Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Lineprot-3pol enUS PDF
Lineprot-3pol enUS PDF
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5 Introduction 1
Distance Protection, Line Basic Structure of the Function 2
Differential Protection, and
Overcurrent Protection for System Functions 3
3-Pole Tripping 7SA84, Applications 4
7SD84, 7SA86, 7SD86,
7SL86, 7SJ86 Function-Group Types 5
Protection and Automation Functions 6
V4.00 and higher
Control Functions 7
Supervision Functions 8
Manual Measured Values, Energy Values and
Monitoring of the Primary System 9
Functional Tests 10
Technical Data 11
Appendix A
Glossary
Index
C53000-G5040-C010-4
i
NOTE
For your own safety, please observe the warnings and safety instructions contained in this manual.
Target Audience
Protection system engineers, commissioning engineers, persons entrusted with the setting, testing and main-
tenance of automation, selective protection and control equipment, and operational crew in electrical installa-
tions and power plants.
Scope
This manual applies to the SIPROTEC 5 device family.
Further Documentation
[dwprefdm-221012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• Device manuals
Each device manual describes the functions and applications of a specific SIPROTEC 5 device. The
printed manual and the online help for the device have the same informational structure.
• Hardware manual
The hardware manual describes the hardware building blocks and device combinations of the
SIPROTEC 5 device family.
• Operating manual
The operating manual describes the basic principles and procedures for operating and assembling the
devices of the SIPROTEC 5 range.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 3
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Preface
• Product Information
The product information includes general information about conditions when preparing for operation.
This document is provided with each SIPROTEC 5 device.
• Engineering Guide
The Engineering Guide describes the important steps in engineering with DIGSI 5. In addition, you learn
in the Engineering Guide how to load a projected configuration in a SIPROTEC 5 device and update the
device functionality of the SIPROTEC 5 device.
• System catalog
The system catalog describes the SIPROTEC 5 system features.
• Device catalogs
The device catalogs describe device-specific features such as functional scope, hardware and applica-
tions.
Indication of Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communi-
ties on harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Council Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equip-
ment for use within specified voltage limits (Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC).
This conformity has been verified by tests performed according to the Council Direc-
tive in accordance with the generic standards EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4 (for
EMC directive) and with the standard EN 60255-27 (for Low Voltage Directive) by
Siemens AG.
The device is designed and manufactured for application in an industrial environ-
ment.
The product conforms with the international standards of IEC 60255 and the
German standard VDE 0435.
Other Standards
IEEE Std C 37.90
This product is UL-certified with the values shown in the Technical data.
File E194016
[scpreful-070211-01.tif, 1, --_--]
4 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Preface
Additional Support
For questions about the system, please contact your Siemens sales partner.
Support
Our Customer Support Center provides 24-hour service.
Tel.: +49 (180) 524-8437
Fax: +49 (180) 524-2471
E-mail: support.ic@siemens.com
Training Courses
Inquiries regarding individual training courses should be addressed to our Training Center:
Siemens AG
Siemens Power Academy TD
Humboldtstrasse 59
90459 Nuremberg
Tel.: +49 (911) 433-7415
Fax: +49 (911) 433-5482
E-mail: poweracademy.ic-sg@siemens.com
Internet: http://www.siemens.com/poweracademy
Safety Information
This manual is not a complete index of all safety measures required for operation of the equipment (module
or device). However, it contains important information that must be followed for personal safety, as well as to
avoid physical damage. Information is highlighted and illustrated as follows according to the degree of
danger.
! DANGER
DANGER means that death or severe injury will result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions in order to avoid death or severe injuries.
! WARNING
WARNING means that death or severe injury may result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions in order to avoid death or severe injuries.
! CAUTION
CAUTION means that moderately severe or slight injuries can occur if the specified measures are not
taken.
² Comply with all instructions in order to avoid moderate or minor injuries.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 5
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Preface
NOTICE
NOTE means that property damage can result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions in order to avoid property damage.
i
NOTE
Important information about the product, product handling or a certain section of the documentation, which
must be given particular attention.
Proper Use
The equipment (device, module) may be used only for such applications as set out in the catalogs and the
technical description, and only in combination with third-party equipment recommended and approved by
Siemens.
Problem-free and safe operation of the product depends on the following:
• Proper transport
• Proper storage, setup and installation
• Hazardous voltages may be present in equipment even after the supply voltage has been disconnected
(capacitors can still be charged).
• Operation of equipment with exposed current-transformer circuits is prohibited. Before disconnecting the
equipment, ensure that the current-transformer circuits are short-circuited.
• The limiting values stated in the document may not be exceeded. This must also be considered during
testing and commissioning.
6 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Open Source Software
Among other things, this product contains Open Source Software that was developed by third parties. The
Open Source Software included with this product and the relevant Open Source Software licence agreement
can be found in Readme_OSS. The Open Source Software program is protected by copyright You are
permitted to use the Open Source Software according to the Open Source Software license agreement.
Should contradictions occur between the Open Source Software license conditions and the Siemens license
conditions applicable to the product, the Open Source Software license agreement with respect to the Open
Source Software shall prevail. The Open Source Software is provided free of charge. If stipulated by the
Open Source Software license agreement, the source text of the software is available until the end of the third
year after purchasing the product. Shipping charges will apply separately. We are liable for the product
including the Open Source Software according to the license agreement for the product. Any liability arising
from the use of the Open Source Software that exceeds the intended program flow of the product, as well as
liability for defects that were caused by changes made to the Open Source Software, is excluded If the
product was modified, we cannot provide technical support.
When using DIGSI 5 in online mode, you are provided with the option to go to the main menu Show Open
source information and read and display the Readme_OSS file containing the original license text and
copyright information. To do this, a PDF viewer must be installed on the computer. In order to operate
SIPROTEC 5 devices, a valid DIGSI 5 license is required (trial, full or compact version).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 7
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
8 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Table of Contents
Preface............................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 35
1.1 General.................................................................................................................................36
1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5................................................................................................... 38
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 9
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Table of Contents
10 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 11
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Table of Contents
12 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 13
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Table of Contents
14 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 15
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Table of Contents
16 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 17
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Table of Contents
18 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 19
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Table of Contents
20 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 21
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Table of Contents
22 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 23
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Table of Contents
24 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 25
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Table of Contents
26 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 27
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Table of Contents
28 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 29
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Table of Contents
30 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Table of Contents
11 Technical Data.............................................................................................................................................1227
11.1 General Device Data ....................................................................................................... 1229
11.1.1 Analog Inputs ............................................................................................................. 1229
11.1.2 Supply Voltage ...........................................................................................................1230
11.1.3 Binary Inputs .............................................................................................................. 1231
11.1.4 Relay Outputs ............................................................................................................ 1231
11.1.5 Design Data ............................................................................................................... 1233
11.2 Protection Interface and Protection Topology...................................................................1236
11.3 Date and Time Synchronization........................................................................................1238
11.4 Line Differential Protection................................................................................................1239
11.5 Stub Differential Protection ..............................................................................................1241
11.6 Distance Protection ..........................................................................................................1242
11.7 Power-Swing Blocking ..................................................................................................... 1244
11.8 Information Transmission Process with Distance Protection ...........................................1245
11.9 Information Transmission Procedure with Ground-Fault Protection ................................ 1246
11.10 Echo and Tripping in the Event of Weak Infeed .............................................................. 1247
11.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems ...... 1248
11.12 External Trip Initiation ...................................................................................................... 1253
11.13 Automatic Reclosing ........................................................................................................ 1254
11.14 Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases ................................................................ 1255
11.15 Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases .................................................................1256
11.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases with User-Defined Characteristic Curve ....................... 1264
11.17 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Ground ................................................................ 1266
11.18 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Ground .................................................................1267
11.19 Overcurrent Protection, Ground with User-Defined Characteristic Curve ....................... 1275
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 31
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Table of Contents
32 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Table of Contents
A Appendix .....................................................................................................................................................1345
A.1 Order Options and Accessories........................................................................................1346
A.2 Typographic and Symbol Conventions............................................................................. 1348
A.3 Standard Variant for 7SA84, 7SD84 ................................................................................1351
A.4 Standard Variants for 7SA86, 7SD86, 7SL86 ..................................................................1352
A.5 Standard variants for 7SJ86 ............................................................................................ 1361
A.6 Connection Examples for Current Transformers ............................................................. 1363
A.7 Connection Examples for Voltage Transformers ............................................................. 1370
A.8 Connection Examples for Special Applications ............................................................... 1376
A.9 Prerouting 7SL86 (Basis) .................................................................................................1377
A.10 Prerouting 7SL86 (1 1/2 Circuit Breaker) .........................................................................1379
A.11 Preroutings 7SJ86 ........................................................................................................... 1382
Glossary.......................................................................................................................................................1383
Index.............................................................................................................................................................1397
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 33
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
34 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
1 Introduction
1.1 General 36
1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5 38
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 35
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Introduction
1.1 General
1.1 General
The digital multifunctional protection and bay controllers of the SIPROTEC 5 device series are equipped with
a powerful microprocessor. As a result, all tasks, from acquiring measurands to entering commands in the
circuit breaker, are processed digitally.
Analog Inputs
The measuring inputs transform the currents sent by the instrument transformers and voltages and adapt
them to the internal processing level of the device. A SIPROTEC 5 device comprises current transformers
and, depending on the type of device, it also uses voltage transformers. The current inputs are therefore
intended for the detection of phase currents and ground current. The ground current can be detected sensi-
tively using a core balance current transformer. In addition, phase currents can be detected very sensitively
for a particularly precise measurement. The voltage inputs detect the measuring voltage of device functions
requiring current and voltage measured values.
The analog values are digitized in the internal microcomputer for data processing.
Microcomputer System
All device functions are processed in the microcomputer system.
This includes, for example:
• Filtering and preparation of the measurands
• Constant monitoring of the measurands
• Storage of indications, fault data, and fault values for fault analysis
• Administration of the operating system and its functions, such as data storage, real-time clock, communi-
cation, interfaces, etc.
Front Elements
For devices with an integrated or offset operation panel, LEDs and an LC display on the front provide infor-
mation on the device function and report events, states, and measured values. In conjunction with the LC
display, the integrated keypad enables on-site operation of the device. All device information such as setting
parameters, operating and fault indications or measured values can be displayed, and setting parameters
changed. In addition, system equipment can be controlled via the user interface of the device.
Serial Interfaces
The serial interface in the front cover enables communication with a personal computer when using the DIGSI
operating program. As a result, the operation of all device functions is possible. Additional interfaces on the
back are used to realize various communication protocols.
36 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Introduction
1.1 General
Power Supply
The individual functional units of the device are powered by an internal power supply. Brief interruptions in the
supply voltage, which can occur during short circuits in the system auxiliary voltage supply are generally
bridged by capacitor storage (see also the Technical Data).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 37
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Introduction
1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5
General Properties
• Powerful multiprocessor
• Fully digital measured-value processing and control, from sampling and digitizing of measurands to
closing and tripping decisions for the circuit breaker
• Complete galvanic and interference-free isolation of the internal processing switches from the system
measuring, control, and supply circuits through instrument transformers, binary input and output
modules, and DC and AC voltage converters
• Easy operation using an integrated operator and display panel, or using a connected personal computer
with user interface
• Storage of min/max measured values (slave pointer function) and storage of long-term average values
• Storage of fault indications for system incidents (faults in system) with real-time assignment and instan-
taneous values for fault recording
• Continuous monitoring of the measurands as well as the device hardware and software
• Communication with central control and storage devices possible via the device interface
Modular Concept
The SIPROTEC 5 modular concept ensures the consistency and integrity of all functionalities across the
entire device series. Significant features here include:
• Modular system design in hardware, software, and communication
• Functional integration of various applications, such as protection, control, and fault recorder
• The same expansion and communication modules for all devices in the family
• Innovative terminal technology with easy assembly and interchangeability and the highest possible
degree of safety
• The same functions can be configured individually across the entire family of devices
• Automatic logging of access attempts and safety-critical operations on the devices and systems
Redundant Communication
SIPROTEC 5 devices maintain complete communication redundancy:
• Multiple redundant communication interfaces
• Redundant and independent protocols to control centers possible (such as IEC 60870-5-103 and
IEC 61850, either single or redundant)
38 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
2 Basic Structure of the Function
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 39
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Function Embedding in the Device
i
NOTE
The availability of certain settings and setting options depends on the device type and the functions avail-
able on the device!
EXAMPLE
A 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout of the 7SA86 distance protection device serves as an example. The following
protection functions are required for implementation (simplified and reduced):
• Distance protection (21)
• Overcurrent protection, phases (51)
Several predefined function packages that are tailored to specific applications exist for each device family. A
predefined functional scope is called an application template. The existing application templates are offered
for selection automatically when you create a new device in DIGSI 5.
EXAMPLE
When creating the device in DIGSI 5, you must select the appropriate application template. In the example,
select the application template DIS overhead line, grounded systems, 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout. This
application template covers the required functional scope. Selecting this application template determines the
preconfigured functional scope. This can be changed as necessary (see Chapter 2.2 Adjustment of Applica-
tion Templates/Functional Scope ).
Function Groups
Functions are arranged in function groups. This simplifies handling of functions (adding and copying). The
function groups are assigned to primary objects, such as a line, transformer, or circuit breaker.
The function groups bundle functions with regard to the following basic tasks:
• Assignment of functions to current and/or voltage transformers (assignment of functions to the meas-
uring points and thus to the protected object)
EXAMPLE
The selected application template DIS overhead line, grounded systems, 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout
comprises 3 function groups:
• Protection function group Line 1
• Circuit-breaker function group QA 1
40 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Function Embedding in the Device
The following figure shows the embedding of functions via function groups.
[dweifkfg-021012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Depending on the type of device, there are different types of function groups:
• Protection function groups
• Circuit-breaker function groups
Protection function groups bundle functions that are assigned to one protected object – for example, to the
line. Depending on the device type and nature of the protected object, there are different types of protection
function groups (line, voltage/current 3-phase, transformer, motor, etc.).
Circuit-breaker function groups bundle functions assigned to the local switches – for example, circuit breakers
and disconnectors (such as processing of tripping, circuit-breaker failure protection, automatic reclosing).
The number and type of function groups differ in the respective application templates, depending on the type
of the device and application. You can add, copy, or even delete function groups for a specific application.
You can also adapt the functional scope within a function group according to the use case. Detailed informa-
tion on this can be found under DIGSI 5 online help.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 41
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Function Embedding in the Device
EXAMPLE
The measuring points in the application template Figure 2-1 are assigned to the function groups as follows:
• The protection function group Line is assigned to the measuring points I-3ph 1, I-3ph 2 and V-3ph 1.
The function group therefore receives the measured values from current transformers 1 and 2 and from
voltage transformer 1. The currents of measuring points I-3ph 1 and I-3ph 2 are added geometrically for
feeder-related processing.
• The circuit-breaker function group QA1 is assigned to the measuring point I-3ph 1 and receives the
measured values from current transformer 1.
• The circuit-breaker function group QA2 is assigned to measuring point I-3ph 2 and receives the meas-
ured values from current transformer 2.
The user can change the assignment as needed, that is, function groups can be assigned to any available
measuring points of the device.
To check or change the assignment of measuring points to the function groups, double-click Function-group
connections in the DIGSI 5-project tree.
[scfgverb-180311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The window for routing of the measuring points opens in the working area (see the following Figure, does not
correspond to the example).
[scmscofg-180311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• Starting the Automatic reclosing function (AREC, if available in the circuit-breaker function group)
through the protection functions of the connected protection function group
42 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Function Embedding in the Device
Besides the general assignment of the protection function group(s) to the circuit-breaker function groups, you
can also configure the interface for specific functionalities in detail. Further information on this can be found in
the section below. Figure 2-6 shows how to reach the detail configuration. Figure 2-7 shows the possible
assignments in detail.
These definitions are also set appropriately for the specific application by the selected application template.
EXAMPLE
The linkage of the function group in the example shown in Figure 2-1 is as follows:
The protection function group Line is linked to both circuit-breaker function groups QA1 and QA2.
This means that an operate indication of the Distance protection function generates a trip command in both
circuit-breaker function groups and thus controls both circuit breakers. The function Circuit-breaker failure
protection of both circuit-breaker function groups QA1 and QA2 is also started if these are configured.
The user can change this linkage as needed, that is, protection function groups can be freely assigned to any
circuit-breaker function groups.
To check or change the allocation of the protection function group to the circuit-breaker function groups,
double-click on function group connections in the DIGSI 5-project tree Name of device (see following
figure).
[scfgverb-180311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The window for general routing of the function groups opens in the working area (see the following Figure).
[scfgcols-220211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-5 Connection of Protection Function Group with Circuit-Breaker Function Group
Besides the general assignment of the protection function group(s) to the circuit-breaker function groups, you
can also configure the interface for specific functionalities in detail. Proceed as follows:
• Open the SIPROTEC 5 device folder in the DIGSI 5 project tree.
• Open the function settings folder in the DIGSI 5 project tree.
• Open the respective protection function group in the DIGSI 5 project tree, for example, Line 1 (see the
following figure)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 43
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Function Embedding in the Device
[sclsinta-180311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• The window for detailed configuration of the interface between the protection function group and the
circuit-breaker function group(s) opens in the working area.
• In this view, configure the interface via the context menu (right mouse button), see Figure 2-7.
[scdetail-220211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-7 Detail Configuration of the Interface Between the Protection Function Group and the Circuit-
Breaker Function Group(s)
44 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Function Embedding in the Device
EXAMPLE
In Figure 2-1 you can see, that the function Overcurrent protection, phases (51) has 3 stages. The number
of zones of the function Distance protection is not shown.
Each stage, each function block, and each function (without stages/function blocks) can be individually
switched into specific operating modes (for example, switch on/off). This is termed as function control and
explained in chapter 2.3 Function Control .
To adjust the functionality to the specific application, functions, tripping stages, and function blocks can be
added, copied, and deleted (see chapter 2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope ).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 45
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Basic Structure of the Function
2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope
• Function settings
Siemens recommends the Single-line configuration Editor to adjust the functional scope.
Complete missing functionalities from the Global DIGSI 5 Library. Then, the default settings of the added
functionality are active. You can copy within a device and between devices as well. Settings and routings are
also copied when you copy functionalities.
i
NOTE
If you delete a parameterized function group, function, or level from the device, all settings and routings
will be lost. The function group, function, or tripping stage can be added again, but then the default
settings are active.
In most cases, the adjustment of the functional scope consists of adding and deleting functions, tripping
stages, and function blocks. As previously described, the functions, tripping stages, and function blocks auto-
matically connect themselves to the measuring points assigned to the function group.
In few cases, it may be necessary to add a protection or circuit-breaker function group. These newly added
function groups do not contain (protection) functions. You must individually load the (protection) functions for
your specific application. You must also connect the protection or circuit-breaker function group to one or
more measuring points (see chapter 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device ). You must connect newly added
protection function groups to a circuit-breaker function group (see chapter 2.1 Function Embedding in the
Device ).
Functions, tripping stages, function blocks, and function groups can be added up to a certain maximum
number. The maximum number can be found in the respective function and function-group descriptions.
Function Points
Function points (FP) are assigned to specific functions, but not to other functions. Further information can be
found in the description of application templates, in the chapter Applications.
The device is supplied with the acquired function-point credit. Functions with function points can be loaded
into the device only within the available function-point credit. The functional scope cannot be loaded into the
device if the required number of points of the functional scope is higher than the function-point credit. You
must either delete functions or upgrade the function-point credit of the device.
No function points are required to add additional stages in functions.
46 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Basic Structure of the Function
2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope
Proceed as follows:
• Determine the function point requirement of certain functions, for example, with DIGSI 5 or the
SIPROTEC 5 Configurator.
• Order the additional function points from your local distributor or at http://www.energy.siemens.com.
• Siemens will provide you with a signed license file for your device, either via e-mail or for downloading.
• Use DIGSI 5 to load the signed license file into your device. The procedure is described in the Online
Help of DIGSI 5.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 47
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Basic Structure of the Function
2.3 Function Control
i
NOTE
Simplifying Functions and Function control will be discussed in the following. The description also
applies to tripping stage control and function block control.
Functions can be switched to different operating modes. You use the parameter mode to define whether you
want a function to run (On) or not Off). In addition, you can temporarily block a function or switch it into test
mode (parameter mode = test) for the purpose of commissioning.
The function shows the current status – such as an Alarm – via the Health signal.
The following explains the different operating modes and mechanisms and how you set the functions into
these modes. The function control is shown in Figure 2-8. It is standardized for all functions. Therefore, this
control is not discussed further in the individual function descriptions.
[losteurg-040411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
State Control
You can control the state of a function via the parameter mode and the input superordinate state.
You set the specified operating state via the parameter mode. The function mode can be set to On, Off , and
Test. The operating state is described in Table 2-2. You can set the parameter mode via:
• DIGSI 5
48 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Basic Structure of the Function
2.3 Function Control
The status of the function resulting from the parameter mode and the superordinate state is shown in the
following table.
Table 2-1 Resulting State of the Function (from Connection of Parameter Mode and Superordinate
State)
Function Explanation
State
On The function is activated and operates as defined. The prerequisite is that function mode is
OK.
From The function is turned off. It does not create any information. The function mode always has
the value OK.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 49
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Basic Structure of the Function
2.3 Function Control
Function Explanation
State
Test The function is set into test mode. This state supports the commissioning. All outgoing infor-
mation of the function (messages and, if available, measuring values) is provided with a test
bit. This test bit significantly influences the further processing of the information, depending
on the target.
For instance, among other things, it is possible to implement the functionality Blocking of
the command relay known from SIPROTEC 4.
Target of the Informa- Processing
tion
Buffer The indications are provided with the identification Test in the
buffer.
Contact An indication routed to contact is not triggering the contact.
Light-emitting diode (LED) An indication routed to the LED triggers the LED (normal
processing)
CFC Here, the behavior depends on the state of the CFC chart.
• CFC chart itself is not in test state:
The CFC chart is not triggered by a status change of an
information with set test bit. The initial state of the informa-
tion (state before test bit was set) is not processed during
execution of the CFC chart.
• CFC chart itself is in test state:
The CFC chart continues to process the information (indi-
cation or measured value) normally. The CFC outgoing
information is provided with a test bit. The definitions in this
table apply to its continued processing.
A CFC chart can be set to the test state only by switching the
entire device to test mode.
Protocol Indication and measured value are transmitted with set test bit,
provided that the protocol supports this functionality.
If an object is transmitted as a GOOSE message, the test bit is
set spontaneously and the GOOSE message is transmitted
immediately. The receiver of the GOOSE message is automati-
cally notified of transmitter test mode.
If an object is transmitted via the protection interface, the test bit
is not transmitted. The Test state must also be transmitted as
information in order for this state to be taken into account in the
application on the receiver end. You must route the Test signal
in the DIGSI 5 project tree → Device → Communication
routing.
The test mode of the differential protection will be dealt with
separately in the application.
Health
Health signals if a selected function can perform its designated functionality. If so, the health is OK. In case
the functionality is only possible in a limited way or not at all, due to state or problems within the device, the
health will signal Warning (limited functionality) or Alarm (no functionality).
Internal self-supervision can cause the functions to assume the health Alarm (see chapter Supervision Func-
tions). If a function assumes the health Alarm, it is no longer effective (message not active is generated).
Only a few functions can signal the health Warning. The health Warning results from function-specific
supervision and is - if available - described in the function description. If a function assumes the health
Warning, it will remain effective, that is, the function can continue to work in a limited way and trigger in the
case of a protection function.
50 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Basic Structure of the Function
2.3 Function Control
Not Active
The indication Not active signals that a function is currently not working. The indication Not active is
generated in the following cases:
• Function is switched off
• Standby of the function is in Alarm state
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 51
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Basic Structure of the Function
2.4 Text Structure and Reference Number for Settings and Indications
EXAMPLE
The structure of the text and reference number is shown in the protection-function group Line as an example
for the parameter threshold value and the indicationpickup of the 2nd definite time-overcurrent protection
stage of the function Overcurrent protection, phases (see Figure 2-9). Only one function and one function
group exist in the device. The representation of the stage is simplified.
[lostuumz-180311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-9 Level of the Overcurrent Protection Function, Phases (Without Representation of Stage
Control)
The following table shows the text and numbers of involved hierarchy elements:
Name Number of the Type Instance Number
Protection function group Line 2 1
Function Overcurrent 3ph 20 1
Stage Definite time-overcur- 66 2
rent protection
Parameter Threshold Value 3 –
Indication Pickup 55 –
52 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Basic Structure of the Function
2.4 Text Structure and Reference Number for Settings and Indications
The structure is simplified accordingly for parameter and indications with fewer hierarchy levels.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 53
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
54 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
3 System Functions
3.1 Indications 56
3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition 83
3.3 Processing of Quality Attributes 85
3.4 Fault Recording 96
3.5 Protection Communication 102
3.6 Date and Time Synchronization 145
3.7 User-Defined Objects 151
3.8 Other Functions 155
3.9 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions 162
3.10 Settings Group Switching 168
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 55
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.1 Indications
3.1 Indications
3.1.1 General
During operation, indications deliver information about operational states. These include:
• Measured data
• System data
• Device supervisions
• Device functions
i
NOTE
All indications are assigned to certain device functions. The text of each indication contains the corre-
sponding function designation. You will find explanations of the meaning of indications in the corre-
sponding device functions. However, you can also define indications yourself and group them into your
own function blocks. These can be set by binary inputs or CFC logic.
Reading Indications
To read the indications of your SIPROTEC 5 device you can use the on-site operation panel of the device or
a PC on which you have installed DIGSI 5. The subsequent section describes the general procedure.
Procedure
The menus of the logs begin with a header and 2 numbers at the top right corner of the display. The number
after the forward slash signifies the number of indications that are available. The number before the forward
slash indicates how many indications have just been selected or shown. The end of the indication list is
closed with the entry ***END***.
56 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scoprlog-090413-01.tif, 1, en_US]
² To reach the desired log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
² Navigate inside the log using the navigation keys (top/bottom). You will find the most current indication
at the top of the list. The selected indication is shown with a dark background.
² Which indications can be shown in the selected log depends on the assignments in the DIGSI 5 informa-
tion routing matrix or is pre-defined. You will find information about this in the chapter 3.1.5.1 General .
² Every indication contains date, time and its state as additional information.
² In some logs you are given the option of deleting the entire indication list by softkey in the footer of the
display. To know more about this, read chapter 3.1.6 Saving and Deleting Logs .
i
NOTE
No password entry is necessary to read indications from the device.
Procedure
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 57
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.1 Indications
² To read the indications with DIGSI 5 your PC must be connected via the USB user interface of the on-
site operation panel or via an Ethernet interface of the device. A direct connection to your PC can be
established via the Ethernet interfaces. It is also possible to access all connected SIPROTEC 5 devices
via a data network from your DIGSI 5 PC.
² To reach the desired logs of the SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window. If you have not set
up the device within a project, you can also attain this via Online access.
² After selecting the desired log, you are shown the last state of the log loaded from the device. To
update, it is necessary to synchronize with the log in the device.
² To execute a synchronization with the logs, click the respective button in the headline of the log (see
example of ground-fault log in Figure 3-2 a)).
[scgrflmd-191012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
² You will find additional information about the deletion and saving of logs in chapter 3.1.6 Saving and
Deleting Logs .
² To determine a relative time for all other logs, you can reference the display of log entries, if needed, to
the real time of a certain entry. The real-time stamps of events remain unaffected.
² For this purpose click the respective button in the headline of the log (see example of ground-fault log in
Figure 3-2 a)).
Displayed indications in DIGSI 5 and on the on-site operation panel are supplemented with the following infor-
mation:
58 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Quality Meaning
Good Indication is valid
Invalid Indication is invalid
Cause Meaning
Data change Value change in an indication
Data update Update of notification value
General interrogation General interrogation
Cyclic Cyclical general inquiry
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 59
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Cause Meaning
Quality change Change of the notification quality
Initiator Meaning
Bay Control local
Substation Control via the substation
Remote control Control via the network control center
Field (auto) Control local via automatic function
Station (auto) Control via the station via automatic function
Distance (auto) Control via the network control center via automatic
function
Maintenance Maintenance
Process Device operation (normal)
60 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.1 Indications
3.1.5 Log
3.1.5.1 General
Indications are saved in logs inside the device and are available for later analyses. Different logs allow cate-
gorization of indication logging based on operating states (for example, operational and fault logs) and based
on fields of application.
Log Logging
Operational log Operational indications
Fault log Fault indications
Sensitive ground-fault log Ground-fault indications
Setting-history log Setting changes
User log User-defined indication scope
Security log Access with safety relevance
Device-diagnosis log Error of the device (software, hardware) and the connection circuits
Communication Log Status of communication interfaces
Motor-startup log Information on the motor startup
Managing Logs
Logs have a ring structure and are automatically managed. If the maximum capacity of a log is exhausted,
the oldest entries disappear before the newest entries. During a supply-voltage failure, recorded data are
securely held by means of battery buffering or storage in the flash memory. You can read and analyze the log
from the device with DIGSI 5. The device display and the navigation allow you to read and analyze the logs
on site using keys.
Configuring Logs
The indication capacity to be recorded in configurable logs (for example, sensitive ground-fault log) is laid
down in columns of the information routing (matrix) of DIGSI 5 specifically defined for this purpose.
Procedure
• To reach the information routing of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window. Access is
only through the project:
Project → Device → Information routing
• The routing of the selected indication is done via right click. Select one of the options in the list box
shown:
– Routed (X)
– Unrouted
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 61
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scinfpuf-191012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
For non-configurable logs (for example, setting-history logs) scope and type of logged indications are
described separately (see following chapter about logs).
• System data
Exceeding or dropping below limiting values is output as an operational indication. Short circuits in the
network are indicated as an operational indication Fault with sequential fault number. For detailed information
about the recording of system incidents, please refer to the description of the fault log (chapter 3.1.5.3 Fault
Log). Up to 2000 indications can be stored in the log.
• To reach the operational log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Process Data → Log → Operational log
• The status of the operational log last loaded from the device is shown to you. To update (synchroniza-
tion with the device) click the button Read log entries in the headline of the indication list (Figure 3-4
a)).
62 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scbetrmd-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• To reach the operational log via the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Indications → Operational log
• You can navigate on the on-site operation panel using the navigation keys (top/bottom) inside the
displayed indication list.
[scoprlog-090413-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-5 Reading the Operational Log on the On-site Operation Panel of the Device
Deletability
The operational log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. This is done usually after testing or commis-
sioning the device. To know more about this, read chapter 3.1.6 Saving and Deleting Logs .
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 63
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Configurability
The indication scope of the operational log is configured in a specifically defined column of the information
routing (matrix) of DIGSI 5:
Target → Log → Operational log column
Selected application templates and functions from the library bring with them a predefined set of operational
indications which you can adjust individually at any time.
Fault Definition
In general, a fault is started by the raising pickup of a protection function and ends with the cleared pickup
after the trip command.
When using an automatic reclosing function, the complete reclosing cycle (successful or unsuccessful) is
preferably integrated into the fault. If evolving faults appear within reclosing cycles, the entire clearing process
is logged under one fault number even in multiple pickup cycles. Without automatic reclosing function every
pickup is also recorded as its own fault.
User-defined configuration of a fault is also possible.
i
NOTE
The definition of the fault is done through settings of the fault recording (see Device manual). Events are
logged in the fault log even when fault recording is switched off.
Apart from the recording of fault indications in the fault log, spontaneous display of fault indications of the last
fault on the device display is also done. You will find details about this in chapter 3.1.8 Spontaneous Fault
Display on the On-Site Operation Panel .
• To reach the fault log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Process Data → Log → Fault logs
The status of the fault log last loaded from the device is shown to you.
• To update (synchronization with the device) click the button Read log entries in the headline of the indi-
cation list.
64 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scstflmd-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• To reach the fault log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Indications → Fault logs
• You can navigate on the on-site operation panel using the navigation keys (top/bottom) inside the
displayed indication list.
[scfaullg-090413-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-7 Reading the Fault Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
Deletability
The fault log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. Read about it in the chapter 3.1.6 Saving and
Deleting Logs .
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 65
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Configurability
The indication scope of the fault log is configured in a specifically defined column of the information routing
(matrix) of DIGSI 5:
Target → Log → Fault log column
Selected application templates and functions from the library already bring a predefined set of operational
indications with them which you can adjust individually at any time.
The operational measured values and the measured values of the fundamental components and symmetrical
components (see Equipment Manual, Chapters 9.3 and 9.4) are calculated every 9 cycles (at 50 Hz, this is
every 180 ms). However, this can mean that the data are not synchronized with the sampled values of the
analog channels. The recording of these measured values can be used to analyze the slowly changing
processes.
• To reach the sensitive ground-fault log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Process Data → Log → Ground-fault indications
The status of the device-diagnosis log last loaded from the sensitive ground-fault log is shown to you.
• To update (synchronization with the device) click the button Read log entries in the headline of the indi-
cation list (Figure 3-8 a)).
[scgrflmd-191012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
66 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.1 Indications
• To reach the sensitive ground-fault log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site oper-
ation panel.
Main Menu → Indications → Ground-fault indication
• You can navigate on the on-site operation panel using the navigation keys (top/bottom) inside the
displayed indication list.
[scgfllg1-191012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-9 Reading the Sensitive Ground-Fault Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
Deletability
The sensitive ground-fault log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. Read about it in the chapter
3.1.6 Saving and Deleting Logs .
Configurability
The indication scope of the sensitive ground-fault log is configured in a specifically defined column of the
information routing (matrix) of DIGSI 5:
Target → Log → Column Sensitive ground-fault log
Selected application templates and functions from the library already bring a predefined set of operational
indications with them which you can adjust individually at any time.
• To reach the user-defined log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Process Data → Log → User log 1/2
The status of the user-defined log last loaded from the device is shown to you.
• To update (synchronization with the device) click the button Read log entries in the headline of the indi-
cation list (Figure 3-10 a)).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 67
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scanwnmd-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• To reach user-specific logs from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Indications → User-defined log 1/2
You can navigate on the on-site operation panel using the navigation keys (top/bottom) inside the displayed
indication list.
[scuserlg-090413-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-11 Reading the User-Defined Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
Deletability
The user-defined log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. Read about it in the chapter 3.1.6 Saving
and Deleting Logs .
68 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scinfpuf-191012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• To reach the log for setting changes of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Process Data → Log → Setting changes
The status of the setting-history log last loaded from the device is shown to you.
• To update (synchronization with the device) click the button Read log entries in the headline of the indi-
cation list (Figure 3-13 a)).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 69
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scparamd-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• To reach the setting-history log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation
panel.
Menu → Indications → Setting changes
• You can navigate on the on-site operation panel using the navigation keys (top/bottom) inside the
displayed indication list.
[schislog-090413-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-14 Reading the Setting-History Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
70 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.1 Indications
i
NOTE
• This log, which is organized as a ring buffer. cannot be deleted by the user!
• If you want to archive security-relevant information without loss of information, you must regularly
read this log.
• Use the project-tree window to reach the communication logs of your SIPROTEC 5 device.
Online access → USB → Project → Test suite → Communication module
• Then select:
J:Onboard Ethernet → Communication log
The status of the communication log last loaded from the device is shown to you under the Time stamp item.
• To update (synchronization with the device) click the button Update in the headline of the indication list.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 71
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[sccompuf-140912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• To reach the communication log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation
panel.
Main Menu → Test & Diagnosis → Indications → Communication log
• You can navigate on the on-site operation panel using the navigation keys (top/bottom) inside the
displayed indication list.
[sccommlg-090413-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-16 Reading the Communication Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
72 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Deletability
The communication logs of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. Read details about this in the chapter
3.1.6 Saving and Deleting Logs .
Configurability
The communication logs are not freely configurable. The entries are preconfigured.
• To reach the security log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Device Information → Log → Security log
The status of the security log last loaded from the device is shown to you.
• To update (synchronization with the device) click the button Update in the headline of the indication list.
[scsecmld-140912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 73
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.1 Indications
• To reach the security log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Test & Diagnosis → Indications → Security log
• You can navigate on the on-site operation panel using the navigation keys (top/bottom) inside the
displayed indication list.
[scseclog-090413-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-18 Reading the Security Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
i
NOTE
• This log, which is organized as a ring buffer. cannot be deleted by the user!
• If you want to archive security-relevant information without loss of information, you must regularly
read this log.
• compatibility problems
Up to 500 indications can be stored in the device-diagnosis log. In normal operation of the device, it is suffi-
cient for diagnostic purposes to follow the entries of the operational log. This specific significance is assumed
by the device-diagnosis log when the device is no longer ready for operation due to hardware defect or
compatibility problems and the fallback system is active.
• To reach the device-diagnosis log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Device Information → Log → Device-diagnosis log
The status of the device-diagnosis log last loaded from the device is shown to you.
• To update (synchronization with the device) click the button Update in the headline of the indication list.
74 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scdevdia-140912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Reading on the Device through the On-Site Operation Panel in Normal Operation
• To reach the diagnosis log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Test & Diagnosis → Indications → Device diagnosis
• You can navigate on the on-site operation panel using the navigation keys (top/bottom) inside the
displayed indication list.
[scdevdia-090413-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-20 Reading the Device-Diagnosis Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 75
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.1 Indications
i
NOTE
Deleting the logs of the device in the operating state is unnecessary. If storage capacity is no longer sufficient
for new indications, the oldest indications are automatically overwritten with new incoming events. In order for
the memory to contain information about the new faults in the future, for example, after an inspection of the
system, a deletion of the log makes sense. Resetting the logs is done separately for the various logs.
i
NOTE
Before you delete the content of a log on your SIPROTEC 5 device, save the log with DIGSI 5 on the hard
disk drive of your PC.
i
NOTE
Not all logs of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. These limitations apply especially to logs with
relevance for security and after-sales (security log, device-diagnosis log, setting-history log).
i
NOTE
Upon deletion of the fault log, the associated fault records are also deleted. In addition, the meters for fault
number and fault record number are reset to 0. In contrast, if you delete fault records, the content of the
fault log, including the allocated fault numbers, remains.
i
NOTE
If the device executes an initial start, e.g. after an update of the devices software, not all logs are deleted.
Back up the deletable logs beforehand using DIGSI 5.
i
NOTE
If a ground fault is currently active, the sensitive ground-fault log cannot be deleted.
• To reach the selected log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel
(example operational log):
Main Menu → Indications → Operational log
76 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scoprlog-090413-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-21 Deleting the Operational Log on the On-Site Operation Panel
• You can navigate on the on-site operation panel using the navigation keys (top/bottom) inside the
displayed indication list.
• The option to delete the entire log is offered to you in the footer of the display at the bottom left. Use the
softkeys below under the display to activate the command prompts. Confirm the request to Delete.
• After being prompted, enter the password and confirm with Enter.
• After being prompted, confirm the Deletion of all entries with Ok.
• To reach the selected log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window (e.g. operational
log).
Project → Device → Process Data → Log → Operational Log
With DIGSI 5 you have the possibility of displaying all currently transmitted indications of the selected device
in a special indication window.
Procedure
• Call up the spontaneous indications of your selected device in the navigation window under Online
access.
• The raising indications appear immediately without you having to wait for a cyclical update or initiate the
manual update.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 77
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scspnmld-230211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
After a fault, the most important data of the last fault can be displayed automatically on the device display
without further operational measures. In SIPROTEC 5 devices, protected objects (for example, lines) and
even circuit breakers can be freely created and configured depending on the application (even several
instances). In DIGSI 5, several spontaneous fault displays can be configured, depending on the application,
with each individual one being assigned a particular circuit breaker. These displays remain stored in the
device until they are manually confirmed or reset by LED reset.
• To reach the Fault-display configuration of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Display pages → Fault-display configuration
• In the main window, all configured circuit breakers are displayed. A list of a maximum of 6 configurable
display lines is offered for each circuit breaker. The activation of a spontaneous fault display occurs for
each circuit breaker by selection via checkmark in the column Display.
• With the parameter Malfunction display (under Device → Parameter → Device settings) you determine
whether spontaneous fault displays should be displayed for each pickup or only pickups with the off
command.
[sckonstf-230211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
For every display line the following display options can be selected:
78 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scstfanz-090413-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• After completion of all confirmations the last display view is showed before the faults.
Method 2: Acknowledgement via LED reset
• An LED reset (device) causes the reset of all stored LEDs and binary output contacts of the device and
also to the confirmation of all fault displays stored in the display.
You can find more details on the topic of LED reset in the section Stored indications in the SIPROTEC 5
Device manual.
In your SIPROTEC 5 device, you can also configure indications as stored This type of configuration can be
used for LEDs as well as for output contacts. The configured output (LED or contact) is activated until it is
acknowledged. Acknowledgement occurs via:
• On-site operation panel
• DIGSI 5
• Binary input
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 79
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.1 Indications
• In the Information Routing of each device set up in DIGSI 5, you can route binary signals, among
others, to LEDs and output contacts. For this, go to the project tree.
Project → Device → Information routing
• Click the routing field of the binary indication in the desired LED or binary output column in the routing
range of the targets by clicking the right mouse button.
You are offered the following options:
[scresled-090413-01.tif, 1, en_US]
80 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.1 Indications
• As needed, enter the confirmation ID when requested and then confirm with the softkey Enter.
• Use Reset LEDs not in FG to reset stored LEDs that are not assigned to a special function group.
• As needed, enter the confirmation ID when requested and then confirm with the softkey Enter.
Depending on device configuration, the protection function group(s) are displayed to you as submenus for
which separately corresponding, stored LEDs can be reset.
• Go to the submenu of the selected function group (Example Line 1).
• Use Reset LEDs to reset stored LEDs in the selected function group.
• As needed, enter the confirmation ID when requested and then confirm with the softkey Enter.
[screslin-090413-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-26 Reset Functions on the On-Site Operation Panel (for Example, Line FG)
[scquiled-140912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 81
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Stored LEDs, output contacts and spontaneous fault displays are reset on the assigned device.
i
NOTE
The acknowledgement of stored indications then leads to the resetting of configured LEDs and output
contacts, as long as these active unstored indications are present in parallel. That is, indications config-
ured as unstored are not affected by the acknowledgement process.
You can configure indications of individual functions as "stored" in a function group. This type of configuration
can be used for LEDs as well as for output contacts. The configured output (LED or contact) is activated until
it is acknowledged.
The protection and the circuit-breaker function groups contain the block Reset LED FG. The block
Reset LED FG is visible only in the Information routing under the corresponding function group in DIGSI 5.
You use the binary input signal >Reset LED to reset the stored LEDs in the respective function group. The
configured outputs (contacts) are not reset.
If the test mode of the device or of individual functions is switched on, the SIPROTEC 5 device marks indica-
tions sent to substation automation technology station control system with an additional test bit. This test bit
makes it possible to determine that an indication was set during a test. Necessary reactions in normal opera-
tion on the basis of an indication can thus be suppressed.
82 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition
The following figure shows the basics of dealing with sampled values in the measured-value acquisition
chain. Figure 3-28 shows to whom the various sampling frequencies are made available. In order to limit the
bandwidth of the input signals, a low-pass filter (anti-aliasing filter to maintain the sampling theorem) is
installed downstream. After sampling, the current input channels are adjusted. This means the magnitude and
phase as well as the transformer time constant are corrected. The compensation is designed to ensure that
the current transformer terminal blocks can be exchanged randomly between the devices.
[dwmeserf-250211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The internal sampling frequency of the SIPROTEC 5 devices is fixed at 16 kHz (sampling rate: 320 samplings
per 50-Hz cycle). All current and voltage inputs are sampled. If the absolute value, phase, and transformer
time constant are corrected, the sampling frequency is reduced by 8 kHz (160 samplings per 50-Hz cycle).
This is the basic sampling frequency to which various processes, such as fault recording, RMS measured
values, refer. For the RMS measurement, the measured-value window is adjusted on the basis of the power
frequency. For numerous measurement and protection applications , 20 samplings per cycle are sufficient (if
frated = 50 Hz: sampling every 1 ms, at frated = 60 Hz: sampling every 0.833 ms). This sampling rate is an
adequate compromise between accuracy and the parallel processing of the functions (multi-functionality).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 83
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition
The 20 samplings per cycle will be made available to the algorithms processed in the function groups, in 2
variants:
• Fixed (not resampled)
• Resampled (frequency range from 10 Hz to 80 Hz)
Depending on the algorithms (see function descriptions), the respective data flow is considered. A higher
sampling frequency is used for selected methods of measurement. Detailed information can be found in the
corresponding function description.
i
NOTE
You will find the measuring points for current and voltage in the System data (starting at chapter
6.1.1 Overview ). Each measuring point has its own parameters.
84 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.3 Processing of Quality Attributes
3.3.1 Overview
The IEC 61850 standard defines certain quality attributes for data objects (DO), the so-called Quality. The
SIPROTEC 5 system automatically processes some of these quality attributes. In order to satisfy different
applications, you can influence certain quality attributes and also the values of the data objects depending on
these quality attributes. This is how you can ensure the necessary functionality.
The following figure describes roughly the general data flow within a SIPROTEC 5 device. The following
figure also shows at which points the quality can be influenced. The building blocks presented in the figure
are described in more detail in the following.
[loquali1-090212-02.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 85
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.3 Processing of Quality Attributes
• In the Information routing editor for binary input signals of device-internal functions
The following chapters describe in more detail the options of this influence as well as the automatic quality
processing.
If a GOOSE connection is the data source of a binary input signal of a device internal function, you can influ-
ence the quality processing on 2 locations: at the GOOSE connection and the function input signal. This is
based on the following: A GOOSE date can be distributed within the receiving device to several functions.
The GOOSE connection setting (influence) affects all functions. However, if different functions require
customized settings, these are then set directly at the binary input signal of the function.
86 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.3 Processing of Quality Attributes
In the editor IEC 61850 GOOSE communication, you can influence the data value and quality of all data
types. Figure 3-30 shows the possible influence in an ACD data type example.
• In the DIGSI 5 project tree, double-click IEC 61850 GOOSE Communication.
• Select the desired data link in the operating range under GOOSE Connections.
• Open the Properties window and select the Processing Quality Attributes sheet.
[scgoosee-020311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-30 Influence Option When Linking an ACD Type Data Object
The setting options work for the device receiving the data.
Quality Attribute: Validity
The validity values reserved and questionable are replaced at the receiving end by the invalid
value.
• Check box is not set. The validity attribute and data value are forwarded
• Check box is set and receipt of Validity = good without change.
Check box is set and receipt of Validity = invalid • The validity attribute is set to good and
is set (also applies to values reserved and ques- processed further using this value.
tionable). • The data value is set to the defined substitute
value and processed further using this substitute
value.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 87
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.3 Processing of Quality Attributes
88 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.3 Processing of Quality Attributes
In the case of CFC charts, a distinction has to be made between the general processing of quality and certain
CFC blocks that are specifically designed for the quality processing.
General Processing
Most of the CFC blocks do not have an explicit quality processing. For these blocks, the following general
mechanisms shall apply.
Quality Attribute: Validity
If only an invalid date is received in the case of CFC input data, then all CFC output data will also be set
to invalid, provided they come from blocks without explicit quality processing. In other words, the quality
is not processed sequentially from block to block, but the output data are set lump sum.
An exception is the CFC output data that originate from blocks with explicit quality processing (see next
section).
• Via the CFC block ERR_INFO, an individual chart may be switched to the test state.
• Via the IEC 61850 communication functions, an individual CFC chart may be switched to the test state.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 89
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.3 Processing of Quality Attributes
Blocks Description
OR_SPS The blocks process according to their logic also the supported quality attributes.
AND_SPS The following tables describe the logic with help from the Validity attribute using
NEG_SPS the values good (=g) and invalid (=i).
x = 0 or 1 and validity = i or g
OR_SPS
A (Value, Attribute) B (Value, Attribute) Q (Value, Attribute)
0, i 0, x 0, i
0, g 0, g 0, g
1, g x, x 1, g
1, i 0, x 1, i
1, i 1, i 1, i
The output has thus the logical value 1 with Validity = good, as soon as at least
1 input has the logical value 1 with Validity = good. Otherwise the inputs are
treated according to the OR operation and combined for OR for the INVALID bit
quality.
AND_SPS
A (Value, Attribute) B (Value, Attribute) Q (Value, Attribute)
0, g x, x 0, g
0, i 1, x 0, i
1, i 1, x 1, i
1, g 1, g 1, g
The output has thus the logical value 0 with Validity = good, as soon as at least
1 input has the logical value 0 with Validity = good. Otherwise the inputs are
treated according to the AND connection and combined for OR for the INVALID
bit quality.
NEG_SPS
A (Value, Attribute) Q (Value, Attribute)
0, i 1, i
0, g 1, g
1, i 0, i
1, g 0, g
SPLIT_SPS The blocks isolate the data value and quality of a data object.
SPLIT_DPS The requirement is that the quality is available from the input end. This is the
SPLI_XMV case if the block is interconnected with CFC input data, or is connected down-
stream with a quality processing block (x_SPS). In other cases, the CFC editor
does not allow a connection.
SPLIT_Q The block separates the quality binary according to good, bad (=invalid),
Test, and OperatorBlocked.
These 4 attributes can then be processed individually in a binary operation. The
block must be connected downstream to a SPLIT_(DO) block.
BUILD_Q The block always enters a binary value for good and bad (=invalid) in the
quality structure. Thus, with this block the quality attributes good and bad
(=invalid) may be set explicitly, for example, as a result of a monitoring logic.
All other quality attributes are set to the default state, for instance, Test = FALSE.
If, for example, the entire CFC chart is in the test state (see Quality Attribute:
Test Under General Processing), this preset status can again be overwritten on
the CFC output side.
The block must be connected downstream to a BUILD_(DO) block.
90 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.3 Processing of Quality Attributes
Blocks Description
BUILD_SPS These blocks merge data value and quality. The block output is generally used
BUILD_DPS as a CFC output.
BUILD_XMV Generally, the BUILD_Q block is connected downstream from this block.
BUILD_ENS
CFC charts have a standard behavior in the processing of pure binary signals. If an input signal of the CFC
chart has the quality invalid, all output signals of the CFC chart also get the quality invalid. This
standard behavior is not desirable in some applications. If you use the building blocks for quality processing,
the quality attributes of the input signals in the CFC chart are processed.
• The removed device sends the release signal for the interlocking condition via a GOOSE telegram.
If the communication connection has been interrupted, the release signal (GOOSEStr) gets the quality
invalid via the GOOSE telegram. If the CFC chart obtains an invalid input signal, there are the following
possibilities: The last signal valid before the communication interruption is used (quality = good) or a substi-
tute data value with the quality good is used (True, False).
To do this, you have to create a separate CFC chart in addition to the interlocking plan of the switchgear
interlocking. Use the building blocks for quality processing in a separate CFC chart. With the SPLIT_SPS
building block, split the input signal (data type = SPS) up into data value and quality information. You can
then continue to process these signals separately in the CFC chart. Use the quality information as an input
signal for a BUILD_SPS building block and assign the quality good to the signal. You obtain an SPS signal
as a result, with the quality good. You can use this to process release messages correctly. You can process
the release messages with the quality good in the CFC chart of the actual interlocking. Therefore, the release
signal for a switch illustrated in the interlocking logic is available as a valid result with the quality good. The
following image shows an example of the CFC chart with the building blocks for quality processing:
[sccfcran-310112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-31 CFC Chart with Building Blocks for Quality Processing (Switchgear Interlocking via GOOSE)
If you do not want to convert the invalid release signal to a valid signal, as described, during the communica-
tion interruption, you can also assign a defined data value to the release signal. Proceed as follows: With the
SPLIT_SPS building block, split the input signal (data type = SPS) up into data value and quality information.
Link the VALID output of the SPLIT_SPS building block with the data value of the input signal (AND gate).
This way, you can set the value to a non-risk state with the valid input signals. In the example, the output of
the CFC chart is set to the value FALSE when the input signal is invalid.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 91
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.3 Processing of Quality Attributes
Figure 3-32 provides an overview for quality processing of data objects within a device-internal function.
A function can receive internal data or input data that is routable by the user (binary input signal or double
commands). The respective quality attributes supported are evaluated by the function on the input side. The
attributes are not passed through the specific algorithm/the specific logic of the function. The output data are
supplied with a quality that is specified by the function state and device-operating mode.
i
NOTE
Take into account that pickup of the chatter blocking (see chapter 3.8.1 Signal Filtering and Chatter
Blocking for Input Signals) sets the respective Validity attribute to invalid.
[loquali3-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
92 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.3 Processing of Quality Attributes
[loquali2-230212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
For this signal type (SPS), you can influence the processing of the quality, see overview in Figure 3-32.
Figure 3-34 shows the possible influence on a binary input signal of a protection stage.
• In the DIGSI 5 project tree, double-click Information routing.
• In the operating range, select the desired binary input signal.
• In the Properties window, select the Details entry. There, you will find the point Processing quality
attributes.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 93
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.3 Processing of Quality Attributes
[sceinflu-020311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-34 Influence Options for a Binary Input Signal (SPS Input Signal)
94 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.3 Processing of Quality Attributes
Output Data
The quality is not processed through the actual algorithm/logic of the function. The following table displays the
conditions required to set the quality of output signals of a function.
Cause D0 Value Quality Attribute
After internal (to the To the IEC 61850 inter-
SIPROTEC 5 system, for face, in buffer
example in direction of a
CFC chart)
Functional condition = Unchanged Test = TRUE Test = TRUE
Test
(thus result of device
operating mode = Test or
function mode = Test)
Functional condition = Off Function specific Validity = good Validity = invalid
(thus result of device according to definition for
operating mode = Off) switched off
Function readiness = Function specific Validity = good Validity = invalid
Alarm according to definition for
(for example, result of reset
invalid receiving data)
Device operating mode = Unchanged Validity = good Validity = good
functionally logged off OperatorBlocked = detailQual = oldData
TRUE OperatorBlocked =
TRUE
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 95
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.4 Fault Recording
All SIPROTEC 5 devices have a fault memory in which fault recordings are kept securely. Fault recording
documents operations within the power system and the way in which protection devices respond to them.
You can read out fault recordings from the device and analyze them afterwards using evaluation tools such
as SIGRA.
A fault record contains the following information:
• Sample values of the analog input channels
• Measured values calculated internally
• Any binary signals (for example, pickup signals and trip signals of protection functions)
You can individually configure the signals to be recorded. Furthermore, you can define the starting condition,
the record duration, and the saving criterion of a recording. Fault records saved in the device are also avail-
able after a loss of auxiliary voltage.
The Fault recorder function is a central device function. Both the recording criterion and the measured-value
and binary channels to be recorded are functionally preconfigured through the application templates. You are
able to individually adapt the configuration in DIGSI 5. The fault recording and the fault log are subject to the
same control. This ensures that real time, relative time, and numbering of the fault data are synchronized.
In devices with line differential protection (7SD, 7SL), the time management feature synchronizes the fault
records of all line ends via the protection interfaces. This means that all fault recordings function on the same
real-time and relative-time basis.
The data read out via the DIGSI-PC are saved in COMTRADE format. Fault recording data can be trans-
ferred to the substation automation technology by request in accordance with the standards via existing
communication connections (such as IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103). The central device analyzes the data
using appropriate programs.
The Fault recorder function records the sampled values, specific to each device, of all analog inputs, the
internally calculated measured values and the binary signals. The configuration, which is predefined for each
device via an application template, can be adapted individually. Detailed information about selecting and
deleting fault recordings can be found in the Operating manual.
The fault memory of the device is automatically updated with every recording. When the fault memory is filled
completely, the oldest records are overwritten automatically. Thus, the most recent recordings are always
stored safely. The maximum number of recordings is 128.
Sampling Frequency
The analog measuring channels are sampled at a different sampling rate for fault recording. The Sampling
frequency parameter is used to set the desired sampling frequency. Possible setting values are 1 kHz,
2 kHz, 4 kHz and 8 kHz. This setting value applies only to fault recording and does not affect protection func-
tions or calculated measured values.
Recording Duration
The overall duration of a single fault-recording process comprises the period of the configurable recording
criterion of the Pre-trigger time and the Post-trigger time. You can set the parameters for these
components individually.
96 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.4 Fault Recording
[dwsigrar-070813-01, 1, en_US]
The Fault recording parameter is used to define the start criterion of the recording.
You can set the following values:
• with pickup:
The fault recording records the complete fault until dropout. The resulting pickup signals of all function
groups are taken into account.
• user-defined:
With this setting value, you can individually specify the recording criterion for the fault recording in
DIGSI 5. Function-specific recording criteria are thus realized.
If a recording criterion reoccurs during the pickup time and post-trigger time, the recording which is currently
active is extended to include a new post-trigger time.
For a sampling frequency of 8 kHz and 24 analog channels to be recorded, the duration of individual fault
recordings can be up to 20 s.
The maximum record duration can be limited by the Maximum record time parameter.
In addition to starting the fault recording via the pickup, the following alternatives are possible:
• From outside via binary input signal >External start (for example, from an external protection
device without fault recording by an object transferred via a GOOSE message)
• From DIGSI 5 or via a configurable input signal >Manual start (for example, function key), you can
start the test fault record using a configurable length (parameter Manual record time)
• By means of a command from a central device via an existing communication connection (IEC 61850,
IEC 60870-5-103)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 97
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.4 Fault Recording
nels can be configured individually for recording in the DIGSI information-routing matrix. For this purpose, a
separate Content column is available.
The operational measured values and the measured values of the fundamental components and symmetrical
components (see Equipment Manual, Chapters 9.3 and 9.4) are calculated every 9 cycles (at 50 Hz, this is
every 180 ms). However, this may mean that the data are not synchronized with the sampled values of the
analog channels. The recording of these measured values can be used to analyze the slowly changing
processes.
Fault Memory
The device manages its available fault memory dynamically, so that the maximum recording capacity is
always available. When exceeding the limits of the fault memory, the oldest records are automatically over-
written. This means that the most recent records are always available. The sampling rate, type, and number
of measured value trends to be recorded are the crucial variables when it comes to restricting the length and
number of records possible. Parallel to the sampled tracks, up to 50 tracks with function-specific measured
values and up to 100 binary traces can be recorded. The following table provides an overview of the
maximum storage capacities, in seconds, for different connection variations of the protection devices.
98 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.4 Fault Recording
In the following table, you can find output signals of the Fault recorder function:
Name Type Description
General: Mode ENC Status feedback of the fault recording according
General: State ENS to chapter 2.3 Function Control.
General: Standby ENS
Control: Error number INS The indication of the current error number
allows a unique allocation of entries in the
message buffers for the recorded fault records.
Control: Recording started SPS Fault recording running
Parameter: Storage
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 99
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.4 Fault Recording
3.4.5 Settings
100 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.4 Fault Recording
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 101
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
3.5.1 Overview
Protection communication includes all functionalities required to exchange data via the protection interface
(PI). It manages one or a maximum of 2 protection interfaces. The Protection communication is generated
with the configuration of the channels as a protocol.
You can find detailed information in the section Protection interface in chapter 3.5.3.1 Overview of Func-
tions.
• Remote data
The following figure shows the structure of Protection communication:
[dwstrufg-171012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
i
NOTE
If the information transmission method is to work via a protection interface, the signal in DIGSI must be
pulled from the library into the routing matrix. Otherwise, the information transmission method does not
work. Proceed as follows:
– Open the library and instance, for example, the function DIS Release method.
Line FG > Information Transmission Method > DIS Release Method.
– Then open the communication matrix and route the Send signal.
102 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
Topology Recognition
The topology recognition determines the physical structure of the device combination, that is, the topology
recognition determines the way the devices are connected to one another. The communication is controlled
on this basis.
Remote Data
The Remote data functionality is applied if you route a specific signal or a measured value to the protection
interfaces. The protection interface then attends to the transmitting and receiving of such signals. The
maximum amount of remote data is defined by the available bandwidth.
• Protective data, e.g. differential protective data or information transfer method binary data, are trans-
ferred for distance protection and ground-fault protection.
• The devices can be synchronized in time via the connection, whereby a device of the protection topology
assumes the role of the timing master.
The connection is continuously monitored for data faults and outage, and the time delay of the data is meas-
ured.
The protection interfaces are typically used for differential protection and with information transfer methods for
distance protection and ground-fault protection. In SIPROTEC 5, you can configure protection interfaces into
all devices and then use them for further protection applications. At the same time, any binary information and
measured values can be transferred between the devices.
Access to devices at the remote ends is possible via the protection interface with DIGSI 5. For this, the
protection-data connection is interrupted and the communication channel reserved exclusively for DIGSI 5.
The protection connection is restored following remote access with DIGSI 5 (for more information, see
Chapter 3.5.3.10 Tunneling with DIGSI 5 via Protection Interface).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 103
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
[dwstruct-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The protection communication runs physically via a serial optical communication module. This module can
have 1 or 2 channels. The protection communication can take place via various modules. This depends on
the type of interface and the application. DIGSI 5 is used to configure 1 or 2 channels of a serial optical
module as a protection interface. This enables communication with the values set at the protection interface
via this channel.
104 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
[dwintert-030211-02.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-38 Data Exchange between 4 Devices with Protection-Data Communications of Type 1 or Type 2
in a Protection Topology
[dwinterf-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-39 Data Exchange for 2 Devices, Each Having Protection Communication
i
NOTE
The index describes the consecutive numbering of the devices in a protection topology (see parameter
Local device is device).
A maximum of 2 protection communications can be integrated in one device (see next figure). If 2 protection
communications of the same type are connected to one another, this results in 100 % redundancy regarding
the transmission route. The devices then search for the communication connection with the highest band-
width (for example, optical fiber). If this connection fails, the system switches over automatically to the second
connection until the first connection is available again. As the connection with lower bandwidth defines the
maximum amount of transferable information, the same information is exchanged via both connections. An
application for this is differential protection realized via a redundant communication connection. Both protec-
tion communications in the device are then of type 1.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 105
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
[dwintera-030211-02.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-40 Data Exchange for 2 Devices, Each Having 2 Protection Communications/Redundant Trans-
mission Route
[dwchaint-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
106 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
The communication ring has the advantage over the communication chain that the entire communications
system and, for example, the differential protection function also work if one of the communication connec-
tions fails or if a device in the topology is taken out of operation.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 3.5.3.5 Device-Combination Settings, section Unregister
device.
The devices detect failure or logging off, and switch over automatically to the remaining communication
paths.
The following figure shows, for example, a four-line-end differential-protection application if all protection
communications are of type 1. A typical application with protection communications of type 2 is the exchange
of indications and measured values between 4 devices (for example, between substations), whereby the
connection can occur via different communication paths. This is the application for a protection-data transmis-
sion device.
[dwringto-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
i
NOTE
If a connection fails in the ring topology, this configuration continues to function as a chain topology. In
addition, a device in the constellation can be logged off from the topology.
• Priority 2: Use Priority 2 for the transmission of fast single-point or double-point indications that are
transferred and updated at a maximum of every 40 ms.
• Priority 3: Use Priority 3 for all indications, measured, and metered values that are transferred and
updated a maximum of every 100 ms.
The number of customer-specific signals, indications, and measured values conform with the remaining band-
width. The remaining bandwidth is lower than with all other protection functions (type 2) when using a differ-
ential protection (type 1). Customer-specific measured values consume more bandwidth than single-point
indications.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 107
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
Communication Media
The communication takes place via direct fiber-optic connections, or via communication networks, or via 2-
wire copper conductors. Siemens recommends a direct fiber-optic connection, as this offers the highest trans-
mission rate of 2 MBit/s and is immune to failures in the communication path while offering the shortest trans-
mission time. This also enables the transmission of a large amount of additional information on differential
protection routes and the remote control of devices at the remote end with DIGSI 5.
The distance to be bridged and the transmission paths available determine the settings of the protection inter-
face. External communication converters are used for the connection to communication networks via
G703.1-, X21-, or G703.6 interfaces. The connection to 2-wire copper cores also takes place via a communi-
cation converter. The C37.94 interface, for example, with 2 MBit/s, offers a direct fiber-optic connection to a
multiplexer with corresponding interface.
Table 3-7 to Table 3-8 show examples of communication connections.
In the case of a direct connection, the distance bridged depends on the fiber type of the optical fiber. This
distance can also be extended via external repeaters.
The modules in the device can be replaced from outside, so that adaptation to a transmission route is
possible. In the case of the 820-nm double module USART-AE-2FO with 2 channels, 2 protection interfaces
can be operated on one module.
The modules can be located at slots E and F in the base device, and at slots N and P in the plug-in module
assembly with integrated power supply.
When using communication converters, the connection from the device to the communication converter by a
module is established via optical fibers.
Table 3-7 Plug-in Modules for Applications with the Protection Interface
Module Type: USART-AF-1LDFO
Physical Connection
1 x optical serial, 1300 nm, duplex LC plug, 24 km via ●
9/125 μm single-mode optical , 4 km via 62.5/125 μm
multi-mode optical fibers
2 x optical serial, 1300 nm, duplex LC plug, 24 km via ●
9/125 μm single-mode optical , 4 km via 62.5/125 μm
multi-mode optical fibers
1 x optical serial, 1300 nm, duplex LC plug, 60 km via ●
9/125 μm single-mode optical fibers
2 x optical serial, 1300 nm, duplex LC plug, 60 km via ●
9/125 μm single-mode optical fibers
1 x optical serial, 1550 nm, duplex LC plug, 100 km ●
via 9/125 μm single-mode optical fibers
108 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
Physical Connection
2 x optical serial, 1550 nm, duplex LC plug, 100 km ●
via 9/125 μm single-mode optical fibers
1 x optical serial, bi-directional via 1 optical fiber, ●
1300 nm/1550 nm (Tx/Rx), simplex plug LC, 40 km
via 9/125 μm single-mode optical fiber
1 x optical serial, bi-directional via 1 optical fiber, ●
1550 nm/1300 nm (Tx/Rx), simplex plug LC, 40 km
via 9/125 μm single mode optical fiber
2 x optical serial, bi-directional via 1 optical fiber, ●
1300 nm/1550 nm (Tx/Rx), 2 x simplex LC plug,
40 km via 9/125 μm single-mode optical fiber
2 x optical serial, bi-directional via 1 optical fiber, ●
1550 nm/1300 nm (Tx/Rx), 2 x simplex LC plug, 40
km via 9/125 μm single-mode optical fiber
USART-AD-1FO
USART-AE-2FO
Plug-In Module
Physical Connection
1 x optical serial, 820 nm, ST connector, 1.5 km via 62.5 μm/125 μm multi-mode optical fibers ●
2 x optical serial, 820 nm, ST connector, 1.5 km via 62.5 μm/125 μm multi-mode optical fibers ●
Application
Protection interface (Sync. HDLC, IEEE C37.94) X X
i
NOTE
The USART plug-in module types can be used in slots E and F in the base module as well as in slots N
and P in the CB202 expansion module. They are not suitable for use in port M in the CB202 expansion
module.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 109
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
[dwmultim-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-43 Connection via Short Distances, 1.5 km to 2 km via Multimode Optical Fiber
[dwmultim-070611-02.tif, 1, en_US]
[dwsingle-070611-03.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-45 Connection via Different Distances via Single-Mode Optical Fiber
i
NOTE
In order to avoid optical overload of the receiver, an attenuator 7XV5107-0AA00 must be used on one side
in the optical-fiber modules USART-AG, USART-AU, USART-AK, and USART-AV for distances of less
than 25 km/50 km.
110 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
[dwsingle-020513-04.tif, 1, en_US]
[dwmultim-070611-05.tif, 1, en_US]
The connection to the multiplexer is established via a communication converter with a G703.1 interface (64
Kbps) or X21 interface (64 Kbps to 512 Kbps). You can make the setting for the bit rate KU-XG-512 (for X21),
KU-XG-256 (for X21), KU-XG-128 (for X21), and KU-XG-64 (for X21 or G703.1) with the parameter Connec-
tion via.
You can find more information in Table 3-9.
[dwmultim-070611-06.tif, 1, en_US]
The connection to the multiplexer is established with 512 kBit/s via a communication converter with a G703.6
interface (E1 with 2 MBit/s or T1 with 1.44 MBit/s). The communication converter offers a 2nd interface for
connecting a further protection interface.
Make the setting for the bit rate with KU-2M-512 with 512 Kbps in accordance with Table 3-9 with the param-
eter Connection via. .
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 111
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
[dwmulti7-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The connection to a communication converter with integrated 5 kV isolating voltage is established with 128
Kbps (KU-KU-128 setting in accordance with Table 3-9). A 20 kV isolation of the 2-wire connection is possible
via an external 7XR9516 isolating transformer.
[dwrepeat-070611-10.tif, 1, en_US]
The repeater offers an interface for connecting an additional protection interface. The connection to a
repeater is established with 512 kBit/s (repeater 512 setting in accordance with Table 3-9).
[dwmutip8-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-51 Direct Optical Connection to a Multiplexer with a C37.94 N * 64 kBit/s Interface (Time Slot N =
1; 2 or 8)
i
NOTE
The redundancy of different communication connections (for the ring topology) requires rigorous separa-
tion of all devices involved in the communication. Therefore, avoid different communication paths via the
same multiplexer board, as no more substitute paths are possible if the board fails.
112 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
[dwtimesy-130212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-52 shows how device 1 with index 1 is synchronized with devices 2, 3, and 4 via the protection inter-
face. This device 1 is synchronized externally from 2 sources (IRIG-B and SNTP via Ethernet).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 113
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
Time Synchronization of the Line Differential Protection Measured Values with Millisecond Accuracy
The measured values of the line differential protection for the various line ends are synchronized with each
other with microsecond accuracy via the mechanisms of the protection interface. The protection interface
displays this state with the COMING indication Protection interface synchronized.
If communications problems occur, it is possible that the measured values may not be properly synchronized.
In this case, the protection interface generates the GOING indication Protection interface
synchronized. The line differential protection is blocked. This state can be corrected only by manual inter-
vention.
i
NOTE
You can reset the synchronization of the protection interface directly in the device. Proceed as follows:
Device functions > x Device protection communication > Protection interface y > Reset synchron..
PPS Synchronization
Millisecond-accurate synchronization of the devices (1*10E-06 s) connected via protection interfaces can take
place via a second pulse at the time-synchronous port G for special differential protection applications or
synchrophasor measuring devices. As a result, the time delay of the communication path can be measured
and displayed separately in the forward and reverse directions. This ensures that the maximum responsivity
can be obtained during differential protection, even if transmission times are unbalanced in the communica-
tion networks. Different transmission times are insignificant for the transmission of protection data with a
protection communication of type 2. Constellation measured values from remote ends may be displayed with
the wrong phase displacement if the transmission times in the forward and reverse directions differ.
Unregister Device
A device can be switched off due to protection-function tests, system inspections, or disconnection of a
feeder for operational reasons. The device that is switched off no longer participates in the distributed func-
tionality and is therefore no longer a component of the topology. The protection functions are still in operation
for the other end or ends.
The following conditions are necessary for a successful logoff of the device from the point of view of protec-
tion communication:
• The protection topology is not in a transient state and is stable in operation without switchovers.
• The local device is one of the two token masters if there is a chain topology. The token masters are the
devices at the ends of the chain.
• The circuit breaker must be open and current must not be flowing.
i
NOTE
If one of these conditions is not fulfilled, the device cannot be logged off.
114 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
[scconfcp-241110-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• Then select the Select constellation text box to select the number of devices (see next figure).
Depending on the device, the selection of constellations can be restricted to 2 or 3 devices.
The number of devices is an order option with regard to differential protection.
[scconfws-241110-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 115
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
i
NOTE
You have the option of changing the number of devices (for example 2 protection communication
devices) depending on the product code any way you like via the Select constellation text box.
If you change the number of devices via the Select constellation text box, all activated constellation
settings are lost.
If the module slot is not yet provided with modules, proceed as follows:
• Select the desired communication module in the rear view of the device.
• Select the module from the catalog and drag it to a channel. Thus is the channel configured with a
module. DIGSI 5 indicates whether the module can be used for protection communication under Device
Information.
• Use the Communication protocols text box to select the protection interface. A text box entitled
Protection interface will then appear (see Figure 3-53).
• Then use the Select constellation text box to select the number of devices (for example 2 devices
protection com.) (see Figure 3-54).
116 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
[scconfig-181013-011, 1, en_US]
Changes in a channel are always visible on the other channel as well. All further parameters can be set sepa-
rately for individual channels.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 117
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
With the Local device is device parameter, you set the index (number) of your device in the topology.
A maximum of 6 devices can be present in one topology.
APPLICATION EXAMPLE
You have a topology with 2 devices.
For example, select in DIGSI 5 the parameter setting Address of device 1 with the parameter value 101
for device 1 and the parameter setting Address of device 2 with the parameter value 102 for device 2.
Then, use the Local device is device parameter to set the index of the local device.
The addresses must be configured identically for all devices involved in the constellation. A functional protec-
tion communication requires that you also assign the same index in all devices of a constellation for a device
with a unique address.
• Default setting (_:5131:122) Lowest appearing bit rate = 64 kBit/s
The Lowest appearing bit rate parameter is used to set the smallest occurring bit rate in the device
group. Set the smallest value in each device with a three-end constellation with 2 optical fiber connections (2
MBit/s) and a 64-Kbps connection. This value determines the maximum signals and measured values within
a constellation.
Apart from the default value, you can also set the following bit rates:
• 128 kBit/s
• 512 kBit/s
• 2048 kBit/s
i
NOTE
If you use fiber-optic cables for the connection between the devices, set the value to 2048 kBit/s.
118 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
i
NOTE
If the setting values of the parameters Disturbance alarm after and Transm. fail. alarm
after are exceeded, then an indication is generated.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 119
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
i
NOTE
The PPS measurement is used to consider the time delay in the send and receive directions. If PPS fails
due to a reception fault or due to a short-term unfavorable satellite position, synchronization via conven-
tional communication media remains active.
i
NOTE
The synchronization mode can be set separately for both protection interfaces.
If no further PPS pulse is received within 2.1 s, the time-out monitoring responds. If no new second pulse
occurs after the expiry of the monitoring time, the indication PPS pulse loss is issued.
[loppssyn-100113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The binary input >PPS pulse loss can be used to signal an externally detected fault in the PPS signal
(e.g. error message from the receiver). Setting this binary input also leads to the indication PPS pulse
loss.
120 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
[dwdatenl-100113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The data bar is divided into 3 priorities, which also have different transmission rates and data volumes.
The following basic principle applies for all messages: Only pure data contents are transmitted. The quality
(for example, Valid) is not automatically transmitted as well. If you want to transmit the quality as well (for
example, for further processing of GOOSE messages), the quality must be transmitted separately (for
example, by using CFC). If a signal that has a test flag is transmitted (because its function is in test mode, for
example), all signals are provided with a test flag on the receiving side. If the connection is broken, all
received signals are flagged with the quality Invalid. If desired, the value can also be set to a secure state
after a selectable dropout time, or the last value received can be retained (Hold setting). This can be config-
ured separately for each received signal (see Table 3-13).
i
NOTE
For ACT type signals, only the phase information is transmitted.
Indications that are transferred data fields of priority 1 are sent with every telegram. They are preferably used
for the transmission of rapid signals, e.g. release for circuit-breaker intertripping. A strictly deterministic, rapid
transmission is required there.
Signals of priority 2 are transmitted with at least every 2nd telegram. For bit rates >256 kbit/s, there are no
differences between priority 1 and priority 2.
Priority 3 information is transmitted at least every 100 ms. This priority is used for transmission of measured
and metered values. Complex values must be routed separately as the real and the imaginary part for trans-
mission. Measured-value thresholds that lead to an updating of a measured value are set centrally as a prop-
erty of the measured value. These measured-value thresholds apply with the corresponding reporting, for
example, also for the transfer via IEC 61850 to a substation automation technology.
Indications which are written to a data area x under a priority on the data bar must be routed to an indication
of the same type in the device reading this information. Otherwise, they are processed incorrectly on the
receiving side. The data bar is organized in terms of bits. For information on the bit requirement by each
signal type, refer to Table 3-12.
Table 3-10 and Table 3-11 show the number of data areas in the data bar in relation to the available baud
rate.
i
NOTE
The Lowest appearing bit rate parameter, which has to be set in each device for the protection
interfaces of a topology, defines the number of data areas as well as the topology type.
If, for example, in a three-end constellation with a type 2 chain topology two devices are connected via direct
optical fibers and 2 devices via the 64 Kbps weakest line, the 64-Kbps section is the limiting factor for the
entire constellation.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 121
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
Table 3-10 Available Bits - Minimum Constellation Baud Rate 64/128 kbit/s
Table 3-11 Available bits - Minimum Constellation Baud Rate 512/2048 kbit/s
i
NOTE
If the protection link fails, these values can be set on the receiver side.
EXAMPLE
2 devices are connected with differential protection via a 64-kBit channel. This is a type 1 topology; 8 bits are
freely available for priority 1. Now, for example, 4 SPS and 2 DPS can be routed:
4 x 1 Bit + 2 x 2 Bits = 8 Bits
i
NOTE
Measured values are transmitted as primary values.
EXAMPLE
For the rated current display in the receiving device
When Irated = 1000 A in the transmitting device and ILoad = 200 A, the number 200 is displayed in the receiving
device.
122 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
Remote Data Transmission: Routing of the Indications and Measured Values to the Protection Interface
The transmission is organized in the form of a data bar which is continuously exchanged between the
devices.
For this, see Figure 3-57.
A device indication or measured value is allocated to a definite data area of the bar.
Figure 3-58 to Figure 3-61 show the routing for a communication topology of protection interface type 1.
To transmit signals to other devices, these signals must be routed in the communication matrix under
Transmit. Binary inputs 1 and 2 are single-point indications (SPS) and are routed to position 1 and position 2
of the transmission with the highest priority (priority 1). For 64 Kbps, for example, only 8 of these data areas
are available for type 1; they are exchanged between the transmission routes with each telegram. Signals 3
and 4 are double-point indications (DPS), e.g. a switch position that is transmitted by a device 1. A double-
point indication occupies 2 positions on the data bar. In addition, a measured and metered value are commu-
nicated via priority 3.
As a measured or metered value uses 32 bits, value 2 starts at position 33. DIGSI 5 indicated the next avail-
able position.
[scransps-021210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[scrangmw-021210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 123
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
[scrangzw-021210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
This device also receives information (in the matrix under Receive). This must have been routed as a target
for other devices (see next figure). The binary outputs 1 and 2 in device 1 receive their information via the
protection interface. This is priority 1 information, which has been routed in another device to position 3 and 4
of the data bar. The secure state is defined in the Fallback Value column. If the data connection fails, the
single-point indication is reset to coming or going or its value is retained (hold). For data of the various
priorities, you can also set a dropout time after which the resetting (see Figure 3-60) to the fallback value
occurs, in order to retain the original state for a short time in the event of brief interruptions. These 3 dropout
times apply for all data of one transmission priority and are set as parameters.
[scspsemp-021210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-61 Routing of Single-Point Indications (Receive) to the Protection Interface in Device 1
The following figure shows the routing in the 2nd device. Binary inputs 1 and 2 are routed with priority 1 to
positions 3 and 4 there. In device 1, positions 1 and 2 are already occupied (see Figure 3-58). If you also
route the signals to positions 1 and 2, the signals of the devices are then connected to the corresponding
position with a logical OR operation. If measured and metered values are routed in the same data areas, this
results in implausible values for the receivers that read the data. As a user, you are therefore responsible for
the correct routing.
124 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
[scbaspsr-021210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-62 Routing of Single Indications to be Sent to the Protection Interface in Device 2
The binary outputs 1 and 2 (Receive) in the 2nd device are connected to priority 1 signals 1 and 2 from the
1st device. This takes place via the data areas at positions 1 and 2 of the data bar, which transfer the state of
the indications. Other devices can also read this information and link it to their internal signals. Here, too, the
secure state, which is assumed when the protection connection is interrupted, is entered. This state depends
on the information. In the case of single-point indications, the state is 0 or 1. In the case of double-point indi-
cations, the bit combinations 00, 01, 10, or 11 are possible, in order to directly signal a disturbed position
upon failure of the data connection, for example.
Hold is used to retain the state.
[scbausps-021210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-63 Routing of Single-Point Indications (Receive) to the Protection Interface in Device 2
[scbausmw-021210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 125
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
[scbauszw-021210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• Time delay in the send and receive direction of the telegrams between local and neighboring device
You can find this diagnostic data in DIGSI under the following menu structure (see Figure 3-66 to
Figure 3-67):
126 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
[sc_diagnose_wskanäle_geräteadresse, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 127
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
[sc_diagnose_wskanäle_geräte_nichtverb, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-67 Diagnostic Data of the Protection-Interface Channels - Device 2 Not Connected
i
NOTE
You can use the following procedure to reset the measured values for the protection interface directly in
the device:
Device functions > x Device protection communication > Protection interface y > Reset measured
values.
128 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
Indication Description
(_:5161:301) Status The output signal gives you information about the state of communication layers
of lay. 1 and 2 1 and 2 (1: Physical Layer, 2: Data Link Layer). The following indications values
are possible:
• Initialized:
The protection interface is not connected and is in the Initial state.
• Protection interface connected:
The protection interface is connected to the protection interface of a device.
• Protection interface fault:
The protection interface has not received any valid telegrams for the time
set in parameter (_:5161:107) Disturbance alarm after.
• Protection interface failure:
The protection interface has not received any valid telegrams for the time
set in parameter (_:5161:108) Transm. fail. alarm after .
• not present:
The protection interface has not been assigned to a communication
channel.
(_:5161:302) Status The output signal gives you information about the state of communication layers
of lay. 3 and 4 3 and 4 (3: Network Layer, 4: Transport Layer). The following indications values
are possible:
• no error:
The protection interface is operating correctly.
• Software versions incomp.:
The firmware versions of the connected devices are incompatible. Update
the firmware.
• System mirroring:
The protection interface is receiving its own data. Check the wiring:
• Dev. add. incorrect:
The device address of the partner device is incorrect. Check the settings for
parameters Address of device 1 to address of device n (_:
5131:102 and following).
• Constell. incorrect:
The constellation settings of the devices are different. Check that the setting
for the parameter Select constellation is identical in all devices.
• Const. param. incorrect:
Check that the same setting has been made for parameter (_:5131:122)
Lowest appearing bit rate in all devices.
• Diff. Param. Error:
The line differential protection settings for the connected devices are incom-
patible. Check whether both devices are set to operate with or without line
differential protection. The setting for parameter (_:9001:101) Rated
current must be the same.
In order to clarify faults, each individual protection interface provides the following binary signals:
Binary Output Signal Description
(_:5161:303) Signal Connection broken indicates that during a parameterized time
Connection broken (parameter (_:5161:107) Disturbance alarm after) faulty or missing
telegrams were continuously received. If the 'Connection interrupted' indication
occurs, the affected protection interface link will be terminated. This may cause
the blocking of an active differential protection or a ring topology may change to
a chain topology.
(_:5161:320) Time Signal Time delay jump indicates that the data transit times changed
delay jump abruptly. This is caused by switching the communication path in the communica-
tion network.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 129
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
130 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
i
NOTE
You can reset the measured values of the protection interface directly in the device. Proceed as follows:
Device functions > x Device protection communication > Protection interface y > Reset measured
values.
i
NOTE
All remote devices need an IP configuration for port J (integrated Ethernet interface) in all cases. The IP
addresses of slots J of a protection topology must be in different subnetworks.
i
NOTE
If reparameterization requires a restart of the remote device, then the corresponding route is not available
until after approx. 2 min. following a complete restart.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 131
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
[dwremote-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• Open Protection topology. In the next window, press the button at top left (see arrow in the following
figure). The dialog for deactivating the protection communication then opens.
If you confirm the query, protection communication is interrupted and the communication channels are
used exclusively for DIGSI 5. Note that the protection functions that use protection data communications
(e.g. differential protection) are deactivated and no remote data can be updated in the constellation.
Then, the remote signals fall back to the secure state the user has defined earlier.
6This function is not yet implemented and will first be activated with a later firmware version.
132 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
[sctunnel-200213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
i
NOTE
The protection communication remains interrupted until either the user reactivates it manually, or a
maximum deactivation duration of 12 hours has been exceeded. After this, the connection reactivates
itself. This ensures that the protection communication and protection function working with it are reacti-
vated.
i
NOTE
Ensure that DIGSI 5 is connected via Ethernet to RJ45 of the local device. The local device must be
configured with valid IP addresses.
Figure 3-70 to Figure 3-71 show the steps for the deactivation of protection communication.
In the next step, a window appears in DIGSI 5 containing the instructions for deactivating the protection data
communication (see next figure).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 133
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
[scdeadig-061210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In order to be able to deactivate the protection-data communication, you must enter your confirmation ID if a
security query is activated (see next figure). The default confirmation ID is 222222.
134 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
[scdecode-061210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-71 Entering the Confirmation ID for the Deactivation of Protection Communication
• Under Start ---> Run in Windows, open an input window by entering CMD.
Use the DOS box to enter a command line to set a route (see next figure). This is the prerequisite that
DIGSI 5 can be routed further via the protection interface.
[scdosbox-310311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
i
NOTE
To set the route, you must have administrator rights for the DIGSI PC.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 135
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
• The following routing command is necessary to connect from device 1 to device 2 in the example shown
(see Figure 3-68):
– Route add 173.16.60.60 Mask 255.255.0.0 172.16.60.60
– Route <Command> Destination (= Device 2) Mask (Routing Device) Local Device
Remote devices must be available in different subnetworks and provided with unique IP addresses. For
this, RJ45 of the relevant devices must already be configured so that these devices can now be
accessed remotely.
• Now, select your DIGSI 5 project for substation 2 and connect this to the device. Although you are physi-
cally connected to the local device, this device now establishes a connection with the remote device.
You can now fully operate the remote device with DIGSI 5.
After completing the process, the protection communication must be reactivated. For this, end the
connection with the remote device in DIGSI 5 at the local device for the protection interface.
If this communication is not terminated properly, the protection-data communication then switches on
again automatically after about 12 hours.
• Delete the route again by entering the following in the DOS box:
– Route Delete 173.16.60.60
• If you wish to access device 3 via the protection interface, proceed in the same way. In this case, the
DIGSI 5 communication is routed to device 3 via device 2 and you are connected from device 1 to
device 3.
i
NOTE
If there is no connection between the local device and DIGSI 5 for longer than an hour, the connection
automatically resets to protection communication.
i
NOTE
The diagnostic data can also be read via the device control on the display of the device. The overview of
DIGSI 5 does not offer this option, however.
136 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
[scdiapin-140912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-73 Diagnostic Data of a Channel Configured with the Protection Interface
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 137
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
[scdiamed-140912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
138 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
[scdiahdl-140912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-75 Diagnostic Data of the Protection-Interface Log - HDLC (Log - Layer)
Table 3-16 Description of Diagnostic Data of the Protection-Interface Log - HDLC (Log - Layer)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 139
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
[scdiacom-140912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-76 Diagnostic Data of the Protection-Interface Log - COM Interface (Internal COM Link Interface
Between Module and Mainboard)
Table 3-17 Description of Diagnostic Data of the COM Interface (Internal COM Link Interface Between
Module and Mainboard)
140 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
Table 3-18 Description of Diagnostic Data of some Setting Values of the Protection Interface
3.5.3.12 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 141
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
142 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 143
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
144 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.6 Date and Time Synchronization
Timely recording of process data requires precise time synchronization of the devices. The integrated date/
time synchronization allows the exact chronological assignment of events to an internally managed device
time that is used to time stamp events in logs, which are then transmitted to a substation automation tech-
nology or transferred via the protection interface. A clock module internal to the device and having battery
backup is synchronized cyclically with the current device time so that the right device time is available and
used even in case of auxiliary-voltage failure. At the same time, this permits hardware-supported monitoring
of the device time.
The integrated date/time synchronization is a supervisory device function. Setting parameters and indications
can be found in the following menus for the DIGSI and the device:
Set date and time:
• DIGSI: Online access -> Interface -> Device -> Device Information -> Time Information
• Device: Main menu → Device functions → Date & Time
Parameter:
• DIGSI: Project -> Device -> Parameter -> Time Settings
Indications:
• DIGSI: Project -> Device -> Information routing ->Time keeping or Time Sync.
Every SIPROTEC 5 device maintains an internal device time with date. The date and time can also be set on
the device via the on-site operation panel or via DIGSI 5. Within a system, or even beyond, it is usually
necessary to record the time of process data accurately and to have exact time synchronization of all devices.
For SIPROTEC 5 devices, the sources of time and synchronization options can be configured.
• Telegram
The time is synchronized via a telegram with an appropriately configured communication interface in
accordance with the IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3 protocol.
• Ethernet
The time synchronization is done via Ethernet-based SNTP protocol (Simple Network Time Protocol), for
example with IEC 61850 stations. The SNTP service must be enabled during configuration of Ethernet
interfaces so that it is available as an option for the time synchronization.
• Protection interface
The time synchronization takes place via the protection interfaces configured for your SIPROTEC 5
device. Here, the timing master takes over the time management.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 145
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.6 Date and Time Synchronization
• 2 time sources can be taken into consideration with the SIPROTEC 5 devices. For each time source, the
synchronization type may be selected based on the options provided.
• Time source 1 takes precedence over Time source 2, that is, Time source 2 will be effective
for the synchronization of the device time only if Time source 1 fails. If only one time source is avail-
able and it fails, then only the internal clock continues unsynchronized. The status of the time sources is
indicated.
• For every time source it is possible to define via the Time zone time source 1 parameter (or Time
zone time source 2) if this source transmits its time by UTC (universal time) or if the settings corre-
spond to the local time zone of the device.
i
NOTE
Make sure that the settings for the time sources coincide with the actual hardware configuration of your
SIPROTEC 5 device. In any event, incorrect settings cause the status indications of time sources to pick
up.
• Year-Month-Day: 2009-12-24
i
NOTE
• For time sources that transmit the status of the switch to daylight saving time, this will be taken into
account when creating the internal device time in the UTC format. The differential time of the daylight
saving time set in the device (parameter Offset daylight saving time) is taken into consideration.
However, in contrast, the settings of the start of daylight saving time and end of the daylight saving
times are ignored when converting into the device internal UTC format.
• For active time sources, it is not possible to set the time via the device display or DIGSI 5. An excep-
tion is setting the calendar year for active time protocol IRIG-B.
146 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.6 Date and Time Synchronization
Indication Description
Device: This indication indicates a high difference between
Clock fail the internally managed time and the time of the clock
module that is not permissible. The triggering of the
indication can point to a defect in the clock module or
to an unacceptable high drift of the system quartz
crystal. The time maintained internally is marked as
invalid.
Time management: This indication indicates whether daylight saving time
Daylight saving time has been enabled.
Time management: This indication indicates that the device time has
Clock set manually been set manually via the on-site operation panel or
via DIGSI 5.
Time synchronization: These 2 indications indicate whether the active time
Status time source 1 sources are recognized as valid and active from the
Status time source 2 device point of view. When the indications get trig-
gered, it can also be an indication that an incorrect
configuration of the port or channel numbers was
done at the on-site operation panel.
Time synchronization: This indication indicates after the parameterized time
Time sync. error Fault indication after that synchronization
using an external time source has failed.
i
NOTE
In case of a missing or discharged battery, the device starts without active external time synchronization
with the device time 2011-01-01 00:00:00 (UTC).
For the device, DIGSI 5 provides a compact overview of the status of the time synchronization of your
SIPROTEC 5 device in online mode. All displays are updated continuously. You can access the overview in
the project-tree window via Online access.
DIGSI: Online access -> Interface -> Device -> Device Information -> Time Information
[sctimedg-140912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• Whether the device time is currently synchronized from the time source
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 147
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.6 Date and Time Synchronization
The lower section displays the device time, which is continuously updated. If the internal device time and the
infeed time source were synchronous at the time of telegram receipt, both displayed times are identical.
i
NOTE
All times displayed (also the time source) take into consideration the local time settings (zone and daylight
saving time of the device) in the form of a numerical offset for UTC (universal time).
• Default setting Time zone time source 1 = local, Time zone time source 2 = local
With the Time zone time source 1 and Time zone time source 2 parameters, you define the
handling of time zones of the external timer.
Parameter Value Description
local Local time zone and daylight saving time are considered as time zone offsets
to GMT.
UTC Time format according to UTC (universal time)
148 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.6 Date and Time Synchronization
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 149
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.6 Date and Time Synchronization
[sctimezo-140912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-78 Settings for Time Zone and Daylight Saving Time in DIGSI
150 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.7 User-Defined Objects
3.7.1 Overview
Within a User-defined function group, you can use the User-defined function block to group user-defined
objects that you find in the DIGSI 5 library under User-defined functions.
You can enter single-point indications, pickup and operate indications (ACD, ACT), single or double
commands as well as measured values in the user-defined function block and assign a superordinate name
to the grouping, for example, Process indications for a group of single-point indications that are read in via
binary inputs.
The functionality can be added at either the function-group level (highest level in the device) or at the func-
tionality level within an existing function group.
[scbenutz-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-79 Information Routing Through Use of Added User-Defined Process Indication and Single-Point
Indication Function Block
The following data types are available for user-defined objects in the DIGSI 5 library under the heading User-
defined signals.
EXAMPLE
Acquisition using binary input, further processing in a CFC and/or signaling using an LED.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 151
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.7 User-Defined Objects
[scspsfas-140613-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-80 Single-Point Indication SPS Unsaved (Example: 7KE85 Fault Recorder)
EXAMPLE
Acquisition of a disconnector or circuit-breaker switch position.
152 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.7 User-Defined Objects
EXAMPLE
The output of the CFC block ADD_D can be connected with the data type INS. The result can be shown on
the display of the device.
i
NOTE
Additional data types can be found under other headings in the DIGSI 5 library as well as in the corre-
sponding function blocks. This applies to the following data types:
• Pulse-metered values (see User-defined functions in the DIGSI 5 library)
• Transformer taps
• Metered Values
Pulse-Metered Values
Pulse-metered values are available as data types BCR (Binary Counter Reading) in the function group Line
as well as in the DIGSI library under User-defined Functions.
The functionality and the settings of the pulse-metered values can be found in chapter 9.8.1 Function
Description Pulse-Metered Values ..
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 153
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.7 User-Defined Objects
The following data types are also used in the system, but they are not contained in the information catalog for
general use:
• ENC (Enumerated Setting Controllable)
The data type ENC models a command with which the user can set predefined values.
• SEQ (Sequence)
i
NOTE
Transformer taps are included in the tap changer switching element. If this switching element is created
in the device, the transformer tap position is available as a data object of type BSC (binary controlled tap
changer with tap-position information).
154 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.8 Other Functions
Input signals can be filtered to suppress brief changes at the binary input. Chatter blocking can be used to
prevent continuously changing indications from clogging the event list. After an adjustable number of
changes, the indication is blocked for a certain period.
The settings for indication filtering can be found at the individual signals. The next figure shows the settings
using the example of a controllable (circuit-breaker switch position).
i
NOTE
The settings are available only in the Control function block of the circuit breaker or disconnector switch
and not in the Circuit breaker or Disconnector function block, since these function blocks contain the
actual unfiltered position of the switch in the bay.
[sclsposi-291110-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The setting range for the Software filtering time parameter ranges from 0 ms to 86 400 000 ms
(1 day) in ms increments. The Retrigger filter check box can be used to select whether the software filter
should be restarted by a change from 1 to 0 and back. When activated, the Indication timestamp before
filtering check box back dates the time stamp by the set software filtering time and the fixed hardware
filtering time. In this case, the time stamp corresponds to the actual status change of the signal.
Chatter blocking can be activated or deactivated as a parameter of the position in the circuit breaker or
disconnector function block.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 155
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.8 Other Functions
[scflatte-291110-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The settings for the chatter blocking function are set centrally for the entire device in DIGSI. They are acces-
sible as settings in the General function group (see the following figure).
[scparafl-291110-01.tif, 1, en_US]
156 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.8 Other Functions
The chatter-blocking settings have the following meaning (see Figure 3-84):
• Number of permissible status changes
This number specifies how often the state of a signal may toggle within the chatter-test time and the
chatter-checking time. If this number is exceeded, the signal will be or remains blocked.
Enter a number from 0 to 65535 in this field. If the entry is 0, chatter blocking is essentially inactive.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 157
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.8 Other Functions
[dwflatsp-140212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
During commissioning, maintenance, or testing, a brief interruption of the connection between the logical
signals and binary inputs may be useful. It allows you to manually update the status of a switching device that
is not providing feedback correctly. Before this can take place, you must first set acquisition blocking.
Set the Acquisition blocking function in the menu of the device display Commands > Equipment >Aq.blk
man. update. If several switching devices are available, select the appropriate switching device. When
pressing the Change key, the confirmation ID will be queried. After entering the confirmation ID, the acquisi-
tion blocking function is switched on when OK is pressed.
[scerfass-280513-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual updating of the switching device is possible from within the same menu. Use the menu item Change
to select the Manual updating function. Subsequently, select the updating setting of the switching device
manually and acknowledge the selection by pressing OK. The manually updated position of the switching
device will be displayed.
158 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.8 Other Functions
[scstatus-280513-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[scstatu2-280513-01.tif, 1, en_US]
i
NOTE
For safety reasons, manual updating is possible only directly through the on-site operation panel of the
device and not through DIGSI 5.
i
NOTE
Setting acquisition blocking and the subsequent manual updating are also possible via the IEC 61850
system interface.
Acquisition blocking can also be set via a binary input. This way, acquisition blocking can be set for an indi-
vidual or several switching devices in a feeder simultaneously by means of an external toggle switch in order
to disable the feeder. For this purpose, every switching device in the Switch functionality (circuit breaker or
disconnector switch) has the input signal >Acquisition blocking. This signal can also be set from the
CFC.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 159
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.8 Other Functions
[scbeerfa-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
i
NOTE
Interlockings are carried out with the status changes of the switching device. Remove acquisition blocking
again manually. Otherwise, position changes of the switching device are not detected and interlockings
are ineffective.
If the acquisition blocking and the manually updated position are set using the operation panel of the device
or the system interface IEC 61850, these are retained until the acquisition blocking is manually deactivated.
When you initially start the device, the acquisition blocking is deactivated.
Except for a restart, the acquisition blocking and the manually updated position are retained.
If the acquisition blocking is activated via the input signal >Acquisition blocking, it is retained as long
as the binary input is active.
To set the acquisition blocking of a switching device, the following sources are possible:
• Operation panel of the device
• System interface IEC 61850
i
NOTE
When the acquisition blocking is activated or the switching device updated manually while the entire
device or the switching device is in test mode, these states are not saved. The acquisition blocking and the
manual updating are not retained after a restart.
In addition to the switching commands, which are issued as pulse commands, and stored for the standard
switching devices (circuit breaker, disconnector switch), persistent commands are also possible. In this case,
a distinction must be drawn between controllables with the Continuous output operating mode and a stored
signal output that is immune to reset.
You can change a controllable from pulse to persistent command with the Command output parameter.
160 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.8 Other Functions
[scbefehl-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Select Pulse output or Continuous output for the command output type. If a persistent command is
selected, the Pulse parameter is irrelevant.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 161
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.9 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions
3.9.1 Overview
You can set the threshold values of protection functions directly on the device or by using DIGSI 5.
An innovative design was implemented for the protection settings.
You can switchover the edit mode between the following setting views:
• Primary
• Secondary
• Percent
If you change settings in a setting view, DIGSI 5 calculates the settings of the 2 inactive views in the back-
ground. If you wish to save, for example, conversion to secondary values, then select the primary view.
Configure all the settings and switchover to the secondary view.
162 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.9 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions
The following setting example shows how you can change the transformer ratio in DIGSI 5, and what impact
this has on the settings in the setting views Primary and Secondary. The protection setting is observed in
the example of the Overcurrent protection function.
The following output data are assumed:
Current transformer: 1000 A/1 A
Protection pickup value: 1.5 A
The following figure shows the protection setting of the Overcurrent protection function in the secondary
view. The threshold value of the stage is set to 1.5 A.
[scmodsek-201210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
When you click the green arrow in the setting sheet at the upper left, you get to the window for switching over
to the setting view (see the following figure). Select the setting view you prefer.
[scmodums-201210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The following figures show the setting sequence in the Primary edit mode. Set the transformer data. In the
example, the current transformer has a transformation ratio of 1000 A/1 A.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 163
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.9 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions
[scpwandl-201210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In the Line function group, you set the line data (see the following figure). Rated current, rated voltage are the
reference variables for the percent setting.
[scproref-201210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The following figures show the threshold value of the Overcurrent protection function in the primary view
with 1500 A.
164 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.9 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions
[scumzpri-201210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-94 Example for the Threshold Value of the Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection (Edit Mode:
Primary)
When switching over to the percent view, the result should be the following value:
1500 A/1000 A · 100 % = 150 %
[scumzpro-201210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-95 Example for the Threshold Value of the Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection (Edit Mode:
Percent)
When switching over to the secondary view, the result should be the following value:
1500 A/(1000 A/1 A) = 1.5 A
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 165
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.9 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions
[scumzsek-201210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-96 Example for the Threshold Value of the Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection (Edit Mode:
Secondary)
If you only want to work in the secondary view, DIGSI 5 supports you if the transformer ratio changes during
the project phase.
In the example, the current-transformer ratio changes from 1000 A/1 A to 1000 A/5 A. Change the secondary
rated current of the current transformer in the setting sheet of the transformer data from 1 A to 5 A (Edit
mode: Secondary). If you change the transformer data, a window will appear (see the following figure) that
will ask you for the action desired.
[scfragew-100211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-97 Query after Changing the Transformer Data (Setting View: Secondary)
166 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.9 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions
If you answer the question with Yes, then DIGSI 5 will recalculate the pickup values (threshold values) in the
active secondary view. For the new secondary transformer current 5 A, the new secondary threshold value
obtained is 7.5 A (1.5 A * 5 = 7.5 A). The primary and percent values remain unchanged.
The following figure shows the newly calculated threshold value in the secondary view.
[scsekneu-201210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-98 Automatically Recalculated Secondary Values After Changes in the Transformer Data
If you have already set the settings in the secondary view by including the new transformation ratio of the
transformer in the calculation, then you answer the question with No. In this case, the protection settings in
the secondary view remain unchanged. DIGSI 5 recalculates the settings (threshold values) of the primary
view. In the example, the primary threshold value is then 300 A (1.5 A * 1000 A/5 A = 300 A).
In the example, the current-transformer ratio changes from 1000 A/1 A to 1000 A/5 A. The following table
summarizes the pickup values that DIGSI 5 will recalculate in the setting view. The new values (in bold)
depend on the answer of your inquiry (see Figure 3-97).
Reply to the Question
Yes No
Threshold value secondary (active setting view) 7.5 A 1.5 A
Threshold value primary (covered setting view) 1500 A 300 A
The device is preset to the secondary value at the time of delivery. Only secondary values can be set directly
on the device.
If you change transformer data directly on the device, it is not followed by a query, like in DIGSI 5 (see
Figure 3-97). Instead, the device assumes that all settings remain unchanged in the secondary view.
i
NOTE
If the device works with IEC 61850 protocol, you change the transformer data only via DIGSI 5 and not
directly on the device. If you change the transformer data directly on the device, the IEC 61850 configura-
tion of the measurement and metered values can be faulty.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 167
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.10 Settings Group Switching
For different applications you can save the respective function settings in so-called Settings groups, and if
necessary enable them quickly.
You can save up to 8 different settings groups in the device. In the process, only one settings group is active
at any given time. During operation, you can switch between settings groups. The source of the switchover
can be selected via a parameter.
You can switchover the settings groups via the following alternatives:
• Via the on-site operation panel directly on the device
• Via an online DIGSI connection to the device
168 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.10 Settings Group Switching
settings groups must be switched over, only 1 binary input is required. The following table shows the possible
binary codes (BCD) and applicable settings groups (PG).
Table 3-19 Binary Codes of the Input Signals and Applicable Settings Groups
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 169
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.10 Settings Group Switching
3.10.5 Settings
170 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.10 Settings Group Switching
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 171
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
System Functions
3.10 Settings Group Switching
172 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
4 Applications
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 173
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Applications
4.1 Overview
4.1 Overview
The Global DIGSI 5 library provides application templates for the applications of the devices. The application
template
• Supports the fast realization of complete protection solutions for applications
• Contains the basic configuration for the use case
• Check the routing of binary outputs with respect to fast and normal relays.
• Check the CFC charts for the group-warning indications and group-fault indications.
The following describes the application templates and maximum functional scope for the devices shown in
this manual.
i
NOTE
The availability of certain settings and setting options depends on the device type and the functions avail-
able on the device!
174 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Applications
4.2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for the Devices 7SA84/7SA86
• Distance protection for overhead line, grounded systems with 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout, (in prepara-
tion)
• Distance protection for overhead line with 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout, 7SA86 only
To load the application templates to the device, the following minimum hardware configuration requirements
must be met:
Application Template Hardware Configuration Minimum Requirement
DIS Basis 5 BI, 7 BO, 4 I, 4 V
DIS Res./isol. systems, with AREC
DIS Overhead line, grounded systems
DIS MHO, overhead line, grounded systems
DIS Overhead line, grounded systems 1 1/2 circuit- 15 BI, 12 BO, 8 I, 8 V
breaker layout (in preparation)
DIS MHO, overhead line, grounded systems 1 1/2
circuit-breaker layout
The following table shows the functional scope and the required function points of the application templates
for the devices 7SA84/7SA86:
Table 4-1 Functional Scope of the Application Template for the Devices 7SA84/7SA86
DIS Overhead Line,
7SA86
DIS Basis
Grounded Systems
Grounded Systems
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 175
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Applications
4.2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for the Devices 7SA84/7SA86
7SA86
DIS Basis
Grounded Systems
Grounded Systems
176 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Applications
4.2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for the Devices 7SA84/7SA86
7SA86
DIS Basis
Grounded Systems
Grounded Systems
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 177
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Applications
4.2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for the Devices 7SA84/7SA86
7SA86
DIS Basis
Grounded Systems
• Signal-transmission method
• Fault Locator
178 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Applications
4.2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for the Devices 7SA84/7SA86
• Signal-transmission method
• Fault Locator
Application Template: Distance Protection for Overhead Line, Grounded Systems (7SA84/7SA86)
The Distance protection for overhead line, grounded systems application template is preconfigured for
the following applications:
• Line protection with 3-pole tripping for overhead lines
• For systems with grounded neutral point
• Signal-transmission method
• Fault Locator
Application Template: MHO Distance Protection for Overhead Line, Grounded Systems (7SA84/7SA86, in
Preparation)
The Distance protection MHO for overhead line, grounded systems application template is preconfigured
for the following applications:
• Line protection with 3-pole tripping for overhead lines
• For systems with grounded neutral point
• The main protection is distance protection (distance zones preconfigured with MHO characteristic
curves)
• Signal-transmission method
• Fault Locator
Application Template: Distance Protection for Overhead Line with 1 1/2 Circuit-Breaker Layout (7SA86 Only, in
Preparation)
The Distance protection for overhead line with 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout application template is
preconfigured for the following applications:
• Line protection with 3-pole tripping for overhead lines and cables
• For systems with all types of neutral-point treatment
• Signal-transmission method
• Fault Locator
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 179
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Applications
4.2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for the Devices 7SA84/7SA86
Application Template: MHO Distance Protection for Overhead Line with 1 1/2 Circuit-Breaker Layout (7SA86
Only)
The Distance protection MHO for overhead line with 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout application template is
preconfigured for the following applications:
• Line protection with 3-pole tripping for overhead lines and cables
• For systems with all types of neutral-point treatment
• The main protection is distance protection (distance zones preconfigured with MHO characteristic
curves)
• Signal-transmission method
• Fault Locator
180 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Applications
4.3 Application Templates and Functional Scope for the Devices 7SD84/7SD86
• Differential protection for overhead line with transformer in the protection range
• Differential protection for overhead line with 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout, 7SA86 only
To load the application templates to the device, the following minimum hardware configuration requirements
must be met:
Application Template Hardware Configuration Minimum Requirement
DIFF Basis 5 BI, 7 BO, 4 I, 4 V
DIFF overhead line (in preparation)
DIFF Overhead Line with Transformer
DIFF overhead line, 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout 15 BI, 12 BO, 8 I, 8 V
The following table shows the functional scope and the required function points of the application templates
for devices 7SD84/7SD86:
Table 4-2 Functional Scope of the Application Template for the Devices 7SD84/7SD86
7SD86
DIFF Basis
with Transformer
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 181
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Applications
4.3 Application Templates and Functional Scope for the Devices 7SD84/7SD86
7SD86
DIFF Basis
with Transformer
182 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Applications
4.3 Application Templates and Functional Scope for the Devices 7SD84/7SD86
7SD84
7SD86
DIFF Basis
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 183
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Applications
4.3 Application Templates and Functional Scope for the Devices 7SD84/7SD86
Application Template: Differential Protection for Overhead Line with Transformer in the Protection Range
(7SD84/7SD86)
The Differential protection overhead line with transformer in the protection range application template
is preconfigured for the following standard applications:
• Overhead-line protection with 3-pole tripping with transformer in the protection range
• The main protection is phase-selective differential protection with transformer option
Application Template: Differential Protection for Overhead Line with 1 1/2 Circuit-Breaker Layout (7SD86 Only)
The Differential protection overhead line with 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout application template is precon-
figured for the following applications:
• Overhead-line protection with 3-pole tripping
• The main protection is phase-selective differential protection
• Stub-fault protection
184 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Applications
4.4 Application Templates and Functional Scope for the Device 7SL86
• Differential protection/distance protection for overhead line, grounded systems with 1 1/2 circuit-breaker
layout
• Differential protection/distance protection MHO for overhead line, grounded systems with 1 1/2 circuit-
breaker layout (in preparation)
To load the application templates to the device, the following minimum hardware configuration requirements
must be met:
Application Template Hardware Configuration Minimum Requirement
DIFF/DIS Basis 7 BI, 8 BO, 4 I, 4 V
DIFF/DIS overhead line, grounded systems (in prepa-
ration)
DIFF/DIS MHO, overhead line, grounded systems (in
preparation)
DIFF/DIS Overhead line, grounded systems 1 1/2 15 BI, 12 BO, 8 I, 8 V
circuit-breaker layout
DIFF/DIS MHO, overhead line, grounded systems, 1
1/2 line (in preparation)
The following table shows the functional scope and the required function points of the application templates
for device 7SL86:
Table 4-3 Functional Scope of the Application Template for the Device 7SL86
DIFF/DIS Basis
Grounded Systems
MHO DIFF/DIS,
Overhead Line, Grounded Systems
DIFF/DIS Overhead Line, Grounded
Systems 1 1/2 Circuit-Breaker Layout
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 185
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Applications
4.4 Application Templates and Functional Scope for the Device 7SL86
DIFF/DIS Basis
Grounded Systems
MHO DIFF/DIS,
Overhead Line, Grounded Systems
DIFF/DIS Overhead Line, Grounded
Systems 1 1/2 Circuit-Breaker Layout
186 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Applications
4.4 Application Templates and Functional Scope for the Device 7SL86
DIFF/DIS Basis
Grounded Systems
MHO DIFF/DIS,
Overhead Line, Grounded Systems
DIFF/DIS Overhead Line, Grounded
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 187
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Applications
4.4 Application Templates and Functional Scope for the Device 7SL86
Grounded Systems
MHO DIFF/DIS,
Overhead Line, Grounded Systems
DIFF/DIS Overhead Line, Grounded
Systems 1 1/2 Circuit-Breaker Layout
188 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Applications
4.5 Application Template and Functional Scope for the Device 7SJ86
4.5 Application Template and Functional Scope for the Device 7SJ86
Application templates are available in DIGSI 5 for the applications of device 7SJ86. The application templates
contain the basic configurations, required functions, and default settings.
The following application templates are available for device 7SJ86 in the Global DIGSI 5 library:
• Non-directional time-overcurrent protection
• Directional time-overcurrent protection
To load the application templates to the device, the following minimum hardware configuration requirements
must be met:
Application Template Hardware Configuration Minimum Requirement
Non-directional time-overcurrent protection 6 BI, 2 BO, 4 I, 4 V
Directional time-overcurrent protection 6 BI, 2 BO, 4 I, 4 V
The following table shows the functional scope and the required function points of the application templates
for device 7SJ86:
Table 4-4 Functional Scope of the Application Template for the Device 7SJ86
7SJ86
Overcurrent Protection
Directional Time-
Overcurrent Protection
ANSI Function Abbr.
Non-Directional Time-
Protection functions for 3-pole 3-pole x x x
tripping
Hardware quantity structure I/O x x x
expandable
25 Synchrocheck, synchronizing Sync x
function
27 Undervoltage protection, 3-phase V< x
27 Undervoltage protection, positive- V1< x
sequence system
32, 37 Power protection active/reactive P<>, Q<> x
power
38 Temperature supervision θ> x
46 Negative-sequence overcurrent I2>, ∠ x
protection with direction (V2/I2)
49 Thermal overload protection θ, I2t x
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection, phases I> x x x
50N/51N Overcurrent protection, ground IN> x x x
TD
50HS Instantaneous high-current trip- I>>> x
ping
50Ns/ Sensitive ground-current protec- INs> x
51Ns tion for systems with resonant or
isolated neutral
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection x
59 Overvoltage protection, 3-phase V> x
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 189
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Applications
4.5 Application Template and Functional Scope for the Device 7SJ86
7SJ86
Overcurrent Protection
Directional Time-
Overcurrent Protection
ANSI Function Abbr.
Non-Directional Time-
59 Overvoltage protection, positive- V1> x
sequence system
59 Overvoltage protection, V1comp> x
compounding
59 Overvoltage protection, negative- V2> x
sequence system
59N Overvoltage protection, zero- V0> x
sequence system
67 Directional time-overcurrent I>, ∠ (V,I) x x
protection, phases
67N Directional overcurrent protection x x
for ground faults in grounded
systems
67Ns Dir. sensitive ground-fault detec- INs>, ∠ x
tion for systems with resonant or (V,I)
isolated neutral
67Ns Transient ground-fault function for W0p, tr> x
systems with resonant or isolated
neutral
74TC Trip-circuit Monitoring x
79 Automatic reclosing AREC x
81O Overfrequency protection f> x
81U Underfrequency protection f< x
81R Frequency change protection df/dt x
85/67N Teleprotection for directional x
ground-fault protection
86 Lockout x
87N T Ground-fault differential protection ΔIN x
FL Fault locator, single-ended FL-one x
PMU Synchrophasor measurement PMU x
Measured values, standard x x x
Measured values, extended: Min, x
Max, Avg (function points per
type)
Switching statistic values x x x
CFC standard x x x
CFC arithmetic x
CFC switching sequences x
Inrush-current detection x x x
External trip initiation x
Fault recording of analog and x x x
binary signals
Supervision x x x
190 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Applications
4.5 Application Template and Functional Scope for the Device 7SJ86
7SJ86
Overcurrent Protection
Directional Time-
Overcurrent Protection
ANSI Function Abbr.
Non-Directional Time-
Protection interface, serial x x x
Circuit breaker x x x
Circuit-breaker control x
Circuit-breaker status x
Disconnector x
Disconnector status x
27Q Undervoltage-controlled reactive Q>/V< x
power protection (27/Q)
37 Undercurrent I< x
67Ns Sensitive ground-fault detection x
for systems with resonant or
isolated neutral according to the
admittance methods
51V Voltage-dependent overcurrent t = f(I,V) x
protection
Intermittent ground-fault protec- IIE> x
tion
Circuit-breaker supervision #Ix, I2t, 2P x
Function-point class: 0 50
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 191
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
192 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
5 Function-Group Types
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 193
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
5.1.1 Overview
In the Line function group, all of the functions that are necessary for protecting and monitoring a line can be
used. The Line function group also contains the measuring functions (for more information, see chapter 9).
You will find the Line function group under each device type in the function library in DIGSI 5. The Line func-
tion group contains all of the protection and supervision functions that you can use for this device type..
These functions are described in the chapter Protection and automation functions. The following diagram
shows the functional scope of the Line function group using the example of the 7SL86 device.
[scbibofg-020311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-1 Line Function Group - Functional Scope for Device Type 7SL86
For more information about the embedding of the functions in the device, please refer to Chapter 2. For infor-
mation about the overall functional scope of the application templates for the various device types, please
refer to Chapter 4.
• Process monitor
194 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
[dwfgline-160812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• Protection communication
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 195
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
i
NOTE
You can connect the 3-phase phase current interface to at most two 3-phase current measuring
points (for example, for 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layouts).
The other interfaces can only be connected to one measuring point each!
• Start of the Automatic reclosing function (AREC if available in the circuit-breaker function group)
through the protection functions of the connected Line protection function group
Besides the general allocation of the Line protection function group to the circuit-breaker function groups, you
can also configure the interface for certain functionalities in detail. Configure the details in DIGSI 5 using the
Circuit-breaker interaction editor in the Line function group.
In the detail configuration of the interface, you define:
• Which operate indications of the protection functions go into the generation of the trip command
• Which protection functions start the automatic reclosing function
196 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
Line Data
The line data characterizes the line that is to be protected. The line data applies for all of the functions in
theLine function group.
Process Monitor
The process monitor is always present in the Line function group and cannot be removed. The process
monitor provides the following information in the Line function group:
• Current-flow criterion:
Detection of an open/closed line based on the flow of minimum current
• Closure detection:
Detection of closure of the line
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 197
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
• Energy
• Mean values
With the P, Q sign setting, you can invert the sign of these operational measured values such that a power
flow from the line to the busbar is displayed positively.
More information can be found in Chapter 9.1 Overview of Functions .
Output Logic
The output logic treats the pick up and operate indications of the protection and supervision functions in the
function group separately, in either a pickup logic or an output logic. The pickup and output logic generate the
overarching indications (group indications) of the function group. These group indications are transferred via
the Protection information interface to the Circuit breaker function group and are processed further there.
The pickup indications of the protection and supervision functions in the Line function group are combined
phase-segregated and output as a group indication.
198 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
[loanrlin-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The operate indications from the protection functions of the Line function group always result in 3-pole trip-
ping of the device.
[loauslin-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Line Data
The following application and setting instructions apply for the line data. The line data are configured in the
Line function group and apply for all functions in the function group.
i
NOTE
Specify the line data for your specific application!
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 199
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
With the Rated voltage parameter, you can set the primary rated voltage for the line to be protected. The
Rated voltage parameter is relevant for the Differential-protection, Distance-protection, and Voltage-
protection functions. The Rated voltage set here is the reference value for the percentage-measured
values and setting values made in percentages.
If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change only the setting value of the parameter via
DIGSI 5 and not directly on the device. If you change the setting value directly on the device, then the
IEC 61850 configuration of the metered values can be faulty.
EXAMPLE
110-kV single-conductor liquid-filled cable 3 · 185 mm2 Cu with the data:
co = cgnd = 0.27 μF/km
The setting value for the parameters C1 covering and C0 covering is 0.27 μF/km.
200 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
[folwinkl-050509-01.tif, 1, en_US]
where:
RL Resistance of the line to be protected
XL Reactance of the line to be protected
EXAMPLE
110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 with the data
R´1 = 0.19 Ω/km
X´1 = 0.42 Ω/km
You calculate the setting value for the line angle as follows:
[folwibsp-050912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Parameter: Kr and Kx
i
NOTE
The visibility of the Kr and Kx parameters depend on the selected setting format of the residual compen-
sation factors. The parameters Kr and Kx only become visible after you have set the parameter Set.
format residu. comp. = Kr, Kx for the device.
The Kr and Kx parameters are used to set the residual compensation factors as scalar values. The Kr and
Kx parameters are relevant for the Distance-protection and Fault-location functions.
i
NOTE
You can overwrite the residual compensation factors specified here in the distance-protection zones with
specific parameters for each zone.
Calculate the setting values for the parameters Kr and Kx from the line data as follows:
Resistance ratio Reactance ratio
where:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 201
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
This data can either be used for the entire line or as length-related values, since the quotients are length-
independent. You can calculate the data both from the primary values and from the secondary values.
EXAMPLE
110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 with the data:
R1/s 0.19 Ω/km positive-sequence system resistance
X1/s 0.42 Ω/km positive-sequence system reactance
R0/s 0.53 Ω/km zero-sequence system resistance
X0/s 1.19 Ω/km zero-sequence system reactance
s Line length
You receive the following setting values for the parameters Kr and Kx:
[forerlx1-050912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
i
NOTE
The visibility of the K0 and Angle (K0) parameters depend on the selected setting format of the residual
compensation factors. The parameters K0 and Angle (K0) only become visible after you have set the
parameter Set. format residu. comp. = K0 for the device.
The K0 and Angle (K0) parameters are used to set the complex residual compensation factor. The K0 and
Angle (K0) parameters are relevant for the Distance-protection and Fault-location functions.
i
NOTE
You can overwrite the residual compensation factors specified here in the distance-protection zones with
local parameters for each zone.
Make sure that the line angle is set correctly because the device needs the line angle for calculation of the
compensation components from the K0 factor. The complex residual compensation factor is defined by the
value and the angle. You can calculate the complex residual compensation factor from the line data as
follows:
[foforlk0-180912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
202 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
where:
Z0 (Complex) zero-sequence impedance
Z1 (Complex) positive-sequence impedance
This data can either be used for the entire line or as length-related values, since the quotients are length-
independent. The data can be calculated both from the primary values and from the secondary values.
For overhead lines, you can use the values for the calculation because the angles of the zero-sequence
system and the positive-sequence system differ only slightly. For cables, however, significant angular differ-
ences can occur, as the following example illustrates.
EXAMPLE
110-kV single-phase liquid-filled cable 3 · 185 mm2 Cu with the data:
Z1/s 0.408 · ej73° Ω/km positive-sequence impedance
Z0/s 0.632 · ej18.4° Ω/km zero-sequence impedance
s Line length
[fofork02-180912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fofork03-180912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fofork04-180912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
When determining the angle, take note of the quadrant of the result. The following table lists the quadrants
and the angle range obtained from the operational signs of the real and imaginary parts of K0.
Real Part Imaginary Part Tan Phi (K0) Quadrant/Range Calculation Method
+ + + I 0° to 90° arc tan (|Im| / |Re|)
+ - - IV -90° to 0° –arc tan (|Im| / |Re|)
- - + III -90° to -180° arc tan (|Im| / |Re|) –180°
- + - II +90° to +180° –arc tan (|Im| / |Re|) +180°
In this example, the following setting value for the Angle (K0) parameter is obtained:
[fofork05-050509-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 203
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
The KmR and KmX parameters are used to set the coupling impedance for parallel-line compensation. The
KmR parameter (= R0m/3RL) is used to set the coupling resistance. The KmX parameter (= X0m/3XL) is used
to set the coupling reactance. The KmR and KmX parameters are only relevant for the Distance-protection
function.
Parameter: Gnd.curr.ratio(MutComp)
[dwparkomrw-161013, 1, en_US]
Parallel-line compensation is only carried out if the ground current of the line to be protected (Ignd) is greater
than the ground current of the parallel line (IgndP) evaluated with the parameter
Gnd.curr.ratio(MutComp).
Siemens recommends retaining the default setting Gnd.curr.ratio(MutComp) = 85 %. In highly unbal-
anced system conditions and if the coupling factor is very small (XM/XL less than 0.4), a smaller value may
be advisable.
204 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
The CT saturation threshold parameter allows you to set the current threshold for the saturation
detection. If the value that is set is exceeded, the device switchovers the method of measurement for
distance measurement. Calculate the setting value for the parameter CT saturation threshold
according to the following rule of thumb:
[fo1isaet-041210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
where:
i
NOTE
The parameter CT saturation threshold only becomes visible when you have set the parameter CT
saturation detection = yes.
i
NOTE
The parameter Series capacit. reactance only becomes visible when you have set the parameter
Series compensation = yes.
The Series capacit. reactance parameter is used to define the positive-sequence system reactance
of the series capacitor. The reactance of the series capacitor is calculated as follows from the capacitance of
the capacitor (cs):
[foforcse-060509-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The Series capacit. reactance parameter is only relevant for the Directional ground-fault protec-
tion function.
Parameter: P, Q sign
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 205
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
protected object (for example, as seen by the consumer). With the P, Q sign setting, you can invert the
sign for these components. This inversion does not influence any protection function.
[dwpro3p1-050612-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The following figure shows the relationships of the individual function blocks.
206 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
[lopro3po-171012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• The corresponding phase current (for example, I A) falls below 10 % of the phase current when the trip
command arrives. If the current does not drop until after a delay due to current transformer influences,
an open pole can therefore be detected quickly even after a high-current fault on the line.
With the Current thresh. CB open parameter, you define the minimum current as the criterion for a
deactivated line. The parameter lies in the Circuit-breaker function group. It acts both in the Circuit-breaker
function group, for example circuit-breaker position recognition, and also for the process monitor in the
Protection-function group.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 207
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
Logic
[loprolsz-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-8 Logic Diagram of the Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected-Object Function Block
The Circuit-breaker position recognition function block in the Switch function group provides the circuit-
breaker condition (CB condition indication). If a protected object is supplied via 2 circuit breakers (CBs),
for example 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout, then the switch position of the protected object must be determined
with the aid of both circuit breakers. In this case, the circuit-breaker condition for the Protected object function
block performs linking of the individual CB conditions. The connection provides the CB-pos. protected
object indication to the other function blocks of the process monitor and other functions, for example, Trip
in the event of weak infeed and Echo function for teleprotection scheme) within the same function
group.
If one of the following 2 conditions is met, the CB status protected object indication assumes the
Open state:
• All connected circuit breakers signal the Open state.
Logic
The closure detection enables the immediate tripping of selected protection functions or protection stages
when switching to short circuit or the reduction of the responsivity. The closure detection determines whether
the protected object is switched on.
208 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
[loproein-121012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
For an applied binary input signal Detected (from Manual close function block), the indication Closure is
always active. The indication Closure can also be activated via the measurand. In addition the protected
object must be switched off for at least the time Min. time feeder open.
This time is started as follows depending on the Operating mode parameter:
• For parameter Operating mode = I open and V open
If the current-flow criterion and the voltage criterion are detected open-circuited.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 209
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
210 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
Logic
[loproure-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If you want to test closure detection or an open-pole detector via a voltage, you need a voltage transformer
installed on the line side and electrical power systems with a grounded neutral point. In this case, add the
Voltage criterion function block to the process monitor.
If the voltage transformers are installed on the busbar side or if there is no voltage connected, you must not
use the voltage criterion to detect a deactivated phase.
With the (_:101) Threshold U open parameter, you define the leakage voltage as the criterion for a
deactivated line. If the phase-to-ground voltage falls below the value of the Threshold U open parameter,
the V open signal is generated. The function stabilizes the signal with a hysteresis and a delay of the rising
edge of the signal. The falling edge of the signal is forwarded without delay.
i
NOTE
The Threshold U open parameter is available only when the optional Voltage criterion function block
is used. Use this parameter only with a voltage transformer installed on the line side and in electrical
power systems with a grounded neutral point.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 211
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
Logic
[loprocls-180912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-11 Logic Diagram of the Cold-Load Pickup Detection Function Block
The Cold-load pickup detection function block detects that a specific time has been exceeded after deacti-
vation of the line or protected object. If you want to connect the protected object again, you must note that an
increased load-current requirement exists for a limited time after connection. This results from the nature of
the load.
The Cold-load pickup detection function block ensures that different parameters are used for an adjustable
time after connection. For example, for the time of the Min. CB-open time parameter, you can increase
the threshold value of a protection function or you can select a special characteristic curve.
If the Cold-load pickup detection function block detects an open feeder and the set time of the Min. CB-
open time parameter has expired, the indication >Activate cold-load is generated.
With the >Activate cold-load indication, you can activate a parameter set of the Cold-load pickup
function. Via the binary input signal >Activate cold-load, you can also activate the >Activate cold-
load indication directly.
If the Cold-load pickup detection function block detects closure and the corresponding load current, it starts
the time set in the Dropout delay CB closed parameter. The >Activate cold-load indication and
the activated parameter set are deactivated after this time has elapsed.
212 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
If, for the time set in the Dropout delay curr.crit. parameter, the maximum phase current falls below
the threshold value Dropout threshold current, the parameter set for the Cold-load pickup detection
function block is also deactivated. As a result, if the load current is very low, the action time Dropout delay
curr.crit. of the >Activate cold-load indication can be shortened.
i
NOTE
The settings and indications described in this chapter are only available when using the optional Cold-
load pickup detection function block.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 213
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
5.1.4.12 Settings
5.1.5 Settings
214 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 215
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
216 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type 3-Phase Voltage/Current
5.2.1 Overview
All functions for the protection and supervision of a protected object or equipment allowing 3-phase current
and voltage measurement can be used in the function group Voltage/current 3-phase. The function group
also contains the operational measurement for the protected object or equipment (on this topic, see chapter
9).
You will find the Voltage/current 3-phase function group under each device type in the function library in
DIGSI 5. You will find all protection and supervision functions that you can use for this function-group type in
the function group Voltage/current 3-phase. These functions are described in the chapter Protection and
automation functions.
You will find additional information on embedding functions in the device in chapter 2. You will find the entire
function scope of the application templates for the various device types in chapter 4.
• Process monitor
[dwfgui3p-301112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 217
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type 3-Phase Voltage/Current
• Starting the Automatic reclosing function (AREC, if available in the circuit-breaker function group)
through the protection functions of the connected protection function group
Besides the general allocation of the protection function group to the circuit-breaker function groups, you can
also configure the interface for certain functionalities in detail. Configure the details in DIGSI 5 using the
Circuit-breaker interaction editor in the protection function group.
In the detail configuration of the interface, you define:
• Which operate indications of the protection functions go into the generation of the trip command
• Which protection functions start the automatic reclosing function
218 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type 3-Phase Voltage/Current
If an application template is used, the function groups are already connected to each other, because this
connection is absolutely essential to ensure proper operation. You can modify the connection in DIGSI 5 via
the Function-group connections Editor.
You can find more detailed information in Chapter 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device .
If the connection is missing, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency.
Equipment Data
The rated voltage and rated current as well as the neutral-point treatment of the object or the equipment are
defined here. These data apply to all functions in the Voltage/current 3-phase function group.
Process Monitor
The process monitor is always present in the Voltage/current 3-phase function group and cannot be
removed.
The process monitor provides the following information in the Voltage/current 3-phase function group:
• Current-flow criterion:
Detection of an open/activated protected object/equipment based on the flow of leakage current
• Closure detection:
Detection of the switching on of the protected object/equipment
Table 5-2 Operational Measured Values of the Voltage/Current 3-Phase Function Group
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 219
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type 3-Phase Voltage/Current
The operational measured values are explained in more detail in chapter 9.3 Operational Measured Values .
• Energy
• Average values
With the P, Q sign setting, you can invert the sign of these operational measured values such that a power
flow from the line to the busbar is displayed positively.
More information can be found in Chapter 9.1 Overview of Functions .
Output Logic
The output logic treats the pickup and trip signals of the protection and supervision functions that are avail-
able in the function group separately, in a pickup logic and a trip logic, respectively. The pickup and trip logic
generate the overreaching indications (group indications) of the function group. These group indications are
transferred via the Protection information interface to the Circuit-breaker function group and are
processed further there.
The pickup signals of the protection and supervision functions in the Voltage/current 3-phase function group
are combined in a phase-selective manner and output as a group indication.
220 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type 3-Phase Voltage/Current
[loanrlin-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-13 Creation of the Pickup Indication of the Voltage/Current 3-Phase Function Group
The trip signals from the protection and supervision functions of the Voltage/current 3-phase function group
always result in 3-pole tripping of the device.
[loauslin-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-14 Creation of the Operate Indication of the Voltage/Current 3-Phase Function Group
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 221
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type 3-Phase Voltage/Current
If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change only the setting value of the parameter via
DIGSI 5 and not directly on the device. If you change the setting value directly on the device, then the
IEC 61850 configuration of the metered values can be faulty.
Parameter: P, Q sign
i
NOTE
If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change the setting value of the parameter only
via DIGSI 5 and not directly on the device. If you change the setting value directly on the device, then the
IEC 61850 configuration of the metered values can be faulty.
The settings listed here are used primarily for understanding during configuration of the function groups. They
are calculated on the basis of other settings and cannot be directly changed.
Adr. Parameter C Range of Values Default Setting
Network data
_:91:103 General:rated apparent 0.20 MVA to 5000.00 MVA 692.82 MVA
power
i
NOTE
You can find more detailed information on the Process monitor in Chapter 5.1.4.1 Overview of Functions .
5.2.5 Settings
222 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type 3-Phase Voltage/Current
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 223
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type 3-Phase Voltage/Current
• Current-flow criterion
• Circuit-breaker condition
• Closure detection
[dwpro3pt-061212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The following figure shows the relationships of the individual function blocks.
[lopro3pt-171012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• The corresponding phase current (for example, I A) falls below 10 % of the phase current when the trip
command arrives. If the current does not drop until after a delay due to current transformer influences,
an open pole can therefore be detected quickly even after a high-current fault on the line.
With the Current thresh. CB open parameter, you define the minimum current as the criterion for a
deactivated line. The parameter lies in the Circuit-breaker function group. It acts both in the Circuit-breaker
function group, for example circuit-breaker position recognition, and also for the process monitor in the
Protection-function group.
224 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type 3-Phase Voltage/Current
Logic
[loprolsz-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-17 Logic Diagram of the Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected-Object Function Block
The Circuit-breaker position recognition function block in the Switch function group provides the circuit-
breaker condition (CB condition indication). If a protected object is supplied via 2 circuit breakers (CBs),
for example 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout, then the switch position of the protected object must be determined
with the aid of both circuit breakers. In this case, the circuit-breaker condition for the Protected object function
block performs linking of the individual CB conditions. The connection provides the CB-pos. protected
object indication to the other function blocks of the process monitor and other functions, for example, Trip
in the event of weak infeed and Echo function for teleprotection scheme) within the same function
group.
If one of the following 2 conditions is met, the CB status protected object indication assumes the
Open state:
• All connected circuit breakers signal the Open state.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 225
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type 3-Phase Voltage/Current
Logic
[loein6md-171012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
For an applied binary input signal Detected (from Manual close function block), the indication Closure is
active.
226 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type 3-Phase Voltage/Current
Logic
[loprocls-180912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-19 Logic Diagram of the Cold-Load Pickup Detection Function Block
The Cold-load pickup detection function block detects that a specific time has been exceeded after deacti-
vation of the line or protected object. If you want to connect the protected object again, you must note that an
increased load-current requirement exists for a limited time after connection. This results from the nature of
the load.
The Cold-load pickup detection function block ensures that different parameters are used for an adjustable
time after connection. For example, for the time of the Min. CB-open time parameter, you can increase
the threshold value of a protection function or you can select a special characteristic curve.
If the Cold-load pickup detection function block detects an open feeder and the set time of the Min. CB-
open time parameter has expired, the indication >Activate cold-load is generated.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 227
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type 3-Phase Voltage/Current
With the >Activate cold-load indication, you can activate a parameter set of the Cold-load pickup
function. Via the binary input signal >Activate cold-load, you can also activate the >Activate cold-
load indication directly.
If the Cold-load pickup detection function block detects closure and the corresponding load current, it starts
the time set in the Dropout delay CB closed parameter. The >Activate cold-load indication and
the activated parameter set are deactivated after this time has elapsed.
If, for the time set in the Dropout delay curr.crit. parameter, the maximum phase current falls below
the threshold value Dropout threshold current, the parameter set for the Cold-load pickup detection
function block is also deactivated. As a result, if the load current is very low, the action time Dropout delay
curr.crit. of the >Activate cold-load indication can be shortened.
i
NOTE
The settings and indications described in this chapter are only available when using the optional Cold-
load pickup detection function block.
228 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type 3-Phase Voltage/Current
5.2.7.10 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 229
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.3 Function-Group Type 1-Phase Voltage/Current
5.3.1 Overview
In the Voltage/current 1-phase function group, all functions can be used for protecting and for monitoring a
protected object or equipment which allows a 1-phase current and voltage measurement. The function group
also contains the operational measurement for the protected object or equipment (on this topic, see chapter
9).
The Voltage/current 1-phase function group has interfaces to the measuring points and the Circuit-breaker
function group.
[dw1spstr-301112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[sc1stsp1-130912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-21 Connecting Measuring Points to the Voltage/Current 1-Phase Function Group
If you add functions to the Voltage/current 1-phase function group, these are connected to the measuring
point automatically.
The measurands from the 1-phase current system are supplied via the I 1-ph interface. The measurands
from the 1-phase voltage system are supplied via the V 1-ph interface. All values that can be calculated
from the measurands are also provided via these interfaces.
You can connect multiple measuring points with the V 1-ph interface. You can find more information in
chapter 5.8.1 Overview of Functions.
230 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.3 Function-Group Type 1-Phase Voltage/Current
[sc1stspc-130912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-22 Connecting Voltage/Current 1-Phase Function Group with Circuit-Breaker Function Group
Operational Measurement
The operational measurement is always present in the Voltage/current 1-phase function group and cannot
be deleted.
The following table shows the operational measured values of the Voltage/current 1-phase function group:
Table 5-3 Operational Measured Values of the Voltage/Current 1-Phase Function Group
i
NOTE
Prior to creation of the protection functions in the function group, these functions should first be connected
to the appropriate Circuit-breaker function group.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 231
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.3 Function-Group Type 1-Phase Voltage/Current
The settings listed here are used primarily for understanding during configuration of the function groups. They
are calculated on the basis of other settings and cannot be directly changed.
Addr. Parameter C Range of Values Default Setting
Rated values
_:9421:104 General: Rated current 1 A to 100000 A 1000 A
_:9421:105 General: Rated voltage 0.20 kV to 1200.00 kV 400.00 kV
Network data
_:91:103 General:rated apparent 0.20 MVA to 5000.00 MVA 692.82 MVA
power
_:91:214 General:M I-1ph uses 0 to 100 0
measuring point ID
_:91:223 General: Scale factor M 0.010 to 100.000 0.000
I-1ph
5.3.5 Settings
232 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.4 Function-Group Type 3-Phase Voltage
5.4.1 Overview
In the Voltage 3-phase function group, all functions can be used for protecting and for monitoring a protected
object or equipment which allows a 3-phase voltage measurement. The function group also contains the
operational measurement for the protected object or equipment (on this topic, see chapter 9). Applicable
functions are, for example, Voltage protection or Frequency protection.
The Voltage 3-phase function group has interfaces to the measuring points and the Circuit-breaker function
group.
[dw3spann-300913, 1, en_US]
[sc3span1-130912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-24 Connecting Measuring Points to the Voltage 3-Phase Function Group
If you add functions to the Voltage 3-phase function group, these are connected to the measuring point auto-
matically.
You can connect multiple measuring points with this interface. You can find more information in Chapter
5.8.1 Overview of Functions.
The measurands from the 3-phase voltage system are supplied via the V 3-ph interface. Depending on the
type of transformer connections, these are, for instance, VA, VB, VC, Ve. All values that can be calculated from
the measurands are also provided via this interface.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 233
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.4 Function-Group Type 3-Phase Voltage
[sc3span2-301112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-25 Connecting Voltage 3-Phase Function Group with Circuit-Breaker Function Group
Table 5-4 Operational Measured Values of the Voltage 3-Phase Function Group
i
NOTE
Prior to creation of the protection functions in the function group, these functions should first be connected
to the appropriate Circuit-breaker function group.
5.4.4 Settings
234 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.4 Function-Group Type 3-Phase Voltage
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 235
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
5.5.1 Overview
The Circuit-breaker function group combines all the user functions that relate to a circuit breaker.
You will find the Circuit-breaker function group under each device type in the function library in DIGSI 5. The
Circuit-breaker function group contains all of the protection, control, and supervision functions that you can
use for this device type. The following figure shows, for example, the functional scope of the Circuit-breaker
function group.
[scfgleis-261112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Besides the user functions, the Circuit-breaker function group contains certain functionalities that are essen-
tial for general purposes and therefore cannot be loaded or deleted:
• Trip logic
• Mapping the physical circuit breaker
• General settings
The following figure shows the structure of the Circuit-Breaker function group. The individual function blocks
in the image are described in the following chapters.
236 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
[dwfgstru-080812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• Voltage
The measurands of the 3-phase voltage system or 1-phase voltage are supplied via this interface.
Depending on the connection type of the transformers, in the 3-phase voltage system these are for
example, VA, VB, VC of the line or feeder.
The connection to the corresponding measuring point is necessary only if a user function that needs the
measurand of the 3-phase voltage system is used, for example, to make use of the Synchronization or
Automatic reclosing function.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 237
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
238 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
[loausbef-140113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 239
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
Trip-Command Termination
[lobefe3p-140113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• with I<
240 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
5.5.4.3 Settings
5.5.5.1 Overview
The Circuit-breaker function block represents the physical switch in the SIPROTEC 5 device.
The basic tasks of this function block are the operation of the circuit breaker and the acquisition of the circuit-
breaker auxiliary contacts and other circuit-breaker information.
The Circuit-breaker function block provides information about:
• Number of switching cycles
• Breaking current, breaking voltage, and breaking frequency
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 241
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
To operate the circuit breaker, the Circuit-breaker function block provides the output signals that must be
routed to the corresponding binary outputs of the device (see Table 5-5).
[loausssc-090211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
242 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
These signals are of the Double-point indication (DPC) type. A double-point indication can be routed to
2 binary inputs so that the open and closed circuit-breaker switch positions can be reliably acquired.
[loerfass-101210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The signals must be routed to the binary input that is with the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts. The open and
closed signals do not necessarily have to be routed in parallel. The advantage of parallel routing is that it can
be used to determine an intermediate or disturbed position. On the other hand, this is not possible if only one
signal is routed.
In the monitoring direction, the position signals generate the following information when the open and closed
positions are acquired (see following table). This information is further processed by the Circuit-breaker
position recognition and Control function blocks.
Information Type Description
Off SPS Circuit-breaker switch position is opened.
On SPS Circuit-breaker switch position is closed.
Intermediate position SPS Circuit-breaker switch position is in intermediate position.
Disturbed position SPS Circuit-breaker switch position is in disturbed position.
Not selected SPS The circuit breaker is not selected for a control operation.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 243
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
Definitive Tripping
Definitive tripping is always pending whenever the Automatic reclosing (AREC) function does not carry out
any reclosing after tripping. It follows that this is the case whenever an automatic reclosing is not present or
the AREC has been switched off.
[lounterd-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
244 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
[loausloe-081210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[lostatis-140113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• The device can execute 3-pole closing (via AREC or via the control).
[loansteu-230311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 245
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
By routing the Trip/open cmd. signals to 1 or 2 binary outputs, you can carry out 1, 1.5, and 2-pole activa-
tions of the circuit breaker. You will find a detailed description of this in 7.2.2.3 Connection Variants of the
Circuit Breaker .
i
NOTE
Do not confuse these 1-pole, 1.5-pole, and 2-pole activations of the circuit breaker with 1-pole or 3-pole
tripping of the circuit breaker.
[loauswer-230311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-36 Recommended Analysis of the Circuit-Breaker Switch Position when Used as a Protection
and Control Device
The following diagram shows the recommended routing, in which H stands for active with voltage.
[scpolg3p-230311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-37 Routing for Acquisition of the Circuit-Breaker Switch Position via 2 Auxiliary Contacts
The device can also function without the analysis from the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts, that is, routing of
the auxiliary contacts is not absolutely necessary. However, this is a requirement for control functions.
246 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
! CAUTION
Do not set a time that is too short.
If you set a time that is too short, there is a danger that the device contacts will interrupt the
control circuit. If this happens, the device contacts will burn out.
² Set a time that is long enough to ensure that the circuit breaker reliably reaches its final position
(open or closed) after a control operation.
[loschalt-081210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
5.5.6.1 Overview
This function block calculates the position of the circuit breaker from the evaluation of the auxiliary contacts
and the current flow.
This information is needed in the following protection-related additional functions:
• Trip logic (see 5.5.4.1 Function Description)
• Detection of manual closing (see 5.5.7.1 Function Description)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 247
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
[lozust3p-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Based on the link between the information from the auxiliary contacts and the current flow, the circuit breaker
can assume the following positions:
Circuit-Breaker Condi- Description
tion
Open The circuit-breaker pole is detected unambiguously as open according to both
criteria.
Closed The circuit-breaker pole is detected unambiguously as closed according to both
criteria.
Possibly open, possibly These conditions can occur if the information is incomplete due to the routing of
closed the auxiliary contacts and the condition can no longer be determined reliably.
These uncertain conditions are evaluated differently by certain functions.
Opening This is a dynamically occurring condition that results when, while a trip command
is active and the auxiliary contact is still closed, the current is detected to have
fallen below the threshold value because the current-flow criterion takes effect
faster than the auxiliary contact can open.
248 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
[lohand3p-101210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[losteuer-150113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-41 Connection of the Input Signal to the Control Circuit of the Circuit-Breaker Closing Coil
Every closure of the circuit breaker is recorded in the process. Therefore, detection is suppressed in the
event of a close command by the internal AREC function of the device.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 249
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
If external close commands are possible (actuation of the circuit breaker by other devices), which are not
intended to prompt detection of a manual closure (for example, with an external reclosing device), this can be
ensured in 2 ways:
• The input signal is connected in such a way that it is not activated in the event of external close
commands.
• The external close command is connected to the blocking input >Block manual close for manual
closure detection.
5.5.7.3 Settings
5.5.8 Settings
250 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 251
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
252 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
5.6.1 Overview
The Analog units function group is used to map analog units and communicate with them. Analog units are
external devices, such as RTD units, or analog plug-in modules, such as measuring-transducer modules.
You will find the Analog units function group for many device types in the Global DIGSI 5 library.
[sc20maee-290113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the device has a measuring transducer, it is automatically mapped in the Analog units function group. If
one or more RTD units are connected to the device, you have to load one or more RTD unit Ether. or RTD
unit serial functions from the Global DIGSI library in order to map the RTD units.
The following figure shows the structure of the function group.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 253
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[dwstrthe-290113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The Analog units function group has interfaces to protection function groups. The Analog units function
group provides measured temperature values that come from an external RTD unit. These measured temper-
ature values are available for all protection function groups in which a temperature monitoring function works.
The RTD unit Ether. function is not preconfigured by the manufacturer. A maximum of 4 function instances
can work simultaneously.
The RTD unit serial function is set up structurally exactly in the same manner as the RTD unit Ether. func-
tion.
5.6.3.1 Overview
The function 20-mA unit Ether.:
• Communicates in series with a 20-mA unit via the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP) and records the values
measured by the 20-mA unit
• Transforms the measured 20-mA values into slowly changing process tags such as temperature or gas
pressure
254 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
• Makes the recorded process tags available to CFC, GOOSE, protocols and the device display
[dwstrfn2-150113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 255
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
Logic
[lo20mtcp-150113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Error Responses
The following table lists the conditions under which the Health status transitions to the Alarm or Warning
state.
256 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
The Failure signal is set as soon as one of the channel function blocks reports a failure.
Parameter: Port
Parameter: IP address
Logic
[lo20mcha-160113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 257
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
(1) If the setting Range active is set to test , the setting Transformation ratio is not
displayed.
(2) If the setting Range active is set to false, the settings Upper limit, Transformation
ratio upper limit, Lower limit and Transformation ratio are not displayed.
Measured-Value Calculation
The function 20-mA channel processes a single 20-mA current signal supplied by the 20-mA unit of the
corresponding channel. The 20-mA current measured value is converted into the correct physical quantities
such as temperature or pressure. In each 20-mA functional unit (Ether. and serial) there are always 12 of the
20-mA channel function blocks, even if fewer channels are connected with the 20-mA unit. The calculated
values are available for further processing via CFC, GOOSE, protocols, and the display image.
Measured-Value Processing
The 20-mA unit typically transmits a value which represents a physical quantity, such as a temperature or a
pressure. Therefore, the device must contain a characteristic curve that maps the physical quantity to the 20-
mA value. If you do not activate the Range active setting (no x in the check box), the function operates
over the range 0 mA to 20 mA. If a value smaller than 0 mA or greater than 20 mA is active at the input of the
20-mA unit, the measured value is identified as invalid. The setting of the range for the scaled value goes
from a usable range of 0 mA to 20 mA. The following figure shows an example.
[sckanumw-290113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In this example, the measured value 0 mA means a temperature of 0 °C and the measured value 20 mA
means a temperature of 100 °C. So enter Unit = °C and as Conversion factor = 100. The resolution
(decimal place) of the temperature value can be chosen; for a decimal place, select Resolution = 0.1.
[dwknges3-020513-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If you activate the Range active setting, then 4 additional settings Upper limit, Lower limit, Upper
limit conv. factor, and Lower limit conv. factor appear. The settings Upper limit and
Lower limit indicate the range of the input current in mA. The setting Upper limit conv. factor is
258 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
the calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the value in the Upper limit setting. The
setting Lower limit conv. factor is the calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to
the value in the Lower limit setting. The setting of the range for the scaled value corresponds to the
useable range between Lower limit and Upper limit (refer to the following figure).
[sckanumf-290113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[dwknges2-020513-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In this example, the Range active setting is selected. The setting Upper limit is at 20 mA, the setting
Lower limit is at 4 mA. The setting Upper limit conv. factor is at 55 and the setting Lower
limit conv. factor is at -33. If the input current is smaller than -33 mA or greater than 55 mA, the
quality of the scaled measured value in this example is invalid.
Each 20-mA channel makes available the scaled measured value in the information routing (these are the
temperature values in the examples) and the original current measured value in mA for further processing.
The 20-mA values can be displayed in the display image and processed with CFC charts.
Error Responses
If the current input value is determined to be incorrect, the quality attribute of the output value is set to
invalid That status for Health and the defect status assume the states displayed in the table.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 259
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
Parameter: Unit
Parameter: Resolution
Parameter: Upper limit, Lower limit, Upper limit conv. factor and Lower limit conv. factor
5.6.3.7 Settings
260 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 261
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
5.6.4.1 Overview
The function 20-mA unit Serial:
• Provides serial communications with a 20-mA unit via the Modbus protocol and records the values
measured by the 20-mA unit
• Transforms the measured 20-mA values into slowly changing process variables such as temperature or
gas pressure
• Makes the recorded process tags available to CFC, GOOSE, protocols and the device display
Parameter: Port
262 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
20-mA unit. The device address is important for distinguishing several 20-mA units that are connected to a
serial bus. Set an unambiguous device address on every 20-mA unit, for example, 1, 2 and 3 when
connecting 3 of the 20-mA units. On every 20-mA unit, set for the Slave address setting in the 3 functions
20-mA Unit Serial the same device address for each.
Parameter: Unit
Parameter: Resolution
Parameter: Upper limit, Lower limit, Upper limit conv. factor and Lower limit conv. factor
5.6.4.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 263
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
264 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[dwve20au-150213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 265
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[sc20ser3-152013-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[scauser4-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Communication Settings
Make the communications settings for the relevant serial channels. For this, use the default settings specified
by the 20-mA unit. Normally, you must adapt only the parameterization of the SIPROTEC 5 device to the
settings of the 20-mA unit. Make sure that the setting values in both devices are the same. The settings of the
Non-flickering light (on/off): is not relevant for the RS485 interface.
i
NOTE
The driver for the USART module for the SUP protocol is not preinstalled as standard for the initial use of
this interface (following the firmware update).
266 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[scauser5-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
With the selection of the SUP protocol for the 20-mA unit DIGSI automatically adds the function group
Analog units to your device configuration. You can now instantiate the function 20-mA Unit Serial 1 (see
following figure).
[sc20ser6-150213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Now, set the channel number over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the slave address of the 20-
mA unit. This address must be set with the same value in the 20-mA unit (refer to the following figure).
For the first use of the 20-mA unit, the following device configuration must be set on the 20-mA unit:
• Bus protocol: mod
• Device address: 1
• Parity: no
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 267
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[scauser7-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-56 Setting the Port, Channel Number, and Slave Address
Device Configuration
In DIGSI add in the device configuration an Ethernet module into an adequate slot. Figure 5-57 shows the
potential slots in the base module or on the expansion module CB 202. Alternatively, you can also use the
integrated Ethernet interface Port J.
[scautcp1-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Communication Settings
Activate the SUP Ethernet protocol for the Ethernet module.
268 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[scautcp2-011112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
This protocol is also available for Port J of the integrated Ethernet interface of the base module (refer to
following figure).
[scautcp3-011112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
With the selection of the SUP protocol for the 20-mA unit, DIGSI automatically adds the Analog units func-
tion group and the 20-mA unit Ether. function to your device configuration (refer to the following figure).
[sc20tcp4-150213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Now, set the port over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the IP address of the 20-mA unit (refer to
the following figure). This address must be set with the same value in the 20-mA unit.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 269
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[scautcp5-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
5.6.6.1 Overview
The RTD unit Ether. function:
• Communicates with an external RTD unit via the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP) and records the measured
temperatures from the RTD unit
[dwstrfnc-291112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
270 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
Logic
[lortdtcp-311012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Error Responses
The following table lists the conditions under which the Health status transitions to the Alarm or Warning
state.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 271
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
The Failure signal is set as soon as one of the sensor function blocks reports a failure.
Parameter: Port
Parameter: IP address
272 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
Logic
[lotmpval-311012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Error Responses
If the measured input value is determined to be incorrect, the quality attribute of the output measured temper-
ature value is set to invalid. The statuses for Health and Error take the statuses in accordance with the
following table:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 273
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
• Under Standard unit system change the setting value of the unit system used from SI units to US
units.
[scfahrht-011112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The following settings and information table shows only 1 of the 12 sensors, as the setting possibilities of the
12 sensors do not differ.
5.6.6.7 Settings
274 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 275
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
276 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
5.6.7.1 Overview
The RTD unit serial function:
• Communicates with an external RTD unit serial via the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP) and records the meas-
ured temperatures from the RTD unit
Parameter: Port
5.6.7.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 277
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
278 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 279
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[dwverbau-201112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
280 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[scauser3-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[scauser4-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Communication Settings
Make the communications settings for the relevant serial channels. For this, use the default settings specified
by the RTD box. Normally, you must adapt only the parameterization of the SIPROTEC 5 device to the
settings of the RTD box. Make sure that the setting values in both devices are the same. The settings of the
Non-flickering light (on/off): is not relevant for the RS485 interface.
i
NOTE
The driver for the USART module for the SUP protocol is not preinstalled as standard for the initial use of
this interface (following the firmware update).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 281
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[scauser5-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
With the selection of the SUP protocol for the RTD box DIGSI automatically adds the function group Analog
units to your device configuration. You can now instantiate the function RTD box serial 1 (refer to the
following figure).
[scauser6-011112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Now, set the channel number over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the slave address of the RTD
box. This address must be set with the same value in the RTD box (refer to the following figure).
The following device configuration must be set on the TR1200 RTD unit when the RTD unit is used for the
first time:
• Bus protocol: mod
• Device address: 1
• Parity: no
282 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[scauser7-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-68 Setting the Port, Channel Number, and Slave Address
Device Configuration
In DIGSI add in the device configuration an Ethernet module into an adequate slot. Figure 5-69 shows the
potential slots in the base module or on the expansion module CB 202. Alternatively, you can also use the
integrated Ethernet interface Port J.
[scautcp1-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Communication Settings
Activate the SUP Ethernet protocol for the Ethernet module.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 283
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[scautcp2-011112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
This protocol is also available for Port J of the integrated Ethernet interface of the base module (refer to
following figure).
[scautcp3-011112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
With the selection of the SUP protocol for the RTD unit, DIGSI automatically adds the Analog units function
group and the RTD unit Ether. function to your device configuration (refer to the following figure).
[scautcp4-011112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Now, set the port over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the IP address of the RTD box (refer to
the following figure). This address must be set with the same value in the RTD box.
284 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[scautcp5-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 285
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.7 Function-Group Type User-Defined Function Group
5.7.1 Overview
Within a User-defined function group, you can use the User-defined function block to group user-defined
objects that you find in the DIGSI 5 library under User-defined functions.
You can enter single-point indications, pickup and operate indications (ACD, ACT), single or double
commands as well as measured values in the user-defined function block and assign a superordinate name
to the grouping, for example, Process indications for a group of single-point indications that are read in via
binary inputs.
The functionality can be added at either the function-group level (highest level in the device) or at the func-
tionality level within an existing function group.
[scbenutz-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-71 Information Routing Through Use of Added User-Defined Process Indication and Single-Point
Indication Function Block
The following data types are available for user-defined objects in the DIGSI 5 library under the heading User-
defined signals.
EXAMPLE
Acquisition using binary input, further processing in a CFC and/or signaling using an LED.
286 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.7 Function-Group Type User-Defined Function Group
[scspsfas-140613-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-72 Single-Point Indication SPS Unsaved (Example: 7KE85 Fault Recorder)
EXAMPLE
Acquisition of a disconnector or circuit-breaker switch position.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 287
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.7 Function-Group Type User-Defined Function Group
EXAMPLE
The output of the CFC block ADD_D can be connected with the data type INS. The result can be shown on
the display of the device.
i
NOTE
Additional data types can be found under other headings in the DIGSI 5 library as well as in the corre-
sponding function blocks. This applies to the following data types:
• Pulse-metered values (see User-defined functions in the DIGSI 5 library)
• Transformer taps
• Metered Values
Pulse-Metered Values
Pulse-metered values are available as data types BCR (Binary Counter Reading) in the function group Line
as well as in the DIGSI library under User-defined Functions.
The functionality and the settings of the pulse-metered values can be found in chapter 9.8.1 Function
Description Pulse-Metered Values ..
288 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.7 Function-Group Type User-Defined Function Group
The following data types are also used in the system, but they are not contained in the information catalog for
general use:
• ENC (Enumerated Setting Controllable)
The data type ENC models a command with which the user can set predefined values.
• SEQ (Sequence)
i
NOTE
Transformer taps are included in the tap changer switching element. If this switching element is created
in the device, the transformer tap position is available as a data object of type BSC (binary controlled tap
changer with tap-position information).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 289
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.8 Selection of Voltage Measuring Points
• Select the correct voltage based on the switch position of the plant
If more than one voltage measuring point is connected to the same voltage interface of the function group,
use the Voltage measuring-point selection function block in the function group.
The Voltage measuring-point selection is a common functionality for the function groups of the pro-tected
objects except function group Line.
The Voltage measuring-point selection function block realizes the selection of voltage measuring points by
a logic block chart. The logic block chart controls the input >MP-ID selection depending on the switch
positions of circuit breakers and/or disconnectors.
Example
Figure 5-73 shows an example of voltage measuring points selection for the function group Capacitor bank
in a double busbar application.
[dwbusbardouble.vsd, 1, en_US]
290 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.8 Selection of Voltage Measuring Points
[scconnection, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-74 Connecting the Measuring Points with the Capacitor Bank Function Group
There are consistency checks that validate the connections of voltage measuring points to the function group:
• The connection type must be identical for all measuring points connected to the same interface of the
function group.
• The rated voltage (primary and secondary) must be identical for all measuring points connected to the
same interface.
• If more than 1 measuring point is connected to one voltage interface, a function block must be added to
enable the selection of the voltage measuring points.
CFC Control
The voltage mearuring point is selected by logic block chart on basis of the measuring point IDs. If more than
one measuring point is connected to the interface of the function group, instantiate the function block Voltage
measuring point selection from the library in the corresponding function group.
In order to ensure the correct measuring-point connection for the function group, a logic block chart has to
define the actual valid IDs for the input >MP-ID selection of the function block.
The following logic block chart implementation is based on the example given in Figure 5-75.
If Disconnector 1 (QB1) is closed and Disconnector 2 (QB2) is open, value 2 is the output of CFC block
mux_d_1 and transferred to the input >MP-ID selection. Then, the Meas.point V-3ph with ID 2 is
selected as the reference voltage. Similarly, the Meas.point V-3ph with ID 3 is selected as the reference
voltage if the Disconnector 1 (QB1) is open while Disconnector 2 (QB2) is closed.
[sclocfc, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-75 Logic Block Chart: Voltage Selection Using Measuring Point ID
However, the disconnectors or circuit breakers might be in a transient state. In this case, the input IN3 of the
block bool_int_1 becomes true, the value 0 must be used as the ID for voltage selection input (>MP-ID
selection). If ID 0 is selected, then the last valid Meas.point V-3ph is maintained. If ID 0 lasts longer than
5 s, the last valid selection is still used, but an alarm indication Selection invalid is issued. There is no
effect on the measured values of the used MP (measuring point) after alarm indication is issued.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 291
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Function-Group Types
5.8 Selection of Voltage Measuring Points
i
NOTE
The transient state (with measuring point ID = 0) at device startup or an invalid measuring point selection
(ID < 0 or an ID of not connected measuring point) for input >MP-ID selection results in the following:
• The validity of the voltage measuring values is set to invalid.
• Indication Health signals state alarm
292 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
6 Protection and Automation Functions
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 293
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
294 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 System Data
6.1.1 Overview
The System data are provided with each SIPROTEC 5 device and cannot be deleted. You will find them in
DIGSI under Settings → System Data.
The System data contain the block General and the Measuring points of the device. The following figure
shows the structure of the system data:
[dwandata-180912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In order to adjust its functions to the application, the device requires some data about the power system. The
necessary settings can be found in the system data under General as well as in the Measuring points.
Type and scope of the required measuring points depend on the application. Possible measuring points are:
• Voltage 3-phase (measuring point V 3-ph)
• Current 3-phase (measuring point I 3-ph)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 295
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 System Data
6.1.4 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 3-Phase (V-3ph)
The following example describes the settings of the voltage measuring point Measuring point V-3ph
(Voltage 3-phase). Settings for the supervision functions are also located in the voltage measuring point. The
description of these settings can be found in Chapter Supervision Functions.
Parameter: VT connection
• 3 ph-to-ph volt. + VN
• 3 ph-to-ph voltages
• 2 ph-to-ph volt. + VN
• 2 ph-to-ph voltages
• 2 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN
• 2 ph-to-gnd voltages
Depending on the connection type selected, you must route the measured values to the terminals of the
voltage measuring point in DIGSI 5. You can find connection examples for voltage transformers in chapter A.
7 Connection Examples for Voltage Transformers . The connection examples provide assistance when
selecting the type of connection.
Parameter: Tracking
296 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 System Data
The sampling frequency of the device is adjusted to the power frequency. The device selects a measuring
channel, through which the sampling frequency is determined. Preferably, this should be a voltage metering
channel. This validity of the signal is monitored (minimum level, frequency range). If these values are invalid,
the device switches to another channel (etc.). Once switched to a current channel, the system automatically
switches back to this channel if a voltage channel is valid again.
Parameter Value Description
active If the Tracking = active parameter is set, the measuring point will be
included when determining the sampling frequency. If possible, only the 3-
phase measuring points shall be considered.
Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Note: Please note that during the manual updating of the sampling frequency
the entire device is set to the defined sampling frequency; that is to say, all
channels of all measuring points work with the determined main sampling
frequency. Please keep this in mind when working with the device.
inactive If the channels of the measuring point are not being considered for determining
the sampling frequency, please select the setting value inactive.
i
NOTE
The Magnitude correction parameter does not refer to the internal adjustment of the input circuit.
6.1.5 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Current 3-Phase (I-3ph)
The following example describes the settings for the current measuring points Measuring point I-3ph
(Current 3-phase). The supervision function settings are also located in the current measuring point. The
description of these settings can be found in Chapter Supervision Functions.
Parameter: CT connection
• 3-phase
• 3-phase, 2 primary CT
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 297
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 System Data
• 3ph,2prim.CT + IN-sep
Parameter: Tracking
298 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 System Data
[dwpolstromwdl-251013, 1, en_US]
Parameter: CT error A
Parameter: CT error B
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 299
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 System Data
When using the Magnitude correction parameter, you adjust the amplitude (amplitude correction) for
the electric current input. This allows you to correct the tolerances of the primary current transformer phase-
selectively. The magnitude correction may be required for highly precise measurements. Use a comparison
measurement to determine the setting value (for example, a high-precision measuring-voltage transformer). If
a primary correction is not necessary, retain the default setting.
i
NOTE
The Magnitude correction parameter does not refer to the internal adjustment of the input circuit.
6.1.6 Application and Setting Instructions for Line Differential Protection Settings
i
NOTE
The following parameters are only important for the Line differential protection function. These parame-
ters can be found in DIGSI 5 project tree under Device name (for example., 7SL86) → Settings →
System data under Measuring point I-3ph.
[dwctfail-310111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
300 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 System Data
[fofueber-090311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
with
n' Operational overcurrent factor (effective overcurrent factor)
n Rated overcurrent factor of the current transformer (index following the letter "P")
PN Rated burden of the current transformer at rated current in [VA]
Pi Internal current transformer burden at rated current in [VA]
P' Actually connected burden (devices and secondary connection cables) at rated current in
[VA]
The rated overcurrent factor n and the rated power PN of the current transformer can be found on the name
plate of the current transformer. These values refer to the specified conditions (rated current, rated burden).
EXAMPLE:
Current transformer per VDE 0414/Part 1 or IEC 60044
Current transformer 10P10; 30 VA → n = 10; PN = 30 VA
Current transformer 10P20; 20 VA → n = 20; PN = 20 VA
The operational overcurrent factor n' is the result of the rated data and the actual secondary burden P'.
Under normal circumstances, the internal burden of the current transformer is documented in the test
protocol. If this value is unknown, the internal burden Pi can be approximated and determined from the DC
resistance Ri of the secondary winding:
[foeigbue-090311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Parameter: CT error A
Example:
Parameter: CT error B
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 301
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 System Data
The CT error B parameter considers the transformer fault during rated overcurrent factor in addition to the
safety margin. It is the number preceding the letter P of the transformer data.
You can find the Siemens setting recommendation in Table 6-1.
EXAMPLE:
[fobererl-150311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The worst-case scenario has been assumed for the calculation, whereby during a 1-pole error the current
flows back and forth across the secondary lines (factor 2). This follows that the power at a rated current of
Irated = 5 A can be calculated as:
[foberepi-090311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The entire connected burden comprises the burden of the supply lines and the burden of the device, and is
calculated as follows:
302 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 System Data
[fobereps-090311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fofakuei-220311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
EXAMPLE:
For a transformer YNd5, 35 MV, 110 kV/25 kV, Y-side controlled ± 10 %
This results in the following values:
Rated electric current at rated voltage = 184 A
Rated electric current at Vrated + 10% Imin = 167 A
Rated electric current at Vrated - 10% Imax = 202 A
For the controlled side of the transformer the following mean current is determined:
[foimittl-090311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fodelmax-090311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Add this max. deviation to the transformer error as determined above CT error A and CT error B.
Please ensure that this deviation due to voltage control relates to the mean current at rated apparent power
and not to the rated current at the rated voltage
6.1.7 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 303
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 System Data
304 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 System Data
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 305
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 System Data
306 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 System Data
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 307
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 System Data
308 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 System Data
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 309
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 System Data
310 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
Line differential protection is designed for protected objects with up to 6 ends. It works on the basis of current
comparison. For this a device has to be installed at each end of the area to be protected. The devices
exchange their measurands via communication connections. Each device performs the current comparison
with these measurands and trips the assigned circuit breaker, if there is an internal short circuit.
Apart from normal lines, the line differential protection can also protect lines with a transformer in block
connection. The current transformers selectively delimit the protection range. By using the Inrush-current
detection function and the adaptive measuring techniques for the line differential protection, the stages can
be stabilized to prevent tripping that may be caused by transformer-inrush currents.
Measured-Value Transmission
If the safety installation is spatially connected – as is the case with generators, transformers, busbars – the
measurands can be processed directly. The processing is different for lines where the protection range
extends more or less far from one station to another. To enable the measurands from all line ends to be
processed at each line end, these measurands must be transferred in a suitable form. In this way, the tripping
condition can be checked at each line end, and the respective local circuit breaker can be tripped if neces-
sary.
The measured values are encrypted and transmitted in digital telegrams via communication channels. For
this purpose, each device features at least one interface for protection-data communication, called the protec-
tion interface in the following.
Figure 6-4 shows this principle for a line with 2 ends. Each device detects the local current and sends the
information on its magnitude and phase relation to the opposite end. Thus, each device can add the currents
from all ends and further process them.
[dwdiff2e-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If there are more than 2 ends, a communication chain is established so that each device is informed of the
sum of the currents flowing into the protected object. Figure 6-5 shows an example of 3 ends. The underlying
principle in this regard is partial current summation. In this process, each device measures the respective
local currents. Device 1 detects the current i1 and transmits its data in the form of a complex phasor I1 to
device 2. This device adds the component I2 from measuring current i2 and transmits this subtotal to device
3. The subtotal I1 + I2 finally reaches device 3 which adds its component I3. In the reverse direction, a corre-
sponding chain runs from device 3 via device 2 to device 1. In this way, all 3 devices have the sum of all 3
currents measured at the measuring points.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 311
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
If ends 1 and 2 are close together (within about 500 m), currents I1 and I2 can also be detected by one
protection device, provided the number of analog current inputs (8I) in the device permits that. Thus, the
topology shown in Figure 6-5 can also be protected by 2 physical devices.
The order of the devices in the communication chain does not have to correspond with their indexing, as
shown in the example in Figure 6-5. The assignment is made in the course of parameterization for the
topology.
[dwdiff3e-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The communication chain can also be connected to a ring, as shown with dashed lines in Figure 6-5. This
enables a redundant transmission. Even if there is an outage of the communication connection, the differen-
tial-protection system remains operational without any restrictions. The devices recognize a failure in the
communication and automatically switch over to a different communication route. It is also possible to discon-
nect one line end (for example for tests or modification) and shut down the local protection. In a communica-
tion ring, the remaining operation can continue without interruption.
312 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
[scconstp-061210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Measured-Value Synchronization
The devices detect the local currents asynchronously. This means that each device detects, digitizes, and
preprocesses the associated currents from the current transformers at its own random processor clock. If the
currents of 2 or more line ends are to be compared, however, it is necessary to process all currents with the
same time basis. All devices belonging together exchange their time status with each telegram. The device
whose address is entered first into the protection interface functions as Timing Master, meaning, it specifies
the time frame. Each device can thus calculate the time offset due to the transmission and processing times
relative to the Timing master.
To achieve a sufficiently exact synchronization, the current values are additionally provided with a time
stamp before they are transmitted from one device to the others in digital telegrams. This allows a statement
on the time at which the transmitted current values were valid. The receiving devices can thus carry out a fine
synchronization based on the time stamp and their own time management, that is compare the currents
detected at truly the same time (<5 μs tolerance).
The transmission times are continuously monitored by the devices via the time stamp in the measured-data
telegram and taken into account at the respective receiving end. The frequency of the measurands, which is
decisive for the exact calculation of complex phasors, is also measured continuously and updated with the
calculation, if necessary, so that the phasor comparison is synchronous. If the device is connected to voltage
transformers and if at least one voltage is available in sufficient magnitude, the frequency is determined from
this voltage. Otherwise, the measured currents are used as the basis for frequency determination. The deter-
mined frequencies are exchanged between the devices via the communication routes. Under these condi-
tions, all devices operate with the updated frequency.
Adaptive Self-Stabilization
The basic principle of the differential protection is based on the precondition that, during uninterrupted opera-
tion, the sum of all currents flowing into the protected object equals 0. This applies to the primary system and
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 313
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
only there if the quadrature-axis components of current, which occur from the capacitance of the lines or the
excitation currents of the transformers and parallel reactors, are negligible. In contrast, the secondary
currents offered to the devices via the current transformers contain measuring errors originating from the
transmission behavior of the current transformers and the input circuits of the devices themselves. Even
transmission errors such as signal jitter can cause measurand deviations.
All these influences mean that even in healthy operation the sum of the currents processed in the devices is
not exactly 0. The differential protection is stabilized against these influences. A special method of Adaptive
self-stabilization is applied in this context to ensure the highest possible sensitivity of the differential protec-
tion.
[dwanspre-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Current-Transformer Errors
In order to take into account the influences of current-transformer errors, each device calculates an adaptive
self-stabilization value Ierror. This value results from calculating the possible local transformer errors based on
the data of the local current transformers and the magnitude of the locally measured currents.
[dwctfail-310111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The basis for this are the transformer data of the connected current transformers that must be entered individ-
ually for each device. Since each device transmits its estimated error to the other devices, each device is able
to determine the sum of possible errors and use them for stabilization.
314 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
also estimated by the device and automatically adaptively increase the local self-stabilization value. The
permissible variance of the transmission and processing times are also taken into account..
Time deviations are caused by residual errors when synchronizing the measurands, runtime variance or
similar. GPS synchronization prevents an increase of the self-stabilization that can be caused by runtime
jumps.
If an influencing variable cannot be detected – for example, the frequency if no adequate measurands are
available – the device assumes the rated values by definition. In the frequency example, this means the
following: If the frequency cannot be determined because no sufficient measurands are available, the device
uses the rated frequency. But since the actual frequency can deviate from the rated frequency within the
permissible range (±20 %), the stabilization is automatically increased correspondingly. As soon as the
frequency has been determined (100 ms max. after applying a usable measurand), the stabilization is
decreased accordingly. In practice, this has an effect if no measurand is available in the range to be protected
before the occurrence of a short-circuit, for example when switching a line with line-side voltage transformers
onto a fault. Since the frequency is not yet known at that time, the stabilization is increased at first until the
actual frequency is determined. This can lead to a tripping delay, but only at the pickup threshold, for
example, in the case of very low-current faults.
Inrush-Current Detection
If the protection range extends beyond a transformer, a high inrush current, which flows into the protection
range but does not leave it again, has to be expected when connecting the transformer. The inrush current
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 315
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
can reach a multiple of the rated current and is characterized by a relatively high content of 2nd harmonic
(twice the rated frequency) which is missing almost completely in the case of a short circuit.
The algorithm of the line differential protection recognizes the inrush currents. Temporarily, the adaptive
stabilization function provides an elevated stabilization current, thus preventing any false tripping. When the
Inrush-current detection function is activated in the device, inrush currents can be detected correctly. Further-
more, overfunctioning caused by the inrush currents can be prevented by blocking the affected phases or all
phases using the crossblock function.
charging-current compensation
Distributed line or conductor capacitances cause a permanently capacitive charging current. This current has
to be taken into account by the pickup values of the differential-protection stages. In cables in particular, this
charging current can reach considerable values. The charging-current compensation serves to improve the
sensitivity so that maximum sensitivity can be protected even at high charging currents. For this, the
Charging-current compensation function block must be loaded from the function library and activated.
Emergency Mode
Emergency mode of a line protection device is detected if no main protection function is effective as a result
of interference. With differential protection, emergency mode can be triggered not only by protection inter-
faces that have dropped out and become corrupted, but also by invalid current measured values.
[dwdifstr-310512-01.tif, 1, en_US]
316 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
Overall logic
[logesa3p-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-10 General Logic for Differential Protection Functions with 3-Pole Tripping
Operation Direction
The Line differential protection function is composed of several subfunctions, which are referred to as stages
or function blocks in the following sections. A distinction is made between standard subfunctions and option-
ally configurable subfunctions.
The core of differential protection consists of the 2 stages Idiff and Idiff fast. Both work in parallel and ensure
high sensitivity or fast tripping, depending on the severity of the fault. The output signals of these stages are
pickup and trip signals, which are routed to the pickup logic and the trip logic, resulting in the corresponding
protection indications.
Charging-current compensation lc-Compensat. is an optional function of differential protection that is
assigned exclusively to the sensitive stage Idiff and for which maximum sensitivity is guaranteed, even with
high capacitive charging currents.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 317
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
The optional Transformer function is required when a transformer is configured in the protection range. It
guarantees that amplitudes and phase angle of the measured currents will be evaluated correctly at the line
ends.
i
NOTE
To stabilize the line differential protection against current-transformer errors, the corresponding settings for
the current measuring points must be taken into account in the system data. These are used exclusively
by the line differential protection.
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:104) Supervision Idiff = yes: block diff. prot.
When using the parameter Supervision Idiff, you can determine whether the function line differential
protection operates with or without differential current monitoring.
Parameter value Description
no The differential current is not monitored.
yes: reporting only The differential current is monitored. If the differential current exceeds the
monitoring threshold, and a current jump is not present, the indicationAlarm:
Idiff too high will be displayed.
yes: block diff. The differential current is monitored. If the differential current exceeds the
prot. monitoring threshold, the line differential protection will be blocked and the indi-
cationAlarm: Idiff too high will be displayed.
6.2.5 Settings
318 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 319
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
6.2.7.1 Description
[lo3idiff-020412-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Mode of Operation
The IDiff stage is the sensitive differential protection stage. It is based on the principle of current phasor
calculation. Usable current phasors are available after 1 period has elapsed following the occurrence of a
fault event. The Idiff fast stage, which operates in parallel, is responsible for fast tripping in the event of high-
current errors.
320 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
The measurands are analyzed separately for each phase. Each device calculates a differential current from
the sum of the current phasors which are calculated at each end of the protected object and transmitted to
the other ends. Its value corresponds to the fault current which the differential protection system sees, ideally
that is the short-circuit current. In correct operation, it is small and corresponds to the capacitive charging
current in lines in a first approximation. If charging-current compensation is active, the maximum sensitivity is
achieved and the pickup value can be set considerably smaller.
The restraint current counteracts the differential current. The restraint current results from the sum of the
maximum measuring errors at the ends of the protected object and is calculated adaptively from the current
measurands and the set substation settings. To this end, the maximum error of the current transformers in
the rated range or the short-circuit current range is multiplied by the presently flowing current at each end of
the protected object and transmitted to the other ends together with the determined internal errors. Thus, the
restraint current always reflects the maximum possible measuring error of the differential-protection system.
Optional functions such as charging-current compensation (increased sensitivity) and transformer in the
protection range are automatically considered when the differential and stabilization currents are calculated.
[dwanspre-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the additional criterion of a local minimum current has to be satisfied for tripping in the event of an internal
error, the value of this current can be set in Min. current for release.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 321
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
and parallel reactors, the device additionally features an inrush-current detection that can block the affected
phase of the differential protection.
Fault Behavior
The Health object is set to Alarm when fast measured value monitoring functions (broken-wire detection,
fast sum I, analog-digital converter) signal an error or when invalid data are received via the protection inter-
face. The validity of the currents used as well as the validity of the data received via the protection interface
are monitored continuously. If persistent faults are detected, Health is set to Alarm and Inactive is set to
Yes.
The measured values are available in the fault record. You can read out fault recordings from the device and
analyze them afterwards using evaluation tools such as SIGRA. The device display shows only I diff. and
I restr.. In order to find the measured values, go to Main menu → Measurements → Line x → Func-
tional measured values → Line differential protection.
Detailed information about selecting and deleting fault recordings can be found in the Operating Manual.
Parameter: Threshold
322 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
A setting of 3 times to 4 times the stationary charging current generally ensures the stability of the protection
when switching.
i
NOTE
This parameter is only effective for resonant-grounded/isolated neutral-point treatment!
6.2.7.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 323
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
324 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
6.2.8.1 Description
[lo3idifs-020412-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Mode of Operation
The Idiff fast stage is the differential-protection stage that is optimized for fast operate times in the event of
high-current errors. It is superimposed on the Idiff stage. The measurands are also analyzed separately for
each phase. Fast tripping for high-current errors is achieved with a procedure based on filtered instantaneous
values. Since this procedure is not able to provide stabilization against signal distortions (for example,
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 325
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
current-transformer saturation) that can occur during high-current external faults, a decision on internal or
external fault has to be made before the possible saturation occurs. It is assumed that the current trans-
formers do not yet go into saturation at least for the duration of one integration interval (5 ms) after fault
inception.
Above a given passing current level (> 2.5·pickup value, local measurement), the decision for external fault is
made automatically and the Idiff fast stage is blocked. If saturation occurs for one or more current trans-
formers that delimit the protection range, this blocking is maintained and the differential caused by saturation
is thus neutralized. The Idiff fast stage is normally set to be higher than the rated current. In this way, the
influence of charging currents and cross-flow currents of transformers (fixed and transient) is suppressed.
Otherwise, the Idiff fast stage works in the same way as the sensitive Idiff stage. Each device calculates a
differential current for each phase from the sum of the filtered instantaneous values, which are calculated at
each end of the protected object and transmitted to the other ends. Its value corresponds to the fault current
which the differential-protection system sees, ideally that is the short-circuit current. In correct operation, it is
small and corresponds to the capacitive charging current in lines in a first approximation.
The restraint current counteracts the differential current. The restraint current results from the sum of the
maximum measuring errors at the ends of the protected object and is calculated adaptively from the current
measurands and the set substation settings. To this end, the maximum error of the current transformers in
the rated range or the short-circuit current range is multiplied by the presently flowing current at each end of
the protected object and transmitted to the other ends together with the determined internal errors. Thus, the
restraint current always reflects the maximum possible measuring error of the differential-protection system.
The option of a transformer in the protection range is automatically taken into account when calculating the
differential and stabilization currents. An activated charging-current compensation has no effect on the Idiff
fast stage.
[dwanspre-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
326 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
Fault Behavior
The Health object is set to Alarm when fast measured value monitoring functions (broken-wire detection,
fast sum I, analog-digital converter) signal an error or when invalid data are received via the protection inter-
face. The validity of the currents used as well as the validity of the data received via the protection interface
are monitored continuously. If persistent faults are detected, Health is set to Alarm and Inactive is set to
Yes.
6.2.8.2 Application and Setting Notes for the Idiff Fast Stage
Parameter: Threshold
i
NOTE
In order to stabilize the line differential protection against the current-transformer error, the respective
parameters at the current-measuring points in the system data (Chapter 6.1.5 Application and Setting
Notes for Measuring Point Current 3-Phase (I-3ph) ) must be taken into account. These are used exclu-
sively by the line differential protection.
Since this stage responds very quickly, pickup in response to capacitive charging currents (for lines), induc-
tive excitation currents (for transformers or parallel reactors) – including during switching procedures - must
be excluded. This also applies when charging-current compensation is switched on, because this is not effec-
tive for the Idiff fast stage. The pickup value should be set higher than the load current (max. 1.2·IN to 2·IN).
In resonant-grounded systems, the value must not fall below the value of the non-resonant-grounded ground-
fault current. This value results from the total capacitive ground-fault current without taking into account the
arc-suppression coil. Since the arc-suppression coil has to compensate for approximately the total capacitive
ground fault current, its rated current can approximately be taken as a basis. For transformers, set IN transf./Vsc
transf..
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 327
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
i
NOTE
This parameter is only effective for resonant-grounded/isolated neutral-point treatment!
6.2.8.3 Settings
Logic
In the pickup logic, the stage pickups are combined for specific phases and issued as superordinate pickup
indications of the differential protection.
328 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
[loanregu-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Operation Direction
The trip logic combines the trip requirements of the differential-protection stages Idiff and Idiff fast and
creates the superordinate operate indication of the differential protection.
Logic
[loauslo3-100311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 329
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
[loextta1-121210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-17 External Push-Button Wiring for Controlling the Test of the Local Device
[loextta2-121210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-18 External Switch Wiring for Controlling the Test of the Local Device
i
NOTE
Prior to testing the differential protection of the local device, all remaining differential protection topology
must be disconnected by logging off the device if the remaining part of the protection topology should be
protected as normally. In order to activate a functional log out, the power must be off at the affected feeder
(circuit breaker/disconnector open).
330 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
devices off. The indications Ctrl: Test all devices or BI: Test all devices will display the
source. If a test was activated, the differential protection function in all devices operates in test mode. The
indications Test all devices activ as well as Behavior (Test Idiff) and Behavior (Test Idiff fast) will
display this. In this state the differential protection may be tested. All indications generated by the differential
protection are identified as "Test". This prevents the automatic activation of the local circuit breakers. With
this test the reaction of the differential protection with regard to setting changes prior to switching can be veri-
fied. Within DIGSI the current operating point along the differential protection characteristic can also be
checked.
i
NOTE
The test of all devices cannot be set or will be rejected if the local differential protection functions are
already logged off.
[loextta3-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-19 External Push-Button Wiring for Controlling the Test of All Devices
[loextta4-121210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-20 External Switch Wiring for Controlling the Test of All Devices
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 331
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
ential current and the restraint current are graphically displayed in the differential protection characteristic
curve (see the following figure).
[dwueidif-241013, 1, en_US]
To ensure reliable operation of the line differential protection, the operating point must be located inside the
working area and clearly below the tripping lines.
If the differential current monitoring function is tripped or the operating point lies within the tripping area,
proceed as follows:
• Check the pickup of value for stage Idiff.
• Check the polarity of the current transformer.
• Verify that the differential current is generated by the primary system. Did you consider the charging
current? It will be depicted as a permanent differential current.
Should this not be the case, the differential current can be generated by asynchronous communication
networks. Such asynchronicity can be created by linking a larger communication networks.
Another source of error could be unbalances in the transit times for the protection communication that
have always existed but not been noticed. This means that the transit times for the protection data back
and forth are different, as a result of which the measured values received cannot be synchronized
perfectly. Hence, a differential current that will activate the operate function during increased current flow
will be calculated.
332 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
i
NOTE
Before logging off, the feeder protected from the local line differential protection must be switched off.
The logged-off local line differential protection can be activated for test purposes (see 6.2.11 Function Check
of the Line Differential Protection). This will result in influencing or impacting the running protection interface
communication.
• Via the binary inputs, general: >Function logoff on or >Function logoff off
[loexttx3-140311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-21 External Key Wiring for Logging off the Local Line Differential Protection
[loextsx4-020412-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-22 External Switch Wiring for Logging off the Local Line Differential Protection
Indications
The logged-off function reports the status and cause of the logoff: Function logged off, Logged off
via BI and Logged off via control. In addition to the logoff of the local line differential protection,
SIPROTEC 5 devices offer the option of logging off the entire device. This functionality is defined to deacti-
vate the protection function from an unplanned switch-off of the device (switch off supply voltage).
6.2.13.1 Description
Mode of Operation
When using the optional function transformer (function of the differential protection), any random transformer
(two-winding transformer or multi-winding transformer) in the protected line structure can be considered. This
requires taking into account the topology data of the transformer which affect the magnitude and phase of the
differential current to be calculated. In this way, all measurands can be based on the rated data for the power
transformer. For each side of the transformer the rated apparent power of the transformer must be deter-
mined from the rated power and the rated voltage of the transformer side. Additionally, the respective vector
groups for current and voltage and the type of grounding of the transformer neutral point have to be entered.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 333
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
Note that the same transformer parameters have to be set for all differential protection devices if they are
assigned to the same side from the transformer perspective!
Line Settings
First, enter the primary rated values of the transformer into the general line settings. These include the rated
apparent power and the winding-related phase-to-phase rated voltage.
1. First, enter the rated power of the transformer winding (side).
2. Subsequently, enter the rated power of the transformer winding. The rated power is the quotient of rated
apparent power and rated voltage.
Formula: Rated power = rated apparent power / (rated power * square root of 3)
To verify this, the resulting rated apparent power is indicated under the rated value of the line.
i
NOTE
The rated apparent power must adopt the same value on all ends of the protected object, since it is the
basis for the current comparison of all ends.
In general, select the rated voltage of the winding facing the respective device. However, if a winding has a
voltage regulating range, do not use the rated voltage of the winding, but rather the voltage which corre-
sponds to the mean current of the regulating range. Thus, the fault currents are regulated to a minimum.
Example:
• Transformer YNd5
• 35 MVA
• 110 kV/25 kV
[fotfobsp-181010-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Protection Settings
For verification purposes, the internally calculated rated apparent power will be displayed the same as a
parameter. The rated apparent power is the result of the rated values of the line settings.
334 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
= 0 for all ends. In this case, the differential protection works without a matching calculation of its own.
However, the measured voltages would then not be matched beyond the transformer and thus not calculated
and displayed correctly. The Voltage vector group nb. corrects this shortcoming. Here, specify the
actual vector group of the transformer according to the aspects mentioned previously.
The Current vector group nb. is therefore significant for the differential protection, while Voltage
vector group nb. is valid as the basis for calculating measuring voltages beyond the transformer.
[logfpaus-121210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
i
NOTE
• If elimination of the residual current is activated, and in case of ground faults, the differential protec-
tion becomes less sensitive by a factor of 1/3:
• A higher degree of sensitivity is only possible through measurement of the grounded neutral-point
current of the transformer. This requires the installation of a current transformer in the neutral-point
supply of the transformer, whereby its measured current can be captured by a 1-phase current input
configured on the device.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 335
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
6.2.13.3 Settings
336 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
[loladeko-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Mode of Operation
The charging-current compensation Ic-Compensat. is an optional function of the line differential protection. It
improves the sensitivity of the Idiff stage by compensating for the charging current caused by the capaci-
tances of the overhead line or the cable, flowing due to the distributed capacitance of the line. Due to the
capacitances of the phases to ground or to each other, charging currents are flowing even in correct opera-
tion, which cause a difference of the currents at the ends of the protection range. Especially in cables or long
lines, the capacitive charging currents can reach considerable magnitudes. If the feeder-side transformer
voltages are connected to the devices, the influence of the capacitive charging currents can largely be
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 337
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
compensated for by calculation. It is possible here to use the charging current compensation which deter-
mines the actual charging current. If there are 2 line ends, each device performs half the charging current
compensation. When using an x-number of devices, each device assumes the x-th part.
[dwladko2-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-25 Charging Current Compensation for a Two-Terminal Line (1-phase system)
For correct operation, stationary charging currents can be regarded as almost constant since they are only
determined by the voltage and line capacitances. Without charging current compensation, they must there-
fore be taken into account when setting the sensitivity of the differential protection. With charging current
compensation, this does not have to be taken into account here. With charging current compensation, the
stationary excitation currents are considered before quadrature-axis reactances. For transient inrush currents,
the devices are provided with separate inrush-current detection.
i
NOTE
• The charging current compensation requires that the local voltage transformers be connected!
• If you use charging-current compensation, monitor the voltage is by means of the Measuring-voltage
failure detection function. If Measuring-voltage failure detection is not present in the Line function
group, add the function to the Line function group from the Global DIGSI 5 library.
338 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
i
NOTE
Please bear in mind that the Idiff parameter must be increased to 2 to 3 times Ic rated before deactivating
the charging-current compensation (parameter Mode), otherwise undesired tripping might occur.
i
NOTE
The charging-current compensation requires the input of some supplementary parameter. This includes
the rated frequency, the rated voltage of the line, the line-related capacitance per unit length C1 per
length unit as well as the Total line length.
Parameter: Ic-stabilization/Ic-rated
6.2.14.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 339
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
• Detects short circuits that lie between the current transformer and the feeder disconnector switch QB.
[dwstubap-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[dwstubeb-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
340 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
Mode of Operation
The stub-differential protection function is composed of the two stages: Stubdif and Stubdif fast. Both will
also be referred to in the following sections as function blocks. Both stages work in parallel and ensure high
sensitivity or fast tripping, depending on the severity of the fault. A release binary input (>Release func-
tion) switches the stub-differential protection to active. This binary input reports the position as open to the
feeder disconnector switch. The output signals of these stages are pickup and trip signals, which are routed
to the output logic, resulting in the corresponding protection indications.
Overall Logic
[lostubfx-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Adaptive Self-Stabilization
The basic principle of differential protection rests on the precondition that, during an uninterrupted operation,
the sum of all currents flowing into the protected object equal 0. Secondary currents detected by the device
are tainted with measuring errors that are caused by the transmission behavior of the current transformer and
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 341
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
the input circuits of the device. All these influences mean that even in healthy operation the sum of the
currents processed in the devices is not exactly 0. The differential protection is stabilized against these influ-
ences. A special method of adaptive self-stabilization is used in this context to ensure the highest possible
sensitivity of the differential protection.
The stabilization variables are calculated from the sum of the potential faults:
Istab = Threshold + Σ(current transformer errors and other measuring errors).
If the measured differential current exceeds the pickup threshold and the maximum possible measuring error,
there is an internal error (shaded area in Figure 6-29). With the adaptive approach it is no longer necessary to
assign parameters for a characteristic curve.
[dwanstub-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Current-Transformer Faults
In order to take into account the influences of current-transformer faults, an adaptive self-stabilization value
Ierror is calculated for each measuring point. This is the result of the sum of all current-transformer errors,
which in turn are the result of the current-transformer data and the degree of currents measured on the trans-
former.
[dwctfail-310111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The set parameters of the transformer data apply to the configured current inputs on the device.
342 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 343
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
[lostubi1-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Operation Direction
The Stubdif stage is the sensitive stage of the stub-differential protection. It is based on the principle of
current phasor calculation. Usable current phasors are available after 1 period has elapsed following the
occurrence of a fault event. The Stubdif fast stage, which operates in parallel, is responsible for fast tripping
in the event of high-current errors.
All measurands are evaluated separately for each phase. The device calculates a differential current from the
sum of the current phasors on the measuring inputs. The sum of the differential current is equal to the fault
current, which is detected by the differential-protection system. Ideally, this is the short circuit current. In
344 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
correct operation, it is small and corresponds to the capacitive charging current in lines in a first approxima-
tion.
The restraint current counteracts the differential current. The restraint current results from the sum of the
maximum measuring errors at the ends of the protected object and is calculated adaptively from the current
measurands and the set substation settings. To do this, the maximum error of the current transformers in the
rated range or the short-circuit current range is multiplied with the straight flowing currents of the current
transformer of the protected object.
[dwanspre-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Fault Behavior
If fast measured-value supervision functions (broken-wire detection, fast sum I, analog-digital converter)
report a fault, the object (_:8401:53) Health will be set to Alarm. The validity of the used currents is
constantly monitored. If persistent faults are detected, (_:8401:53) Health is set to Alarm and (_:
8401:54) Inactive is set to Yes.
Parameter: Threshold
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 345
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
[lostubi2-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Operation Direction
The Stubdif fast stage is optimized for fast operate times during high current faults. It is superimposed on the
Stubdif stage. The measurands are also analyzed separately for each phase. Fast tripping for high-current
346 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
errors is achieved with a procedure based on filtered instantaneous values. During this procedure, stabiliza-
tion to prevent signal distortion (for example, current-transformer saturation), which may occur during high
current external faults, is not possible. For this reason, a decision for internal or external faults must be made
prior to the entry of the potential saturation. It is assumed that the current transformers do not yet go into
saturation at least for the duration of one integration interval (5 ms) after fault inception.
Above a given passing current level (> 2.5·pickup value, local measurement), the decision for external fault is
made automatically and the Stubdif fast stage is blocked. If saturation occurs with at least one of the current
transformers that limits the protection range, this blockage will remain. Thus, the difference generated by the
saturation will be eliminated. Normally, the Stubdif fast is set higher than the rated current. Otherwise, the
Stubdif fast stage works in the same way as the sensitive Stubdif stage. Each device calculates a differen-
tial current for each phase from the sum of the filtered instantaneous values, which are calculated at each
end of the protected object. The sum of the differential current is equal to the fault current, which is detected
by the differential-protection system. Ideally, this is the short circuit current. In correct operation, it is small
and corresponds to the capacitive charging current in lines in a first approximation.
The restraint current counteracts the differential current. The restraint current results from the sum of the
maximum measuring errors at the ends of the protected object and is calculated adaptively from the current
measurands and the set substation settings. To do this, the maximum error of the current transformers in the
nominal range or the short-circuit current range is multiplied with the straight flowing currents on each end of
the protected object.
[dwanspre-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Fault Behavior
If fast measured-value supervision functions (broken-wire detection, fast sum I, analog-digital converter)
report a fault, the object Health will be set to Alarm. The validity of the used currents is constantly moni-
tored. If persistent faults are detected, Health is set to Alarm and Inactive is set to Yes.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 347
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
6.3.7 Application and Setting Notes for the Stubdif Fast Stage
Parameter: Threshold
Output Logic
[lostubag-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
6.3.9 Settings
348 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 349
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Ground-Fault Differential Protection
• Protects grounding transformers in the protection range. It is required that a current transformer be used
in the case of neutral point feed, that is, between neutral point and grounding conductor. The neutral
point transformer and the phase current transformer define the protection range.
• Adapts itself to the highest-amperage side with auto transformers and thereby prevents overfunction in
the event of external ground faults.
The Ground-fault differential protection function is used in the Transformer side or Auto transformer
protection function group. Furthermore, you can use the function in the stabilizing winding of the auto trans-
former or also in the Standard UI function. The function depends upon application in the corresponding appli-
cation template preconfigured by the manufacturer or can be copied during the engineering into the corre-
sponding function group.
The Ground-fault differential protection function is stepless.
[dwstrupt-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
350 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Ground-Fault Differential Protection
[loreffkt-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The protection function processes the neutral-point current I0* (exactly 3I0) and the calculated residual current
I0** (exactly 3I0) from the phase currents (see following figure). The protection range extends exclusively over
the transformer winding, including current transformer. The amount-adapted (compensated) currents are
described by the * symbol. They are normalized to the rated object current of the respective side.
In case of an internal ground fault, the residual currents flow to the fault point. With an external ground fault,
the fault current inverts itself in the phase current transformers. In this way, the direction of current flow
serves as the decisive criterion for an internal fault.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 351
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Ground-Fault Differential Protection
[dwgrdpri-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In accordance with the logic diagram, Figure 6-37 the protection function consists of 3 parts:
i
NOTE
The following calculation applies to the configurations with a current transformer for the side. In a special
case of several current transformers per side, the calculation of the restraint current must be performed in
greater detail.
I0* = km · 3I0'
I0** = km · 3I0'' → 3I0'' = IA + IB + IC
with km = Irated,transformer/Irated,side
IDiff,REF = |I0* + I0**|
Irest,REF = |I0*| + |IA| + |IB| + |IC|
where:
3I0' Measured residual current at neutral point
3I0'' Residual current calculated from the phase currents
km Factor for amount adaptation (compensation)
Irated,trans- Primary transformer rated current
former
Using the calculated restraint current, a current Ichar. curve which represents the pickup value for the tripping is
determined from the characteristic curve (Figure 6-39). In this way, the protection function is stabilized in the
event of external, multiphase ground faults, for example, a 2-pole ground fault. This means that the protection
function becomes less sensitive.
If the Slope = 0 is set here, the set Threshold of the operate curve is delivered independent of the restraint
current.
352 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Ground-Fault Differential Protection
[dwstabke-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[dwautraf-201112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In this case the neutral-point current calculates as sum of the phase currents of the ground side:
I0* = km · 3I0' → 3I0' = Ignd,A + Ignd,B + Ignd, C
with km = Irated,transformer/Irated,side
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 353
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Ground-Fault Differential Protection
i
NOTE
If both 1-phase neutral point and 3-phase ground side are connected, only the 1-phase neutral point is
used by the ground fault differential protection. The 3-phase ground side is not considered.
Pickup
If the calculated differential current IDiff,REF exceeds the calculated current Ichar. curve (see Figure 6-37), pickup
occurs and the internal processing is enabled. The pickup is indicated.
Operate Curve
The operate curve represented in the following figure consists of 2 parts. In the right part of the characteristic
curve, you will find a case of an internal ground fault. Under ideal conditions, the angle between the two
residual currents (∠(I0*, I0**)) equals 0. With current-transformer saturation, angle errors can result. The right
part of the characteristic curve is valid for angles ≤ 90°. The tripping current is the current flowing at the
neutral point (I0*). It is compared to the set or increased threshold value.
[dwausken-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-41 Operate Curve Depending on the Phase Angle between l0* and I0** at |I0*| = |I0**| (180° =
External Fault)
In case of an external ground fault the residual current calculated from the phase currents reverses by 180°.
The phase angle between the residual currents thus (∠(I0*, I0**)) equals 180°. They are located in the left part
of the operate curve and recognize a clearly increased pickup value. Angle deviations of 180° are caused by
transformer saturation in conjunction with external short-circuits.
The current Iangle,REF for the Angle Decision is determined from the following subtraction and totaling:
Iangle,REF = |I0* - I0**| - |I0* + I0**|
The resulting current Iangle,REF results from the respective fault conditions, which are illustrated in the following
figure. With an internal fault (angle = 0°) a current results that has a negative sign. If angle errors occur, the
sign remains negative. The amount of the current decreases.
354 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Ground-Fault Differential Protection
In an external short-circuit (180°), the current becomes positive. At a smaller angle (<180°) due to transformer
saturation, the angle remains positive. The amount also decreases.
[dwwinken-011112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
For tripping to occur, the neutral-point current I0* must reach the value IREF,off. The characteristic curve in the
left part of the figure can be determined from the following relationship:
IREF,off = Ichar. curve + k · Iangle,REF
where:
Ichar. curve Pickup value resulting from the pickup value increase
k Factor (permanently set to 4.05657. With this value, the limit angle at |I0*| = |I0**| is
precisely 100°. No tripping is possible from this angle on.)
i
NOTE
With an external fault, the current Iangle,REF is always > 0.
The following figure shows the behavior under different fault conditions.
Also observe that the restraint current (Irest.,REF) always results from the sum of all currents (phase currents of
the measuring points and the neutral-point current). For pickup, the differential current IDiff,REF is necessary.
This differential current results from the geometric sum of all adapted residual currents. The residual currents
of the measuring points on the outgoing side and of the neutral-point current are meant here.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 355
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Ground-Fault Differential Protection
[dwfehler-291112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
i
NOTE
The following conditions must be observed when setting the threshold values:
Threshold value ≥ max {0.05 I/Irated,S ; 0.05 I/Irated,S * Iprim transf. max / Irated, protected object}
Threshold value ≤ min {2.00 I/Irated,S ; 100.00 I/Irated,S * Iprim transf. max / Irated, protected object}
The value 0.05 I/Irated,S is the minimum possible setting value and 2.00 I/Irated,S the
maximum possible. Iprim,transf. max is the largest transformer current and Irated,protected object the protected object
rated current. 100.00 I/Irated,S is the upper measurement limit.
If otherwise it could happen that there is chattering of the pickup indication, the minimum threshold limit is
lifted. The maximum limit on the other hand is corrected downward, if the exceeding current otherwise
through the magnitude scaling must be so large, that it would already be outside of the measuring range of
the transformer.
The adaptation of the setting limits is done automatically. In addition a setting is prevented outside of these
limits.
In the following, typical applications are described for the ground-fault differential protection.
356 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Ground-Fault Differential Protection
[dwanster-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
This application is a standard application. Here the phase currents of one side and the neutral-point current
are processed. The function is located in the Transformer Side function group.
The following figure show the structural division of the function. The ground fault differential protection gets its
measurands from the current transformers, which are connected to the Transformer side function group.
The neutral-point current is guided via the Transformer neutral point function group to the Transformer
side function group. To be compatible with SIPROTEC 4 (including reference arrow definition of the ground
fault differential protection), in addition to the magnitude scaling of the neutral-point current, a rotation of the
polarity (phase rotation by 180°) is also done in the Transformer neutral point function group.
i
NOTE
The fault record indicates the analog traces according to the connection. For this reason the neutral-point
current is shown rotated by 180° in comparison to SIPROTEC 4.
[dw2wtyde-201112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-45 Function Group Structure of the Ground Fault Differential Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 357
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Ground-Fault Differential Protection
Uniform reference arrows and transformer burdens are defined for the SIPROTEC 5 device series. These
agreements also apply to the transformer protection devices. The special handling of the neutral-point current
described previously is a result of this.
The current definition states that the sum of the currents flowing into the protected object is equal to 0 (IA + IB
+ IC + IN = 0 or IA + IB + IC = -IN). The protected object is located to the right or left of the transformer set. The
following basic connections result from this.
[tileite2-070211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
or
[tileite4-260313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The following connection is defined for the transformer according to Figure 6-48. The current flow for an
external ground fault is entered at the same time. It is recognized that the secondary currents each flow from
the device. From this, a differential current (Idiff,REF = |IY + IA + IB + IC| = | -I4 - I3|) results, according to the
reference arrow definition for the ground fault differential protection (positive to the protected object) with an
external ground fault. To prevent that, the neutral-point current is rotated in the Transformer neutral-point
function group. It follows that: IDiff, REF = |I4 – I3| = 0.
358 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Ground-Fault Differential Protection
i
NOTE
If the neutral-point current is included in the protection function (residual current correction), this rotation
also has an effect for the differential protection.
[dwstwnas-281112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The setting of the 1-phase measuring point based on the definition is done as follows:
[scedsall-101012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The point in Figure 6-48 describes the polarity of the current transformer. At the same time the current
terminal is designed so that this side is fed out on an odd number terminal point. Since in the SIPROTEC 5
system each current transformer can be assigned a 1-phase measuring point, the odd number terminal points
are named in the setting parameters. According to Figure 6-48 the setting must be yes.
• Default setting (_:115) terminal 1,3,5,7 in dir.obj. = yes
The following view can be used to derive the threshold value. The transformer is supplied, for example, via
the delta winding and a 1-pole ground fault occurs on the star side.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 359
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Ground-Fault Differential Protection
i
NOTE
For estimation of the short-circuit current, note that the inductance changes quadratically with the winding
and the linearly with the voltage.
The right part in the following figure represents the fault current as a function of the fault point. The fault
current curve IF1 shows that the longitudinal differential protection with faults near the neutral point has sensi-
tivity problems due to the sinking current. On the other hand, the neutral-point current IF2 is sufficiently large.
There is therefore no need to set the Threshold (current through the neutral point transformer) to sensitive.
[dwf1pole-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-50 Principal Fault Current Curves with a 1-Pole Ground Fault
[foschwe1-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The following lower limiting value results from the data from Figure 6-44:
360 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Ground-Fault Differential Protection
[foschwe2-041012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fostbref-231012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[dwsteiga-221012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If you have several measuring points on an outgoing side (see Figure 6-43), Siemens recommends using the
value 3 I/Irated,S in the intersection calculation for the restraint current. In the load case, the maximum trans-
former rated current flows on one side.
If, however, several measuring points are on the supply side (for example, 1 1/2 circuit-breaker application),
Siemens recommends including all phase currents in the intersection calculation, in order to avoid too strong
of a stabilization. With 2 measuring points, a value of 6 I/Irated,S results as intersection with the threshold
value. The slope becomes flatter (0.2 I/Irated,S/6 I/Irated,S = 0.03).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 361
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Ground-Fault Differential Protection
[dwsptran-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-52 Activation and Application Example of an Auto Transformer (500 MVA: 400 kV, 230 kV;
125 MVA: 34.5 kV)
Use the highest side rated current with the auto transformer for normalization. In the example (Figure 6-52),
the measuring point is M2 (230 kV side). For this side, a rated current of 500 MVA/(√(3) · 230 kV) = 1255 A
results. The primary transformer rated current is 1500 A. With this, you can estimate the minimum permissible
pickup value.
[foscwe01-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
362 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Ground-Fault Differential Protection
To determine the Slope, the restraint current of both sides (400 kV and 230 kV) must be used. The rated
current is used as starting value for the gradient. Since side 2 (230 kV) is the reference side for the normali-
zation, the value of the 400 kV side must be adapted to this rated current. The adaptation factor results from
the inverse ratio (230 kV/400 kV). The following restraint current goes into the calculation:
[fostbrst-231012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[dwrefspa-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
To also capture faults in the resistance to ground, a current transformer must be installed at the neutral point
of the protected object (see Figure 6-53). The pickup values can be derived from the data in the example. As
side rated value, the following results:
140 MVA/(√3 · 20 kV) = 4042 A
The following threshold value results as lower limit:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 363
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Ground-Fault Differential Protection
[foschwe3-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fosteig1-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[foschwe4-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The attainable protection range amounts to approx. 66.4 %. In order to capture ground faults near the neutral
point, it is also recommended to connect a sensitive ground current protection to the neutral point trans-
former. You must coordinate its operate time with the line protection.
i
NOTE
Ensure that the protection range further limits itself with larger neutral-point resistances, or the ground-fault
differential protection can no longer be used.
364 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Ground-Fault Differential Protection
[dwstrpkt-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[foschwe5-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the fault is in the middle of the winding, the minimum ground current will arise, as shown in Figure 6-54. The
driving voltage is:
Vgndmin = Vrated,S2/(2 √3) = 34.5 kV/(2 √3) = 9.96 kV
The following minimum ground current results:
IEmin = VEmin/RE = 9.96 kV/19.05 Ω = 523 A
With reference to the side rated current, the relationship is:
Igndmin/Irated,S = 523 A/2343 A = 0.223
With a safety margin of 2, 0.223/2 = 0.1115 results. Select this value as threshold value (rounded: 0.12 I/
Irated,S).
• Recommended setting value (_:103) Threshold = 0.12 I/Irated,S
As gradient, the following results:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 365
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Ground-Fault Differential Protection
[fosteig2-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[dwanquer-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[foschwe6-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
6.4.5 Settings
366 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Ground-Fault Differential Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 367
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Ground-Fault Differential Protection
368 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
• Trips 3-phase
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 369
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
[dwstrg3p-090212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Operation Direction
Ground-fault detection determines whether a fault with ground contact has occurred. The pickup method
releases the measurement loops. For the released loops, the impedance is calculated. The calculated impe-
dance is assigned to the operate curves (quadrilateral, MHO, or circular characteristic7) of the zones. In the
Impedance pickup method, the load cutout is then analyzed and the apparent impedances eliminated. For
all picked up loops, the direction is then determined. The loop selection determines which loops are actually
selected and which loops lie within the operate curves of the zones (loop pickup). All other loops are removed
during loop elimination. For the picked up loops, the time delay in the zone logic is started. The zone logic
forms the pickup and trip signals of the loops and phases for the zone. The output logic processes the pickup
and trip signals of the zones and forms the pickup and trip signals of the distance protection.
Ground-Fault Detection
Ground-fault detection checks whether a fault with ground contact has occurred. If a fault with ground contact
has occurred, the measuring elements for the phase-to-ground loops are released.
For ground-fault detection, the following criteria are available:
• Monitoring of the residual current 3I0
• Monitoring of the ratio of the residual current and negative-sequence current (3I0/3I2)
Current and voltage criteria complement one another (see Figure 6-57). If the ratio of zero-sequence impe-
dance to positive-sequence impedance is greater, zero voltage increases. If the ratio of zero sequence impe-
dance to positive-sequence impedance is small, the ground current increases. The Ground-fault detec-
tion parameter determines the criterion used to perform ground fault recognition.
If a phase current leads to current-transformer saturation, the voltage criterion must be met for ground-fault
detection. Uneven saturation of current transformers can lead to a secondary residual current without a
primary residual current flowing. Automatic scanning of the voltage criterion in the event of current-trans-
former saturation prevents unwanted ground-fault detection.
Ground-fault detection alone does not lead to the general pickup of the distance protection; it only controls
other pickup modules. Ground-fault detection is also not indicated on its own.
7in preparation
370 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
[loerdfeh-240511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The residual-current criterion monitors the fundamental component of the sum of phase currents for
exceeding a settable value (parameter 3I0> threshold value).
The residual-current criterion is stabilized against unwanted pickup for the following cases:
• Residual currents due to unbalanced load conditions
• Residual currents in the event of faults without ground contact due to differing saturation of phase-
current transformers
[dwklerds-060611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
For long, highly loaded lines, high load currents can lead to destabilization of the residual-current criterion
(see Figure 6-58). For the detection of ground faults, the load-independent negative-sequence current crite-
rion is extended. In addition to the residual current, the ratio of residual current to negative-sequence current
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 371
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
is also monitored. In a 1-phase short circuit, the negative-sequence current I2 is approximately as high as the
residual current I0. If the ratio of residual current to negative-sequence current exceeds a preset limit, the
criterion is released. The residual-current/negative-sequence current criterion is stabilized for high negative-
sequence currents using a parabolic characteristic. Figure 6-59 shows the connection. A prerequisite for
release of the residual-current/negative-sequence current criterion is a minimum current of 0.2· Irated for 3I0.
[dwkli0i2-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The zero voltage is monitored for exceeding a set value (parameter V0> threshold value). The reset
value is about 95 % of the pickup value. In grounded networks, monitoring of the zero voltage can be used as
an additional ground-fault criterion.
Pickup Method
The pickup method selects the fault loops to be measured.
Impedance pickup is preconfigured as the pickup method.
Zone Assignment
The calculated impedance vectors for the fault loops are assigned to the zones. For each zone, an operate
curve is defined in the R-X plane. The following operate curves are available:
• Quadrilateral characteristic
• MHO characteristic curve
The description of operate curves can be found in sections 6.5.9.1 Description and 6.5.10.1 Description/
Direction Determination
You can define for each zone whether the zone should work forwards, backwards, or non-direc-
tional. For directional zones, you define the direction in the R-X level. When assigning the impedance
phasors in the R-X level, the direction is then additionally analyzed. The description can be found in Chapter
6.5.4 Direction Determination .
372 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
For double ground-fault protection, 2 phase-to-ground loops generally pick up. If both ground faults are in the
same direction, this can also lead to pick up in the associated phase-to-phase loop. The Loop select.
with ph-ph-g parameter is used to restrict analysis to certain loops.
In a 3-phase short circuit, all phase-to-phase loops generally pick up. In this case, the 3 phase-to-phase loops
are analyzed. If a fault is detected with ground contact, the phase-to-ground loops are also analyzed.
Output Logic
The output logic of the function Distance protection for grounded networks links the output signals of the
zones and forms the group trip signal of the function.
The description of the output logics can be found in section 6.5.12 Output Logic of the Distance Protection .
• Blocking of the pickup during impedance starting by blocking the external distance zone(s)
The Inrush-current detection can be configured individually for the blocking of the mentioned pickup
methods and distance zones. In case of blocking, the distance zone that is linked to the inrush-current detec-
tion or the pickup method will not pick-up. The function Inrush-current detection signals the blocking
through a corresponding indication. Once the blocking drops out and the pickup condition for the respective
method or the linked distance zone is met, the pickup is signaled and the corresponding time delay will start.
After that time, the operate indication will be generated. Only if the central function Inrush-current detection
(see section 6.44.1 Overview of Functions ) is in effect can the blocking be set.
EXAMPLE:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 373
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
Calculate the line angle from the data of the positive-sequence impedance on the line to be protected:
[foflwink-290411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If you need to coordinate the function with other equipment, you can also set the inclination angle of the
distance protection characteristic differently.
374 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
3I0 pickup stabilization parameter is used to avoid unwanted ground activation. If no extreme
power-system unbalance and unusually large current-transformer errors are expected, Siemens recommends
keeping the default value of 0.10.
• Default setting (_:2311:108) Loop select. with ph-ph-g = block leading phase
The Loop select. with ph-ph-g parameter is used to determine which loops will be analyzed by the
distance protection in the event of double ground faults. You can restrict the analysis to certain loops. If you
wish to restrict analysis to certain loops, they must have the same direction.
In the case of a bilateral infeed to one common fault resistance with respect to ground, the phase-to-ground
loop of the leading phase tends to overreach, that is, the leading phase-to-ground loop is measured too small.
If you set the parameter Loop select. with ph-ph-g = block leading phase, these loops will not
be analyzed.
The following table shows which loops are analyzed for different settings of the Loop select. with ph-
ph-g parameter:
Parameter Value Picked Up Loops Analyzed Loop(s)
block leading phase A-gnd, B-gnd, A-B B-gnd, A-B
B-gnd, C-gnd, B-C C-gnd, B-C
A-gnd, C-gnd, C-A A-gnd, C-A
block lagging phase A-gnd, B-gnd, A-B A-gnd, A-B
B-gnd, C-gnd, B-C B-gnd, B-C
A-gnd, C-gnd, C-A C-gnd, C-A
all A-gnd, B-gnd, A-B A-gnd, B-gnd, A-B
B-gnd, C-gnd, B-C B-gnd, C-gnd, B-C
A-gnd, C-gnd, C-A A-gnd, C-gnd, C-A
ph-ph only A-gnd, B-gnd, A-B A-B
B-gnd, C-gnd, B-C B-C
A-gnd, C-gnd, C-A C-A
ph-gnd only A-gnd, B-gnd, A-B A-gnd, B-gnd
B-gnd, C-gnd, B-C B-gnd, C-gnd
A-gnd, C-gnd, C-A A-gnd, C-gnd
In a double line, ground faults may occur simultaneously on both lines. To avoid blocking of the internal fault
loop, you must set the parameter Loop select. with ph-ph-g to ph-gnd only or all for this applica-
tion. To ensure the selectivity of protection, reduce the range of the underreaching zone.
i
NOTE
You see the parameter Parallel-line compensat. only if the ground current of the parallel line is
available in the Line function group. To do this, connect the measuring point I-1ph (ground current of the
parallel line) to the Line function group in DIGSI 5.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 375
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
i
NOTE
Only if you are working with MHO characteristics the following parameters will be visible:
• Mem. polarization(ph-g)
• Mem. polarization(ph-ph)
• Cross polarization(ph-g)
• Cross polarization(ph-ph)
The parameters apply to all MHO zones!
6.5.2.4 Settings
376 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 377
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
378 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 379
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
380 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 381
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
• Trips 3-phase
382 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
[dwstriso-090212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Operation Direction
Ground-fault detection determines whether a fault with ground contact has occurred. The pickup method
releases the measurement loops. For the released loops, the impedance is calculated. The calculated impe-
dance is assigned to the operate curves (quadrilateral, MHO, or circular characteristic8) of the zones. In the
Impedance pickup method, the load cutout is then analyzed and the apparent impedances eliminated. For
all picked up loops, the direction is then determined. The loop selection determines which loops are actually
selected and which loops lie within the operate curves of the zones (loop pickup). All other loops are removed
during loop elimination. For the picked up loops, the time delay in the zone logic is started. The zone logic
forms the pickup and trip signals of the loops and phases for the zone. The output logic processes the pickup
and trip signals of the zones and forms the pickup and trip signals of the distance protection.
Ground-Fault Detection
Ground-fault detection checks whether a fault with ground contact has occurred. If a fault with ground contact
has occurred, the measuring elements for the phase-to-ground loops are released.
For ground-fault detection, the following criteria are available:
• Monitoring of the residual current 3I0
• Monitoring of the ratio of the residual current and negative-sequence current (3I0/3I2)
8in preparation
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 383
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
[losymerk-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-62 shows the logic of the error identification in isolated or resonant-grounded systems.
If the following conditions are met, the ground-fault detection responds for double ground faults with very low
ground currents:
• The residual current is 10 % of the measured negative-sequence current I2
• The residual current is at least 5 % of the secondary rated current
[loisolie-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The residual-current criterion monitors the fundamental component of the sum of phase currents for
exceeding a settable value (parameter 3I0> threshold value).
384 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
The residual-current criterion is stabilized against unwanted pickup for the following cases:
• Residual currents due to unbalanced load conditions
• Residual currents in the event of faults without ground contact due to differing saturation of phase-
current transformers
[dwklerds-060611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
For long lines, high load currents can lead to destabilization of the residual-current criterion (see Figure 6-63).
For the detection of double ground faults, the load-independent negative-sequence current criterion is
extended. In addition to the residual current, the ratio of residual current to negative-sequence current is also
monitored. If the ratio of residual current to negative-sequence current exceeds a preset limit, the criterion is
released. The residual current/negative-sequence current criterion is stabilized for high negative-sequence
currents using a parabolic characteristic. Figure 6-64 shows the connection. A prerequisite for release of the
residual-current/negative-sequence current criterion is a minimum current of 0.2· Irated for 3I0.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 385
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
[dwkli0i2-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Only for current-transformer saturation, the zero-sequence voltage criterion is taken into account for the
release of the ground-fault detection for double ground faults. If V0 exceeds the firmly set threshold of 0.23 V
Vrated, the zero-sequence voltage criterion is released.
Pickup Method
The pickup method selects the fault loops to be measured.
Impedance pickup is preconfigured as the pickup method.
Zone Assignment
The calculated impedance vectors for the fault loops are assigned to the zones. For each zone, an operate
curve is defined in the R-X plane. The following operate curves are available:
• Polygonal characteristic (preconfigured)
• MHO characteristic curve
The description of operate curves can be found in sections 6.5.9.1 Description and 6.5.10.1 Description/
Direction Determination
You can define for each zone whether the zone should work forwards, backwards, or non-direc-
tional. For directional zones, you define the direction in the R-X level. When assigning the impedance
phasors in the R-X level, the direction is then additionally analyzed. The description can be found in Chapter
6.5.4 Direction Determination .
386 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
[dwerdslu-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If a ground fault occurs, a significant starting current can flow in an extended resonant-grounded system. This
can result in a pickup of the ground-current pickup. Special measures must be taken to prevent unwanted
pickups when a ground fault occurs.
Specify a uniform double ground-fault preference for the galvanically contiguous system. This specifies which
fault will be switched off.
For a double ground fault in the isolated or resonant-grounded system, it is enough to switch off one base
point. The second fault can remain in the system as a simple ground fault. Specify a uniform double ground-
fault preference for the galvanically contiguous system. This specifies which fault will be switched off. The
Phase preferen. (ph-ph-g) parameter is used to define the order of preference. The following double
ground-fault preferences can be selected.
Setting for Parameter Phase preferen. (ph-ph- Principle of Preference
g)
C(A) acyclical Acyclical L3 before L1 before L2
A(C) acyclic Acyclic A before C before B
B(A) acyclic Acyclic B before A before C
A(B) acyclic Acyclic A before B before C
C(B) acyclic Acyclic C before B before A
B(C) acyclic Acyclic B before C before A
C(A) cyclic Cyclical C before A before B
A(C) cyclic Cyclic A before C before B before A
In the 8 preference cases, a ground fault will be switched off according to the preference program. The
second fault remains as a simple ground fault in the system and can be detected using the Ground-fault
detection function.
• Blocking of the pickup during impedance starting by blocking the external distance zone(s)
The Inrush-current detection can be configured individually for the blocking of the mentioned pickup
methods and distance zones. In case of blocking, the distance zone that is linked to the inrush-current detec-
tion or the pickup method will not pick-up. The function Inrush-current detection signals the blocking
through a corresponding indication. Once the blocking drops out and the pickup condition for the respective
method or the linked distance zone is met, the pickup is signaled and the corresponding time delay will start.
After that time, the operate indication will be generated. Only if the central function Inrush-current detection
(see section 6.44.1 Overview of Functions ) is in effect can the blocking be set.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 387
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
EXAMPLE:
Calculate the line angle from the data of the positive-sequence impedance (Z1) on the line to be protected:
[foflwink-290411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If you need to coordinate the function with other equipment, you can also set the inclination angle of the
distance protection characteristic differently.
388 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
If you wish to switch off both base points of a ground fault, set the parameter Phase preferen. (ph-ph-
g) = all.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 389
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
The parameter Max. unbalance Vph-ph can be used to specify the maximum permitted unbalance for
phase-to-phase voltages in the healthy condition. Determine the setting value for the specific application.
i
NOTE
Only if you are working with MHO characteristics the following parameters will be visible:
• Mem. polarization(ph-g)
• Mem. polarization(ph-ph)
• Cross polarization(ph-g)
• Cross polarization(ph-ph)
The parameters apply to all MHO zones!
6.5.3.4 Settings
390 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 391
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
392 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 393
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
394 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 395
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
To determine the direction of a short circuit, an impedance phasor is used for each loop. Depending on the
quality of the measurands, different calculation methods can be used. Immediately after a fault occurs, the
short-circuit voltage is influenced by the compensation procedure. Hence, the voltage buffered before the
occurrence of the short circuit is used. If the steady state short-circuit voltage (for a nearby fault) is also too
small for direction determination, an external short-circuit voltage is used. This is theoretically perpendicular
to the actual short-circuit voltages. This applies both to phase-to-phase loops and to phase-to-ground loops
(Figure 6-66). This is taken into consideration with a 90° rotation during the calculation of the directional
vector. Table 6-2 shows the assignment of the measurands to the 6 fault loops for determining the direction.
[dwksfreu-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
396 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
If a sufficient existing or buffered voltage is available for direction determination, the system decides on
forward. If a dead line is connected and this line is faulty (for example, switching when the grounding switch
is engaged), this case can occur.
The theoretical steady state direction-characteristic curve is shown in Figure 6-67.
If buffered voltages are used, the following factors influence the position of the direction-characteristic curve:
• The source impedance
• The power transported on the line before occurrence of the short circuit
For this reason, the direction-characteristic curve has a reserve distance from the limits of the first quadrant in
the R-X diagram (Figure 6-67).
[dwritgkl-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Since each zone can be set to forward, backward or non-directional, different (reflected through the
center) direction-characteristic curves are used for forward and backward. A non-directional zone has no
direction-characteristic curve. For such a zone, the entire trip region applies.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 397
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
If external short-circuit or buffered voltages are used, the following factors influence the position of the direc-
tion-characteristic curve:
• The source impedance
• The power transported on the line before occurrence of the short circuit
Figure 6-68 shows the direction-characteristic curve, taking the source impedance into consideration for
external short-circuit or buffered voltages (without load transport). Since these voltages are equal to the
corresponding generator voltage E, and they also do not change after the short circuit occurs, the direction-
characteristic curve appears in the impedance diagram shifted by the source impedance ZS1 = E1/I1. For
fault location F1 (Figure 6-68a), the short circuit lies in the forward direction, and the source impedance is in
the backward direction. For all fault locations up to directly where the device is installed (current transformer),
there is a consensus for forward (Figure 6-68b). If the current reverses, the orientation of the direction-char-
acteristic curve changes suddenly (Figure 6-68c). A reversed current I now flows through the measuring point
(current transformer). 2. The source impedance ZS2 + ZL determines the value of I2. During load transport on
the line, the direction-characteristic curve can also rotate by the load angle.
[dwrspeiu-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
398 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
[dwrserko-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-69 Voltage Characteristic for a Short Circuit Upstream of a Series Capacitor
The distance protection thus senses a false fault direction. But in this case as well, measurement of direction
is correct due to the use of buffered voltages (see Figure 6-70a).
For direction determination, the voltage before the occurrence of the fault is used. Thus the peaks of the
direction-characteristic curves, depending on the source impedance and load conditions before occurrence of
the fault, appear shifted so far that the capacitor reactance does not lead to apparent reversal of direction
(Figure 6-70b). The capacitor reactance is always lower than the pre-reactance.
If the short circuit is downstream of the capacitor – thus in reverse direction from where the device is installed
(current transformer) – the peaks of the direction-characteristic curve are shifted in the other direction
(Figure 6-70c). This also ensures a correct direction determination in this case.
[dwrklser-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
So that the direction determination for lines with series compensation functions correctly, you must set the
parameter Series compensation = yes in the Line function group.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 399
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
6.5.5.1 Description
In impedance pickup, the phase currents are monitored. If the phase currents exceed the set Min. phase-
current thresh, the impedances between the phase-to-phase loops are calculated. If a ground fault is
detected, the impedances of the phase-to-ground loops are also calculated.
Impedance pickup includes the elimination of apparent impedance and – if activated – monitoring of the load
cutout.
Healthy Loops
In impedance pickup, all 6 line loops are calculated. Here, the short-circuit currents and voltages of short-
circuited lines also influence the impedances of the healthy loops. For an A-gnd fault, for example, the short-
circuit current in line A also influences the measured values in measurement loops A-B and C-A. The ground
current is also measured in loops B-gnd and C-gnd. Together with load currents flowing, so-called "apparent
impedances" occur in the healthy loops. These have nothing to do with the actual troubleshooting.
These apparent impedances in the healthy loops are typically greater than the fault impedance of the short-
circuit loop. The healthy loops contain only part of the short-circuit current, and always have a higher voltage
than the faulty loop. They are therefore of no significance for the zone selectivity of the protection.
In addition to zone selectivity, phase selectivity is also important. Phase selectivity includes the identification
of the faulty conductor, the generation of phase-selective indications, and the possibility of executing a 1-pole
automatic reclosing function (AREC). Depending on the infeed conditions, short circuits near the station may
have the result that the healthy loops see the short circuit at a greater distance, but they still see it within a
tripping area. This case leads to a disconnection without the option of a 1-pole AREC. The 3-pole disconnec-
tion of the line then results.
Inspecting the loops reliably assures zone and phase selectivity. Loops are inspected in 2 steps.
• From the calculated loop impedance and their partial impedances (phase or ground), a replication of the
line is first simulated.
Load Cutout
For long lines with high loads, there is a risk that the load impedance will be reflected in the operate curve of
the distance protection. For operate curves with high R segments, a load cutout can be configured that elimi-
nates unwanted pickups due to overload. The load cutout (see Figure 6-71 can be configured for phase-to-
phase loops and for phase-to-ground loops.
The parameters are explained in Chapter 6.5.5.2 Application and Setting Notes .
400 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
Load Cutout
The load cutout can be set using the following parameters:
• Default setting (_:102) Use ph-g load cutout = Yes
• Default setting (_:103) R load cutout (ph-g) = 20,000 Ω
[dwlastke-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The values should be set a little smaller (about 10 %) than the minimum load impedance expected. The
minimum load impedance results at maximum load current and minimum operating voltage.
EXAMPLE
Calculation of load-cutout parameters in balanced load conditions
110 kV overhead line, 150 mm2, with the data:
Maximum transmittable power
Pmax = 100 MVA
Imax = 525 A
Minimum operating voltage
Vmin = 0.9 Vrated
Current transformer 600 A/5 A
Voltage transformer 110 kV/0.1 kV
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 401
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
[foltber1-080909-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[foltber2-080909-01.tif, 1, en_US]
With a safety margin of 10 %, the following setting values result for setting the primary and secondary values:
Primary: R load cutout (ph-ph) = 169.71 Ω or
Secondary: R load cutout (ph-ph) = 18.51 Ω
Set the opening angle of the load cutout (parameters Angle load cutout (ph-ph) and Angle load
cutout (ph-g)) greater (approx. 5°) than the maximum occurring load angle (corresponding to the
minimum power factor cos φ).
EXAMPLE
Minimum power factor under heavy load (cos φmax)min = 0.8
φmax = 36.9°
Setting value Angle load cutout (ph-ph) = φmax + 5° = 41.9°
You can find additional setting notes in Example application high voltage overhead line in 6.5.5.2 Application
and Setting Notes
When, with double lines, 2 line systems are on a single tower, there is a significant coupling between the 2
line systems. In the event of a 1-pole tripping of neighboring circuits, increased load currents and coupled
ground currents can cause a ground pickup. This pickup can be prevented by separate setting of the load
cutout for phase-to-ground loops.
During the 1-pole dead time on the parallel line, a significant ground current flows on the intact line. This
ground current is caused by the coupling in the zero-sequence system. The ground current during the single-
phase pause on the parallel line must be taken into consideration when setting the R load cutout (ph-
g) parameter.
EXAMPLE
Calculation of the load-cutout parameters for an application on a double circuit line
This example applies to a double line with zero-sequence system coupling of both line systems and 1-pole
tripping on one system in the double line.
The set values for the load cutout parameters are calculated for a 400-kV overhead line with the following
data:
220 km double line on one tower (zero system coupling of both line systems)
Maximum load current per line with both lines in operation:
Pmax = 1200 MVA
Imax = 1732 A
402 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
[fofr1bs2-051109-01.tif, 1, en_US]
This calculated value applies to phase-to-phase loops. For double lines, the 1-pole dead time on the parallel
line must also be taken into consideration for phase-to-ground loops. During the 1-pole dead time, the load
current on the intact line increases. At the same time, a load current flows in the ground path on the parallel
line in the 1-pole dead time. Calculate the minimum load impedance for phase-to-ground loops with the load
current in the ground path. For the calculation in this example, this ground current is given as a value relative
to the load current Imax.
For the ratio of Ignd on the healthy line to Imax in the 1-phase pause on the parallel line, the following value is
assumed:
[fofx2bs2-051109-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The line length as well as the source impedance and line impedance have an influence on this ratio. If you
cannot determine the value using a system simulation, you can assume the following approximate values:
Long lines (about 200 km) Ignd1phase:Pause/Imax: About 0.4
Short lines (about 25 km) Ignd1phase:Pause/Imax: About 0.6
The minimum load impedance for phase-to-ground loops results in the following for the calculation example:
[fofr2bs2-270910-01.tif, 1, en_US]
When parameterizing using PC and DIGSI, you can select to enter the values as the primary or secondary
variables. Conversion into secondary values yields:
[fofr3bs2-051109-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fofr4bs2-051109-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The opening angle of the load cutout, as in the first example for the single line, is calculated using the
minimum power factor.
6.5.5.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 403
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
6.5.6.1 Description
In overcurrent pickup, the phase currents are monitored. If the phase currents exceed the set values O/C
threshold Iph>>, a phase-selective pickup signal is output.
The phase-selective pickup signals are converted to loop information for the distance zones. If the network is
grounded, the loop selection for 1-phase pickup without ground-fault detection depends on parameter Loops
with 1-ph. pickup.
For more information about ground-fault detection in grounded systems, please refer to chapter 6.5.2.2 Struc-
ture of the Function .
If the network is not grounded, the selection of the 1-phase pickup without ground-fault detection always
depends on the max. current in the phases that are not picked up.
For more information about ground-fault detection in isolated/arc-suppression-coil-ground systems, please
refer to chapter 6.5.3.2 Structure of the Function .
The pickup will be indicated phase-selectively. If a ground fault is detected, it will be indicated.
404 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
i
NOTE
If you have set the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes, the minimum pickup and
operate time for theis distance zone is about 1.5 line periods, even if no transformer inrush current is
detected. Set the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes only if you really need blocking
on the basis of inrush-current detection.
• Recommended setting value (_:114) Loops with 1-ph. pickup =ph-ph or ph-gnd loop
i
NOTE
Only if you instantiated Distance protection for grounded networks, will the parameter Loops with
1-ph. pickup be valid and visible.
When using parameter Loops with 1-ph. pickup, you determine which loop will be measured during 1-
phase pickup without ground-fault detection.
Parameter Value Description
ph-ph or ph-gnd loop During 1-phase pickup without ground-fault detection, the selection of the loop
always depends on the max. current in the phases that are not picked up. If a
current in the phases that are not picked up exceed 2/3 of the current in the
phase that is picked up, the respective phase-phase loop will be selected, e.g.:
• Pickup A, IB > IC and IB > 2/3 IA → Selection loop A-B
• Pickup A, IC > IB and IC > 2/3 IA → Selection loop A-C
Otherwise, the phase-to-ground loop will be selected, e.g.:
Pickup A, IB and IC < 2/3 IA → Selection loop A-E
phase-to-ground loop During 1-phase pickup without ground fault detection, the zone will work with
the phase-to-ground measuring element. If A is picked up, the A-E loop will be
selected
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 405
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
If a forward fault has occurred and the time Op. delay forward pickup (directional finite time) has
elapsed, the overcurrent pickup initiates an operate indication. The time Op. delay forward pickup
responds independently of the distance zones pickup.
Set the parameter Op. delay forward pickup for the specific application.
6.5.6.3 Settings
6.5.7.1 Description
V/I pickup is a phase- and loop-based pickup method. The following figure shows the V/I pickup character-
istic:
406 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
[DwUIanreg-160813-01, 1, en_US]
The geometry of the V/I characteristic is determined by the parameters shown in the figure (dots).
A requirement for pickup is that the phase currents have exceeded the set threshold value Min. current
thresh. Iph>. If phase-to-phase voltages are being evaluated, both associated phase currents must
exceed the Min. current thresh. Iph>.
If the phase currents are greater than the Min. current thresh. Iph>, the pickup value depends on the
voltage. The voltage settings in Figure 6-72 determine the slope of the V/I characteristic.
With the Pickup program parameter, you control which voltages are evaluated in the case of ground faults
or phase-to-phase faults. In this way, you can adjust the V/I characteristic to provide optimum response to
various fault types and system conditions. The following table shows which voltage settings define the char-
acteristic in Figure 6-72:
For high-current short-circuits, overcurrent pickup O/C threshold Iph>> is superimposed. If the phase
currents exceed the threshold value O/C threshold Iph>>, pickup occurs regardless of the voltage.
In isolated/arc-suppression-coil-grounded systems, pickup is undesired for single-phase ground faults.
Ground-fault detection prevents undesired pickup in the case of single-phase ground faults.
For more information about ground-fault detection in isolated/arc-suppression-coil-ground systems, please
refer to chapter 6.5.3.2 Structure of the Function .
The pickup will be indicated phase-selectively. Ground faults are indicated only if at least one phase pickup
has occurred.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 407
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter is visible only when the Inrush-current detection func-
tion is available in the application. With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you determine
whether pickup is blocked during the detection of a transformer inrush current.
i
NOTE
If you have set the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes, the minimum pickup and
operate time for theis distance zone is about 1.5 line periods, even if no transformer inrush current is
detected. Set the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes only if you really need blocking
on the basis of inrush-current detection.
408 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
other feeders. If the Min. current thresh. Iph> is not exceeded in some short circuits – depending on
system conditions – you will have to take special measures for the weak infeed. Siemens recommends using
the default setting Min. current thresh. Iph> = 0.200 A.
• Recommended setting value (_:114) Loops with 1-ph. pickup = ph-ph or ph-gnd loop
i
NOTE
Only if you instantiated Distance protection for grounded networks, will the parameter Loops with
1-ph. pickup be valid and visible.
When using parameter Loops with 1-ph. pickup, you determine which loop will be measured during 1-
phase pickup without ground-fault detection.
Parameter Value Description
ph-ph or ph-gnd loop During 1-phase pickup without ground-fault detection, the selection of the loop
always depends on the max. current in the phases that are not picked up. If a
current in the phases that are not picked up exceed 2/3 of the current in the
phase that is picked up, the respective phase-phase loop will be selected, e.g.:
• Pickup A, IB > IC and IB > 2/3 IA → Selection loop A-B
• Pickup A, IC > IB and IC > 2/3 IA → Selection loop A-C
Otherwise, the phase-to-ground loop will be selected, e.g.:
Pickup A, IB and IC < 2/3 IA → Selection loop A-E
phase-to-ground loop During 1-phase pickup without ground fault detection, the zone will work with
the phase-to-ground measuring element. If A is picked up, the A-E loop will be
selected
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 409
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
6.5.7.3 Settings
410 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
6.5.8.1 Description
V/I/j pickup is a phase- and loop-based pickup method. The following figure shows the V/I pickup character-
istic:
[DwUIPhia-160813-01, 1, en_US]
The basic structure of the V/I/j characteristic is identical to that for V/I pickup with an additional, sensitive
angle-controlled characteristic (short-circuit region j> in Figure 6-73). The sensitive characteristic (a-d-e) is
used if the fault impedance is close to the straight lines. In this way, it is still possible to differentiate reliably
between load and short-circuit conditions in cases where simple V/I pickup fails.
Possible applications include, for instance, protection of long power lines or power line segments with inter-
mediate infeed and low external impedance at the same time. In the event of a short circuit at the end of the
line or in the distance protection backup range, the local measured voltage is interrupted only briefly. In this
case, the phase angle between the current and voltage serves as an additional criterion for fault detection.
The angle-dependent region of the characteristic (hatched area in Figure 6-73) can be set for the forward
direction only (line direction) or both directions.
A requirement for pickup is that the phase currents have exceeded the set threshold value Min. current
thresh. Iph>. If phase-to-phase voltages are being evaluated, both associated phase currents must
exceed the Min. current thresh. Iph>.
If the phase currents are greater than the Min. current thresh. Iph>, the pickup value depends on the
voltage and the phase angle between the current and voltage. The voltage settings in Figure 6-73 determine
the slope of the U/I-/j characteristic.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 411
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
With the Pickup program parameter, you control which voltages are evaluated in the case of ground faults
or phase-to-phase faults. In this way, you can adjust the V/I-/j characteristic to provide optimum response to
various fault types and network conditions. The following table shows which voltage settings define the char-
acteristic in Figure 6-73:
Setting When Evaluating Phase- Setting When Evaluating Phase-
to-Ground Voltages to-Phase Voltages
V(Iph>) Undervolt. phase-ground for Undervolt. phase-phase for Iph>
Iph>
V(Iph>>) Undervolt. phase-ground for Undervolt. phase-phase for
Iph>> Iph>>
V(Iphi>) Undervolt. phase-ground for Undervolt. phase-phase for Iphi>
Iphi>
The phase angle between the current and voltage is determined as follows:
• If you are evaluating phase-to-ground voltages, the phase angle is determined from the phase-to-ground
voltage and the associated phase current without consideration of the ground current. A requirement is
that the corresponding phase current must have exceeded the minimum phase current Iph>.
• If you are evaluating phase-to-phase voltages, the angle is determined from the phase-to-phase voltage
and the associated current difference. A requirement is that both phase currents and the definitive differ-
ential current for the loop must have exceeded the minimum phase current Iph>.
With the j< and j> parameters, you define the upper and lower limits of the short-circuit angle range (see
following figure).
[DwUIphiK-160813-01, 1, en_US]
If the phase angle is greater than the limit angle j> and less than the limit angle j<, the sensitive V/I/j char-
acteristic applies (a-d-e). Otherwise, the lower characteristic applies (a-b-c).
412 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
i
NOTE
If you have set the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes, the minimum pickup time is
about 1.5 line periods, even if no transformer inrush current is detected. Set the parameter Blk. w.
inrush curr. detect. = yes only if you really need blocking on the basis of inrush-current detec-
tion.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 413
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
Parameter: φ>
414 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
Set the φ> parameter between the load angle jL and the short-circuit angle jK. Set the φ> parameter 10° to
20° smaller than the line angle (jL = arctan(XL/RL)). Ensure that unfavorable load conditions do not result in
pickup.
Parameter: φ<
• Recommended setting value (_:114) Loops with 1-ph. pickup = ph-ph or ph-gnd loop
i
NOTE
Only if you instantiated Distance protection for grounded networks, will the parameter Loops with
1-ph. pickup be valid and visible.
When using parameter Loops with 1-ph. pickup, you determine which loop will be measured during 1-
phase pickup without ground-fault detection.
Parameter Value Description
ph-ph or ph-gnd loop During 1-phase pickup without ground-fault detection, the selection of the loop
always depends on the max. current in the phases that are not picked up. If a
current in the phases that are not picked up exceed 2/3 of the current in the
phase that is picked up, the respective phase-phase loop will be selected, e.g.:
• Pickup A, IB > IC and IB > 2/3 IA → Selection loop A-B
• Pickup A, IC > IB and IC > 2/3 IA → Selection loop A-C
Otherwise, the phase-to-ground loop will be selected, e.g.:
Pickup A, IB and IC < 2/3 IA → Selection loop A-E
phase-to-ground loop During 1-phase pickup without ground fault detection, the zone will work with
the phase-to-ground measuring element. If A is picked up, the A-E loop will be
selected
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 415
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
6.5.8.3 Settings
416 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
6.5.9.1 Description
Logic of a Zone
[lopoly3p-060611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 417
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
Operation Direction
The zone handles the following tasks:
• Impedance calculation from the measured current and voltage values
• Placement of the impedance into the zone
Working Polygon
The quadrilateral characteristic (working polygon) of the zone is an inclined parallelogram in the R-X plane.
The working polygon is defined by the parameters X reach, R (ph-ph), R (ph-g), and Zone-inclina-
tion angle.
To stabilize the polygon limits, the characteristics have a hysteresis of 5%. If the fault impedance lies within a
polygon, the limits are increased by 5% in all directions.
The following figure shows an example with 4 zones for the distance protection with quadrilateral operate
curve.
[dwklpoly-060611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
418 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
i
NOTE
You can rename or delete the zones in DIGSI. You can also add additional zones from the DIGSI function
library.
[foflschl-160909-01.tif, 1, en_US]
with
(complex) measurands
(complex) line impedance
[folimped-240609-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[dwllschl-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
As long as one of the lines involved is switched off, for example, during the 1-pole dead time of the automatic
reclosing, the phase-to-phase loops involved are not calculated. During the 1-pole dead time of the automatic
reclosing in A, for example, the loops A-B and C-A are blocked. This prevents an incorrect measurement with
undefined measurands. The process monitor in the Line function group observes the state of the automatic
reclosing and provides the blocking signal.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 419
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
[dwleschl-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The voltage VC-gnd, the phase current IC, and the ground current Ignd of the faulty loop are measured.
[fofeschl-150909-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[foreform-240609-01.tif, 1, en_US]
and
[foxeform-240609-01.tif, 1, en_US]
with
VC-gnd Short-circuit voltage phasor
IC Short-circuit current phasor (phase C)
Ignd Phasor of the ground-fault current
φV Phase angle of the short-circuit voltage
φph Short-circuit current phasor (phase C)
φgnd Phase angle of the ground-fault current
The factors Kr = Rgnd/Rph and Kx = Xgnd/Xph depend only on the line constants and not on the distance to the
fault.
i
NOTE
In the impedance calculation, the factors Kr and Kx are used for residual compensation. If you enter the
grounding resistance factors in the format k0 with Phi(k0), they are automatically converted into Kr and
Kx. Conversion is performed under consideration of the line angle. For this reason, pay attention to the
correct setting of the line angle in the general data of the Line function group (parameter (_:9001:108)
Line angle).
As long as one of the phases involved is switched off, for example, during the 1-pole dead time of the auto-
matic reclosing, the phase-to-ground loops involved are not calculated. During the 1-pole dead time in the
automatic reclosing in C, the C-gnd loop is blocked, for example. This prevents an incorrect measurement
420 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
with undefined measurands. The process monitor observes the state of the automatic reclosing and provides
the blocking signal.
[fofokpl1-150909-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fofokpl2-150909-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Ignd-P is the ground current of the parallel line. The ratios R0M/3Rph and X0M/3Xph are line constants that result
from the geometry of the double line and the suitability of the grounding.
[dweksdol-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Without parallel-line compensation, the ground current of the parallel line leads in most cases to a move-back
of the breakdown point (the distance measurement falls short, that is, the impedance is too large). If both
lines end on different busbars and the grounding point is on a remote busbar (at B in Figure 6-79), overreach
can result.
The parallel-line compensation applies only to faults on the line to be protected. Compensation may not be
carried out for faults on the parallel line, since it would cause significant overreach. At installation point II in
Figure 6-79, no compensation may occur for this fault situation.
The device thus receives an additional ground-current balance to perform a cross-comparison of the ground
currents in both lines. The compensation is only connected for those line ends where the ground current of
the parallel line is less than that of the end's own line. In example Figure 6-79, Ignd is greater than Ignd-P:
There is compensation in I in that ZM · Ignd-P is coupled in; in II there is no compensation.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 421
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
i
NOTE
When you have set the parameters Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes, the minimum pickup and
operate time for this distance protection zone is about 1.5 line periods, even if no transformer-inrush
current is detected. Set the parameters Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes only if you really
need the blocking by the Inrush-Current Detection.
Parameter: X reach
422 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
Parameter: R (ph-g)
Parameter: R (ph-ph)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 423
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
i
NOTE
Only if you set the parameter Zone-spec. residu. comp. = yes in the zone will the residual compen-
sation factors set here be valid and visible. If you set the parameter Zone-spec. residu. comp. = no,
the residual compensation factors set for the device apply.
Parameter: Kr and Kx
i
NOTE
The parameters Zone-spec. residu. comp. and Set. format residu. comp. are visible in the
zone only if you have set the parameter Kr = yes in the zone and the parameter Kx = Kr, Kx for the
device. You can only change the setting value of the parameter Set. format residu. comp. in
DIGSI 5 under Device settings.
An example of calculation of the Kr and Kx parameters from line data can be found in the High-voltage over-
head-line application example in Chapter 6.5.13.3 Setting Notes for Function Group Line ..
i
NOTE
The parameters Zone-spec. residu. comp. and Set. format residu. comp. are visible in the
zone only if you have set the parameter K0 = yes in the zone and the parameter Angle (K0) = K0 for
the device. You can only change the setting value of the parameter Set. format residu. comp. in
DIGSI 5 under Device settings.
424 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
i
NOTE
For short lines with large R/X ratios, note the following during zone setting: The angle errors of the current
and voltage transformers cause a rotation of the impedance measured in the direction of the R axis. The
risk that external faults will be shifted into the first zone increases if, because of the settings for the
polygon, kr and kx, the loop range is large in the R direction in relation to the X director for Zone 1. Use the
grading factor of 85% only up to an R/X ratio ≤ 1 (loop range).
For larger R/X settings, you can calculate a reduced grading factor for Zone 1 using the following formula:
STF Grading factor = range of Zone 1 relative to the line length
R Loop range in the direction R for Zone 1 = R1· (1 + kr)
X Loop range in the direction X for Zone 1 = X1· (1 + kx)
δV Angle error of the voltage transformer (typically 1°)
δI Angle error of the current transformer (typically 1°)
[fofdustf-060709-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Alternatively or additionally, you can use the Zone-inclination angle parameter to incline the polygon
of Zone 1 in the first quadrant. This also prevents overreach (see Figure 6-76).
6.5.9.4 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 425
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
426 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
Logic of a Zone
[lomho3po-060611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 427
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
Operation Direction
The zone handles the following tasks:
• Calculation of the polarization voltage from the measured current values
• Placement of the polarization and loop voltage into the zone
[fofdltzr-130709-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In the boundary case, ZF is on the periphery of the circle. Then the angle between the 2 difference vectors is
90° (Thales's theorem). Within the characteristic, the angle is greater than 90°; outside the characteristic it is
less than 90°.
[dwmhomes-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-81 Vector Diagram of the Measurands for the MHO Characteristic
The Zr impedance reach parameter is used to define the zone. With the parameter Directional
mode, you can specify whether the zone works forward or reverse directed. In the backward direction, the
MHO characteristic is reflected across the coordinate origin. Once the fault impedance of a loop lies well
428 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
within the MHO characteristic of a distance zone, the zone picks up. The loop information is converted into
phase-selective pickup indications. The phase-selective pickup indications of the zones are processed further
in the output logic of the distance protection and by external additional functions (for example, signal-trans-
mission processes). The output logic of the distance protection is described in Chapter 6.5.12 Output Logic of
the Distance Protection .
[dwmhogru-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 429
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
[dwmhopol-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
430 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
[dwksfrsp-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fofuspch-090709-01.tif, 1, en_US]
A value (factor kpre) for the prefault voltage can be set separately for phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase
loops. Buffer polarization is only carried out when the RMS value of the corresponding buffer voltage for
phase-to-ground loops is greater than 40 % of the rated voltage (Vrated). For phase-to-phase loops, the RMS
value of the buffer voltage must be greater than 70 % of Vrated.
For a subsequent fault or after switching onto a fault, the prefault voltage may be missing. In this case, the
buffer voltage can only be used for a limited time, for reasons of accuracy. For 1-phase short circuits and 2-
phase short circuits without ground contact, you can use a voltage not involved in the fault for polarization.
This voltage is rotated by 90° in relation to the actual fault voltage (cross-polarization). The polarization
voltage VP is a mixture of the present voltage and the corresponding external fault voltage. The following
equation shows the polarization voltage VP for a phase-to-ground loop:
[fofukrzp-090709-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the buffer voltage is not available, then cross-polarization can be used. An evaluation (factor kcross) for the
voltage can be set separately for phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase loops.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 431
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
i
NOTE
The following parameters are available as evaluation factors for polarization:
• Mem. polarization(ph-g)
• Mem. polarization(ph-ph)
• Cross polarization(ph-g)
• Cross polarization(ph-ph)
Set the parameters for all zones in the general parameters for the distance protection function.
i
NOTE
With the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes set, the minimum pickup and operate
time for this distance protection zone is 1.5 power-system cyles even if the transformer inrush current is
detected. Set the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes parameter only if you really need the block-
ings of the inrush-current detection.
432 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
[dwstaffz-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Set the range of Zone Z1 to about 85 % of the line section to be protected. Zone Z1 should trip quickly. Set
the time delay of Zone Z1 to 0.00 s The protection then switches off faults at this distance with its operating
time. For higher levels, increase the time delay by one grading time increment.
The grading time must take the following factors into consideration:
• Circuit-breaker opening time including variation
• Dropout time for protection systems
[fofpmsek-140409-01.tif, 1, en_US]
6.5.10.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 433
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
434 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
Logic
[loarzon3-310112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Operation Direction
The automatic reclosing zone is an instance of controlled trip logic. You use the parameter Operate with to
select which distance zones will deliver the pickup information. If the selected distance zones have picked up
and a release from the automatic reclosing function is present, the automatic reclosing zone generates an
operate indication.
You use the parameter Effected by AR cycle to select the automatic reclosing cycle for the release of
tripping. If you wish to have a zone release in several automatic reclosing cycles, you must instantiate several
automatic reclosing zones and select a different automatic reclosing cycle for each zone.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 435
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
If the function teleprotection with distance protection is present and in effect, you can block the automatic
reclosing zone with the parameter Blocked if 85-21 active. The AREC zone is active only if the tele-
protection with distance protection is not in effect, for example, with a communication failure. If the teleprotec-
tion with distance protection is in effect, you achieve the 100 % selectivity through the teleprotection with
distance protection only if the comprehensive AREC zone is blocked.
436 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
6.5.11.3 Settings
Operation Direction
The output logic treats the pickup and trip signals of the distance zones separately, in one pickup logic and
one output logic each. The pickup and output logic generate the general indications of the distance protec-
tion.
General Pickup
In impedance pickup, the signal General is generated once a fault is reliably detected in the tripping area of
a zone. In the pickup methods I>, V</I>, and V</I>/Phi, the signal General is generated when a pickup
condition is met.
The signal General is indicated and can be further processed by internal and external additional functions,
for example, signal-transmission, automatic reclosing.
Pickup Logic
The distance zone pickups are combined phase-selectively and output as indications.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 437
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
[loanrdis-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Output Logic
The trip signals of the distance zones always lead to a 3-phase trip indication of the distance protection.
[loaus3po-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• The distance protection works with the Impedance pickup with load cutout pickup method.
• Global parameters of the Distance protection for grounded systems function (3-phase trip) (ANSI 21)
438 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
i
NOTE
If you wish to add new functions, take the following steps:
• The visibility of individual parameters depends on the configuration.
Block Diagram
The following figure shows the block diagram with line 1 to be protected.
[dwplanab-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Time-Grading Chart
The following figure shows the time-grading chart for the application example:
[dwstaffp-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The distance protection works with four time-graded distance zones. The distance zones have the following
function:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 439
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
i
NOTE
If you use an application template, the numbering of the stages of the distance protection is Z1, Z1B, Z3,
and Z4. If you load the function Distance protection from the DIGSI 5 library, the numbering of the stages
is Z1, Z2, Z3, and Z4.
The quadrilateral characteristics of the zones are shown in the R-X level in Figure 6-91. The setting instruc-
tions for the parameters of the zones can be found in Chapters 6.5.13.6 Setting Notes for Zone Z1 through
6.5.13.9 Setting Notes for Zone Z4 .
[dwklpoly-060611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
System Data
The following system data and line parameters apply to the application example:
440 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
Parameter Value
System Data Phase-to-phase rated system voltage 400 kV
Power frequency 50 Hz
Maximum positive-sequence system source impedance (10 + j 100) Ω
Maximum zero-sequence system source impedance (25 + j 200) Ω
Minimum positive-sequence system source impedance (1 + j 10) Ω
Minimum zero-sequence system source impedance (2.5 + j 20) Ω
Maximum ratio of remote infeed / local infeed(Iremote/Ilocal) 3
Transducer Voltage-transformer ratio (TV, LINE) 380 kV/100 V
Current-transformer ratio (TI) 1000 A/1 A
Current-transformer data 5PR20, 20 VA, Pi =
3 VA
Current-transformer connecting cable 2.5 mm2, 50 m
TI/TV for impedance conversion 0,2632
Line data Line 1 length 80 km
Maximum load current 250% of full load
Minimum operating voltage 85% of rated voltage
Character convention for power flow Export = negative
Full-load apparent power (S) 600 MVA
Line 1 positive-sequence impedance per km Z1 (0,025 + j 0,21) Ω/km
Line 1 - Zero-sequence system impedance per km Z0 (0.13 + j 0.81) Ω/km
Line 2 - Total positive-sequence impedance (3.5 + j 39.5) Ω
Line 2 - Total zero-sequence system impedance (6.8 + j 148) Ω
Line 3 - Total positive-sequence impedance (1,5 + j 17,5) Ω
Line 3 - Total zero-sequence system impedance (7.5 + j 86.5) Ω
Maximum fault resistance, phase-to-ground 250 Ω
Unfavorable power factor under full load 0,9
Tower data Average tower base resistance 15 Ω
Grounding conductor 60 mm2 steel
Distance: Phase-to-tower/phase-to-ground (mid-span) 3m
Distance: phase-to-phase 5m
Circuit Breaker Trip pickup time 60 ms
Operate time 70 ms
Based on the source and line impedance, the minimum fault-current levels can be calculated as follows:
[fofiklg1-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the fault-contact resistance for 3-phase short circuits is neglected, the following applies:
Ztotal Sum of synchronous source impedance and line impedance (since only the magnitude of the current
= should be calculated, only the magnitude of the impedance is relevant)
For a 3-pole short circuit at the end of the line, Ztotal is calculated as follows:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 441
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
[fofztt3p-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Thus for 3-phase faults without fault contact resistance, there results a minimum fault current of:
[fofi3pmi-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the fault-contact resistance for 1-phase short circuits is neglected, the following applies:
Ztotal 1/3 (sum of the positive-sequence, negative-sequence and zero-sequence source as well as line
= impedance)
[fofztt1p-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Thus for single-phase faults without fault contact resistance, there results a minimum fault current of:
[fofi1pmi-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the fault-contact resistance for 1-phase short circuits is taken into consideration, Ztotal is calculated as
follows:
[fofi1prf-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
For 1-phase short circuits with high fault-contact resistance, the minimum fault current is:
[fofi1pir-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
442 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
With the Rated current parameter, you can set the primary rated current for the line to be protected. The
rated apparent power of the line is 600 MVA. The rated current on the line is thus calculated as follows:
[fofinelg-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fofxstek-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[foflwink-290411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 443
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
The setting value for Kr is calculated as follows from the line data:
[fof1rerl-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The setting value for Kx is calculated as follows from the line data:
[fofdxexl-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
i
NOTE
For other applications, you can overwrite the residual compensation factors in distance zones set here
with local parameters.
6.5.13.4 Setting Notes for Distance Protection for Grounded Systems – General Settings
Set the following parameters under General in the function Distance protection for grounded systems.
The setting values are valid for all zones in the distance protection.
444 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
[dwlwpoly-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In the example application, the system is grounded. For grounded systems, the combination of the criteria
3I0> and V0> is a very reliable criterion for ground-fault detection. The criteria complement one another. For
a weak infeed, the residual current is low and the zero-sequence voltage high. For a strong infeed, the condi-
tions are reversed. Set the parameter Ground-fault detection = 3I0 or V0.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 445
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
unbalance and extraordinarily large current-transformer errors are not expected, Siemens recommends
keeping the default value of 0.10.
[fou0bere-011010-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[dwzverte-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-93 Impedance Distribution for 2-Phase Ground Faults with Fault Resistance
The influence of the load (remote infeed and load angle) can increase or reduce the rotation of the measured
fault resistances (see Figure 6-93). The leading phase-to-ground loop tends to produce an overreach. For this
reason, set the parameter Loop select. with ph-ph-g = block leading phase for the application
example. In a double line, ground faults may occur simultaneously on both lines. To avoid blocking of the
internal fault loop, you must set the parameter Loop select. with ph-ph-g to ph-gnd only or all for
this application. To avoid overreach, you must reduce the radius and/or modify the zone inclination (alpha
angle).
446 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
Load Cutout
You can configure the load cutout separately for phase-to-phase loops and phase-to-ground loops with the
following parameters:
• Default setting (_:3661:102) Use ph-g load cutout = no
• Default setting (_:3661:103) R load cutout (ph-g) = 23.8 Ω
[dwlastke-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The load cutout is set separately for phase-to-ground loops and phase-to-phase loops. Since there is no
restraint current in the load, load conditions cannot lead to a ground pickup. In the event of a 1-pole tripping
of neighboring circuits, there may simultaneously be a ground pickup and an increased load current. For
these cases, the load cutout must be set for the ground characteristic. The smallest load impedance is calcu-
lated as follows:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 447
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
[formnalg-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The minimum operating voltage is 85 % of the rated voltage and the maximum load current is 250 % of the
full-load apparent power (see Table 6-5).
[foumnmax-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The primary minimum load impedance (parameter R load cutout (ph-ph)) can thus be calculated as
follows:
[formnpri-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The secondary setting value for the parameter R load cutout (ph-ph) can be calculated as follows:
[formnsek-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In the following step, you will determine the opening angle of the load cutout for phase-to-phase loops. The
largest angle the load impedance can assume results from the largest angle between the operating voltage
and load current. Since the load current ideally has the same phase as the voltage, the difference is given by
the power factor cos φ. The largest angle of the load impedance results from the least favorable, smallest
power factor. For this calculation, the power factor for full-load conditions must be used, since under light-load
conditions the reactive power flow can dominate. The load impedance under these conditions is not close to
the set impedance range. According to Table 6-5, the least favorable power factor under full-load conditions
is 0.9. The maximum load angle can thus be calculated as follows:
[fophlmax-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The setting value for the parameter Angle load cutout (ph-ph) is 26°.
In this example, there is no distinction drawn between the maximum loads for phase-to-phase activation and
phase-to-ground activation. Under this assumption, you can set the load cutout parameters for phase-to-
ground loops to the same values. The setting value for the parameter R load cutout (ph-g) is 23.8 Ω,
the setting value for the parameter Angle load cutout (ph-g) is 26°.
448 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
With the parameter Directional mode, you can specify whether the zone works forward, reverse or
non-directional. In the example application, for Zone Z1, you should set Directional mode =
forward.
Parameter: X reach
Parameter: R (ph-ph)
[foz1rlbx-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The arc voltage (Varc) is calculated using the following rule of thumb:
[foz1ulbx-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The rule of thumb is a very conservative estimate. The estimated value Rarc is larger than the actual value.
The arc is pulled into a curve due to thermal and magnetic forces. Thus the length of the arc (Iarc) is greater
than the distance between the phases (phase-to-phase). As an estimate, we assume that larc is twice the
distance between the phases. When calculating the setting value, first calculate the largest value of Rarc. To
do so, you must first calculate Rarc with the smallest value of the fault current (calculated in section
6.5.13.2 Block Diagram and System Data ):
[foz1rbwr-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
By adding a safety reserve of 20 %, the secondary minimum set value can be calculated as follows: The divi-
sion by 2 is necessary because Rarc appears in the loop measurement, while the set value corresponds to the
line impedance or positive-sequence impedance.
[foz1rsst-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
This calculated value corresponds to the smallest setting required to achieve the desired coverage of arc
resistances. To achieve the desired quadrilateral balance for Zone 1, the set value can be increased –
depending on the X reach (Z1) calculated above.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 449
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
For Zone 1, the setting value of X reach is 3.537 Ω. For protection of an overhead line on the high-voltage
or very high-voltage range, the following rule of thumb can be used for setting parameter R (ph-ph) for the
Zone 1:
0,8 · X reach < R (ph-ph) < 2,5 · X reach
In this example, the lower limit applies. The secondary setting value for the parameter R (ph-ph) can be
calculated as follows:
R(ph-ph) = 0.8 ⋅ 3.537 = 2.830 Ω
Set the parameter R (ph-ph) in Zone 1 to 2.830 Ω.
Parameter: R (ph-g)
450 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
[dwmaster-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 451
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
[dwfernei-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Remote infeed (Iremote) leads to an additional voltage drop in the effective tower-grounding resistance. The
additional voltage drop is measured in the fault loop of the protection device (see Figure 6-96). To compen-
sate for this influence, you need the highest value of the ratio Iremote/Ilocal. In Table 6-5, this value is specified
as 3. The maximum tower-grounding resistance measured by the protection device in the faulty loop is thus:
[foz1rtfx-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The arc voltage for ground faults is calculated using the distance between lines and the tower/ground (see
Table 6-5):
Varc = 2500 V· larc
Varc = 2500 V· 2· 3 m = 15 kV
When calculating the setting value, the largest value of Rarc is relevant. Calculate the largest value of Rarc
using the smallest fault current (calculated in section 6.5.13.2 Block Diagram and System Data ):
[foz1rbmx-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
For ground faults, the total resistance – that is, the sum of Rarc and RTF – must be covered. By adding a safety
reserve of 20 %, the secondary setting value R (ph-g) can be calculated as follows: The division by the
factor (1 + kr) is necessary because Rarc and RTF appear in the loop measurement, while the setting value
corresponds to the conductor impedance or positive-sequence impedance.
[foz1rsku-250309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
This calculated value corresponds to the smallest setting required to achieve the desired resistance
coverage. To achieve the desired quadrilateral balance for Zone 1, the set value can be increased –
depending on the X reach (Z1) calculated above.
For Zone 1, the setting value of X reach is 3.537 Ω. For protection of an overhead line, the following rule of
thumb can be used for setting parameter R (ph-g) for the Zone 1:
[foz1rez1-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
452 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
i
NOTE
The lower limit is the same as for phase-to-phase faults. This ensures fast tripping. The upper limit corre-
sponds to the loop range. This prevents overreach.
In this example, the lower limit applies. The setting value for the parameter R (ph-g) can be calculated for
Zone 1 as follows:
R (ph-g) = 0.8 · 3.537 = 2.83 Ω
[dwalphae-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-97 Transmission Angle for the Alpha-Angle Setting (Parameter: Zone Inclination)
To determine the setting value for the zone inclination, the least favorable practical case is assumed. First,
calculate the maximum transmission angle (computer simulation). For the example application, the maximum
transmission angle is 35° (see Table 6-5). The R/X ratio of Zone 1 is 0.8 (2.830/3.537 = 0.8). From
Figure 6-98, use these values to read off the alpha angle. For the example application, the point is valid in the
middle between 30° and 40°. This gives an alpha angle of 15°. Set the parameter to Zone-inclination
angle = 15°.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 453
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
[dwklalph-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Zone Z1B
In the example application, Zone Z1B works as an overreaching zone for phase A. Use Zone Z1B for working
with the functions Automatic reclosure and/or Signal-transmission process. These functions process the
output signals (pickup indications) of Zone Z1B. In the example application, Zone Z1B does not trip independ-
ently, but rather only via the functions Automatic reclosure and Signal-transmission process. The inde-
pendent tripping of Zone Z1B is suppressed. To do this, set the time delays of Zone Z1B to ∞.
Parameter: X reach
454 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
Zone Z1B must be set to overreach on Line 1. The minimum setting is 120 % of the line reactance. If the line
is not extremely long, a setting of 150 % of more is used in practice. For this application, a line of medium
length, a range of 150 % is selected:
X reach = 1.5 · XLine 1
X reach = 1.5 · 80· 0.21 = 25.2 Ω (primary)
The secondary setting of the X reach of Zone Z1B can be calculated as follows:
X reach = 25.2 Ω · 0.2632 = 6.633 Ω
Parameter: R (ph-ph)
Parameter: R (ph-g)
[foz1brgl-290309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In the example application, the lower limit applies. The setting value of the R (ph-g) of Zone Z1B can be
calculated as follows:
[foz1brsk-290309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 455
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
Parameter: X reach
[foz2xrch-310309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Parameter: R (ph-ph)
[foz2rlsk-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Parameter: R (ph-g)
456 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
The minimum range for this setting is based on the setting the value R (ph-g) of zone Z1 and the set value
of the X reach of zone 3. The set value R (ph-g) of zone Z1 covers the entire internal fault resistance, the
set value X reach of zone Z3 specifies the extent of overreach. Alternatively, you can calculate the set value
R (ph-g) for zone Z3 according to this formula:
[foz2resk-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Parameter: X reach
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 457
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
Set the parameter X reach for zone Z4 according to the grading requirement (see Table 6-4). The set value
is calculated as follows:
[foz3xrch-130509-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Parameter: R (ph-ph)
[foz3rlmn-020409-01.tif, 1, en_US]
With these assumptions, the calculated setting value R (ph-ph)min ensures fault detection in Zone Z4. The
upper limit is determined by restrictions in reach balance. The following apply:
R (ph-ph) < 6· X reach
The X reach of zone Z4 is 17.782 Ω (see section 6.5.13.9 Setting Notes for Zone Z4 Parameter: X range).
The upper limit is thus 106.69 Ω. This extends well into the load range (see Parameter R load cutout (L-E) in
section 6.5.13.5 Setup Notes for Pickup Method ). Set the parameter R (ph-ph) in zone Z4 to twice the
minimum value. This is a safe compromise.
R (ph-ph) = R (ph-ph)min· 2
R (ph-ph) = 13.16 · 2 = 26.32 Ω
In Zone Z4, set the parameter R (ph-ph) = 26.32 Ω.
Parameter: R (ph-g)
458 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection
Set the delay time for zone Z4 according to the grading schedule (see Figure 6-90 and Table 6-4). For the
application example, set the parameter Operate delay (multi-ph.) = 0.75 s.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 459
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Power-Swing Blocking
Power-swing blocking
• Detects power swings
• Evaluates the impedances per phase accordingly
• Blocks the selected zones of the distance protection in case of power swings
• Detects 1-phase, 2-phase, and 3-phase short circuits during a power swing and then cancels the
blocking for the specific phase
• Does not generate tripping of the out-of-step condition; a separate out-of-step protection function is
available for this purpose
The Power-swing blocking function is a supplementary function to the distance protection. It only works if the
distance-protection function is activated. If a power swing is detected, power-swing blocking blocks the pickup
and tripping through the distance protection. Each distance-protection zone can be blocked separately.
The Power-swing blocking function is included in a function group with at least 3 voltage inputs and current
inputs. The process monitor delivers status information to the function regarding the protected object (open
poles in particular).
[dwpsdstr-010612-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-99 Power-Swing Blocking Works Together with the Distance-Protection Function
Power-Swing Event
After dynamic events such as load jumps, short circuits, automatic reclosing functions, or switching opera-
tions, the generators exposed to the oscillations may have to respond to the new power balance of the
system. In case of power swings, the distance-protection function is fed with high compensating currents and
- especially at the electrical center - low voltages (Figure 6-100). Low voltages combined with high currents
460 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Power-Swing Blocking
represent apparently small impedances that can lead to tripping by the distance protection. Power-swing
blocking prevents tripping by the distance protection in case of power swings.
[dwpendel-160211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Power swings are 3-phase symmetrical events. As a rule, a certain symmetry of the measurands can be
assumed. Power swings may also occur during unsymmetrical events, such as short circuits or during a 1-
pole dead time. For this reason, power-swing detection is structured to use 3 measuring systems. One meas-
uring system is available for each phase, which warrants phase-selective power-swing detection. If short
circuits occur, the power swing detected in the respective phase will be discarded, which enables the
distance protection function to initiate selective tripping.
Functionality
In order to detect the power swing, the rate of change will be adjusted to the impedance phasor.
[dwzvekto-220311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-101 Impedance Vectors During a Power Swing and During a Short Circuit
In order to warrant all functions of the power-swing detection are stable and secure, without the risk of over-
function during a short circuit, the following measurement criteria are used:
• Trajectory monotony:
During a power swing, the measured impedance indicates a directional path of movement. This path
occurs precisely if within the measurement window one of the components ΔR and ΔX at the most indi-
cates a change of directions. As a rule, if a short circuit occurs, it causes a directional change in ΔR as
well as in ΔX within the measured value window.
• Trajectory continuity:
The spacing of two consecutive impedance values will clearly indicate a change of ΔR or ΔX during a
power swing. If a short circuit occurs, the impedance vector skips to the fault impedance and remains
motionless.
• Trajectory uniformity:
During a power swing the ratio between 2 consecutive changes of ΔR or ΔX do not overshoot a
threshold. As a rule, if a short circuit occurs, it will cause an erratic movement since the impedance
phasor abruptly skips from load impedance to fault impedance.
If the impedance indicator enters the distance protection pickup range and the power-swing detection criteria
are met, a power swing will be indicated. The pickup range is composed of the largest setting values for R
and X in all active zones.
Figure 6-102 shows the logic of the power-swing blocking. The measurement takes place per phase. A
power-swing detection signal will be transmitted only after the measured impedance is in the distance protec-
tion pickup range ((_:55) Block zones). The power-swing detection signal remains active until a short-
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 461
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Power-Swing Blocking
circuit occurs, the power-swing subsides, or the maximum blocking time has elapsed. You can use the binary
input signal >Block function to block the power-swing detection.
[lopendel-190413-01.tif, 1, en_US]
When using the Max. blocking time parameter, you can place a time limit on the blocking effect of the
power-swing blockage. In this way, for instance, the power-swing blockage can be eliminated when using
systems that are slowly drifting apart.
When the impedance enters the distance protection pickup range, the maximum blocking time will be started.
When the impedance exits the pickup range while the maximum blocking time is running, the maximum
blocking time will be reset.
462 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Power-Swing Blocking
Logic
[lopsdlog-190413-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The distance protection delivers information about the loops contained in its zones to the power-swing
blocking. If the power-swing blocking detects power swings in the activated loops, it delivers phase-selective
information about the zones to be blocked to the distance protection. The actual blocking is carried out in the
distance protection.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 463
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Power-Swing Blocking
When using the Max. blocking time parameter, you can limit the maximum blocking time of the distance
protection during the power swing. In this way, for instance, the power-swing blockage can be eliminated
when using networks that are slowly drifting apart.
For tripping during an asynchronous long-lasting power swings, Max. blocking time is not relevant. For
this application, use the function Out-of-step protection.
If there is no operational requirement with regards to a time limit of the power-swing blocking, Siemens
recommends the default setting ∞ (= not in effect).
6.6.5 Settings
464 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
To enable the distance protection to shut down in the event of any fault without delay and selectively on the
entire line section, information is exchanged with the remote station. You can implement teleprotection using
binary inputs and outputs (transmission and reception contacts) or using a digital communication connection.
The Information-transmission method is used in protection function groups with voltage-measuring point in
combination with the distance-protection function. The functions outlined in Figure 6-104 are available.
[dwtpsdst-010612-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-105 displays the functional control and the function blocks.
The transmission logic analyzes the pickup signals of the distance protection and generates the associated
transmission signal for transmission to the other line end.
The receipt signal from the other line end is optionally coupled via a binary input, via the unblock logic or via
the communication. For the protection of multi-terminal lines ends, the function blocks Rec. bin.sig.1 and
Rec.unblk.sig# are available multiple times, once for each removed line end.
The distance zone parameterized for the information-transmission method provides the pickup information.
This pickup information is combined with the reception information for the trip condition. If the trip condition is
fulfilled, the information-transmission method creates the operate indication.
A trip signal results through the simultaneous presence of a pickup and a release signal.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 465
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
[lotpsfst-160211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In the following, the individual function blocks for the information transmission procedure are described. You
can find detailed information on the function control in the section Function/Stage Control.
For the coupling of receipt signals from opposite ends, the 3 receipt block types Rec. bin.sig.1,
Rec.unblk.sig# and Rec. PI# are available. The information-transmission methods described below can
be operated with the suitable receipt blocks if required.
A mixture between a line end connected through a protection interface and a binary connected line end is
possible.
466 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
[lotprxbi-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
This receipt logic is used if the communication takes place via binary signals. If an information-transmission
method is configured with a total of 3 ends, for example, 2 Receipt function blocks are required.
For applications with 1-pole tripping, the selectivity of the permissive underreach transfer trip for double
ground faults on parallel lines can be improved, if 3 phase-selective send signals are transmitted per commu-
nication direction. The receipt signals can thus be used phase-specifically for A, B, and C or in general as
individual signals.
For common-phase information transmission, the signal >Receive general is used, for phase-selective
information transmission the 3 signals >Receive phs A, >Receive phs B, and >Receive phs C.
The binary input >Receive failure affects the status indications of the function control, see Figure 6-105.
[lotpsunb-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The information-transmission methods can optionally be used with the unblock method. The difference to the
conventional binary receipt is that a trip is also then possible if a release signal arrives from the opposite end.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 467
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
• If the attenuation of the transmission signal at the fault location can be so great that reception by the
other line end is not ensured.
For transmission of the signal, 2 signal frequencies are required, which are sent from the transmission signal
of the protection device. If the transmission device has channel monitoring, a monitoring frequency (blocking
frequency) can be switched to a working frequency (unblocking frequency). During the idle state or during an
external error, the monitoring frequency is transmitted, which signalizes the binary input >Blocking
general (or during phase-selective information transmission to the binary inputs >Blocking phs A,
>Blocking phs B and >Blocking phs C) of the unblock logic.
If in the event of a fault due to the transmission signal from the opposite line end the working frequency is
received healthy, the receipt signal >Unblocking general will appear at the binary input of the unblock
logic. During phase-selective information transmission, instead of >Unblocking general the 3 receipt
signals >Unblocking phs A, >Unblocking phs B and >Unblocking phs C are used. Subsequently,
the blocking signal >Blocking general disappears. During the phase-selective information transmission,
the 3 blocking signals >Blocking phs A, >Blocking phs B, and >Blocking phs C are used. With
this, the signal >Unblocking general (or the respective signals >Unblocking phs A, >Unblocking
phs B, and >Unblocking phs C) are transmitted and the receipt of the trip logic of the information-trans-
mission method is approved.
A short circuit on the line can cause an attenuation or reflection of the signal and the signal to be transmitted
no longer reaches the other line end. In this condition both binary inputs >Unblocking general and
>Blocking general are not active. After a time delay of 20 ms, the release is still created and forwarded
to the receipt logic. The release is then retracted over the time stage after a further 100 ms.
If the signals continue to receive without disruptions, the release is possible again after a dropout delay of
100 ms.
If the device does not receive any of the signals for 10 s, the indication Unblock receive fail. is gener-
ated. This indication affects the status indications of the function control, see Figure 6-105.
[lotprxws-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
This receipt logic is used if the communication takes place via a protection interface (digital). Independent of
the number of configured devices, only one function block Protection interface is always required. The iden-
tity and the number of devices participating in the information-transmission method for the protection of the
line, are set by using the configuration of the protection interface; see 3.5.3.4 Initialization and Configuration
of the Protection Interface in DIGSI 5 .
468 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
6.7.4.1 Description
[dwtpsmit-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If a fault occurs within the underreaching zone - this is usually zone Z1 for the distance protection - a transfer-
trip signal is sent to the remote end. The receipt signal leads to accelerated tripping in the device at the
remote end.
[lotpssem-270511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Sending takes place upon pickup in the distance zone selected as a send condition. You can use the (_:
5671:101) Send prolongation parameter to compensate the differences in the pickup times at both line
ends.
For applications with 1-pole tripping, the selectivity of the permissive underreach transfer trip for double
ground faults on parallel lines can be improved, if 3 phase-selective send signals are transmitted per commu-
nication direction. Transmission and reception signals can thus be used phase-specifically for L1, L2 and L3
or phase-jointly as individual signals (general).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 469
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
[lotpsalm-110611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The distance protection provides the pickup information to the information-transmission method. The tripping
for the relevant zone is undertaken by that information-transmission method with which the distance protec-
tion works together.
If a reception signal is present, the zone set through the parameter Operate with will be released for trip.
The trip can be delayed. For 1-phase faults, set the delay time under (_:5671:102) Operate delay
(1-phase); for multi-phase faults use the (_:5671:103) Operate delay (multi-ph.) parameter.
If the intertrip process is used to protect a line configuration with more than 2 ends, the receive signals from
all line ends are linked with OR.
A trip signal results from a simultaneous presence of the distance zone pickup, the release signal, and the
time sequence. The (_:5671:11) 1-pole operate allowed parameter can be used to allow 1-pole
tripping in 1-/3-pole tripping devices. This parameter does not apply to devices that only have 3-pole trip.
For applications with time-delayed tripping, a receipt signal once received is retained until the distance zone
pickup drops out. This ensures that the release signal is still present if the expiration of the corresponding
delay time releases the tripping, and the transmission signal of the protection from the remote end is no
longer present.
470 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
The functions are described in more detail in Chapter 6.10.4 Tripping on Weak Infeed (TWI Function) .
6.7.4.2 Application and Setting Notes for the Intertrip Process, General
The selection texts are identical to the designations which you specify during the zone configuration in the
distance protection function. The selection text for the under-reaching distance zone can therefore also be
different from Z1.
6.7.4.3 Application and Setting Notes for the Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip via an Extended
Measuring Range (Distance Protection with Underreaching and Grading-Time Shortening)
A transfer-trip signal is transmitted to the remote end in the event of a fault within the underreaching zone. If
the fault is detected there within the overreaching zone, the receipt signal leads to tripping.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 471
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
[dwtpsmeb-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-112 Function Diagram of the Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip via Extended Measuring Range
You can configure the intertrip process via an extended measuring range with the following settings:
Transmit with
Operate with
6.7.4.4 Application and Setting Notes for the Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip via Pickup (Distance
Protection with Underreaching and Remote Tripping with Release)
A transfer-trip signal is transmitted to the remote end in the event of a fault in the underreaching zone. If the
distance-protection function picks up at the remote end, the signal received there leads to tripping.
472 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
[dwtpsmua-010311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-113 Function Diagram of the Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip via Pickup
You can configure the permissive underreach transfer trip via pickup with the following settings:
6.7.4.5 Application and Setting Notes for the Direct Intertrip Process
A transfer-trip signal is transmitted to the remote end in the event of a fault in the underreaching zone. The
signal received there leads directly to the tripping.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 473
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
[dwtpsdim-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
6.7.4.6 Settings
474 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
6.7.5.1 Description
[dwtpsver-010612-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If a fault occurs within the over-reaching zone - e.g. zone Z1B for the distance protection - a send signal is
sent to the remote end. In the distance protection device, the received signal leads to accelerated tripping if
the fault is also detected in the forward direction.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 475
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
[lotpssmv-270511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Sending takes place upon pickup in the selected overreaching zone or optionally upon pickup in the forward
direction. The send signal can be extended by a parameterizable time (_:5701:101) Send prolonga-
tion, if the protection has already issued a trip command. This also enables the release of the other line end
if the short-circuit is deactivated there very rapidly by the under-reach zone. With this, pickup differences
between the cable ends and signal delays can be considered.
If needed, the transmission signal can be delayed with (_:5701:102) Send delay.
The transient blocking (signal Transient blocking) provides additional security from fault signals due to
transient oscillations caused by a change of direction after disconnection of external faults (for example, on
parallel lines). No transmission signal is sent in the event of transient blocking.
For applications with 1-pole tripping, the selectiveness of the permissive scheme for double faults can be
improved on parallel lines if 3 phase-selective transmission signals are transferred per communication direc-
tion. Transmission and reception signals can thus be used phase-specifically for L1, L2 and L3 or phase-
jointly as individual signals (general).
Related Topics
6.7.8.1 Description
476 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
[lotpsavv-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The distance protection provides the pickup information to the information-transmission method. The tripping
for the relevant zone is undertaken by that information transmission process with which the distance protec-
tion works together.
If a reception signal is present, the zone set through the parameter (_:5701:141) Operate with will be
released for trip. The trip can be delayed. For 1-phase faults, set the time delay under (_:5701:103)
Operate delay (1-phase). For multi-phase faults, use the (_:5701:104) Operate delay (multi-
ph.) parameter.
The (_:5701:11) 1-pole operate allowed parameter can be used to allow 1-pole tripping in 1-/3-
pole tripping devices. This parameter does not apply to devices that only have 3-pole trip.
If the permissive scheme for the protection of a line configuration with more than 2 ends is used, the recep-
tion signals from all line ends are combined for the tripping with AND.
A trip signal results from simultaneous presence of the distance zone activation, the release signal and the
time sequence. For applications with time-delayed tripping, a receipt signal once received is retained until the
distance zone pickup drops out. This ensures that the release signal is still present if the expiration of the
corresponding delay time releases the tripping, and the transmission signal of the protection from the remote
end is no longer present.
The transient blocking (signal Transient blocking) prevents the release of the tripping in the permissive
scheme. It ensures additional security from fault signals due to transient oscillations caused by a change of
direction after disconnection of external faults (for example on parallel lines).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 477
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
Related Topics
6.7.8.1 Description
• In order for the cable end to also be tripped with a weak infeed, the information transmission procedures
have a function for trip with weak infeed.
Related Topics
6.10.4 Tripping on Weak Infeed (TWI Function)
However, the selection texts are identical to the designations which you specify during the zone configuration
in the distance protection function. The selection text for the overreaching distance zone can therefore also
be different from Z1B.
478 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
You can use the Operate delay (1-phase) parameter to set the tripping delay for 1-phase ground faults.
Since the information-transmission method should lead to a rapid and selective tripping, Siemens recom-
mends the setting value 0.00 s.
6.7.5.3 Application and Setting Notes for the Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip Scheme (Distance
Protection with Overreaching and Release)
A send signal is sent to the remote end in the event of a fault in the over-reach zone. If the fault is also
detected there in the over-reach zone, the received signal leads to tripping.
[dwtpssiv-010311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-118 Function Diagram of the Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip Scheme
You can use the following settings to configure the permissive overreach transfer trip scheme:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 479
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
[dwtpsriv-010311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
With the following settings, you can configure the directional comparison:
6.7.5.5 Application and Setting Notes for the Direction Unblocking Process (Distance Protection with
Overreaching and Unblocking)
The directional unblock method corresponds with the permissive overreach transfer trip scheme with a preset
function block Receive Unblock. Thus, compared to the permissive overreach transfer trip scheme, a trip-
ping is also possible without a release signal from the opposite end. The directional unblock method cannot
be operated with a communication via a protection interface owing to the way it functions.
480 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
[dwtpsubl-010311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
With the following settings, you can configure the directional-unblocking method:
6.7.5.6 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 481
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
482 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
6.7.6.1 Description
[dwtpsblo-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the protection function recognizes a fault in the reverse direction, the blocking signal is sent to the opposite
end. If the protection device does not receive a blocking signal at the receiving line end, it generates the trip
signal after a short time delay.
Transmission Logic
[lotpssbl-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The blocking signal is generated upon activation of the distance protection in the reverse direction or non-
directionally. The logic is designed in a phase-selective manner. With the parameter (_:5731:101) Send
prolongation, you can extend the blocking signal. In this way, the remote end can continue to be blocked,
even if the fault has already been cleared locally.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 483
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
The blocking signal can also be immediately sent with jump detection (parameter (_:5731:102) Send
with jump). If the communication channel can react very quickly to the absence of the blocking signal, you
can use this jump signal, because the jump signal appears for every jump in the dimensions. If the distance
protection detects a fault in the forward direction, the blocking signal is stopped immediately and the indica-
tion Stop is generated.
For applications with 1-pole trip, the selectiveness of the blocking procedure for double faults can be
improved on parallel lines if 3 phase-selective transmission signals are transferred per communication direc-
tion. Transmission and reception signals can therefore be used phase-specifically for L1, L2, and L3 or
phase-jointly as individual signals.
[lotpsaub-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The distance protection provides the pickup information to the information-transmission method. The tripping
for the relevant zone is undertaken by that information-transmission method with which the distance protec-
tion works together.
If a reception signal is not present, the zone that is set through the parameter (_:5731:140) Operate
with will be released for tripping. The trip of the blocking procedure must be delayed due to possible differ-
ences in the pickup times of the devices at both cable ends and because of the transmission time. The time
delay is set with the (_:5731:107) Release delay parameter.
The tripping can be delayed. For 1-phase faults, set the delay time under Operate delay (1-phase); for
multi-phase faults use the Operate delay (multi-ph.) parameter.
The trip indication therefore results when there is a simultaneous presence of the distance zone activation,
the internal release signal and the time sequences.
484 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
No release of the trip occurs for an upcoming reception signal. The trip is blocked so that an activation in the
selected over-reach zone in the forward direction does not quickly shut down the external fault at the remote
end.
If the blocking procedure for the protection of a line configuration with more than 2 ends is used, the reception
signals from all cable ends are combined with OR.
The (_:5731:11) 1-pole operate allowed parameter can be used to allow 1-pole tripping in 1-/3-
pole tripping devices. This parameter does not apply to devices that only have 3-pole trip.
• For the protection of line configurations with more than 2 ends with different infeed
If the protection function detects a fault in the reverse direction, a blocking signal is generated. If the other line
end does not receive a blocking signal, the protection function trips in the event of a fault in the over-reach
zone. For this, the over-reach zone must be set to approximately 120 % of the line length. In the case of
multiple end lines, the over-reach zone must extend over the longer line section, irrespective of whether an
additional infeed is possible via the branching point. Since no release signal is required by the opposite end,
single infeed short circuits are quickly switched off with the blocking procedure.
[dwtpsrib-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 485
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
6.7.6.3 Settings
486 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 487
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
6.7.7.1 Description
[dwtpsrwv-260613-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If a fault occurs within the crossover zone and none of the subordinate protection devices transmits a
blocking signal, this will initiate tripping of backward interlocking.
Trip Logic
[loruever-260613-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The distance protection provides the pickup information to the information-transmission method. The tripping
for the relevant zone is undertaken by that information-transmission method with which the distance protec-
tion works together.
If a reception signal is not present, the zone that is set through the parameter (_:14311:140) Operate
with will be released for tripping.
The tripping can be delayed. For 1-phase faults, set the time delay under Operate delay (1-phase); for
multi-phase faults use the Operate delay (multi-ph.) parameter.
488 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
The trip indication therefore results when there is a simultaneous presence of the distance zone activation,
the internal release signal and the time sequences.
If a receiving signal is pending, tripping will be blocked in order to ensure that a pickup in the selected cross-
over zone does not disconnect quickly the short circuit on the outbound line.
If the backward interlocking function is used with several receiving blocks, the receiving signals from all
receiving blocks will be linked with OR.
The (_:14311:11) 1-pole operate allowed parameter can be used to allow 1-pole tripping in 1-/3-
pole tripping devices. If the device is capable of only 3-pole tripping, the parameter 1-pole operate
allowed does not apply and is not visible.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 489
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
[dwrckver-180613-01.tif, 1, en_US]
490 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
6.7.7.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 491
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
6.7.8.1 Description
The transient blocking provides additional security from fault signals due to transient oscillations caused by a
change of direction after disconnection of external faults (for example on parallel lines). The transient blocking
is used for blocking and permissive overreach transfer trips, but not for a permissive underreach transfer trip.
[lotpstrb-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If a pickup in the reverse direction or non-directionally is present (non-forward fault), the transient blocking
occurs after a waiting period Trans. blk. pickup delay. The Transient blocking signal has an
effect on send and trip logic of the permissive overreach transfer trips as well as on the trip logic of the
blocking method. After the omission of the blocking criterium, the transient blocking will be maintained for a
set time Trans. blk. dropout delay. If a trip command is generated in the underreaching zone during
a transient blocking (signal Release Trip forward (DIS)), the transient blocking time is triggered. In this way,
the blocking of the teleprotection in the event of an internal fault is prevented.
The information-transmission methods for distance protection and ground-fault protection can affect one
another. Use the Trans. block. with parameter to set whether the transient blocking of the information-
transmission method for the ground-fault protection is to affect that of the distance protection. The reciprocal
influence is advisable if the information-transmission methods for distance protection and ground-fault protec-
tion work with a common communication channel.
492 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
i
NOTE
The time Trans. blk. pickup delay may not be set to zero. This makes sure that the transient-
blocking time Trans. blk. dropout delay is not already started if the directional information comes
in a delayed manner compared to the function pickup. Depending on the time of the circuit breaker on the
parallel line or the circuit breaker lying in a reverse direction, settings between 10 ms and 40 ms are
recommended.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 493
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
The Ground-fault protection for high-resistance ground faults in grounded-neutral systems function
(ANSI 67N):
• Detects high-resistance ground faults in electric equipment in grounded systems
• Detects short circuits phase selectively
The Ground-fault protection for high-resistance ground faults in grounded systems function is used in
the Line protection function group. The function is preconfigured at the factory to have 2 stages with definite-
time delay (definite time-overcurrent protection stages). Within the function, maximum 6 definite time-overcur-
rent protection stages can be operated as well as 1 simultaneously by each inverse type. A maximum of 2
functions can be operated within the function group.
The following stage types are available:
• Ground-fault protection with definite-time delay (definite-time overcurrent protection)
• Ground fault protection with definite-time delay according to IEC and ANSI (AMZ-3I0-IEC/ANSI)
• Ground fault protection with definite-time delay with logarithmic inverse characteristics (AMZ-3I0-log)
• Operate
[dwgfpstr-030311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
494 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
If the following listed, device-internal functions are present in the device, these functions can influence the
excitation values and delay times of the stages or block the stages. The stage can also be affected from
outside via a binary input signal.
• Automatic reclosing (AREC)
• Binary input signal
Automatic reclosing (AREC) If the device is equipped with an Inrush-current detection function, the stages
can be stabilized against tripping due to transformer-inrush currents (see section 6.8.10.1 Description ).
The stages can be used for directional-comparison protection via the Information-transmission method
with ground-fault protection function, if necessary (see chapter 6.9.1 Overview of Functions ).
Logic
The following figure represents a stage control. It applies for the stage types definite-time overcurrent protec-
tion, inverse time-overcurrent protection according to IEC and ANSI and inverse time-overcurrent protection
with logarithmic inverse characteristics.
[loggfp02-030311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-130 Stage Control for the Stages Types Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection, Inverse Time-Over-
current Protection, and Logarithmic Inverse
Besides the universally applicable stage control, the stage is blocked in the case of a measuring-voltage
failure, insofar as the stage works directionally, and the transformer neutral -point current is not connected.
The following figure represents the stage control for the stage type S0 inverse.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 495
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
[loggfp12-010311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Besides the universally applicable stage control, the stages is also blocked upon a measuring-voltage failure.
496 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
6.8.4.1 Description
Logic of a Stage
[loggfp31-160611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-132 Logic Diagram for Ground-Fault Protection with Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection
Measurand
The residual current is used as a measurand. The residual current is calculated according to its definition
equation
from the sum of the 3 phase currents. Depending on the use of the current inputs of the device, the residual
current can be measured or calculated.
If you connect a current input in the neutral-point feed of the current transformer or to a separate ground-
current transformer of the line to be protected, the ground current (residual current) will be directly available to
the device.
If the device is equipped with a sensitive current input INsens, the device will use this ground current (residual
current). The linear range of this measuring input ends at an amplitude of approx. 1.5 A. At higher currents,
the device automatically switches to analysis of the residual current calculated from the phase currents.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 497
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
If the ground current is not present in the device as a directly measured variable, the device will calculate the
zero current from the conductor currents.
Method of Measurement
The Method of measurement parameter is used to select the relevant measuring procedure, depending
on the application:
• Measurement of the fundamental component over 1 cycle filter (standard filter)
This measuring procedure processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.
[logfpsta-030311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Directional mode
You use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the stage works in a forward or reverse direc-
tion. Non-directional operation is also possible.
The direction determination works across stages (see chapter 6.8.8.1 Description ).
Phase Selection
Phase Selection Depending on the distribution of the currents and voltages, the phase selection detects if a
1-phase (determination of the affected phase) or multiphase short circuit is present (see Chapter 6.8.9 Phase
Selection ).
498 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
• Via the functionality of the dynamic settings (see section 6.8.12.1 Description )
The blocking cause is indicated.
Blocking of the Tripping by Pickup of the Distance Protection or Differential Protection Function
The pickup of the main protection function (distance or differential protection) can block the level tripping. You
can perform this setting via 2 parameters:
• ParameterBlocking by
This parameter is used to select the distance-protection zone or the differential at whose pickup the
blocking is to occur.
Stage-Type Selection
If the tripping delay is to be independent of the current level, select the stage type Definite time-overcurrent
protection.
A multi-stage Definite time-overcurrent protection function is realized by the parallel operation of several defi-
nite time-overcurrent protection stages.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 499
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
500 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
When selecting the current and time setting, note whether stage tripping is direction-dependent and whether
signal transmission is used. See also chapter 6.9.1 Overview of Functions .
If you use a stage direction independently and with signal transmission, it can also have a non-delayed effect
during the release process. Parameterize a short delay for the blocking method equal to the signal-transmis-
sion time plus a reserve of approx. 20 ms.
6.8.4.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 501
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
502 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 503
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
504 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 505
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
6.8.5.1 Description
[loggfp32-300511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-134 Logic Diagram for Ground-Fault Protection with Definite-Time Delay According to IEC and
ANSI (AMZ-3I0-IEC/ANSI)
Measurands
The residual current is used as a measurand. The residual current is calculated according to its definition
equation
from the sum of the 3 phase currents. Depending on the use of the current inputs of the device, the residual
current can be measured or calculated.
If you connect a current input in the neutral-point feed of the current transformer or to a separate ground-
current transformer of the line to be protected, the ground current (residual current) will be directly available to
the device.
506 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
If the device is equipped with a sensitive current input INsens, the device will use this current. The linear range
of this measuring input ends at an amplitude of approx. 1.6 A. At higher currents, the device automatically
switches to analysis of the residual current calculated from the phase currents.
If the ground current is not present in the device as a directly measured variable, the device will calculate the
residual current from the phase currents.
Method of Measurement
The Method of measurement parameter is used to select the relevant method of measurement,
depending on the application:
• Measurement of the fundamental component via 1-cycle filter (standard filter)
This measuring procedure processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.
[loggfpst-030810-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Directional mode
You use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the stage works in a forward or reverse direc-
tion. Non-directional operation is also possible.
The direction determination works across stages (see chapter 6.8.8.1 Description ).
Phase Selection
The phase selection detects whether a 1-pole (determination of the relevant conductor) or a multiphase short
circuit is present via the distribution of the currents and voltages (see section 6.8.9 Phase Selection ).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 507
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
Pickup, Dropout, and Tripping Behavior of the Dependent Characteristic Curve According to IEC and ANSI
When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1.1, the inverse-time characteristic curve
is processed. An integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time. This time results from the
characteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined from the
characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls short of the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 x 1.1 x threshold value),
the dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via
setting parameters. You can select between the following options:
• Non-delayed dropout: The summed time is deleted.
• Dropout according to characteristic curve: The summed time is reduced in relation to the characteristic
curve.
The dropout according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The
weighted reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The characteristic curve and associated formulas are shown in the Technical Data.
The execution of the characteristic curve after exceeding 1.1 times the threshold value can be delayed by a
constant time (Additional time delay parameter).
• Via the functionality of the dynamic settings (see section 6.8.12.1 Description )
The blocking cause is indicated.
Blocking of the Tripping by Pickup of the Distance Protection or Differential Protection Function
The pickup of the main protection function (distance or differential protection) can block the stage tripping.
You can perform this setting via 2 parameters:
• ParameterBlocking by
This parameter is used to select the distance-protection zone or the differential at whose pickup the
blocking is to occur.
508 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
Stage-Type Selection
If the tripping delay is to be dependent on the current stage according to the IEC or ANSI standard, select this
type of stage.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 509
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
ground fault residual current can lead to false pickup and unwanted tripping at low setting values for the
ground-current stages. To avoid false pickup and unwanted tripping, the ground-current stages are stabilized
with the phase currents. The threshold value increases as the phase currents increase. You can change the
stabilization factor (= gradient) via the Stabiliz. w. phase current parameter.
Siemens recommends a setting of 10% under normal conditions.
Parameter: Reset
6.8.5.3 Settings
510 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 511
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
512 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
6.8.6.1 Description
[loggfp33-300511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-136 Logic Diagram for Ground-Fault Protection with Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection with
Logarithmic Inverse Characteristic Curve (AMZ-3I0-Log)
Apart from the operate curve, this type of stage is identical to the ground-fault protection type with inverse
time-overcurrent protection according to IEC and ANSI (AMZ-3I0-IEC/ANSI) (see section 6.8.5.1 Descrip-
tion ).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 513
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
This section will only discuss the nature of the operate curve. For the further functionality, Siemens refers to
section 6.8.5.1 Description .
Operate Curve
Figure 6-137 shows the effect of the characteristic curve parameters qualitatively.
The Threshold parameter setting is the reference value for all current values. At the same time, the
Threshold multiplier parameter maps the beginning of the characteristic curve, that is, the lower oper-
ating range on the current axis in relation to the threshold value. The time value Max. time of the
curve determines the initial value of the characteristic curve (for 3I0 = threshold value). The Time dial
parameter changes the slope of the characteristic curve. At high currents, the Min. time of the curve
parameter indicates the lower time limit.
[loggfp04-030810-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Stage-Type Selection
If the operate delay is to be dependent on the current stage according to a logarithmic characteristic curve,
select this stage type.
514 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
6.8.6.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 515
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
516 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 517
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
6.8.7.1 Description
[loggfp34-160611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-138 Logic Diagram for Ground-Fault Protection with Zero-Sequence System Power-Dependent
Delay (S-inverse)
Apart from the operate curve, this type of stage is identical to the ground-fault protection type with inverse
time-overcurrent protection according to IEC and ANSI (AMZ-3I0-IEC/ANSI) (see section 6.8.5.1 Descrip-
tion ).
This section will only discuss the nature of the operate curve. For the further functionality, Siemens refers to
section 6.8.5.1 Description .
Operate Curve
Figure 6-139 shows the operate curve of the stage.
The zero-sequence system power protection operates according to a power-dependent operate curve.
The zero-sequence system power is calculated from the zero-sequence voltage and the zero-sequence
system current. The Sr component in the direction of an adjustable compensation angle φcomp is definitive.
This component is designated as a compensated zero power.
Sr = 3I0 · 3V0 · cos(φ-φcomp) with φ = φV0– φI0
φ comp therefore indicates the direction of maximum sensitivity (cos(φ– φ comp) = 1, if φ = φ comp). The power
calculation automatically contains the direction via its sign information. Reversing the signs also allows the
power for the reverse direction to be determined. Figure 6-142 represents the direction-characteristic curve.
The tripping time results according to the equation:
518 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
[fogfp003-300511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The power-time characteristic curve can be shifted with the reference value Sref (S ref for Sr-charac-
teristic = basic value for the inverse characteristic curve for φ= φcomp) in power direction. The power-time
characteristic curve can be shifted in the time direction by the factor k-fact. for Sr-character..
You can set additional power-dependent delays with the time setting Additional time delay.
[loggfp11-250111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Stage-Type Selection
If the tripping delay is to be dependent on the zero power according to an inverse characteristic curve, select
this stage type.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 519
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
General information cannot be provided. Define the value corresponding to the application.
6.8.7.3 Settings
520 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
6.8.8.1 Description
The direction determination works across stages. Various methods are available for determining the direction
and for increasing the accuracy of the determination.
The following diagram shows which variables and settings are used for direction determination.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 521
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
[logfpri1-010311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
522 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
Depending on the device connection, it is measured or calculated. If a voltage input is connected at the
broken-delta winding Vdadn of a voltage-transformer set, the device will use this voltage with consideration for
the Matching ratio Vph / VN (see section 8.3.5.3 Function Description). Otherwise the device calcu-
lates the zero-sequence voltage from the phase-to-ground voltages.
If the neutral-point current IY of a grounded transformer (supply transformer) is connected, the reference
voltage VP is the sum of the zero-sequence voltage V0 and a variable proportional to the neutral-point current
IY (see Figure 6-141). This corresponds to 20 V with the rated current. With the setting IY (neutral pt.)
only, VP is only derived from the transformer neutral-point current.
To determine the direction, the device sets the measuring current IN (= -3I0) to the real axis. If the phasor of
the reference voltage VP is within the defined forwards range, the device determines the direction as
forwards. In other cases, the device determines the direction as reverse.
As a prerequisite for direction determination, the adjustable minimum variables for the zero-sequence voltage
or the transformer neutral-point current must be exceeded (parameters Min. zero-seq. voltage V0
and Min. neutral-point curr. IY).
If the device detects a fault in the voltage-transformer secondary circuit, the direction determination is
prevented with V0. If the transformer neutral-point current is connected to the device, the direction can be
determined via this.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 523
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
[logfpri2-010311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-141 Phasor Diagram for Direction Determination with Zero-Sequence System Values
Determining the direction requires a minimum residual voltage that can be set as Min. zero-seq.
voltage V0. Another prerequisite is that the compensated zero power must have an adjustable minimum
value (parameter Forw. dir. power threshold). If the device detects a fault in the voltage-transformer
secondary circuit (binary input of voltage transformer miniature circuit breaker dropped out, measuring-
voltage failure detection) or a 1-pole dead time, the direction determination is prevented.
The following figure shows an example of the direction characteristic curve.
524 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
[logfpri4-010311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-142 Direction-Characteristic Curve for Direction Determination with Zero-System Voltage
[logfpri5-010311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 525
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
The V0 voltage at a ground fault with direction = reverse is determined with the following equation:
V0F0=reverse = I0 · (Z0trf + Z0L)
This equation can be used to determine a I0 threshold with corresponding V0 threshold. If the I0 threshold is
exceeded, the measured V0 voltage at a reverse fault must exceed the corresponding V0 threshold. If the I0
threshold is exceeded and the measured V0 voltage is less than the U0 threshold, the direction = forwards
can thus be determined.
The method can improve the directional sensitivity in the case of long lines (large Z0L).
Switch on this functionality via the Dir.reslt=forw.at V0<min parameter.
If the measured U0 voltage falls below the minimum value Min. zero-seq. voltage V0 and 3I0
exceeds the threshold Min.3I0 f.increas.dir.sens., the decision is for forwards.
526 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
The Angle forward β and Angle forward α parameters can be used for all methods based on the
angular measurement between the measuring and reference value which change the position of the direction-
characteristic curve. Only the method for determining the direction via the zero power is excluded.
Siemens recommends using the default settings, as the function reliably determines the direction of ground
faults with this.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 527
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
Parameter: Minimum zero-sequence system current 3I0 for increased directional sensitivity
[fofrbest-060110-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In this equation, V0 is the setting value for the Min. zero-seq. voltage V0 parameter. SM is a reserve
(for example, 1.2).
As the ground-fault protection works with the zero-sequence or negative-sequence values, direct determina-
tion of the ground fault is not possible. The phase selection detects whether a 1-pole or multiphase short
circuit has occurred with the distribution of the currents. The phase selection detects which phase is affected
in the case of a 1-phase short circuit. The affected phase is reported via the pickup. The stages always
initiate 3-pole tripping.
The phase selection filters the negative-sequence and the zero-sequence out of the phase currents. The fault
type, that is, whether a 1-pole or multiphase short circuit has occurred, is determined from the phase
displacement between the negative-sequence current and the zero-sequence current. The phase currents,
purged of the load current, are also evaluated from this. This utilizes the fact that, in the case of a 1-phase
short circuit, the healthy conductors can only conduct either no fault currents at all or only in-phase fault
currents.
The phase selection has an action time of approx. 40 ms. If the phase selection is unable to make a decision
in this time, 3-phase is signaled.
528 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
[loggfp13-260111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-144 Part-Logic Diagram on the Influence of Inrush-Current Detection Exemplified by the 1st Defi-
nite Time-Overcurrent Protection Stage
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 529
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
[lodynpar-260111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-145 Principle of the Dynamic Settings in the Example of 1st Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection
Stage
If the following functions are available in the device, they can affect the overcurrent-protection stages:
530 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
Functionalities Priority
Automatic reclosing (AREC) Priority 1
Cold-load pickup detection Priority 2
Binary input signal Priority 3
These functionalities generate signals that change the settings of the dynamic settings of the protection stage
or block it, if necessary. In the latter case, the settings for the threshold value and time delay are of no rele-
vance. To each of the signals, the overcurrent-protection stage provides a configuration parameter
Affected by function ... and own dynamic settings (Operate delay and Threshold). The config-
uration settings are used to set whether the signal shall be active or not, this means whether the dynamic
settings shall be activated or not. If one of these signals (for example, signal function x) becomes active and
is to take effect, these parameter settings become dynamic, that is, instantly active. This means that the
setting assigned to the signal replaces the standard setting. If the signal becomes inactive, the standard
settings apply again. The activation of the dynamic settings is reported.
Where several signals are active in parallel, the preceding priority applies. This means that a signal with
priority 1 precedes that of priority 2. The settings assigned to signal 1 become active.
The functionality of the dynamic settings can be disabled. In this case, the settings assigned to the signals
are not visible and are without effect.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 531
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
[loeinawe-260111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Several AREC signals can affect the setting for the threshold value and time delay of the protection stage and
its blocking.
• AREC is ready for reclosing 1 (= Automatic reclosing cycle 1)
• AREC is ready for reclosing 2 (= Automatic reclosing cycle 2)
532 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
[logfpkal-300511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-147 Influence of the Cold-Load Pickup Detection on the Overcurrent-Protection Stage
In the case of cold-load pickup, you have the option to change the settings for the Threshold and Operate
delay parameters of the protection level. You can also block the level. To do so, you must activate the influ-
ence of the cold-load pickup. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or assign settings
to Stage blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
The way signals are generated Cold-load pickup is described in section 5.1.4.1 Overview of Functions .
[loeinbin-270111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
You can use the binary input signal >Activ. dyn. settings to change the settings for the Threshold
and the Operate delay of the protection stage. You can also block the level. To do so, you must activate
the influence of the binary input. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or assign
settings to Stage blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 533
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
Further application and setting notes can be found in the Overcurrent protection, phases and function in
section 6.13.7.2 Application and Setting Notes (Advanced Stage) .
534 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
Information is exchanged with the remote station so that the ground-fault protection switches off immediately
and selectively on the entire line for all errors. You can implement the information transmission through
reception and transmission contacts or through a digital communication connection.
The Information-transmission methods are used in Protection function groups with voltage-measuring point
in combination with the Ground-fault protection function. The methods of the function illustrated in the
following figure are available.
[dwtestru-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-150 displays the functional control and the function blocks.
The transmission logic analyzes the pickup signals of the ground-fault protection and creates the respective
transmission signal for the transmission to the other line end.
The receipt signal from the other line end is coupled either through:
• Binary Input
• Unblock logic
• Communication
For the protection of multi-terminal lines ends, the function blocks Rec. bin.sig.1 and Rec.unblk.sig#
are available multiple times, once for each removed line end.
The stage parameterized for the information transmission procedure delivers the pickup information. This
pickup information is combined with the reception information for the trip condition. If the trip condition is
fulfilled, the information-transmission method creates the operate indication.
A trip signal results through the simultaneous presence of a pickup and a release signal.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 535
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
[lotefste-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In the following, the individual function blocks for the information transmission procedure are described.
Detailed information about the function control can be found in chapter 2.3 Function Control .
For the coupling of reception signals from opposite ends, the 3 reception block types Rec. bin.sig.1,
Unblock reception and protection interface reception are available. The information transmission proce-
dures described in the following can be operated with the suitable reception blocks as needed.
A mixture between a line end connected through a protection interface and a binary connected line end is
possible.
536 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
[lotprxbi-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the communication occurs through binary signals, this reception logic is used. If an information transmission
procedure is configured, for example, with altogether 3 ends, 2 function blocks Reception are required.
For applications with 1-pole trip, the selectivity for double ground faults can be improved on parallel lines if 3
phase-selective transmission signals can be transferred per communication direction. The receipt signals can
thus be used phase-specifically for A, B, and C or in general as individual signals.
For common-phase information transmission, the signal >Receive general is used, for phase-selective
information transmission the 3 signals >Receive phs A, >Receive phs B, and >Receive phs C.
The binary input >Receive failure affects the status indications of the function control, see Figure 6-150.
[lotpsunb-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
You can use the information-transmission methods optionally with the unblocking method. The difference to
the conventional binary receipt is that a trip is also then possible if a release signal arrives from the opposite
end.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 537
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
• If the attenuation of the transmission signal at the fault point can be so large that the reception from the
other line end is not provided
For transmission of the signal, 2 signal frequencies are required, which are sent from the transmission signal
of the protection device. If the transmission device has channel monitoring, a monitoring frequency (blocking
frequency) can be switched to a working frequency (unblocking frequency). During the idle state or during an
external error, the monitoring frequency is transmitted, which signalizes the binary input >Blocking
general (or during phase-selective information transmission to the binary inputs >Blocking phs A,
>Blocking phs B and >Blocking phs C) of the unblock logic.
If in the event of a fault due to the transmission signal from the opposite line end the working frequency is
received healthy, the receipt signal >Unblocking general will appear at the binary input of the unblock
logic. During phase-selective information transmission, instead of >Unblocking general the 3 reception
signals >Unblocking phs A, >Unblocking phs Band >Unblocking phs C are used. Subsequently,
the blocking signal >Blocking general disappears. During the phase-selective information transmission,
the 3 blocking signals >Blocking phs A, >Blocking phs B, and >Blocking phs C are used. With
this, the signal >Unblocking general (or the the respective signals >Unblocking phs A,
>Unblocking phs B, and >Unblocking phs C) are transmitted and the reception of the trip logic of the
information transmission procedure is approved.
A short circuit on the line can cause an attenuation or reflection of the signal and the signal to be transmitted
no longer reaches the other line end. In this condition both binary inputs >Unblocking general and
>Blocking general are not active. After a time delay of 20 ms, the release is still created and forwarded
to the receipt logic. The release is then retracted over the time stage after a further 100 ms.
If the signals continue to receive without disruptions, the release is possible again after a dropout delay of
100 ms.
If the device does not receive any of the signals for 10 s, the indication Unblock receive fail. is gener-
ated. This indication affects the status indications of the function control, see Figure 6-150.
[lotprxws-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the communication takes place via a protection interface (digital), this receipt logic is used. Independent of
the number of configured devices, only one function block Protection interface is always required. The
number and the identity of the devices that participate in the information-transmission method for protection of
the line configuration can be set in the function group Protection-data communication under Device
configuration.
538 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
6.9.4.1 Description
[dwtevgve-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the ground-fault protection recognizes an error in a forward direction, a transmission signal will be sent to
the opposite end. If the error is also recognized in the forward direction, the received signal in the device on
the opposite end will lead to an increased trip.
[loteseve-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
With the parameters Send with, you can select which stage of the ground-fault protection affects the trans-
mission signal. The transmission condition is fulfilled if the selected stage - or stages - are picked up in a
forward direction. If the protection has already submitted a trip command, the transmission signal can be
prolongated by a set time (_:5761:101) Send prolongation. This allows for the release of the other
cable end even if the short circuit is very quickly switched off. With this, pickup differences between the cable
ends and signal delays can be considered.
If needed, the transmission signal can be delayed with (_:5761:102) Send delay.
The transient blocking (signal Transient blocking) provides additional security from fault signals due to
transient oscillations caused by a change of direction after disconnection of external faults (for example, on
parallel lines). The detailed description can be found in chapter 6.9.6.1 Description . No transmission signal is
sent in the event of transient blocking.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 539
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
For applications with 1-pole trip, the selectivity of the comparison method for double ground faults can be
improved on parallel lines if 3 phase-selective transmission signals are transferred per communication direc-
tion. Transmission and reception signals can thus be used phase-specifically for L1, L2 and L3 or phase-
jointly as individual signals (general).
[loteausv-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The ground-fault protection provides the pickup information to the information transmission procedure. The
trip for the affected stage is attended to by that information transmission procedure with which the ground-
fault protection collaborates.
If a reception signal is present, the stage set through the parameter (_:5761:141) Operate with will be
released for trip. The trip can be delayed. You can set the time delay under Send delay.
With the parameter (_:5761:11) 1-pole operate allowed, the trip logic can allow for 1-pole trip in
1-/3-pole trip devices. This parameter does not apply to devices that only have 3-pole trip.
If the permissive overreach transfer trip for the protection of a line configuration with more than 2 ends is
used, the reception signals from all line ends are combined for the trip with AND.
A trip signal results from the simultaneous presence of
• Stage pickup
• Release signal
• Expired time
For applications with delayed trip, a non-recurring receipt signal is only kept until the stage pickup returns.
Through this, it is guaranteed that the release signal is also present if the time-out of the corresponding time
delay releases the trip and the transmission signal of the protection of the opposite end is no longer imminent.
540 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
The transient blocking (signal Transient blocking) prevents the release of the trip in the comparison
procedure. It ensures additional security from fault signals due to transient oscillations caused by a change of
direction after disconnection of external faults (for example on parallel lines). The detailed description can be
found in chapter 6.9.6.1 Description .
• In order for the cable end to also be tripped with a weak infeed, the information transmission procedures
have a function for trip with weak infeed.
The functions are described in detail in the chapter Echo and Tripping in the event of weak infeed.
6.9.4.2 Application and Setting Notes for the Trip Logic of the Comparison Procedures
The various comparison procedures can be implemented by using both parameters Send with and
Operate with (see Figure 6-155 and Figure 6-156) . Additionally, you must observe the selection of the
reception block.
The following methods can be ordered:
Methods Parameter: Send with Parameter: Operate with
Ground-fault comparison proce- One or multiple stages One or multiple stages
dure
Ground-fault unblock procedure One or multiple stages One or multiple stages
(unblock logic as a reception block)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 541
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
[dwtevgvf-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
With the following settings, you can configure the directional comparison:
542 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
[dwteublv-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
With the following settings, you can configure the directional-unblocking method:
6.9.4.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 543
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
544 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
6.9.5.1 Description
[dwtefblo-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the protection function recognizes a ground fault in the backward direction, the blocking signal is sent to the
opposite end (signal Blocking). If the protection device does not receive a blocking signal at the receiving
line end, it generates the trip signal after a short time delay.
Transmission Logic
[lotesblk-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The blocking signal is created in the event of pickup of the ground-fault protection in the backward or non-
directional direction. The threshold value for creation of the blocking signal is the percentage of the threshold
value of the level that affects tripping in the blocking procedure. The percentage is set with the parameter (_:
5761:104) 3I0 threshold rev./forw. in the information transmission procedure. Further information
can be found in the section 6.9.7.1 Description .
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 545
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
The logic is designed in a phase-selective manner. With the parameter (_:5791:101) Send prolonga-
tion, you can extend the blocking signal. Even if the error has already been cleared up locally, the opposite
end can continue to be blocked through this.
The blocking signal can also be immediately sent with jump detection (parameter (_:5791:102) Send
with jump). If the communication channel can react very quickly to the absence of the blocking signal, you
can use this jump signal, because the jump signal appears for every jump in the dimensions. If the ground-
fault protection recognizes an error in the forward direction, the blocking signal is immediately stopped and
the indication Stop is created.
For applications with 1-pole trip, the selectiveness of the blocking procedure for double faults can be
improved on parallel lines if 3 phase-selective transmission signals are transferred per communication direc-
tion. Transmission and reception signals can therefore be used phase-specifically for A, B, and C or phase-
jointly as individual signals.
[loteaubv-300511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The ground-fault protection provides the pickup information to the information transmission procedure. The
trip for the affected stage is attended to by that information transmission procedure with which the ground-
fault protection works together.
If a reception signal is present, the zone set through the parameter (_:5791:140) Operate with will be
released for trip. The trip of the blocking method must be delayed due to possible differences in the pickup
times of the devices at both cable ends and because of the transmission time. You can set the time delay
with the parameter (_:5791:107) Release delay.
The tripping can be delayed. You can set the time delay under (_:5761:102) Send delay.
546 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
• For the protection of line configurations with more than 2 ends with different infeed
If the ground-fault protection recognizes an error in a backward direction, a blocking signal is transmitted. If
the other cable end does not receive a blocking signal, the ground-fault protection trips in a forward direction
in the case of a ground-fault current. Since no release signal is required by the opposite end, single infeed
short circuits are quickly switched off with the blocking method.
[dwteblve-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 547
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
With the parameter Send with jump, you can set if the blocking signal is sent without delay with the jump
detection. Siemens recommends using the fast blocking with jump and retaining the setting.
6.9.5.3 Settings
548 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
6.9.6.1 Description
The transient blocking provides additional security from fault signals due to transient oscillations caused by a
change of direction after disconnection of external faults (for example on parallel lines).
[lotetrbl-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If a pickup in the reverse direction or non-directionally is present (non-forward fault), the transient blocking
occurs after a waiting period ((_:5791:105) Trans. blk. pickup delay). After the omission of the
blocking criteria, the transient blocking will be maintained for a set time ((_:5791:106) Trans. blk.
dropout delay).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 549
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
The teleprotection for ground-fault protection and distance protection can influence each other simultane-
ously. With the parameter Trans. block through, you can set if the transient blocking of the teleprotec-
tion for the distance protection should have an effect on the teleprotection of the ground-fault protection. The
mutual influence is meaningful if the teleprotection for ground-fault protection and distance protection works
with a shared communication channel.
i
NOTE
The time Trans. blk. pickup delay may not be set to zero. This makes sure that the transient-
blocking time Trans. blk. dropout delay is not already started if the directional information comes
in a delayed manner compared to the function pickup. Depending on the time of the circuit breaker on the
parallel line or the circuit breaker lying in a reverse direction, settings between 10 ms and 40 ms are
recommended.
6.9.7.1 Description
In order to avoid a faulty echo during comparison, it must be ensured that an external ground-fault with a
flowing ground-fault current is recognized on both cable ends. During the blocking method and for the tran-
sient blocking, a secure blocking signal must be created under these conditions.
If the error is not recognized in a ground-fault in accordance with Figure 6-164 the protection in B, this would
be interpreted as an error fed-in from A. With a comparison, protection B would send an echo signal. For the
blocking procedure and for the transient blocking, the required blocking signal would not be created. The
consequence would be a faulty trip of the ground-fault protection in A.
[dwt3i0v1-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
550 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
The information transmission procedure with ground-fault protection has a sensitive ground-current stage (_:
5791:104) 3I0 threshold rev./forw..
[lotsigzu-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
With the permissive overreach transfer trip, the sensitive ground-current stage has an effect on the echo func-
tion and the transient blocking. If the stage for the recognition of a backward fault in B is always more sensi-
tive than the stage pickup of the ground-fault protection, which sees an error from the other line end A in a
forward direction, no fault echo signal can result and the transient blocking will also work correctly.
With the blocking method, the sensitive ground-current stage is the threshold from which the blocking signal
is created if there are reverse errors. For this application, it also applies that the recognition of a reverse error
in B must be more sensitive than the stage pickup of the ground-fault protection, which sees the error from
the other cable end A in a forward direction. Thus, the blocking signal sent from B leads to the required
blocking of the trip ground-current stage on the cable end A.
The setting value for the sensitive ground-current stage is a percent value. For permissive overreach transfer
trips, it automatically relates to the threshold value of the stage or the stages of the ground-fault protection,
which are connected with the permissive overreach transfer trip through the parameter Send with.
During the blocking procedure, the percentage setting value is automatically in regards to the stage or stages
of the ground-fault protection, which are connected with the blocking procedure through the parameter
Operate with.
6.9.7.2 Application and Setting Notes for the Sensitive Stage of the Ground-Fault Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 551
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
fore be below half of the response value of the ground-current stage used for signal transmission. Addition-
ally, the considerations described above apply with regard to the capacitive ground current, which is not dealt
with in Figure 6-166. The conditions are more convenient for a ground-current distribution different than
assumed here, because then one of the 2 ground currents 3I0b or 3I0c must be greater than in the previous
consideration.
[dwt3i0v2-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-166 Possible Inconvenient Current Distribution through a Teed Feeder in the Event of an External
Ground Fault
552 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Echo and Tripping on Weak Infeed
• From the end of the line with no infeed or only weak infeed
To accelerate tripping at both ends of the line in these situations, the Echo and tripping on weak infeed
function supports the Echo function and the TWI function (TWI = tripping on weak infeed).
To trip the end of the line with a strong infeed, the echo function can be implemented at the end of the line
with a weak infeed. In the absence of pickup at one end of the line, the echo function sends the received
signal back to the other end of the line as an echo, so that the trip command can be enabled there.
The Echo function can also be used to test the signal connection between the protection devices in the
context of permissive underreach transfer trip.
You can also use the TWI function to trip the end of the line with missing or weak infeed. You can use the
TWI function together with permissive overreach transfer trips and permissive underreach transfer trip.
Please note that the function must not be used in conjunction with blocking methods.
[dwwnstru-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The 2 subfunctions Echo and tripping on weak infeed receive control signals from the information-transmis-
sion method for distance protection and ground-fault protection in the local device; see the following figure.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 553
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Echo and Tripping on Weak Infeed
[dwwnfblk-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Echo Release
The release signal for the echo function in the information-transmission method with distance protection is
generated as follows:
[lodisecf-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-169 Release Logic for the Echo Function with Distance Protection
The release signal for the echo function in the information-transmission method with ground-fault protection is
generated as follows:
554 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Echo and Tripping on Weak Infeed
[loeksecf-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-170 Release Logic for the Echo Function with Ground-Fault Protection
Echo Logic
There are 2 echo logics. Structured in exactly the same way, they are assigned to the distance protection and
ground-fault protection functions. The echo logic is shown in the following figure.
[lodisecl-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The time delay (_:5821:102) Echo and operate delay takes effect when the echo release for
distance protection or ground-fault protection is set. This time delay is necessary if the pickup time for the
protection function at the weak end of the line is higher for a reverse fault or if the protection function picks up
later due to unfavorable short-circuit or ground-current distribution. The echo is transmitted at the end of the
time delay. If the circuit-breaker position at the end of the line without infeed is 3-pole open, the echo time
delay is not necessary. The echo time delay is bypassed.
You can set the length of the echo pulse with the (_:5821:103) Echo pulse parameter.
The circuit-breaker position is signaled centrally by the process monitor.
A new echo cannot be transmitted for at least 50 ms (default setting of the (_:5821:101) Echo block
time after Tx parameter) once the echo pulse has been released or for the duration of the send signal
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 555
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Echo and Tripping on Weak Infeed
associated with the release method currently in use. This prevents the echo from being repeated immediately
after the line is disconnected.
[lokankoo-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
556 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Echo and Tripping on Weak Infeed
[loasephe-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-173 Detection of Weak Infeed for Phase-to-Ground Voltages (Grounded Systems)
For systems with isolated or resonant-grounded neutral point, the phase-to-phase voltages are used as the
criteria for undervoltage detection. Phase-selective detection of weak infeed is not possible.
[loasephp-170912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-174 Detection of Weak Infeed for Phase-to-Phase Voltages (Isolated or Resonant-Grounded
Systems)
The TWI function is used to trip the circuit breaker at the end of the line with missing or weak infeed.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 557
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Echo and Tripping on Weak Infeed
[lownfrei-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Phase-selective TWI pickup is triggered if a weak infeed is detected and a receive signal from the informa-
tion-transmission method for distance protection or ground-fault protection is pending at the same time. On
TWI pickup, the trip logic of the associated method triggers the trip signal.
TWI pickup and thus tripping can be delayed with the parameterizable time (_:5821:102) Echo and
operate delay. TWI tripping is also delayed by the release time (_:5821:103) Echo pulse. Synchro-
nization between echo and TWI is achieved by both functions using the same time parameters.
To select the Echo and tripping on weak infeed function, use the function library with DIGSI.
The function is designed for working together with permissive underreach transfer trip and permissive over-
reach transfer trips. The function must not be used in conjunction with blocking methods.
The function contains the following parameters:
The basic mode of operation is set with the (_:5821:104) Weak infeed action parameter.
• Recommended setting value (_:5821:104) Weak infeed action = only echo
558 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Echo and Tripping on Weak Infeed
If distance protection and ground-fault protection are using the same communication channel and generate
an echo independently of one another, you must set the (_:5821:105) 85-21/67N common
chan.parameter to yes to avoid unwanted tripping.
The length of the echo delay time (_:5821:102) Echo and operate delay must be set so that
different pickup response times for Distance-protection functions or Ground-fault protection functions at all
ends of the line cannot lead to an unwanted echo if faults occur outside the system.
• Recommended setting value (_:5821:102) Echo and operate delay = 40 ms
Parameter: Echo pulse
The echo pulse duration (_:5821:103) Echo pulse can be adapted to transmission-system conditions. It
must be long enough to ensure that the receive signal is detected even if the movement delays of the protec-
tion and transmission devices at the ends of the line are not the same.
• Recommended setting value Echo pulse = 50 ms
Parameter: Echo block time after Tx
To avoid an infinite echo between the ends of the line, a new echo cannot be sent for a period of (_:
5821:101) Echo block time after Tx after an echo signal has been sent. An infinite echo could
otherwise be triggered by interference coupling on the signal path, for example. The echo is also blocked for
this time once distance protection or ground-fault protection has been sent.
• Recommended setting value Echo block time after Tx = 50 ms
Parameter: Undervoltage threshold
This parameter is only relevant if you are using the TWI function (tripping on missing or weak infeed).
The upper limit for this threshold value (_:5821:106) Undervoltage threshold must be below the
minimum voltage to be expected during operation. The maximum voltage drop to be expected at the end of
the line with weak infeed if there is a short circuit on the line to be protected, at which distance protection
might no longer pick up, applies as the lower limit.
In systems with grounded neutral point, phase-to-ground voltages apply as reference values; in systems with
isolated or resonant-grounded neutral point, phase-to-phase voltages apply.
6.10.6 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 559
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Echo and Tripping on Weak Infeed
560 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 External Trip Initiation 3-Pole
• Enables direct tripping of the circuit breaker in conjunction with busbar-protection applications
• Enables direct tripping of the circuit-breaker in the case of circuit-breaker failure at the other line end
[dwstrext-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 561
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 External Trip Initiation 3-Pole
[lotrip3p-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
562 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 External Trip Initiation 3-Pole
6.11.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 563
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
• The automatic reclosing can occur through an external automatic reclosing function via binary inputs.
The automatic reclosing after switching off through a short-circuit protection is taken over by the automatic
reclosing function (AREC). The following figure shows an example for the normal procedure with a two-time
automatic reclosing where the second automatic reclosing attempt is successful.
[dw2awewz-090210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-178 Process Diagram of a Two-Time Reclosing With Action Time (2nd Reclosing Successful)
The integrated Automatic reclosing function allows for up to 8 reclosing attempts. Each of the 8 disruption
cycles can work with different parameters.
[dwfktawe-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
564 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
For the Cyclic automatic reclosing function, 1 cycle is preset. The preset cycle cannot be deleted. You can
add and delete additional cycles from the function library in DIGSI 5.
[dwzykawe-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[dwaweasp-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-181 Structure/Embedding of the Automatic Reclosing Function With Adaptive Dead Time (ADT)
[dwextawe-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-182 Structure/Embedding of the Operating Function With External Automatic Reclosing Function
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 565
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
Function Control
The automatic reclosing function contains a central function control, see the following figure. You can find
detailed information on the function control in the section Function/Stage Control.
[loarcfkt-090211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The Automatic reclosing function (AREC) can be influenced by the protection functions in the following way:
• The AREC is started through pickup indications and operate indications by the selected protection func-
tions or protection stages. The start is independent of the set operating mode for the AREC.
• Individual protection functions or protection stages can be configured so that their operate indication
blocks the AREC. If such a blocking exists, the AREC cannot be started. If the AREC is already started,
the blocking will lead to the cancellation of the AREC.
The automatic reclosing device can thus have an influence on the effects of the protection functions. The
following influence possibilities exist:
• The AREC provides signals that can be used by protection functions for the blocking or release of
special stages or zones. An example is the release of overreaching zones with distance protection.
566 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
[loawesig-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-184 Signals between Protection Functions and Automatic Reclosing Functions
The configuration of the interaction between internal protection functions and automatic reclosing functions
can be set separately for each protection function, see Figure 6-184. The configuration occurs in a matrix
view in DIGSI, see the following figure..
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 567
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
[scdigsia-080311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-185 Configuration of the Protection Functions for Starting and Blocking the Automatic Reclosing
Function in DIGSI 5
If a protection function or the stage of a protection function is connected with the AREC through the matrix,
this means that the respective pickup and operate indications are forwarded to the AREC.
The links can be conducted separately
• For starting the automatic reclosing function and
• For the blocking of the automatic reclosing function
The Automatic reclosing function also has the corresponding binary inputs and binary outputs through which
the external protection devices can be connected to the internal Automatic reclosing function.
568 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
[dwarce1d-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Through the action time, there is a direct influence on the dead time behavior of the automatic reclosing func-
tion. With faults with short operate times, other dead times can be realized than for removed faults with longer
tripping time. With faults with short operate time, an automatic reclosing is executed, with removed faults this
does not occur with longer operate time. The operating mode with op., with act. time allows for
different automatic reclosing cycles depending on the operate time of the protection function(s).
• With 2-phase pickup, the automatic reclosing cycles set for 2-phase dead times are activated.
• With 3-phase pickup, the automatic reclosing cycles set for 3-phase dead times are activated.
With each automatic reclosing cycle, it is checked to see if it is a 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase pickup.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 569
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
With raising general pickup, the action times of the configured automatic reclosing cycles start. The general
pickup is in this connection the group indication of all internal protection functions configured for starting the
automatic reclosing and the external binary input for general pickup >Gen. pickup for start.
Through the time between the raising general pickup and raising trip command, the automatic reclosing cycle
to be started will be determined. Here for multiple automatic reclosing cycles, the sequence of the expiring
automatic reclosing cycles is not fixed, like the operating modes without action time.
The following example shows a tripping that comes after expiration of the action time of cycle 1, but still
before the expiration of the action times from cycle 2 and cycle 3. Since it is a 2-phase pickup, cycle 2 is
active with the dead-time setting for 2-phase faults.
After reclosing, there will be another, this time 3-phase, pickup and tripping within the following reclaim time.
Since cycle 2 is already complete, these and all lower cycles are no longer able to expire. The trip command
comes during the current action time of cycle 3. Thus, cycle 3 is active, with the dead time setting for 3-phase
faults.
[dwarcbm2-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[dwaweb3d-240810-01.tif, 1, en_US]
570 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
The start of the dead time occurs after each trip command. Additionally, the pickup sample from the
conductor pickups is considered:
• With 1-phase pickup, the automatic reclosing cycles set for 1-phase dead times are activated. 1-phase
pickup includes both pickup samples phase-to-ground and only grounding.
• With 2-phase pickup, the automatic reclosing cycles set for 2-phase dead times are activated.
• With 3-phase pickup, the automatic reclosing cycles set for 3-phase dead times are activated.
With each automatic reclosing cycle, it is checked to see if it is a 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase pickup. If more
than one automatic reclosing cycle is configured, the sequence of the expiring automatic reclosing cycles is
identical with the cycle number (1, 2, 3, etc.).
[dwarcbs4-170311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 571
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
[lozykawe-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
572 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
[lobtaaus-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• On Start with 2-phase pickup, it is recognized if all 2 phases were picked up in the period from the first
raising pickup indication up to the last clearing pickup indication and at no time 3 phases.
• On Start with 1-phase pickup, it is recognized if only 1 phase was picked up in the period from the first
raising pickup indication up to the last clearing pickup indication.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 573
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
For operating modes with action time, the start of the action time(s) occurs with the pickup indications.
During operating modes with pickup, the pickup indications affect the selection of the dead times. During all
operating modes, the pickup indications are also required during the processing of faults and for supervision
during the reclaim time.
The automatic reclosing operating modes with pickup are only ideal for applications with 3-pole tripping.
Therefore, the outputs of the input logic always signal 3-pole operate indications.
[lobtaanr-010611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
6.12.4.5 Start
In the Start function block, the automatic reclosing function is switched from the idle state AREC ready to the
state Dead time, see Figure 6-193. The length of the starting signals is controlled with a supervision time.
574 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
• The circuit breaker must be closed before the 3-pole trip command. This condition is not considered if
the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are not connected to the protection device.
You can delay the transition to the dead time state through the binary input >Dead time start delay.
As long the corresponding binary signal is present, the dead time of the automatic reclosing function will not
be started. The maximum duration of this binary signal is monitored through a time stage that can be set,
parameter Max. dead-time delay. Upon expiration of this time stage, that is, if the binary signal is
present longer than permitted, the automatic reclosing function will be blocked until the end of the binary
signal, additionally extended by another 0.5 s. See also chapter 6.12.4.17 Blockings.
[logistar-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
6.12.4.6 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 1: With Tripping/With Action Time
The cycle control checks the readiness for each automatic reclosing cycle and controls the process of the
action time(s). In Figure 6-194, the cycle control is illustrated.
Cycle Availability
The cycle availability is influenced through the parameterization of the dead time and through a binary input.
In this way, setting the parameter Dead time aft. 3-pole trip to invalid avoids an automatic
reclosing after 3-pole tripping. Correspondingly, there is no automatic reclosing function if the Dead time
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 575
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
aft. 1-pole trip 10 is set to invalid. If both dead times are set to invalid, the respective automatic
reclosing cycle will be completely blocked. With the binary input >Block 79 cycle, you can block the asso-
ciated automatic reclosing cycle.
For applications with 1-pole tripping, the cycle control provides a signal, based on which the protection func-
tions can recognize that the automatic reclosing function only occurs after 1-pole tripping (AR only after
1p. trip). The approval or switch over of special protection stages only occurs for types of fauts that lead
to 1-pole tripping.
Action Time
If the automatic reclosing function is in the idle state automatic reclosing function ready, an incoming
general pickup will affect the start of the action time. This applies for the reclosing function cycles that are
released through the parameter Start from idle state allow. and not blocked.
During one of the started action times, the corresponding reclosing cycle is blocked and the reclosing cycle is
assigned the next highest cycle number, whose action time is running and is not blocked.
With raising trip commands, the action times are stopped and reset. The process state of the action times
existing at this moment determines the automatic reclosing cycle that should be started.
If all initiated action times expire without capturing a tripping, the automatic reclosing function does not take
place. However, if a tripping function is initiated after expiry of the action time, the automatic closing function
is blocked for 3 seconds. A new start of the reclosing function is only possible if the general pickup is no
longer active.
576 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
[loauswir-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-194 Cycle Control with Operating Mode: With Tripping/With Action Time
6.12.4.7 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 2: With Pickup/With Action Time
The cycle control checks the readiness for each automatic reclosing cycle and controls the process of the
action time(s). In Figure 6-195, the cycle control is illustrated.
Cycle Availability
The cycle availability is influenced through the parameterization of the dead time and through a binary input.
In this way, setting the parameter Dead time aft.1ph. pickup to invalid avoids an automatic
reclosing after 3-pole tripping due to 1-phase short circuits. This also applies to Dead time aft.2ph.
pickup and Dead time aft.3ph. pickup. If all 3 dead times are set to invalid, the respective
reclosing cycle will be completely blocked. With the binary input >Block 79 cycle, you can block the asso-
ciated automatic reclosing cycle.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 577
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
Action Time
If the automatic reclosing function is in the idle state automatic reclosing function ready, an incoming
general pickup will affect the start of the action time. This applies for the reclosing function cycles that are
released through the parameter Start from idle state allow. and not blocked.
During one of the started action times, the corresponding reclosing cycle is blocked and the reclosing cycle is
assigned the next highest cycle number, whose action time is running and is not blocked.
With raising trip commands, the action times are stopped and reset. The process state of the action times
existing at this moment determines the automatic reclosing cycle that should be started.
If all initiated action times expire without capturing a tripping, the automatic reclosing function does not take
place. However, if a tripping function is initiated after expiry of the action time, the automatic closing function
is blocked for 3 seconds. A new start of the reclosing function is only possible if the general pickup is no
longer active.
578 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
[loanrwir-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-195 Cycle Control with Operating Mode: With Pickup/With Action Time
6.12.4.8 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 3: With Tripping/Without Action Time
The cycle control checks the availability for each automatic reclosing cycle. In Figure 6-196, the cycle control
for the 1st automatic reclosing cycle and other reclosing cycles is illustrated. The further automatic reclosing
cycles are generally described with the cycle number n and apply for all other configured automatic reclosing
cycles.
The cycle availability is influenced through the parameterization of the dead time and through a binary input.
In this way, setting the parameter Dead time aft. 3-pole trip to invalid avoids an automatic
reclosing after 3-pole tripping. Correspondingly, there is no automatic reclosing function after 1-pole tripping if
the Dead time aft. 1-pole trip 11 to invalid. If both dead times are set to invalid, the respective
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 579
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
automatic reclosing cycle will be completely blocked. With the binary input >Block 79 cycle, you can
block the associated automatic reclosing cycle.
For applications with 1-pole tripping, the cycle control provides a signal, based on which the protection func-
tions can recognize that the automatic reclosing function only occurs after 1-pole tripping (AR only after
1p. trip). The approval or switch over of special protection stages only occurs for types of faults that lead
to 1-pole tripping.
[loauowrk-210311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-196 Cycle Control with Operating Mode: With Tripping/Without Action Time
6.12.4.9 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 4: With Pickup/Without Action Time
The cycle control checks the availability for each automatic reclosing cycle. In Figure 6-197, the cycle control
for the 1st automatic reclosing cycle and other reclosing cycles is illustrated. The further automatic reclosing
cycles are generally described with the cycle number n and apply for all other configured automatic reclosing
cycles.
580 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
The cycle availability is influenced through the parameterization of the dead time and through a binary input.
In this way, setting the parameter Dead time aft.1ph. pickup to invalid avoids an automatic
reclosing after 3-pole tripping due to 1-phase short circuits. This also applies to Dead time aft.2ph.
pickup and Dead time aft.3ph. pickup. If all 3 dead times are set to invalid, the respective
reclosing cycle will be completely blocked. With the binary input >Block 79 cycle, you can block the asso-
ciated automatic reclosing cycle.
[loanowrk-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-197 Cycle Control with Operating Mode: With Pickup/Without Action Time
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 581
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
Figure 6-198 shows the tripping stage release for the 1st automatic reclosing cycle. With available automatic
reclosing functions, the tripping stage release typically occurs up to the expiration of the dead time. The cycle
number in this state is on 1. However, if the automatic reclosing cycle is set only for 1-phase 12, the tripping
stage release will be reset to the beginning of the 1-phase dead time. This is necessary, since every addi-
tional evolving fault that occurs within the dead time causes a 3-pole cut-off, and subsequently, the automatic
reclosing function can no longer take place.
[lo1awezk-170912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-198 Stage Release for Protection Functions in the 1st Automatic Reclosing Cycle
The tripping stage release for higher automatic reclosing cycles is set to the beginning of the reclaim time for
rising edge close commands. Simultaneously, the cycle number is increased. The reset condition is identical
to the condition for the 1st automatic reclosing cycle. If the reduced dead time (RDT) mode is selected and no
additional reduced dead time occurs, the release of the 2nd cycle will be maintained, since it can be assumed
that the opposite end is open.
[lo2awezk-170912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-199 Stage Release for Protection Functions Starting With the 2nd Automatic Reclosing Cycle
582 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
Setting the parameter Dead time aft. 3-pole trip to ∞ (= invalid) avoids an automatic reclosing after
3-pole tripping. Correspondingly, there is no automatic reclosing after 1-pole tripping if Dead time aft. 1-
pole trip is set to ∞ (= invalid).
As soon as an evolving fault is recognized (see chapter 6.12.4.13 Evolving-Fault Detection During Dead
Time), switching to an automatic reclosing cycle for 3-pole interruption occurs. With the 3-pole cut-off of the
evolving fault, a separate adjustable dead time for the evolving fault begins. The total dead time is composed
of the part of the dead time that expired until the evolving fault was stopped for the first disruption plus the
dead time for the evolving fault. With the setting of the parameter Dead time aft. evolv. fault to ∞
(= invalid), no other automatic reclosing cycle is executed after tripping by the evolving fault. The tripping
through evolving faults is then finished.
3-pole Circuit-Breaker Condition With 1-Pole Tripping And Implausible Circuit-Breaker Condition
With applications with 1-pole tripping, during the dead time there is a plausibility check between the assigned
trip command and the flow of electricity in the open conductor. If the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are
connected pole-selectively, the plausibility check also occurs with the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts. More
information can be found in the chapter 6.12.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness and Circuit-Breaker Condition .
The plausibility check determines whether the circuit-breaker poles that have not been switched off after a 1-
pole trip command remain closed.
For an implausible circuit-breaker condition, a 3-pole trip-command synchronization for the circuit breaker is
executed, provided the trip-command synchronization through the parameter is permitted (parameter 3-pole
operate by 79). After this 3-pole tripping, if set and not blocked, more 3-pole automatic reclosing cycles
may follow.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 583
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
[lopauaul-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-200 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function - Logic of the Dead Time for the Operating Modes: With
Tripping
584 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
[lopauare-010611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-201 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function - Logic of the Dead Time for the Operating Modes: With
Pickup
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 585
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
[dwbspffe-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-202 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function - Example for an Evolving Fault
586 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
For tripping through evolving faults, the entire dead time consists of the part of the dead time expired until
disconnecting the evolving fault for the 1-pole interruption plus the dead time for the fault together, see
Figure 6-203.
The dead time for evolving faults is started with the return of the operate indication or with the opening of all
3 circuit-breaker poles, provided the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are connected.
3-Pole Tripping of the Circuit Breaker for Automatic Reclosing Function Blocking through Evolving Faults in a 1-
Pole Dead Time
If due to an evolving fault there is a blocking of the automatic reclosing function in the 1-pole dead time
without a protection function submitting a 3-pole trip command, for example, during an evolving-fault detec-
tion with pickup, the automatic reclosing function can create a 3-pole trip command. Thus, the circuit breaker
will have 3-pole tripping in which the blocking of the automatic reclosing function will occur.
[lofofeer-010611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 587
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
• Through a binary input for delaying the close command (>Delay close cmd.)
The Close cmd. indication is a requirement for the assignment of the actual close command to the
circuit breaker.
The mentioned criteria must not be fulfilled directly after expiration of the dead time. If a dead-time prolonga-
tion is set, the mentioned criteria will be checked during the prolongation. With the release of the closing indi-
cation, the automatic reclosing function will switch to the reclaim time state.
[loeinsha-141111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-204 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Closing Indication
588 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
[lolsvoei-130511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-205 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Query of the Circuit-Breaker Readiness Directly
before Closing
Synchrocheck
For each of the configured automatic reclosing cycles, you can set if a synchrocheck should be executed and
which functionality should be used here, see Figure 6-206. You may only use the internal synchrocheck if the
device is connected to a voltage transformer.
Alternatively, you can also connect an external device with synchrocheck through a binary input.
The measuring request for the synchrocheck is placed if the optional test of the circuit-breaker readiness was
positive. The measuring request for the synchrocheck exists until the synchrocheck assigns the allowance for
the closure. If the allowance is not given within the set maximum dead time extension, the closure will be
cancelled through the blocking of the automatic reclosing function. The minimum duration of the measuring
request is 50 ms.
[losyncro-130511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-206 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Inquiry of the Synchronism
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 589
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
Close Command
As soon as the test of the circuit-breaker readiness and the synchrocheck deliver a positive result, the closing
indication will be created. It will be assigned for 100 ms. The actual close command is not created by the
automatic reclosing function, but rather from the circuit-breaker function block outside of the automatic
reclosing function. Here the set maximum duration of the close command is also considered.
In addition to the closing indication, additional indications will be created that describe the type of closure.
These include:
• Close command after 1-pole tripping in the 1st cycle (Cls.cmd after 1p.1.cyc)
• Close command after 3-pole tripping in the first cycle (Cls.cmd after 3p.1.cyc)
• Close command after 1-pole or 3-pole tripping starting with the second cycle (CloseCmd >=2nd.cyc)
• If during the reclaim time another tripping occurred, the currently running automatic reclosing cycle was
not successful. If other automatic reclosing cycles are permitted, one of these cycles will be used to
continue the process. If, in contrast, the currently executed cycle was the last permissible cycle, the
automatic reclosing process will end and be reported as unsuccessful.
In both cases, the automatic reclosing function switches back to the idle state automatic reclosing function
ready.
• With the operating modes without action time, the cycle following the current cycle will always be
selected in the set cycle. If this is blocked, the cycle following this one will be selected, etc. If no higher
cycles exist or if they are all blocked, there will be no further automatic reclosing.
590 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
[losperre-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-207 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the reclaim time
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 591
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
[lolsbere-130511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-208 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Circuit-Breaker Readiness
The automatic reclosing function uses the information from the circuit breaker for the following purposes (see
Figure 6-209):
• Detection of a non-closed circuit breaker before the start:
In idle state of the automatic reclosing function, a non-3-pole closed circuit breaker leads to the blocking
of the automatic reclosing function, see also chapter 6.12.4.17 Blockings. This monitoring is not needed
if the auxiliary-contact signals are not available.
• After a 1-pole trip, a check is done during the dead time to determine whether the circuit-breaker poles
that were not switched off remain closed. The circuit-breaker position recognition is delivered from the
central circuit-breaker position recognition of the Circuit-breaker function group.
For implausible circuit-breaker condition, a 3-pole trip command synchronization for the circuit breaker is
executed provided the settings allows this. After this 3-pole tripping, if set and not blocked, more 3-pole
automatic reclosing cycles may follow, see also chapter 6.12.4.11 Dead Time for Operating Modes With
Tripping.
592 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
[lolsuebe-010611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-209 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for Circuit-Breaker Condition and Supervision
6.12.4.17 Blockings
The Automatic reclosing function differentiates between 2 types of blockings, see Figure 6-210:
• Static blocking and
• dynamic blocking
Static Blocking
The Automatic reclosing function is statically blocked if the function is switched on, but is not ready for
reclosing and also cannot be started as long as this blocking is present. The dynamic blocking is signaled
with the indication Inactive.
The following conditions lead to the static blocking:
Condition Indication
Manual closing of the circuit breaker, recognition through binary input or Inactive
internal device control.
The blocking is temporary, the duration can be set with the parameter
Block. time aft. man.close.
Circuit breaker not available for automatic reclosing function, recogni- Inactive
tion through binary input. This cause can be switched on or off through
the parameter CB ready check bef.close.
Circuit breaker of non-closed 3-pole, recognition through binary input. Inactive
This criteria is used if the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are
connected.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 593
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
Condition Indication
No reclosing cycle possible Inactive
Recognition due to the following causes:
• Automatic reclosing cycle is not set.
• Automatic reclosing cycles are set, but all are blocked, e.g., via
binary input.
• There is no internal device function and no binary input configured
for starting the automatic reclosing function.
• With operating modes with tripping:
– both 1-pole and 3-pole cycles are blocked via binary inputs
• With operating modes with pickup:
– 1-phase, 2-phase and 3-phase automatic reclosing cycles, the
blocking is done through binary inputs.
• With operating modes without action time:
– the first automatic reclosing cycle is blocked via binary input.
• With the functionality dead-line check:
– if the voltage measurement is not available or is disrupted.
Dynamic Blocking
The automatic reclosing function is dynamically blocked if a blocking condition occurs while an automatic
reclosing function is running. The dynamic blocking is signalized with the indication Not ready.
After the occurrence of a dynamic blocking, it is checked in intervals of 0.5 s to see if the blocking can be
removed. If the blocking condition remains or if a different blocking condition occurs in the meantime, the
blocking will remain. If, in contrast, the cause of the blocking disappears, the dynamic blocking will be
removed if no general pickup or no tripping configured for the automatic reclosing function start is available.
A separate indication for logging exists for each individual blocking cause.
The following conditions lead to the dynamic blocking:
Condition Indication
If no reclosing cycle fitting the fault type is released: Not ready
• With operating modes with tripping: Block. by no cycle
If a 1-pole or 3-pole operate indication occurs during the automatic
reclosing function start input, however, the automatic reclosing
function does not start in accordance with the parameterization for
this type of tripping, the respective dead time will be set to
invalid.
• With operating modes with pickup:
If a 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase pickup message occurs during
the automatic reclosing function starting process, but the automatic
reclosing function may not be started in accordance with the
parameterization for this type of pickup.
If a protection function causes the automatic reclosing function to be Not ready
blocked in accordance with the configuration Block. by protection
If the maximum set waiting time for the delay of the start of the dead Not ready
time through the binary input expires without the binary input >Dead Blk.by max. d.t. delay
time start delay becoming inactive during this period of time
If the synchrocheck is set and the synchronism conditions after the expi- Not ready
ration of the maximum dead-time prolongation are not fulfilled before Blk.by max.d.t. expiry
the assignment of the close command
If the inquiry of the circuit-breaker readiness is switched on directly Not ready
before the close command through the parameter and the maximum Blk.by CB ready sup.
dead-time prolongation expires Blk.by max.d.t. expiry
594 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
Condition Indication
If the closing indication is delayed through the binary input >Delay Not ready
close cmd. for so long until the maximum dead time extension is Blk.by max.d.t. expiry
exceeded before the assignment of the close command
If an evolving fault occurs and the parameter Response to evolv. Not ready
faults is set to blocks 79 Blk. by evolving fault
If the start-signal supervision time for the operate indication starting Not ready
from the automatic reclosing function or the starting binary input Blk.by strtsig.superv.
expires.
In this case, a circuit-breaker failure is assumed.
If after the start of the automatic reclosing function a dead time is Not ready
already running and a blocking binary input is active, with the following Block. by binary input
binary inputs:
>Blk. 1-pole AR, >Blk. 3-pole AR, >Blk. with 1-ph
pickup, >Blk. with 2-ph pickup, >Blk. with 3-ph pickup
If the maximum number of automatic reclosing attempts is reached and Not ready
there is a trip command within the reclaim time Block. by max. cycles
With operating modes with action time: Not ready
If the action times of all released automatic reclosing cycles expire Blk.by action time exp
without a trip command
For applications with voltage measurement and switched on functionali- Not ready
ties with dead-line check: Blk.by dead-line check
If during the dead time the required voltage criteria is not fulfilled
For applications with voltage measurement and switched on functionali- Not ready
ties with dead-line check: Blk.by loss of voltage
If during a running automatic reclosing cycle a failure of the measuring
voltage is determined.
After the completion of the automatic reclosing cycle, the dynamic
blocking becomes static blocking if there is a continued failure of the
measuring voltage.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 595
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
[lobloawe-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-210 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic of the Blocking (Static and Dynamic Blocking)
596 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
The respectively selected additional function runs in the automatic reclosing state dead time.
• Exceeding the threshold is fulfilled for the set duration Voltage supervision time.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 597
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
[lovrkarc-130511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-211 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Functions of Reduced Dead Time and Dead-Line
Check
6.12.5.1 Description
Considering the cyclic automatic reclosing function, it is assumed that defined and similar dead times were
set at both line ends and, if applicable, they are set for different types of faults and/or disruption cycles.
It is also possible to set the dead times only at one line end and to configure the adaptive dead time at the
other end or ends. The requirements for this is that the voltage transformer aligned on the line-side or a
possibility to transfer a close command to a remote line end exists.
598 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
Figure 6-212 shows an example with a voltage measurement. It is assumed that device I works with defined
dead times, while the adaptive dead time is configured in device II. It is important that the line is at least fed
from the busbar A, so from the side with the defined dead times.
With the adaptive dead time, the automatic reclosing function at the line end II decides independently if and
when a reclosing is reasonable and permissible and when it is not. The criteria is the voltage of the line at the
end II, which is switched through after reclosing from end I. The reclosing at end II occurs, as soon as it
exists, so that the line from end I is set back under voltage. Basically, all phase-to-phase and phase-to-
ground voltages are monitored.
With an implied short-circuit, the lines at the positions I, II, and III in the example are switched off. Position I is
switched on again after the dead time set there. At position III the reduced dead time (RDT) can be executed
with the appropriate configuration (see chapter 6.12.4.18 Dead-Line Checking (DLC) and Reduced Dead
Time (RDT)) if an infeed is also available on busbar B.
With an implied short-circuit, the lines at the positions I, II, and III in the example are switched off. Position I is
switched on again after the dead time set there. At position III the reduced dead time (RDT) can be executed
with the appropriate configuration (see chapter 6.12.4.18 Dead-Line Checking (DLC) and Reduced Dead
Time (RDT)) if an infeed is also available on busbar B.
If the short circuit has been cleared after successful reclosing, the line A-B from the busbar A will be set
under voltage through the position I. Device II recognizes this voltage and switches on to warrant adequate
voltage measurement time after a short delay The system incident is thus successfully cleared.
If the short circuit is not cleared after closure at position I, I will be switched to the fault again. At line end II,
now no healthy voltage will appear. The device here recognizes this and does not close again.
With multiple reclosing, the process may repeat if the reclosing is unsuccessful until one of the reclosings is
successful or a final closing occurs.
[dwarcasp-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
As the example shows, the adaptive dead time brings along the following advantages:
• The circuit breaker at position II does not switch off again with a remaining fault and is protected through
this.
• With a non-selective tripping through flashing over to position II, no more disruption cycles may exist
here, because the short-circuit path through busbar B and the position II remains disrupted even with
multiple reclosing.
• At position I, with multiple reclosing and even with a final tripping, an overlapping is allowed, because
the line at position II remains open and thus, no actual overreaching.
The adaptive dead time also contains the reduced dead time (VWE), because the criteria are the same. A
special setting of the reduced dead time (VWE) is unnecessary if the automatic reclosing function is used with
adaptive dead time (ASP).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 599
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
[loaweext-140212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
There are no setting parameters for operation with external automatic reclosing functions. The function
provides exclusively the following described binary inputs. The external reclosing device can thus have an
influence on the effects of the internal protection functions.
The following connection possibilities exist:
• From the external reclosing function, the signal >Release stages can be coupled so that the protec-
tion functions use special stages or zones for release. An example is the release of an overreaching
zone with a distance protection or the non-delayed tripping of an overcurrent protection stage in the 1st
reclosing cycle.
• For applications with 1-pole tripping, the external reclosing can provide the signal >1-pole trip
permitted, based on which the protection functions can switch off the 1-pole circuit breaker.
• For applications with reclosing functions only with 1-pole faults and stage or zone releases through the
reclosing function can the signal >1-pole AR only be connected. The protection functions use this
information to allow the stage or zone release only affect 1-pole faults.
600 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
[scdigsia-080311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-214 Configuration of the Protection Functions for Starting and Blocking the Automatic Reclosing
Function in DIGSI
General Settings
If you use the Cyclic automatic reclosing function or Automatic reclosing function with adaptive dead
time function, set the following settings under General.
There are no settings for the function Operation with external automatic reclosing function. The control
occurs exclusively through binary inputs and binary outputs.
• Default setting (_:6601:101) 79 operating mode = with op., with act. time
You can use the 79 operating mode parameter to determine which start criteria the automatic reclosing
function works with.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 601
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
602 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 603
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
i
NOTE
With the use of an internal or external circuit-breaker failure protection at the same line branch, observe
the following:
• The start supervision time should be the same as the circuit-breaker failure protection time delay.
With this, you can make sure that in the case of a circuit-breaker failure followed by the tripping of the
busbar, no automatic reclosing will be executed.
(Note: An exception to this recommendation is described below.)
• During a 1-pole trip command repeat caused by the circuit-breaker failure protection, the start super-
vision time must be longer than the delay time for the 1-pole trip command repeat. With this, you can
make sure that the trip command is not connected before the 1-pole trip command repeat through the
circuit-breaker failure protection from the trip-command synchronization of the 3-pole automatic
reclosing function.
• The start supervision time must be longer than the time delay for the tripping of the busbars if a 1-
pole trip command for the line branch should not be coupled by the automatic reclosing function or
the circuit-breaker failure protection 3-pole before the circuit-breaker failure protection can trip the
busbars. With this case, the automatic reclosing function must be blocked with the trip command for
the busbars. This helps to avoid an automatic reclosing function being executed after the tripping of
the busbars for the line branch. The blocking of the automatic reclosing function can occur with a
CFC link to the binary input>Block function.
604 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
Detailed information about the functionality can be found in the chapters 6.12.4.11 Dead Time for Operating
Modes With Tripping, 6.12.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness and Circuit-Breaker Condition and
6.12.4.13 Evolving-Fault Detection During Dead Time.
For applications with 1-/3-pole tripping, Siemens recommends the setting with trip if the system is
adequately interconnected.
If multiple individual lines in a row form a total transmission path, the setting with pickup may be better
suitable. With this setting, you can prevent 2 lines following each other from switching to 1-pole in different
conductors during evolving faults. The consequence of this fault would be the remainder of a single conductor
in the dead time for the overall transmission path. This is particularly important if power plants are coupled
through the overall transmission path.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 605
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
• Delay through binary input in order e.g. to give the leading automatic reclosing function priority in a
system with 1 1/2 circuit breaker layout.
Remember that longer dead times after 3-pole disconnection are only permissible if no stability problems
occur or if a synchronous test occurs before the reclosing.
You can find detailed information about the functionality in the chapter 6.12.4.14 Closing Indication and Close
Command .
606 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
You can find detailed information about the functionality in the chapter 6.12.4.18 Dead-Line Checking (DLC)
and Reduced Dead Time (RDT).
i
NOTE
Use RDT or DLC only if the voltages of the line can be correctly measured with an open circuit breaker.
This is only possible if the voltage transformer is aligned on the line-side - seen from the circuit breaker.
6.12.8 Application and Setting Notes for 1 Cycle of the Cyclic Automatic Reclosing
Function
For the function of the cyclic automatic reclosing function, 1 cycle is preset. The preset cycle cannot be
deleted. You can add and delete more cycles from the function library in DIGSI 5.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 607
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
Parameter: Dead time aft.1ph. pickup, Dead time aft.2ph. pickup, Dead time aft.3ph. pickup
This parameter is only important and can be set if you use the automatic reclosing function in an operating
mode with pickup.
• Default setting (_:6571:104) Dead time aft.1ph. pickup = 1,2 s
• The parameter Dead time aft.2ph. pickup applies to dead times after 2-phase short circuits and
the following protection tripping: A-B, B-C, C-A, or A-B-gnd, B-C-gnd, C-A-gnd
• The parameter Dead time aft.3ph. pickup applies to dead times after 3-phase short circuits and
the following protection tripping: A-B-C or A-B-C-Gnd
608 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
i
NOTE
If you would like to avoid automatic reclosing during individual short-circuit types, please set the respective
dead times to oo (invalid).
Example:
After 1-phase short-circuits, the automatic reclosing function should occur after 1.2 sec. The automatic
reclosing function should not occur for 2-phase and 3-phase short circuits.
For this application, the parameters should be set as follows:
• Dead time aft.1ph. pickup = 1,2 s
• Dead time aft.2ph. pickup = oo (invalid)
Detailed information about the function can be found in Chapters 6.12.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness and
Circuit-Breaker Condition and 6.12.4.14 Closing Indication and Close Command .
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 609
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Automatic Reclosing Function
With the parameter Synchroch. aft. 3-pole d.t. you can determine if a synchrocheck must be
carried out for the configured automatic reclosing cycle.
If during a 3-pole interruption in the system stability problems may be a concern, the synchrocheck should be
carried out. If only 1-pole reclosure cycles are possible or stability problems are not to be expected during the
3-pole dead time, for example, due to a highly intermeshed system or radial system, please select the param-
eter none.
Parameter Value Description
none During the automatic reclosing cycle a synchrocheck is not executed.
internal In the configured automatic reclosing cycle, a synchrocheck is executed after a
3-pole dead time prior to the close command of the circuit breaker.
For the synchrocheck a synchrocheck stage of the internal synchronization
function is used, which is contained in the same function group as the circuit
breaker and the automatic reclosing function. The selection of the synchro-
check stage that is used in the automatic reclosing cycle occurs through the
following described parameter Internal synchrocheck.
external In the configured automatic reclosing cycle, a synchrocheck is executed after a
3-pole dead time prior to the close command of the circuit breaker.
An external synchrocheck device initiates the synchrocheck. The external
synchrocheck device is connected with the binary signals Synchrocheck
request and >Release by ext.sync.. Detailed information about the
function can be found in Chapter 6.12.4.14 Closing Indication and Close
Command under the section Synchrocheck.
610 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
• Can be used as backup or emergency overcurrent protection in addition to the main protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 611
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[dwocpap1-210113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[dwocpbp1-210113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the following listed, device-internal functions are present in the device, these functions can influence the
pickup values and tripping delays of the stages or block the stages. The stage can also be affected by an
external source via a binary input signal.
• Automatic reclosing (AREC)
• Cold-load pickup detection
612 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[loocp3b1-280113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-217 Logic Diagram of the Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection (Phases) – Basic
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 613
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[loocp3p1-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-218 Logic Diagram of the Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection (Phases) – Advanced
614 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
If the overcurrent protection is set as backup overcurrent protection (parameter Emergency mode = no), it
operates independently of the main protection and thus in parallel. Backup overcurrent protection can also
serve as sole short-circuit protection when, for example, no voltage transformers are available for an initial
startup.
Blocking of the Operate Delay and the Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
(Basic and Advanced Stage)
Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device-internal Inrush-current detection func-
tion is described in chapter 6.13.6.1 Description .
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 615
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
• Default setting (_:661:6) Operate delay = 0.300 s (for the first stage)
Set the Threshold and Operate delay parameters for the specific application.
The following details apply to a 2-stage characteristic curve (1st stage = definite time-overcurrent protection
stage and 2nd stage = high-current stage).
1st stage (overcurrent stage):
The setting depends on the maximum occurring operating current. Pickup by overload must be excluded
since overcurrent protection operates with short tripping times as short-circuit protection and not as overload
protection. Set the Threshold parameter for lines to approx. 10 %, for transformers and motors to approx.
20 % above the maximum expected load.
EXAMPLE
Overcurrent-protection stage: 110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 cross-section
Maximum transmittable power
Pmax = 120 MVA
Correspondingly
Imax = 630 A
Current transformer = 600 A/5 A
Safety factor = 1.1
616 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[foocpph1-030311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The Operate delay to be set is derived from the time-grading schedule that has been prepared for the
system. Where overcurrent protection is used in emergency mode, shorter time delays might be reasonable
(one grading time above fast tripping), since the emergency mode only operates if the main protection func-
tion fails.
EXAMPLE
High-current stage: 110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 cross-section
s (length) = 60 km
ZA/s = 0.46 Ω/km
Ratio of zero-sequence impedance and positive-sequence impedance of the line: ZL0/ZA = 4
Short-circuit power at the beginning of the line:
Ssc' = 2.5 GVA
Ratio of zero-sequence impedance and positive-sequence impedance of the preliminary impedance at
the beginning of the line: ZP0/ZA = 2
Current transformer = 600 A/5 A
Resulting in the following values for the line impedance ZA and the series impedance ZP1:
[foocp002-030311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The 3-phase short-circuit current at the end of the line is Isc end:
[foocpph3-030311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The settings in primary and secondary values result in the following setting values which include a safety
margin of 10 %:
[foocp004-030311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If short-circuit currents exceed 2365 A (primary) or 19,7 A (secondary), there is a short circuit on the line to be
protected. The overcurrent protection can cut off this short circuit immediately.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 617
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Note: The amounts in the calculation example are accurate enough for overhead lines. If the series impe-
dance and line impedance have different angles, you have use complex numbers to calculate the
Threshold.
6.13.3.3 Settings
618 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 619
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
620 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 621
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
622 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[loocp3b2-280113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-219 Logic Diagram of the Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection (Phases) – Basic
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 623
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[loocp3p2-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-220 Logic Diagram of the Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection (Phases) – Advanced
624 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
If the overcurrent protection is set as backup overcurrent protection (parameter Emergency mode = no), it
operates independently of the main protection and thus in parallel. Backup overcurrent protection can also
serve as sole short-circuit protection when, for example, no voltage transformers are available for an initial
startup.
Pickup and Dropout Behavior of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve according to IEC and ANSI (Basic and
Advanced Stage)
When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1.1, the inverse-time characteristic curve
is processed. An integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time. The weighted time results
from the characteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined
from the characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls short of the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 x 1.1 x threshold value),
the dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via
setting parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout
according to the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The
dropout according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The
weighted reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The characteristic curve and associated formulas are shown in the Technical Data.
Blocking of the Operate Delay and the Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
(Basic and Advanced Stage)
Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device-internal Inrush-current detection func-
tion is described in chapter 6.13.6.1 Description .
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 625
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Parameter: Threshold
626 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
EXAMPLE
Overcurrent-protection stage: 110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 cross-section
Maximum transmittable power
Pmax = 120 MVA
Correspondingly
Imax = 630 A
Current transformer = 600 A/5 A
[foocp005-030311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Parameter: Reset
6.13.4.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 627
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
628 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 629
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[dwocpken-140611-02.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-221 Pickup Behavior and Dropout Behavior when Using a User-Defined Characteristic Curve
i
NOTE
The currents that are lower than the current value of the smallest characteristic-curve point do not extend
the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis up to the smallest character-
istic-curve point. Currents that are larger than the current value of the largest characteristic-curve point do
not reduce the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis from the largest
characteristic-curve point.
630 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Use these settings to define the characteristic curve. Set a current/time value pair for each characteristic-
curve point. The setting depends on the characteristic curve you want to realize.
Set the current value as a multiple of the threshold value. Siemens recommends that you set the Threshold
parameter to 1.00 in order to obtain a simple relation. You can change the threshold value setting afterwards
if you want to displace the characteristic curve.
Set the time value in seconds. The characteristic curve is displaced using the Time dial parameter.
i
NOTE
The value pairs must be entered in continuous order.
Parameter: Reset
Use these settings to define the characteristic curve. Set a current/time value pair for each characteristic-
curve point. The setting depends on the characteristic curve you want to realize.
Set the current value as a multiple of the threshold value. Siemens recommends that you set the Threshold
parameter to 1.00 in order to obtain a simple relation. You can change the threshold value setting afterwards
if you want to displace the characteristic curve.
Set the time value in seconds. The characteristic curve is displaced using the Time dial parameter.
i
NOTE
The value pairs must be entered in continuous order.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 631
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.13.5.3 Settings
632 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 633
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[loocppha-210812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-222 Part-Logic Diagram on the Influence of Inrush-Current Detection Exemplified by the 1st Defi-
nite Time-Overcurrent Protection Stage
634 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 635
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[loocpdpa-030311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-223 Principle of the Dynamic Settings in the Example of 1st Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection
Stage
If available in the device, the following functionalities can affect the overcurrent-protection stages:
Functionalities Priority
Automatic reclosing (AREC) Priority 1
Cold-load pickup detection Priority 2
Binary input signal Priority 3
These functionalities generate signals that change the settings of the dynamic settings of the overcurrent-
protection stage or block it, if required. In the latter case, the settings of the Threshold and Operate
delay parameters are of no relevance. Within the overcurrent-protection stage, each of these signals is
provided with a configuration parameter Influence of function ... and its own dynamic settings
(Operate delay and Threshold). The configuration parameters are used to set whether the signal shall
be active or not, this means whether the dynamic settings shall be activated or not. If one of these signals (for
example, signal function x) becomes active and is to take effect, these parameter settings become dynamic,
that is, instantly active. This means that the setting assigned to the signal replaces the standard setting. If the
signal becomes inactive, the standard settings apply again. The activation of the dynamic settings is reported.
636 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Where several signals are active in parallel, the priority specified above shall apply. This means that a signal
with priority 2 precedes that of priority 3. The settings assigned to signal 2 become active.
The functionality of the dynamic settings can be disabled. In this case, the settings assigned to the signals
are not visible and are without effect.
[loocpawe-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 637
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Several AREC signals can affect the setting for the Threshold and Operate delay parameters of the
protection stage and its blocking.
• AREC is ready for reclosing 1 (= Automatic reclosing cycle 1)
• AREC is ready for reclosing 2 (= Automatic reclosing cycle 2)
[loocpkal-030311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-225 Influence of the Cold-Load Pickup Detection on the Overcurrent-Protection Stage
In the case of cold-load pickup, you have the option to change the settings for the Threshold and Operate
delay parameters of the protection level. You can also block the level. To do so, you must activate the influ-
ence of the cold-load pickup. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or assign settings
to Stage blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
The way signals are generated Cold-load pickup is described in section 5.1.4.1 Overview of Functions .
[loocpbin-030311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
You can use the binary input signal >Activ. dyn. settings to change the settings for the Threshold
and the Operate delay parameters of the protection stage. You can also block the level. To do so, you
must activate the influence of the binary input. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or
assign settings to Stage blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
638 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Influence of AREC
The example of how the overcurrent level (1st level) can be used as a fast level before automatic
reclosing describes the influence exerted by AREC.
The setting of the overcurrent level (1st level) results from the time-grading schedule. Additionally, it is to be
used as fast level before an automatic reclosing. Because a fast disconnection of the short-circuit current
takes priority over the selectivity prior to reclosing, the tripping delay can be set to 0 or a very small value. To
achieve the selectivity, the final disconnection must be done with the grading time.
AREC is set to 2 reclosings. A secondary Threshold of 1.5 A and a Operate delay of 600 ms are
assumed (according to the time-grading schedule) for the overcurrent-protection stage. The standard settings
of the stage are set to these values.
To realize the application, the configuration settings Effected by AR cycle 1 and Effected by AR
cycle 2 are changed in the example to yes (= influenced). This activates the AR cycle 1 and AR cycle
2 input signals within the stage. When they become active, they switch to the assigned dynamic settings.
The two dynamic settings Operate delay assigned to these input signals (sources of influence) are set to
the time delay 0 (instantaneous tripping). The two dynamic settings Threshold assigned to these input
signals are set to the normal threshold value of 1.5 A.
If the threshold value (1.5 A) is exceeded before AREC 1 and AREC 2, the overcurrent-protection stage
trips instantaneously. If the fault still exists after AREC 2 (unsuccessful AREC), the stage trips with the time
delay of 600 ms according to the time-grading schedule.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 639
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
The Overcurrent protection, ground function is used in protection function groups. 2 kinds of functions are
available for the 3-phase overcurrent protection:
• Overcurrent protection, ground – advanced (50/51 OC-gnd-A)
• Overcurrent protection, ground – basic (50/51 OC-gnd-B)
Only the function type Advanced is available in the devices of the line protection family. The function type
Basic is provided for standard applications. The function type Advanced offers more functionality and is
provided for more complex applications.
Both function types are pre-configured by the manufacturer with 2 Definite time-overcurrent protection
stages and with 1 Inverse time-overcurrent protection stage.
In the function type Overcurrent protection, ground – advanced the following stages can be operated
simultaneously:
• Maximum of 3 stages Definite time-overcurrent protection – advanced
• 1 stage Inverse time-overcurrent protection – advanced
640 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
[dwocpga1-060213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[dwocpgb1-060213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the following listed, device-internal functions are present in the device, these functions can influence the
pickup values and tripping delays of the stages or block the stages. The stage can also be affected by an
external source via a binary input signal.
• Automatic reclosing (AREC)
• Cold-load pickup detection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 641
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
[loocpgb1-060213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-229 Logic Diagram of the Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection (Ground) – Basic
642 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
[loocpgr1-081111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-230 Logic Diagram of the Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection (Ground) – Advanced
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 643
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
If the overcurrent protection is set as backup overcurrent protection (parameter Emergency mode = no), it
operates independently of the main protection and thus in parallel. Backup overcurrent protection can also
serve as sole short-circuit protection when, for example, no voltage transformers are available for an initial
startup.
• Via the functionality of the dynamic settings (see chapter Influence of other functions via
dynamic settings and section 6.14.7.1 Description ).
Blocking of the Operate Delay and the Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
(Basic and Advanced Stage)
Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device-internal Inrush-current detection func-
tion is described in chapter 6.14.6.1 Description.
644 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
• Default setting (_:751:6) Operate delay = 0.300 s (for the first stage)
Set the Threshold and Operate delay parameters for the specific application.
The following details apply to a 2-stage characteristic curve (1st stage = definite time-overcurrent protection
stage and 2nd stage = high-current stage).
1st stage (overcurrent stage):
The setting depends on the minimal occurring ground-fault current. This must be recorded.
For very small ground-fault currents, Siemens recommends using the Ground-fault protection against
high-resistance ground faults in grounded systems function.
The Operate delay to be set is derived from the time-grading schedule that has been prepared for the
system. Where overcurrent protection is used in emergency mode, shorter time delays might be reasonable
(one grading time above fast tripping), since the emergency mode only operates if the main protection func-
tion fails.
2nd stage (high-current stage):
This tripping stage can also be used for current grading. This applies in the case of very long lines with low
series impedance or ahead of high reactances (for example, transformers, paralleling reactors). Set the
Threshold parameter to ensure that the stage does not pick up in case of a short-circuit at the end of the
line.
Set the Operate delay parameter to 0 or to a low value.
Siemens recommends that the threshold values be determined by means of a system analysis. The following
example illustrates the principle of grading with a current threshold on a long line.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 645
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
EXAMPLE
High-current stage: 110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 cross-section
s (length) = 60 km
ZA/s = 0.46 Ω/km
Ratio of zero-sequence impedance and positive-sequence impedance of the line: ZL0/ZL1 = 4
Short-circuit power at the beginning of the line:
Ssc' = 2.5 GVA
Ratio of zero-sequence impedance and positive-sequence impedance of the preliminary impedance at
the beginning of the line: ZP0/ZL1 = 2
Current transformer = 600 A/5 A
Resulting in the following values for the line impedance ZL1 and the series impedance ZP:
[foocp002-030311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The 1-pole short-circuit current at the end of the line is IscG end:
[foocpgr3-030311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The settings in primary and secondary values result in the following setting values which include a safety
margin of 10 %:
[foocpgr4-030311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In case of short-circuit currents exceeding 1246 A (primary) or 10.39 A (secondary) there is a short-circuit on
the line to be protected. The overcurrent protection can cut off this short circuit immediately.
Note: The amounts in the calculation example are accurate enough for overhead lines. If the series impe-
dance, line impedance and zero-sequence impedance have very different angles, you have use complex
numbers to calculate the Threshold.
646 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
6.14.3.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 647
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
648 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 649
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
650 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
[loocpgr2-070213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-231 Logic Diagram of the Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection (Ground) – Basic
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 651
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
[loocpgr2-070213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-232 Logic Diagram of the Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection (Ground) – Advanced
652 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
Pickup and Dropout Behavior of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve according to IEC and ANSI (Basic and
Advanced Stage)
When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1.1, the inverse-time characteristic curve
is processed. An integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time. The weighted time results
from the characteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined
from the characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls short of the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 x 1.1 x threshold value),
the dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via
setting parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout
according to the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The
dropout according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The
weighted reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The characteristic curve and associated formulas are shown in the Technical Data.
Blocking of the Operate Delay and the Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
(Basic and Advanced Stage)
Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device-internal Inrush-current detection func-
tion is described in chapter 6.14.6.1 Description.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 653
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
Parameter: Threshold
654 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
Parameter: Reset
6.14.4.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 655
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
656 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
6.14.5.1 Description
This stage is only available in the advanced function type.
This stage is structured the same way as the Inverse time-overcurrent protection – advanced stage (see
chapter 6.14.4.1 Description ). The only difference is that you can define the characteristic curve as desired.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 657
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
(reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The dropout according to characteristic
curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The weighted reduction of the time is initiated
from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The following figure shows the pickup and dropout behavior when a user-defined characteristic curve is used.
[dwocpken-140611-02.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-233 Pickup Behavior and Dropout Behavior when Using a User-Defined Characteristic Curve
i
NOTE
Note that the currents that are lower than the current value of the smallest characteristic-curve point do not
extend the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis up to the smallest
characteristic-curve point. Currents that are larger than the current value of the largest characteristic-curve
point do not reduce the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis from the
largest characteristic-curve point.
Use these settings to define the characteristic curve. Set a current/time value pair for each characteristic-
curve point. The setting depends on the characteristic curve you want to realize.
Set the current value as a multiple of the threshold value. Siemens recommends that you set the Threshold
parameter to 1.00 in order to obtain a simple relation. You can change the threshold value setting afterwards
if you want to displace the characteristic curve.
Set the time value in seconds. The characteristic curve is displaced using the Time dial parameter.
i
NOTE
The value pairs must be entered in continuous order.
658 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
Parameter: Reset
Use these settings to define the characteristic curve. Set a current/time value pair for each characteristic-
curve point. The setting depends on the characteristic curve you want to realize.
Set the current value as a multiple of the threshold value. Siemens recommends that you set the Threshold
parameter to 1.00 in order to obtain a simple relation. You can change the threshold value setting afterwards
if you want to displace the characteristic curve.
Set the time value in seconds. The characteristic curve is displaced using the Time dial parameter.
i
NOTE
The value pairs must be entered in continuous order.
6.14.5.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 659
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
660 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
6.14.6.1 Description
With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you can define whether tripping of the stage
should be blocked when a threshold value is exceeded due to an inrush current. In case of a blocking, the
stage picks up. The start of the tripping delay and the trip signal are blocked. The function signals this through
a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and the threshold value of the stage is still exceeded, the
time delay is started. After that time, the stage operates. The following figure only shows the part of the stage
(exemplified by definite time-overcurrent protection stage 1) that illustrates the influence of the inrush-current
detection. Only if the central function Inrush-current detection (see section 11.50 Inrush-Current Detection )
is in effect can the blocking be set.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 661
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
[loocpgrd-210812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-234 Part-Logic Diagram on the Influence of Inrush-Current Detection Exemplified by the 1st Defi-
nite Time-Overcurrent Protection Stage
662 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
[loocpdpa-030311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-235 Principle of the Dynamic Settings in the Example of 1st Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection
Stage
If available in the device, the following functionalities can affect the overcurrent-protection stages:
Functionalities Priority
Automatic reclosing (AREC) Priority 1
Cold-load pickup detection Priority 2
Binary input signal Priority 3
These functionalities generate signals that change the settings of the dynamic settings of the overcurrent-
protection stage or block it, if required. In the latter case, the settings for the Threshold and the Operate
delay are of no relevance. Within the overcurrent-protection stage, each of these signals is provided with a
configuration parameter Influence of function ... and its own dynamic settings (Operate delay
and Threshold). The configuration settings are used to set whether the signal shall be active or not, this
means whether the dynamic settings shall be activated or not. If one of these signals (for example, signal
function x) becomes active and is to take effect, these parameter settings become dynamic, that is, instantly
active. This means that the setting assigned to the signal replaces the standard setting. If the signal becomes
inactive, the standard settings apply again. The activation of the dynamic settings is reported.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 663
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
Where several signals are active in parallel, the priority specified above shall apply. This means that a signal
with priority 2 precedes that of priority 3. The settings assigned to signal 2 become active.
The functionality of the dynamic settings can be disabled. In this case, the settings assigned to the signals
are not visible and are without effect.
[loocpawe-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
664 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
Several AREC signals can affect the setting for the Threshold and the Operate delay of the protection
stage and its blocking.
• AREC is ready for reclosing 1 (= Automatic reclosing cycle 1)
• AREC is ready for reclosing 2 (= Automatic reclosing cycle 2)
[loocpkal-030311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-237 Influence of the Cold-Load Pickup Detection on the Overcurrent-Protection Stage
You have the option of changing the settings for the Threshold and the Operate delay of the protection
level for a cold-load pick-up You can also block the level. To do so, you must activate the influence of the
cold-load pickup. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or assign settings to Stage
blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
The way signals are generated Cold-load pickup is described in section 5.1.4.10 Cold-Load Pickup
Detection (Optional) .
[loocpbin-030311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
You can use the binary input signal >Activ. dyn. settings to change the settings for the Threshold
and the Operate delay of the protection stage. You can also block the level. To do so, you must activate
the influence of the binary input. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or assign
settings to Stage blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 665
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
Influence of AREC
The example of how the overcurrent-protection stage (1st stage) can be used as a fast stage before auto-
matic reclosing describes the influence exerted by AREC.
The setting of the overcurrent level (1st level) results from the time-grading schedule. It is to be used as fast
stage before an automatic reclosing. Because fast disconnection of the short-circuit current takes priority over
the selectivity prior to reclosing, the Operate delay parameter can be set to 0 or to a very low value. To
achieve the selectivity, the final disconnection must be done with the grading time.
AREC is set to 2 reclosings. A secondary Threshold of 1.5 A and a Operate delay of 600 ms are
assumed (according to the time-grading schedule) for the overcurrent-protection stage. The standard settings
of the stage are set to these values.
To realize the application, the configuration settings Effected by AR cycle 1 and Effected by AR
cycle 2 are changed in the example to yes (= influenced). This activates the AR cycle 1 and AR cycle
2 input signals within the stage. When they become active, they switch to the assigned dynamic settings.
The two dynamic settings Operate delay assigned to these input signals (sources of influence) are set to
the time delay 0 (instantaneous tripping). The two dynamic settings Threshold assigned to these input
signals are set to the normal threshold value of 1.5 A.
If the threshold value (1.5 A) is exceeded before AREC 1 and AREC 2, the overcurrent-protection stage
trips instantaneously. If the fault still exists after AREC 2 (unsuccessful AREC), the stage trips with the time
delay of 600 ms according to the time-grading schedule.
666 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
• Can be used as backup or emergency overcurrent protection in addition to the main protection
• Ensures selective fault detection for parallel lines or transformers with infeed at one end
• Ensures selective fault detection in cable runs with infeed at both ends or in lines connected to form ring
topologies
The Directional time-overcurrent protection, phases function is used in protection function groups. 2 func-
tion types are offered:
• Directional time-overcurrent protection, phases - advanced (67 Dir.OC-3ph-A)
• Directional time-overcurrent protection, phases - basic (67 Dir.OC-3ph-B)
Only the function type Advanced is available in the devices of the line protection family. The function type
Basic is provided for standard applications. The function type Advanced offers more functionality and is
provided for more complex applications.
Both function types are preconfigured by the manufacturer with 2 Directional, definite time-overcurrent
protection stages and with 1 Directional inverse time-overcurrent protection stage.
In the advanced function type Directional time-overcurrent protection, phases – advanced the following
stages can be operated simultaneously:
• Maximum of 4 stages Definite time-overcurrent protection – advanced
• 1 stage Inverse time-overcurrent protection – advanced
• Operate
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 667
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[dwdiocad-050213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[dwdiocba-050213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-240 Structure/Embedding the Function Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases – Basic
If the following listed, device-internal functions are present in the device, these functions can influence the
pickup values and tripping delays of the stages or block the stages. The stage can also be affected by an
external source via a binary input signal.
• Automatic reclosing (AREC)
• Cold-load pickup detection
668 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Logic
The following figure represents the stage control. It applies to all types of stages.
[lodocp32-190111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Blocking of the Stage with Measuring-Voltage Failure (Basic and Advanced Stage)
The stage can be blocked if a measuring-voltage failure occurs. In the event of blocking, the picked up stage
will be reset. The following blocking options are available for the stage:
• From inside on pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function (see Section 8.3.2.1 Over-
view of Functions )
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c.
b., which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 669
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection
blocks the stage or does not block it.
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block VTCB is connected to the voltage-transformer circuit
breaker (see Chapter 8.3.3.1 Overview of Functions ).
670 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[lodocg6b-060213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-242 Logic Diagram of the Directional, Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases - Basic
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 671
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[lodocp31-141013, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-243 Logic Diagram of the Directional, Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases - Advanced
672 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
ments which can be used to determine the direction are available in the voltage memory, the stage response
can be defined via the Non-directional pickup parameter. With the at volt.< & mem.empty
setting, the function picks up in such a situation without direction determination. With the no setting, the func-
tion does not pick up.
• Via the dynamic settings function (only provided in the advanced function type, see section Influence of
other functions via dynamic settings and chapter 6.13.7.1 Description )
Blocking of the Operate Delay and the Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
(Basic and Advanced Stage)
Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device-internal Inrush-current detection func-
tion is described in chapter 6.13.6.1 Description .
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 673
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
674 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Parameter: Threshold
• Default setting (_:8131:6) Operate delay = 0.300 s (for the first stage)
The tripping delay to be set is derived from the time-grading chart that has been prepared for the system.
Where overcurrent protection is used in emergency mode, shorter time delays might be reasonable (one
grading time above fast tripping), since the emergency mode only operates if the main protection function
fails.
Typical examples of grading times are provided in sections 6.15.9 Application Notes for Parallel Lines and
Cable Runs with Infeed at Both Ends and 6.15.10 Application Notes for Directional Comparison Protection .
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 675
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.15.4.3 Settings
676 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 677
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
678 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 679
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
680 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[lodoci6b-060213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-244 Logic Diagram of the Directional, Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases - Basic
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 681
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[lodocp33-121013, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-245 Logic Diagram of the Directional, Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases - Advanced
If a 3-phase close-up fault occurs, all 3 phase-to-ground voltages drop to almost 0. If this happens, direction
determination can fall back on a voltage memory (see chapter l6.15.7.1 Description ). If no voltage measure-
ments which can be used to determine the direction are available in the voltage memory, the stage response
682 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
can be defined via the Non-directional pickup parameter. With the at volt.< & mem.empty
setting, the function picks up in such a situation without direction determination. With the no setting, the func-
tion does not pick up.
Pickup and Dropout Behavior of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve according to IEC and ANSI (Basic and
Advanced Stage)
When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1.1, the inverse-time characteristic curve
is processed. An integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time. The weighted time results
from the characteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined
from the characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls short of the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 x 1.1 x threshold value),
the dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via
setting parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout
according to the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The
dropout according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The
weighted reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The characteristic curve and associated formulas are shown in the Technical Data.
• Via the functionality of the dynamic settings (only in the advanced function type, see subtitle Influ-
ence of other functions via dynamic settings and chapter 6.13.7.1 Description ).
Blocking of the Operate Delay and the Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
(Basic and Advanced Stage)
Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device-internal Inrush-current detection func-
tion is described in chapter 6.13.6.1 Description .
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 683
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
684 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Parameter: Threshold
Parameter: Reset
6.15.5.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 685
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
686 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 687
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
688 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[dwocpken-140611-02.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-246 Pickup and Dropout Behavior when Using a Directional User-Defined Characteristic Curve
i
NOTE
Note that the currents that are lower than the current value of the smallest characteristic-curve point do not
extend the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis up to the smallest
characteristic-curve point. Currents that are larger than the current value of the largest characteristic-curve
point do not reduce the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis from the
largest characteristic-curve point.
Use these settings to define the characteristic curve. Set a current/time value pair for each characteristic-
curve point. The setting depends on the characteristic curve you want to realize.
Set the current value as a multiple of the threshold value. Siemens recommends that you set the Threshold
parameter to 1.00 in order to obtain a simple relation. You can change the threshold value setting afterwards
if you want to displace the characteristic curve.
Set the time value in seconds. The characteristic curve is displaced using the Time dial parameter.
i
NOTE
The value pairs must be entered in continuous order.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 689
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Parameter: Reset
Use these settings to define the characteristic curve. Set a current/time value pair for each characteristic-
curve point. The setting depends on the characteristic curve you want to realize.
Set the current value as a multiple of the threshold value. Siemens recommends that you set the Threshold
parameter to 1.00 in order to obtain a simple relation. You can change the threshold value setting afterwards
if you want to displace the characteristic curve.
Set the time value in seconds. The characteristic curve is displaced using the Time dial parameter.
i
NOTE
The value pairs must be entered in continuous order.
6.15.6.3 Settings
690 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 691
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
General
Every phase has a separate direction-measuring element. If the threshold value in a phase is exceeded, the
direction determination is started for this phase. If there are multiphase short circuits, all measuring elements
involved perform direction determination independently. If one of the determined directions matches the set
direction, the stage picks up (see descriptions of the stage logic).
The direction is determined by calculating the phase angle between the short-circuit current and a reference
voltage.
692 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[dwdocp02-240611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The following table shows how measurands are assigned for direction-determination purposes in the event of
different types of fault.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 693
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Voltage Memory
Saved voltages are used if, when a 3-pole close-up fault occurs, the measuring voltages are not sufficient for
reliable direction determination. Insofar as and as long as no sufficient measuring voltage is available after
the storage time (2 s) has elapsed, the detected direction is retained. If the memory does not contain any
voltages (when closing onto a short circuit, for example), the behavior of the stage is defined using the Non-
directional pickup parameter.
Direction Determination
As mentioned in the General section, the direction is determined by calculating the phase angle between
short-circuit current and reference voltage. To take different system conditions and applications into account,
the reference voltage can be rotated through an adjustable angle (Rotation angle of ref. volt.
parameter). This moves the vector of the rotated reference voltage close to the vector of the short-circuit
current. Consequently, the result of direction determination is as reliable as possible. Figure 6-248 illustrates
the relationship based on a 1-phase ground fault in phase A. The short-circuit current IkL1 lags the short-circuit
voltage by the short-circuit angle φk. The reference voltage, in this case VBC for measuring element A, is
rotated positively (counterclockwise) by the setting value of the Rotation angle of ref. volt. param-
eter. In the scenario illustrated here, the rotation is +45o.
[dwdocp33-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The rotated reference voltage defines the forward and reverse range; see Figure 6-249. The forward range is
calculated as ±88o around the rotated reference voltage Vref,rot. If the short-circuit current vector is located in
this range, the device decides on the forward direction. In the mirrored range, the device decides on the back-
ward direction. In the intermediate range, the direction is undetermined.
694 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[dwdocp34-240611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 695
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
If you activate the binary input signal >Test of direction, the direction is determined and indicated even
without the current threshold being exceeded in one of the stages. This provides an easy means of checking
the direction during commissioning, without changing the threshold values of the stages.
The influence of these functions via dynamic settings is described in chapter 6.13.7.1 Description and chapter
6.13.7.2 Application and Setting Notes (Advanced Stage) .
6.15.9 Application Notes for Parallel Lines and Cable Runs with Infeed at Both
Ends
696 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[dwdocp05-240611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[dwdocp06-240611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 697
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Protection Principle
The protection principle is shown in Figure 6-252. 2 devices (one at the start of the line and the other at the
end of the line) work together in each line section. The information fault in forward direction is transferred
between them. A directional definite time-overcurrent protection level is in operation in both devices in the
forward direction (1st level). However, this level is not enabled in the idle state. The level is only released
when the information fault in forward direction is received from the opposite end. If the enabled level also
defines the fault in the forward direction, the fault must be on this line section and the level trips immediately.
As this protection principle works with an enable procedure (and not with a blocking procedure), there is no
need to delay the level.
A second directional definite time-overcurrent protection stage with standard time grading works in parallel
with the first stage as a selective backup stage. This ensures full selectivity of protection in the following situa-
tions:
• Infeed at one end or weak infeed at one end: In this case, no release signal is generated.
• Failure of the communication route: In this case, the release signal is not transmitted.
To provide selective protection in fast time for busbars between the line sections also, you can combine this
protection principle with the principle of reverse interlocking. This principle is not discussed in further detail in
this document.
[dwdocp07-240611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If you are using a communication channel, the protocol-transmission methods detect if the channel is inter-
rupted. If you are using pilot wires, we recommend operation based on a closed-circuit connection. The
device uses a function chart to check and indicate if the binary input is dead for an unexpectedly long period.
In contrast with the blocking procedure, overfunction is not possible if communication is lost. Therefore, a loss
of communication is not critical where this procedure is concerned, although it must be detected and indi-
cated.
Directional comparison protection can also be implemented as a blocking procedure. This procedure works
under all system switching states, i.e. also with infeed at one end (or weak infeed). However, to use it you
must delay the stage (typically by 100 ms) so that the blocking signal is received in time under all circum-
stances. It is also essential that you monitor the communication channel to avoid overfunction in the event of
failure followed by a system incident.
698 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
• The first stage can be set without a time delay. The second stage has to be graded
• The information forward from the Direction signal in the first stage must be transmitted to the oppo-
site end. The routing is determined by the type of transmission
• A function chart has to be implemented at the receive end to link the received (forward information)
and release signals, dependent upon the type of transmission.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 699
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
• Ensures selective ground fault detection in cable runs with infeed at both ends or in lines connected to
form ring topologies
700 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
[dwrdirad-300913, 1, en_US]
[dwrdirba-300913, 1, en_US]
If the following listed device-internal functions are present in the device, these functions can influence the
pickup values and operate delays of the stages or block the stages. The stage can also be affected by an
external source via a binary input signal.
• Automatic reclosing (AREC)
• Cold-load pickup detection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 701
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
Logic
The following figure represents the stage control. It applies to all types of stages.
[lostacon-240812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
702 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
[lodirovb-280812-02.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-256 Logic Diagram of the Directional Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection, Ground – Basic
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 703
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
[lodirova-280812-02.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-257 Logic Diagram of the Directional Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection, Ground – Advanced
704 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
• Via the dynamic settings functionality (only available in the advanced function type, see Influence of
Other Functions via Dynamic Settings and chapter 6.16.10 Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic
Settings)
Blocking of the Operate Delay and Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
(Basic and Advanced Stage)
Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device-internal Inrush-current detection func-
tion is described in chapter 6.14.6.1 Description
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 705
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
706 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
For further setting notes, refer to chapter 6.14.7.2 Application and Setting Notes (Advanced Stage) of the
function Overcurrent Protection, Ground.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 707
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
Parameter: Threshold
• Default setting (_:4861:6) Operate delay = 0.300 s (for the 1st stage)
The Operate delay to be set is derived from the time-grading chart that has been prepared for the system.
Typical examples of grading times are provided in sections 6.15.9 Application Notes for Parallel Lines and
Cable Runs with Infeed at Both Ends and 6.15.10 Application Notes for Directional Comparison Protection .
6.16.4.3 Settings
708 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 709
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
710 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
[lodiinvb-280812-02.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-258 Logic Diagram of the Directional Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection, Ground – Basic
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 711
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
[lodiinva-280812-02.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-259 Logic Diagram of the Directional Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection, Ground – Advanced
712 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
Pickup and Dropout Behavior of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve According to IEC and ANSI (Basic and
Advanced Stage)
When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1.1, the inverse-time characteristic curve
is processed. An integrated measuring procedure totalizes the weighted time. The weighted time results from
the characteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined from
the characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls below the threshold value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 × 1.1× threshold value),
the dropout starts. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via adjust-
able parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout
according to the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The
dropout according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The
weighted reduction of the time is started from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The characteristic curve and associated formulas are shown in the Technical data.
• Via the dynamic settings functionality (only available in the advanced function type, see Influence of
Other Functions via Dynamic Settings and chapter 6.16.10 Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic
Settings)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 713
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
Blocking of the Operate Delay and Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
(Basic and Advanced Stage)
Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device-internal Inrush-current detection func-
tion is described in chapter Blocking of the Tripping by Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection
For more information, refer to 6.14.6.1 Description.
714 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
For further setting notes, refer to chapter 6.14.7.2 Application and Setting Notes (Advanced Stage) of the
function Overcurrent Protection, Ground.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 715
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
Parameter: Threshold
Parameter: Reset
716 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
6.16.5.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 717
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
718 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
[lodiloin-280812-02.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-260 Logic Diagram of the Directional Logarithmic Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection, Ground
Apart from the operate curve, this type of stage is identical to the Inverse time-overcurrent protection –
advanced stage (see chapter 6.16.5.1 Description).
This section will only discuss the nature of the operate curve. For further functionality, refer to chapter
6.16.5.1 Description.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 719
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
Operate Curve
If the function picks up, the logarithmic inverse-time characteristic curve is processed. A time value Top is
calculated for every input value exceeding 95 % of the pickup value. An integrator accumulates the value 1/
Top. If the accumulated integral reaches the fixed value 1, the stage operates.
The curve used to calculate the time value Top is shown in Figure 6-261. The Threshold multiplier
parameter defines the beginning of the characteristic curve. The Max. time of the curve determines
the initial value of the characteristic curve. The Time dial parameter changes the slope of the characteristic
curve. At high currents, the Min. time of the curve parameter indicates the lower time limit.
[dwloginv-300913, 1, en_US]
[fomula01-240812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Where
Tmax Maximum time of the curve (parameter Max. time of the curve)
Td Time dial (parameter Time dial)
Top Operate time
3I0 Measured zero-sequence current
Ithresh Threshold value (parameter Threshold)
Imul Threshold multiplier (parameter Threshold multiplier)
If the calculated time is less than Tmin (parameter Min. time of the curve), Tmin is used.
720 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
EXAMPLE
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 721
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
6.16.6.3 Settings
722 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 723
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
[lodilokn-280812-02.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-262 Logic Diagram of the Directional Logarithmic Inverse Time with Knee-Point Overcurrent
Protection, Ground
Apart from the operate curve, this type of stage is almost identical to the Inverse time-overcurrent protec-
tion – advanced stage (see chapter 6.16.5.1 Description). The only difference is that the dynamic settings
change functionality is not available.
This section only discusses the nature of the operate curve. For further functionality, refer to chapter
6.16.5.1 Description.
724 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
Operate Curve
If the function picks up, the logarithmic inverse-time characteristic curve is processed. A time value Top is
calculated for every input value exceeding 95 % of the threshold value. An integrator accumulates the value
1/Top. If the accumulated integral reaches the fixed value 1, the stage operates.
The curve used to calculate the time value Top is shown in Figure 6-263. The curve is composed of 2 sections
with different slops. 7 parameters are used to define the logarithmic inverse time with knee-point character-
istic curve. The parameter Max. time of the curve determines the initial time value of the characteristic
curve, and relates to the 3I0 Threshold value. The transition point is defined by parameter Knee-point
current and parameter Knee-point time. The parameter Min. time of the curve indicates the
lower time limit, and parameter Current at Min. time determines the current value at Min. time of
the curve. The parameter Time dial servers as a time factor to the operate time.
[dwloinkn-300913, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-263 Operate Curve of the Logarithmic Inverse Time with Knee-Point Characteristic (In the
Example of Threshold = 0.004 A)
Parameter: Threshold
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 725
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
Parameter: Knee-point
6.16.7.3 Settings
726 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 727
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
[lodirusr-280812-02.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-264 Logic Diagram of the Directional User-Defined Characteristic Curve Overcurrent Protection,
Ground
This stage is structured in the same way as the Inverse time-overcurrent protection – advanced stage
(see chapter 6.16.5.1 Description). The only difference is that you can define the characteristic curve.
This section only discusses the nature of the operate curve. For further functionality, refer to chapter
6.16.5.1 Description.
728 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
[dwpidrbe-300913, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-265 Pickup and Dropout Behavior when Using a User-Defined Characteristic Curve
i
NOTE
Note that the currents that are lower than the current value of the smallest characteristic-curve point do not
extend the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis up to the smallest
characteristic-curve point. Currents that are larger than the current value of the largest characteristic-curve
point do not reduce the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis from the
largest characteristic-curve point.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 729
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
Use these settings to define the characteristic curve. Set a current/time value pair for each characteristic-
curve point. The setting follows the characteristic curve you want to realize.
Set the current value as a multiple of the threshold value. Siemens recommends that you set the Threshold
parameter to 1.00 in order to obtain a simple relation. You can change the threshold setting afterwards if you
want to displace the characteristic curve.
Specify the time value in seconds. The characteristic curve is displaced using the Time dial parameter.
i
NOTE
The value pairs must be entered in continuous order.
Parameter: Reset
Use these settings to define the characteristic curve. Set a current/time value pair for each characteristic-
curve point. The setting is determined by the characteristic curve you want to achieve.
Set the current value as a multiple of the threshold value. Siemens recommends that you set the Threshold
parameter to 1.00 in order to obtain a simple relation. You can change the threshold setting afterwards if you
want to displace the characteristic curve.
Specify the time value in seconds. The characteristic curve is displaced using the Time dialparameter.
i
NOTE
The value pairs must be entered in continuous order.
6.16.8.3 Settings
730 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 731
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
6.16.9.1 Description
Logic
The following figure represents the logic of the direction determination. It applies to all types of stages.
[lodirdet-280812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
732 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
[DwUIkenn-240812-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
[dwroreze-300913, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-268 Rotation of the Reference Voltage, Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Ground Function
with Zero-Sequence Values
The rotated reference voltage Vref, rot and the parameter Forward section +/- define the forward and
reverse ranges, see Figure 6-269. The forward range is calculated as ± Δφ° around the rotated reference
voltage Vref, rot. Δφ is set with the parameter Forward section +/-. If the short-circuit current vector
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 733
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
-3I0 is located in this range, the device decides on the forward direction. In the mirrored range, the device
decides on the reverse direction. In the intermediate range, the direction is undetermined.
[dwforrev-281013, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-269 Forward/Reverse Characteristic of the Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Ground Func-
tion
734 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
EXAMPLE
Maximum operational measured value of zero-sequence voltage V0 = 0.5 Vsec
Min. voltage V0 or V2 = 1.5 * 0.5 V = 0.75Vsec
If you have no information about maximum operational unbalance, Siemens recommends using the default
setting.
30° -30°
30° -30°
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 735
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
negative sequence Select negative sequence to determine the direction via the negative-
sequence components V2 and I2.
The negative-sequence system can be used in case of danger that the
zero-sequence voltage is too small due to unfavorable zero-sequence impe-
dance conditions or that a parallel line influences the zero-sequence
system.
6.16.9.3 Settings
736 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping
[dwihcstr-230211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 737
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping
[lohlore3-160611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-271 Logic Diagram of Instantaneous High-Current Tripping with Standard Release Method
Activation
Using the Activation parameter, you set the conditions under which the stage is released.
• on CB closure
With this procedure, the stage is released only if the circuit breaker is about to be closed (the CB is open) or if
the circuit breaker is being closed. The way signals are generated Rel. by CB switch on is described in
section 5.5.6.1 Overview.
• always active
The stage is always released and is thus independent of closing of the circuit breaker.
• only with binary signal
The stage is released only if the binary input signal >release is active.
738 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping
Parameter: Threshold
• Default setting (_:3901:3) Threshold = 10.0 A for Irated = 1 A or 50.0 A for Irated = 5 A
The stage works independently of the position of the remote circuit breakers. For this reason, set the
Threshold so that the fault current flowing through does not trigger the stage. Thus, use this stage only if
current grading over the protected object is possible, that is, for transformers, paralleling reactors or long lines
with low source impedance. In other cases, deactivate the stage.
EXAMPLE
Calculation example for current grading of a 110 kV overhead line measuring 150 mm2
s (length) = 100 km;
R1/s = 0.21 Ω/km;
X1/s = 0.43 Ω/km
Since the stage is non-directional, the calculation must consider the maximum short-circuit power at the start
of the line or at the opposite end:
Ssc" = 3.5 GVA (subtransient, because the function can respond to the 1st peak value)
Current transformer: 600 A/5 A
The line impedance ZL and the minimum source impedance ZS are calculated on this basis:
[foglchzv-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The maximum 3-phase short-circuit current I"sc flowing through is (at a source voltage of 1.1 VN):
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 739
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping
[foglchik-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[foglnste-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If short-circuit currents exceed 1496 A (primary) or 12.5 A (secondary), there is a short circuit on the line to be
protected. It can be disconnected immediately.
i
NOTE
The calculation was performed with absolute values, which is accurate enough for overhead lines. A
complex calculation is required only if the source impedance and the line impedance have extremely
different angles.
740 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping
Logic
[lohinre3-160611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-272 Logic Diagram of Instantaneous High-Current Tripping with Release Procedure via Protection
Interface
Release
If the following conditions are fulfilled simultaneously, the stage is released (the internal Release signal is
present) (for further information, see Chapter 5.1.4.1 Overview of Functions ):
• No voltage has yet been applied to the protected object, which means that the remote circuit breakers
are open, or
i
NOTE
To enable internal release of the stage, the devices at all ends of the protected object must be informed of
the circuit-breaker position (the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts must be connected to the devices; the
respective binary input signals must be jumpered).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 741
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping
Parameter: Threshold
• Default setting (_:3901:3) Threshold = 2,5 A for Irated = 1 A or 12,5 A for Irated = 5 A
Select the value high enough for the protection not to pick up on the RMS value of the inrush current that
occurs when the local circuit breaker is closed. You do not have to consider short-circuit currents flowing
through, because the stage is released only if the circuit breakers are opened at all remote ends of the
protected object or the release was caused by the binary input >release.
6.17.7 Settings
742 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 743
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Group Indications of Overcurrent Protection Functions
6.18.1 Description
The function block Group indications of the overcurrent protection functions uses the pickup and
operate indications of the following functions:
• Overcurrent protection, phases
• Overcurrent protection, ground
[loocgrin-240112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
744 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
• Detects and monitors the circulating current between the neutral points of 2 capacitor banks
The Overcurrent protection, 1-phase function is used in protection function groups with 1-phase current
measurement. 2 function types are offered:
• Overcurrent protection, 1-phase – advanced (50N/51N OC-1ph-A)
• Overcurrent protection, 1-phase – basic (50N/51N OC-1ph-B)
The function type Basic is provided for standard applications. The function type Advanced offers more func-
tionality and is provided for more complex applications.
Both function types are pre-configured by the manufacturer with 2 Definite time-overcurrent protection
stages and with 1 Inverse time-overcurrent protection stage.
In the function type Overcurrent protection, 1-phase – advanced the following stages can be operated
simultaneously:
• Maximum of 3 stages Definite time-overcurrent protection (UMZ)
• 1 stage Inverse time-overcurrent protection (AMZ)
• 1 Fast stage
In the function type Time-Overcurrent protection, 1-phase – basic, the following stages can operate simul-
taneously:
• Maximum of 3 stages Definite time-overcurrent protection
• 1 stage Inverse time-overcurrent protection
The non-preconfigured stages in Figure 6-274 and Figure 6-275 are shown in gray. Apart from the operate-
delay characteristic curve, the Definite time-overcurrent protection stage, the Inverse time-overcurrent
protection stage, and the User-defined characteristic curve time-overcurrent protection stage are struc-
tured identically.
The Fast stage uses a fast tripping algorithm. It is therefore suited in particular for sensitive ground-fault
detection according to the high-impedance principle.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 745
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
[dwocp1pa-280113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[dwocp1pb-310113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the device is equipped with the Inrush-current detection function, you can stabilize the stages against
issuing of the operate indication due to transformer inrush-currents.
746 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
Logic of a Stage
[loinvocp-270612-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Method of measurement
You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. or the calculated RMS value.
• Measurement of the fundamental component:
This method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 747
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
• You have to connect the protection function group with 1-phase current measurement to the protection
function group with 3-phase current measurement. You connect protection function groups in the
DIGSI 5 Project Tree → Name of the device → Function group connections.
Related Topics
6.13.6.1 Description
• Default setting (_:12661:6) Operate delay = 0.300 s (for the first stage)
Set the Threshold and Operate delay parameters for the specific application.
748 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
6.19.3.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 749
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
[lodefocp-270612-01.tif, 1, en_US]
750 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
Pickup and Dropout Behavior of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve according to IEC and ANSI
When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1.1, the inverse-time characteristic curve
is processed. An integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time. The weighted time results
from the characteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined
from the characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls short of the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 x 1.1 x threshold value),
the dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via
setting parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout
according to the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The
dropout according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The
weighted reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The characteristic curve and associated formulas are shown in the Technical Data.
Method of Measurement
You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. or the calculated RMS value.
• Measurement of the fundamental component:
This method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.
• You have to connect the protection function group with 1-phase current measurement to the protection
function group with 3-phase current measurement. You connect protection function groups in the
DIGSI 5 Project Tree → Name of the device → Function group connections.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 751
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
Parameter: Threshold
Parameter: Reset
6.19.4.3 Settings
752 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
6.19.5.1 Description
This stage is only available in the advanced function type.
This stage is structured the same way as the Inverse time-overcurrent protection – advanced stage (see
chapter 6.13.4.1 Description ). The only difference is that you can define the characteristic curve as desired.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 753
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
[dwocpken-140611-02.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-278 Pickup Behavior and Dropout Behavior when Using a User-Defined Characteristic Curve
i
NOTE
The currents that are lower than the current value of the smallest characteristic-curve point do not extend
the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis up to the smallest character-
istic-curve point. Currents that are larger than the current value of the largest characteristic-curve point do
not reduce the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis from the largest
characteristic-curve point.
Use these settings to define the characteristic curve. Set a current/time value pair for each characteristic-
curve point. The setting depends on the characteristic curve you want to realize.
Set the current value as a multiple of the threshold value. Siemens recommends that you set the Threshold
parameter to 1.00 in order to obtain a simple relation. You can change the threshold value setting afterwards
if you want to displace the characteristic curve.
Set the time value in seconds. The characteristic curve is displaced using the Time dial parameter.
i
NOTE
The value pairs must be entered in continuous order.
754 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
Parameter: Reset
Use these settings to define the characteristic curve. Set a current/time value pair for each characteristic-
curve point. The setting depends on the characteristic curve you want to realize.
Set the current value as a multiple of the threshold value. Siemens recommends that you set the Threshold
parameter to 1.00 in order to obtain a simple relation. You can change the threshold value setting afterwards
if you want to displace the characteristic curve.
Set the time value in seconds. The characteristic curve is displaced using the Time dial parameter.
i
NOTE
The value pairs must be entered in continuous order.
6.19.5.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 755
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
756 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 757
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
• Can be used for special network conditions where the overcurrent pickup level should be decreased
depending on the fault voltage
The Voltage-dependent overcurrent protection function is used in protection function groups with 3-phase
current and voltage measurement.
The function Voltage-dependent overcurrent protection comes with one factory-set voltage-dependent
stage. In this function, the following stages can operate simultaneously:
• A maximum of 2 inverse time-overcurrent voltage-dependent stages
• A maximum of 2 inverse time-overcurrent voltage-released stages
[dwstuvol-210713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
758 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[lovoldep-210713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Method of Measurement
You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. (standard method) or the calculated RMS value.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 759
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[dwvolpic-220713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
With:
V = Measured phase-to-phase voltage
Vrated = Rated voltage (parameter Rated voltage in the function block General of the protec-
tion function group)
PU sett. = Pickup threshold setting (parameter address: _11491:3)
PU(V) = Applied pickup threshold according to the voltage influence
The minimum current pickup threshold value is 0.03 * Irated. This value cannot be decreased any further
even not by voltage-dependent pickup threshold factor.
Decreasing the pickup threshold is carried out phase-selectively. The assignment of voltages to current-
carrying phases is shown in Table 6-11.
Pickup and Dropout Behavior of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve According to IEC and ANSI
When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1.1, the inverse-time characteristic curve
is processed.
760 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
An integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time. The weighted time results from the char-
acteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined from the
characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls below the pickup value by 1.045 times (0.95 x 1.1 x threshold value), the
dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via setting
parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout according to
the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The dropout
according to the characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The weighted
reduction of the time is started from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The characteristic curve and associated formulas are shown in the Technical data.
Blocking of the Operate Delay and the Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device-internal Inrush-current detection func-
tion is described in chapter 6.13.6.1 Description .
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 761
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Parameter: Threshold
Parameter: Reset
762 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[lovolrel-210713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
This stage is structured in the same way as the Inverse time-overcurrent, voltage-dependent stage (see
chapter 6.20.3.1 Description). The only differences are the conditions for the pickup and the influence on the
operate curve.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 763
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Measuring-Element Release
When the controlling voltage drops below the setting Undervoltage threshold, the respective measuring
element is released.
The release of the measuring elements is carried out phase-selectively. The assignment of voltages to
current-carrying phases is shown in Figure 6-281.
764 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
• For detection of high-resistance ground faults in effective (solid) or low-resistance (semi-solid) impe-
dance grounded systems
The Sensitive ground current (ANSI 50Ns/51Ns) serves:
• For ground-fault detection in isolated or arc-suppression-coil-grounded systems
• For detection of high-resistance ground faults in effective (solid) or low-resistance (semi-solid) impe-
dance grounded systems
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 765
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
[DwStrGFP-250113-01, 1, en_US]
The function Sensitive ground-current protection can be used in protection function groups that only make
the zero-sequence system (3I0) available. The function is preconfigured at the factory with a non-directional
3I0> stage.
The following stages can be operated simultaneously within the function:
• 4 non-directional 3I0> tripping stages
The general functionality works across stages on the function level.
The group-indications output logic generates the following group indications of the entire function by the
logical OR from the stage-selective indications:
• Pickup
• Operate indication
[DwSGFPu4-230113-01, 1, en_US]
Logic
Figure 6-285 shows the logic of the stage-superordinated functionality of the directional function.
766 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
[LoGFPger-280113-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-285 Logic Diagram of the Stage-Superordinated Functionality of the Directional Function
Figure 6-286 shows the logic of the stage-superordinated functionality of the non-directional function.
[logfpnon-261012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-286 Logic Diagram of the Stage-Superordinated Functionality of the Non-Directional Function
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 767
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
[DwPhINU0, 1, en_US]
Fault-Extinction Detection
The extinction of the fault is characterized by the fact that the zero-sequence voltage subsides. Depending on
the network conditions and fault characteristics, this process can last several 100 ms. If a continuously falling
zero-sequence voltage is detected during the set time Decay time V0, then the fault is considered extin-
guished. The signal Flt. extinction det. is issued.
Thus, the possibility exists, for example, to block the 3I0> stage with cos φ or sin φ measurement directly
after the fault extinction, in order to avoid an overfunction during the subsiding process with a very sensitive
setting of the stage.
Angle-Error Compensation
The high reactive power factor in the arc-suppression-coil-ground system and the unavoidable air-gap of the
core balance current transformer often make necessary a compensation of the angle error of the core
balance current transformer. The device approaches the angle error of the core balance current transformer
with the characteristic shown in the following figure with sufficient precision.
[dwerdwdl-110512-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-288 Correction of the Transmission Characteristic Curve of a Core Balance Current Transformer
768 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Related Topics
General notes on the sensitive ground-fault log are found in Chapter Indications under 3.1.5.4 Ground-Fault
Log .
Value Indications
If the following value indications can be calculated, they are written into the log (sensitive ground-fault log or
fault log) at the time of the 1st pickup and the 1st operate indication in a step.
• 3I0 (value)
• 3I0 active component
• V0
• φ (IN, V0)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 769
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
cannot be activated. In this case, the risk of a false fleeting indication must be accepted, or the stage must be
blocked by using another criterion during the switching procedures.
6.21.3.3 Settings
770 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Logic
[logfpsv0-291112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-289 Logic Diagram of an Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
Stage
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 771
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
sequence voltage V0 is calculated from the measured phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC using the
defining equation.
Use the Method of measurement parameter to select the relevant method of measurement, depending on
the application:
• Measurement of the fundamental comp. (standard filter):
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.
• Measurement of the fund. comp. long filter (fundamental component over 2 cycle filters with
triangular window):
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically. The extended filter length compared to the standard filter and the use of the
triangular window results in a particularly strong attenuation of harmonics and transient faults. The
extended filter length causes the pickup time to increase slightly compared to the standard filter (see
Technical specifications).
Pickup, Dropout
The stage compares the Threshold with the zero-sequence voltage V0. The Pickup delay parameter
allows you to delay the pickup of the tripping stage depending on the residual voltage.
With the Dropout ratio parameter you can define the ratio of the dropout value to the Threshold.
• From an external source via the binary input signal >open of the function block Voltage transformer
circuit breaker, which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. The Blk. by
meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the
stage or does not block it.
772 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Parameter: Threshold
• You should select a more sensitive (smaller) value in a grounded system. This value must be higher
than the maximum residual voltage anticipated during operation caused by system unbalances.
EXAMPLE
For an isolated system
The residual voltage is measured via the open delta winding:
• If the ground fault is fully unbalanced, a residual voltage of 100 V is present at the device terminals.
• The threshold value should be set so that the stage picks up on 50 % of the full residual voltage.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 773
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage transformer circuit breaker is
linked with the voltage transformer circuit breaker.
774 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
6.21.4.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 775
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Logic
[logfp3i0-061212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-290 Logic Diagram for Direction Determination with Cos φ or Sin φ Measurement
776 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.
The method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.
The methods of measurement are characterized by high accuracy and by insensitivity to harmonics, espe-
cially the 3rd and 5th harmonics frequently present in the ground-fault current.
Direction Determination
Exceeding the threshold values by the zero-sequence voltage V0 is a criterion for the ground fault. The direc-
tion determination can be delayed from the occurrence of the zero-sequence voltage with the Dir. deter-
mination delay parameter to achieve steady-state measurands. The result form the direction determina-
tion is only valid if the amount of the ground current 3I0 has also exceeded its threshold value.
The following figure shows an example of the direction determination in the complex phasor diagram for the
cos-φ direction measurement method with a correction value of the direction straight lines from 0 (parameter
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 777
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
φ correction). The example is suitable for the determination of the ground-fault direction in an arc-
suppression-coil-ground system where the variable 3I0 • cos φ is critical for the direction determination.
[dwcosphi-171012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The zero-sequence voltage V0 is basically the reference value for the real axis. The axis of symmetry of the
direction-characteristic curve comes together for this example with the 3I0react axis. For the direction deter-
mination, basically the portion of the current vertical to the set direction-characteristic curve (= axis of
symmetry) is critical (3I0dir.). In this example, this is the active portion 3l0active of the current 3l0. The current
3l0dir. (here = 3I0active) is calculated and compared with the setting value Min.polar.3I0> for
dir.det.. If the current 3l0dir. exceeds the positive setting value, the direction is forward. If the current
3l0dir. exceeds the negative setting value, the direction is backward. In the range in between, the direction is
undetermined.
With the α1 reduction dir. area and α2 reduction dir. area parameters you can limit the
forward and backward ranges as shown in the figure. With this, the direction determination is secured with
high currents in the direction of the axis of symmetry.
The symmetry axis can be turned via a correction angle (φ correction parameter) in a range of ±45.
Through this, it is possible, for example, to attain the greatest sensitivity in grounded systems in the resistive-
inductive range with a -45° turn. In the case of electric machines in busbar connection on the isolated system,
the greatest sensitivity in the resistive-capacitive range can be attained with a turn of +45° (see following
figure).
778 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
[dwphicor-171012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-292 Turning the Direction-Characteristic Curves with Cos φ Measurement with Angle Correction
If you set the Dir. measuring method parameter to sin φ and the φ correction parameter to 0, the
symmetry axis of the direction-characteristic curve comes together with the 3I0active axis and the V0 axis.
Since the portion of the current vertical to the direction-characteristic curve (= axis of symmetry) is critical
(3l0dir.), here, the current 3l0react is included in the direction determination. If the current 3l0dir. (here,
=3I0react) exceeds the negative setting value Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det., the direction is forward. If
the current 3l0dir. exceeds the positive setting value, the direction is backward. In the range in between, the
direction is undetermined.
This direction measurement thus is appropriate for the determination of ground-fault direction in isolated
systems.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 779
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
[dwsinphi-011112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
780 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Blocking of the Operate Indication via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter allows you to define whether the operate indication of
the stage should be blocked by exceeding the threshold values due to an inrush current. In case of a blocking
and fulfilled pickup conditions, the stage picks up. The start of the time delay and the operate indication are
blocked. The function indicates this through a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and the
pickup conditions are still met, the time delay is started.
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage transformer circuit breaker is connected
to the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 781
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Parameter: Dir. measuring method, φ correction, Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det., 3I0> threshold
value
782 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
6.21.5.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 783
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Introduction
Ground faults occurring in arc-suppression-coil-ground systems quite often extinguish a short time after the
ignition, mostly within a few milliseconds. Such transient occurrences are called transient ground faults. In
order to detect the ground-fault direction, based on these transient occurrences, a special measuring method
is required that can also capture high frequencies. Conventional methods based on phasor calculations are
not suitable. Even for ground faults lasting for a short time, usually, a high-frequency charging process occurs
in healthy phases. The transient charging process is evaluated by the transient ground-fault measuring
784 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
method to determine the ground-fault direction. An integrating method of measurement ensures a high
degree of sensitivity and a positive stability against parasitic signals in the zero-sequence system.
Since permanent ground faults also start with the transient charging process of flawless wires, those errors
will be detected as well.
This process is most suitable for the use in closed loops or meshed systems. Operational, circulating residual
currents are eliminated and therefore, cannot affect the directional result.
Stage-Control Logic
[lostuwis-240113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 785
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
[lowisfut-240113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• Generating pickup
In order to determine the direction, the zero variables will be processed in an integrable procedure. In addi-
tion, the basic oscillation values of the zero-sequence voltage V0 and the residual current 3I0 will be calcu-
lated.
786 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
The basic oscillation values V0 and 3I0 will be used in the optional trip logic.
Operational, meaning circulating residual currents, can occur in closed loops or meshed systems. This type of
residual current is also present in case of a malfunction and can falsify the directional result. Therefore, an
operational residual current is eliminated.
• Stabilization against tripping: After determining the assumed occurrence of the ground fault, forwarding
of the determined direction is delayed for 50 ms. If the circuit breaker is still recognized as being closed
after 50 ms, (inverting of the signal I open (3-phase)), the direction result is forwarded.
There is no process monitor available in the 1-phase function group Voltage/current 1-phase. For this
reason, when applying the stage in this function group, recognition of the switching operation is not working
and is switched off.
You can find more information in Chapter 6.21.6.2 Application and Setting Notes .
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 787
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Trip Logic
[loauswis-240113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In many applications, the transient ground-fault stage is used only to indicate the direction. In this case, the
trip logic is not required and remains switched off. However, this stage can also be used to switch off a
permanent ground fault. To do this, the optional trip logic must be switched on by using theOperate func-
tionality setting. If the basic oscillating values V0 and 3I0 exceed the set threshold values, the pickup is
used to start the tripping delay (setting Operate delay). In order to start the tripping delay, the threshold
values must be exceeded during the time delay. The process of the tripping delay will be indicated. If the
Operate & flt.rec. blocked setting is set to no, the pickup message is sent.
788 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
You can block the operate indication, the fault recording and the fault log with the Operate & flt.rec.
blocked parameter. In this case a sensitive ground-fault log is created instead of the fault log.
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage transformer circuit breaker is linked with
the voltage transformer circuit breaker.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 789
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
6.21.6.3 Settings
790 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Logic
[logfppvi-291112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-297 Logic Diagram of Directional Overcurrent Stage with 3I0-φ(V,I) Measurement
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 791
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.
Direction Determination
The threshold-value violation by the zero-sequence voltage V0 is a criterion for the ground fault. The direction
determination determination can be delayed from the occurrence of the zero-sequence voltage with the Dir.
determination delay parameter to achieve steady measurands.
The direction is determined via the determination of the phase angle between the angle-error compensated
ground current 3I0com. and the rotated zero-sequence voltage, indicated in the following as reference
voltage Vref,rot. To take different system conditions and applications into account, the reference voltage can
be rotated through an adjustable angle (Rotation angle of ref. volt. parameter). This moves the
vector of the rotated reference voltage close to the vector ground current -3I0com. Consequently, the result of
direction determination is as reliable as possible.
The rotated reference voltage Vref,rot and the Forward section +/- parameter define the forward and
backward section, refer to Figure 6-298. The forward section results as range ± Δφ around the rotated refer-
ence voltage, Vref,rot. The value ± Δφ is set with the Forward section +/- parameter. If the ground
current -3I0 vector is located in this range, the device decides on the forward direction. In the mirrored range,
the device decides on the backward direction. In the intermediate range, the direction is undetermined.
792 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
[dwdirrot-011112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Blocking of the Operate Indication via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter allows you to define whether the operate indication of
the tripping stage should be blocked by a threshold-value violation due to an inrush current. In case of a
blocking,and fulfilled pickup conditions, the tripping stage picks up. The start of the time delay and the
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 793
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
operate indication are blocked. The function signals this through a corresponding indication. If the blocking
drops out and the pickup conditions are still met, the time delay is started.
• The binary input signal >open of the function block Voltage transformer circuit breaker is connected
to the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
794 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
The Forward section +/- parameter can normally be left at its default setting. A reduction of the forward
section by a few degrees is practical, for example in an arc-suppression-coil-ground system with long cable
feeders, that generate high capacitive fault currents.
6.21.7.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 795
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
796 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
[LoY0G0B0-300713-01, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 797
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Direction Determination
Exceeding the threshold values by the zero-sequence voltage V0 is a criterion for the ground fault. The direc-
tion determination can be delayed from the occurrence of the zero-sequence voltage with the Dir. deter-
mination delay parameter to achieve steady-state measurands. The result from the direction determina-
tion is only valid if the amount of the ground current 3I0 has also exceeded its release threshold value.
The following figure shows an example of the direction determination in the complex phasor diagram for the
G0 direction measurement method with a correction value of the direction straight line from 0 (Parameter φ
correction). The example is suitable for the determination of the ground-fault direction in an arc-suppres-
sion-coil-ground system where the value G0 is decisive for the direction determination.
[DwY0Dire-171012-01, 1, en_US]
The zero-sequence voltage V0 is generally the reference value for the real axis and is identical to the G0
axis. The axis of symmetry of the direction-characteristic curve coincides for this example with the B0 (reac-
tive) axis. For the direction determination, the component of the admittance perpendicular to the set direction-
characteristic curve (= axis of symmetry) is decisive G0dir (=Y0dir). In this example, this is the active compo-
nent G0active of the admittance Y0. The conductance G0dir. (here = G0active) is calculated and compared
with the setting value Polarized G0/B0 threshold. If the conductance G0dir. exceeds the positive
setting value, the direction is forward. If the conductance G0dir. exceeds the negative setting value, the direc-
tion is backward. In the range in between, the direction is undetermined.
798 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
With the α1 reduction dir. area and α2 reduction dir. area parameters, you can limit the
forward and backward ranges as shown in Figure 6-301. With this, the direction determination is secured in
case of high currents in the direction of the axis of symmetry.
The symmetry axis can be turned via a correction angle (φ correction parameter) in a range of ±45.
Through this, it is possible, for example, to attain the greatest sensitivity in grounded systems in the resistive-
inductive range with a -45° turn. In the case of electric machines in busbar connection on the isolated system,
the greatest sensitivity in the resistive-capacitive range can be attained with a turn of +45° (see following
figure).
[DwY0meas-171012-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-301 Turning the Direction-Characteristic Curves with G0 Measurement with Angle Correction
If you set the Dir. measuring method parameter to B0 and the φ correction parameter to 0, the axis
of symmetry of the direction-characteristic curve coincides with the G0 and V0 axes. Since the component of
the admittance Y0 perpendicular to the direction-characteristic curve (= axis of symmetry) is decisive (B0dir.
(=Y0dir.)), here, the susceptance B0 (reactive) is used in the direction determination. If the susceptance
B0dir. (B0 reactive) exceeds the negative setting value Polarized G0/B0 threshold, the direction is
forward. If the susceptance B0dir. exceeds the positive setting value, the direction is backward. In the range
in between, the direction is undetermined.
This direction measurement thus is appropriate for the determination of ground-fault direction in isolated
systems.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 799
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
[DwSiCoY0-011112-01, 1, en_US]
800 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Blocking of the Operate Indication via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter allows you to define whether the operate indication of
the stage should be blocked by exceeding of the threshold values due to an inrush current. In case of a
blocking and fulfilled pickup conditions, the stage picks up. The start of the time delay and the operate indica-
tion are blocked. The function indicates this through a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and
the pickup conditions are still met, the time delay is started.
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage transformer circuit breaker is connected
to the voltage transformer circuit breaker.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 801
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Parameter: Dir. measuring method, φ correction, Polarized G0/B0 threshold, 3I0> release
thresh. value
802 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
where:
ks: Safety margin, ks = 1.2 (cable networks), ks = 2.0 (overhead lines)
I0active: Active component of the ground-fault current (watt leakage current) of the
protected power line
Vrated: Secondary rated voltage in the healthy case
I0min: Min. ground current in the healthy case, 5 mA to 10 mA (core balance current
transformer), 50 mA to 100 mA (Holmgreen transformer)
V0>: Pickup threshold of the residual voltage ≈ 0.1
If a parallel resistor Rp is used on the arc-suppression coil, the threshold value G0
must also be smaller than:
where:
ks: Safety margin ≥ 1.5
IRp: Secondary rated current of the parallel resistor
Vrated: Secondary rated voltage in the healthy case
The 3I0> release thresh. value parameter can be set to half of the expected
measuring current and here the entire zero-sequence current can be put to use.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 803
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
where:
I0min: Ground current in the healthy case
where:
ks: Safety margin, ks = 1.2 (cable networks), ks = 2.0 (overhead lines)
I0active: Active component of the ground-fault current of the protected power line
Vrated: Secondary rated voltage in the healthy case
I0min: Min. ground current in the healthy case, 5 mA to 10 mA (core balance current
transformer), 50 mA to 100 mA (Holmgreen transformer)
V0>: Pickup threshold of the residual voltage ≈ 0.02
The 3I0> release thresh. value parameter must be set to a value below the
minimum expected ground-fault current.
804 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
In an arc-suppression-coil-ground system in feeders with a very large reactive current, it can be practical to
set a somewhat larger angle α1 to avoid a false pickup based on transformer and algorithm tolerances.
6.21.8.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 805
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
6.21.9.1 Description
In the Directional sensitive ground-fault detection function the tripping stage of the non-directional sensi-
tive ground current also works on demand.
806 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Logic
[logfpdyn-291112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Method of Measurement
You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. or the calculated RMS value.
• Measurement of the fundamental component:
This method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 807
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Parameter: Threshold
808 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
6.21.9.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 809
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
[DwIntGFP, 1, en_US]
810 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
[LoIntnon, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 811
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
Method of Measurement
The stage calculates the RMS value of 3I0 since this value takes into account the higher-order harmonics
components and the direct component (DC). Both components contribute to the thermal load.
[DwIntFaD, 1, en_US]
Number of Pickups
The stage counts the number of Pickup signals during the intermittent ground fault. With the operate of the
stage this number is logged via the information No. of pickups.
Accumulation of the Intermittent Ground-Fault Current and Issuing the Operate Signal
An intermittent ground fault can result in thermal stress on the protected equipment. The magnitude and the
duration of the ground-fault current are decisive for the thermal stress. In order to calculate the thermal
stress, the stage sums up the duration of the stabilized pickups with an integrator. If the integration value
reaches the predefined Sum of extended PU times, the limit of the thermal load is reached. The stage
issues the signal Sum limit reached and operates when the signal Pickup is active.
812 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
Reset Timer for the Definition of the Interval between Independent Ground Faults
If there is a large interval between independent ground faults or if ground fault extinguishes and does not
restrike again within a larger time, the stressed equipment can cool down. In this case, an operation is not
necessary. The interval between ground faults is monitored with the reset timer. If a ground fault occurs, the
Timer T-reset with its setting Reset time is launched simultaneously with Integrator T-sum. Unlike the
integrator, each new ground fault restarts the reset timer with its initial value. If Timer T-reset expires, that is,
no new ground fault was detected during that period, all memories and the stage logics are reset. Timer T-
reset thus determines the time during which the next ground fault must occur to be processed yet as intermit-
tent ground fault in connection with the previous fault. A ground fault that occurs later is considered as a new
fault event.
Reset Conditions
Under one of the following 2 conditions, Timer T-reset is reset.
• The Intermittent ground-fault protection stage operates.
• The general operate indication is going.
Under one of the following conditions, Integrator T-sum and Counter are reset and the whole stage is reset
and returns to its idle state.
• Timer T-reset expires without an operate signal of this stage or another function was issued.
• The operate signal of the intermittent ground-fault protection stage is going.
• The general operate indication is going without the operate signal of the intermittent ground-fault protec-
tion stage issued.
Start & Stop of Fault Recording, Fault Logging, and General Pickup
The Stabilized pickup signal initiates the fault recording, fault logging, and the general pickup of the
function group. The fault recording starts according to the pre-trigger time before the Stabilized pickup
signal rises.
With the reset condition of this stage, the fault recording, fault logging, and the general pickup of the function
group are terminated.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 813
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
Table 6-13 Information Target with Different Processing of Signal Status Changes
814 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
i
NOTE
To avoid a burst of messages, do not route the signal Pickup to the operational log and fault log.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 815
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
EXAMPLE
[TiExaInt, 1, en_US]
6.22.5 Settings
816 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 817
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current- Independent Time Delay
• Recording of phase conductor interruptions in the primary system and in the current-transformer secon-
dary circuits
• Protection of electrical machines following unbalanced loads that are caused by unbalanced voltages or
conductor interruptions (for example, through a defective fuse)
[dwnspdir-271112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the device is equipped with the Inrush-current detection function, the tripping stages can be stabilized
against tripping due to transformer-inrush currents.
818 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current- Independent Time Delay
[lostensp-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In addition to the generally valid stage control, the stage is blocked in the event of a measuring voltage
failure, provided the stage is working directionally.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 819
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current- Independent Time Delay
[lonspdir-300112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-310 Logic Diagram of the Function Directional Negative-Sequence System Protection with
Current-Independen Time Delay
Measurand
The negative-sequence current I2 is used as a measurand. From the 3-phase currents, the fundamental
phasors are determined via a 1-cycle filter and, corresponding with the definition equation of the symmetrical
components, the negative-sequence system is calculated from this.
820 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current- Independent Time Delay
Functioning
The stage picks up if the negative-sequence system current exceeds the set threshold value and the parame-
terized direction agrees with the measured direction. The pickup drops out if the negative-sequence system
current falls below 95 % of the set threshold.
[dwstabil-300112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Direction Determination
The direction determination takes place with the negative-sequence system measurements I2 and V2.
The forward and reverse region is defined through the parameters Angle forward α and Angle forward
β (see next figure). The reference for the 2 angles that must be set is the positive real axis. The angles are
positively defined in a mathematical sense (counter-clockwise). The region between the limit angle α and the
limit angle β - counted from the former in a positive direction - is the forward region. The remaining region is
the reverse region.
For determining of the direction, the function places the measuring current I2 on the real axis. If the phasor of
the negative-sequence system voltage V2 is located within the defined forward region, the function deter-
mines the direction as forward. In the other case, the function determines the direction as reverse.
The requirement for determining the direction is that the adjustable minimum variables have been exceeded
for the negative-sequence system current and negative-sequence system voltage (parameters Min. neg.-
seq. current I2 and Min. neg.-seq. voltage V2).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 821
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current- Independent Time Delay
[dwphasor-140212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-312 Phasor Diagram for Direction Determination with Negative-Sequence System Values
If the device determines a fault in the voltage-transformer secondary circuit (through the binary input
voltage transformer circuit-breaker dropout or through measuring-voltage failure detec-
tion), direction determination will be disabled and every directionally set stage will be blocked. Non-direction-
ally set stages become active again if there are faults in the voltage-transformer secondary circuit.
[lorichtu-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Directional Mode
You use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the stage works in a forward or reverse direc-
tion. Non-directional operation is also possible.
822 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current- Independent Time Delay
i
NOTE
The Op.mode at 1p dead time setting is only available in devices with 1-/3-pole tripping. In devices
with 3-pole tripping, this setting does not apply.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 823
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current- Independent Time Delay
824 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current- Independent Time Delay
i
NOTE
The Op.mode at 1p dead time setting is only available in devices with 1-/3-pole tripping. In devices
with 3-pole tripping, this setting does not apply.
i
NOTE
The Hold mode 1p dead time setting is only available in devices with 1-/3-pole tripping. In devices
with 3-pole tripping, this setting does not apply.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 825
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current- Independent Time Delay
Parameter: Threshold
6.23.6 Settings
826 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current- Independent Time Delay
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 827
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current- Independent Time Delay
828 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.24 Undercurrent Protection
[lostuundcu-150813, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 829
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.24 Undercurrent Protection
[loundcur-200713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Method of Measurement
You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. (standard method) or the calculated RMS value.
830 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.24 Undercurrent Protection
Pickup Mode
The Pickup mode parameter defines whether the protection stage picks up if all 3 measuring elements
detect the undercurrent condition (3 out of 3) or if only 1 measuring element has to detect the undercur-
rent condition (1 out of 3).
Activation and Blocking of the Stage Depending On the Circuit Breaker Condition
With parameter Activation, you define if the Undercurrent protection stage is always active or only
active if the circuit breaker is detected as closed.
If the local circuit-breaker is open, the function Undercurrent protection should be blocked, and no pickup
should be generated. The blocking information is via the CB open signal which is obtained from the Process
monitor. The circuit-breaker switch position is detected as open if both of the following conditions are met:
• The circuit-breaker switch position must be detected as open via the related binary inputs of the Posi-
tion indication. The binary inputs must be connected to the auxiliary contacts of the circuit-breaker.
• The phase current must be lower than setting of parameter Current thresh.CB open.
The stage will always be active if the Position indication is not routed to the binary inputs, even if the param-
eter Activation is set to with CB closed.
For more information, see Overview of Functionin chapter Process monitor.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 831
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.24 Undercurrent Protection
Parameter: Threshold
6.24.5 Settings
832 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.24 Undercurrent Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 833
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
The function Overvoltage Protection with 3-phase voltage (ANSI 59) is used to:
• Monitor the permissible voltage range
• protect equipment (for example, plant components, machines, etc.) against damages caused by over-
voltage
The Overvoltage protection with 3-phase voltage function is used in protection function groups with
voltage measurement.
The function Overvoltage protection with 3-phase voltage comes with 2 preconfigured stages from the
factory. A maximum of 3 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages
have an identical structure.
[dw3phovp-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
834 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
[lo3phasi-090611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-317 Logic Diagram of the Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
Method of Measurement
Use the Method of measurement parameter to select the relevant method of measurement, depending on
the application.
• Measurement of the fundamental comp.:
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.
Measured Value
Use the Measured value parameter to define whether the tripping stage analyzes the phase-to-phase
voltages VAB, VBC, and VCA, or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 835
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
If the measured value is set to phase-to-phase, the function reports those measuring elements that have
picked up.
Parameter: Threshold
836 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
EXAMPLE
Example for 2-stage overvoltage protection
The example describes the possible settings for a 2-stage overvoltage protection function. We will look at the
settings of the parameters Threshold and Operate delay.
• 1. Stage:
To detect stationary overvoltages, set the threshold value of the first overvoltage-protection element at
least 10 % above the max. stationary phase-to-phase voltage anticipated during normal operation. When
setting the parameter Measured value to phase-to-phase voltage and a secondary rated voltage of
100 V, the secondary setting value of the first overvoltage-protection element is calculated as follows:
6.25.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 837
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
838 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
[dwovpu1s-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 839
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
[logovpu1-090611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-319 Logic Diagram of a Stage: Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
Method of Measurement
The stage uses the positive-sequence voltage. The positive-sequence voltage is calculated from the meas-
ured phase-to-ground voltages according to the defining equation.
840 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
General Notes
If the overvoltage is high, the first stage can trip with a short time delay. If overvoltages are lower, the second
stage can either only signal the threshold value violation (see Operation as monitoring function) or trip with a
longer delay to allow the voltage controller to regulate the voltage back into the nominal range.
6.26.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 841
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
842 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage
• Other causes can include faults in the primary system, for example at the transformer or in installations
for reactive-power compensation.
• Voltage unbalance can also be caused by phase failure, for example due to a tripped 1-phase fuse.
[dwu2ovps-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 843
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage
[lou23pol-090611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-321 Logic Diagram of a Stage: Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage
Method of Measurement
The stage uses the negative-sequence voltage. The negative-sequence voltage is calculated from the meas-
ured phase-to-ground voltages according to the defined equation.
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c.
b., which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker The Blk. by meas.-volt.
failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not
block it.
844 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block VTCB is connected to the voltage-transformer circuit
breaker (see Chapter 8.3.3.1 Overview of Functions ).
6.27.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 845
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage
846 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.28 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage and Compounding
The Overvoltage Protection with Positive-sequence Voltage and Compounding function (ANSI 59)
detects stationary overvoltages at the opposite line end.
On long, unloaded or weakly loaded transmission lines stationary overvoltages are caused by the capaci-
tance per unit length (Ferranti effect). The overvoltage is present at the opposite line end in this case, but it
can only be eliminated by switching off the local line end.
[dwovpuko-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 847
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.28 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage and Compounding
[lovpu1ko-090611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-323 Logic Diagram of a Stage: Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage and
Compounding
Method of Measurement
The compounding calculates the positive-sequence system of the voltage at the opposite line end. For this,
the function uses the line data (X per length unit, C1 per length unit, Line angle, Line
length).
i
NOTE
Compounding is not suitable for lines with series capacitors or common-mode reactor.
The voltage Vend at the remote line end is calculated from the voltage measured at the local line end and from
the flowing current based on the equivalent circuit diagram for the line (see Figure 6-324):
848 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.28 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage and Compounding
[fofuende-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
with
VEnd Calculated voltage at the opposite line end
Vmeas Measured voltage at the local line end
Imeas Measured current at the local line end
CB Effective capacitance of the line
RL Ohmic operating resistance of the line
LL Working inductance of the line
[dwerskom-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Parameter: Threshold
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 849
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.28 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage and Compounding
General Notes
If the overvoltage is high, the first stage can trip with a short time delay. If overvoltages are lower, the second
stage can either only signal the threshold value violation (see Operation as monitoring function) or trip with a
longer delay to allow the voltage controller to regulate the voltage back into the nominal range.
6.28.5 Settings
850 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.28 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage and Compounding
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 851
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
• is used with electrical machines to detect ground faults in the stator winding.
[dwu0ovps-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
852 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
[loovpu03-090611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-326 Logic Diagram of an Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
Stage
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 853
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
Use the Method of measurement parameter to select the relevant method of measurement, depending on
the application.
• Measurement of the fundamental comp. (standard filter):
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.
• fund. comp. long filter (fundamental component over 2 cycle filters with triangular window):
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically. The extended filter length compared to the standard filter and the use of the
triangular window results in a particularly strong attenuation of harmonics and transient faults. The
extended filter length causes the pickup time to increase slightly compared to the standard filter (see
Technical Data).
Pickup, Dropout
The stage compares the Threshold with the zero-sequence voltage V0. The Pickup delay parameter
allows you to delay the pickup of the tripping stage depending on the residual voltage.
With the Dropout ratio parameter you can define the ratio of the dropout value to the Threshold.
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c.
b., which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. The Blk. by meas.-volt.
failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not
block it.
854 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
Parameter: Threshold
• You should select a more sensitive (smaller) value in a grounded system. This value must be higher
than the maximum residual voltage anticipated during operation caused by system unbalances.
EXAMPLE
For an isolated system
The residual voltage is measured via the open delta winding:
• If the ground fault is fully unbalanced, a residual voltage of 100 V is present at the device terminals.
• The threshold value should be set so that the stage picks up on 50 % of the full residual voltage.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 855
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block VTCB is connected to the voltage-transformer circuit
breaker (see Chapter 8.3.3.1 Overview of Functions ).
856 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
6.29.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 857
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.30 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage
The Overvoltage protection with any voltage function is used in protection function groups, which are
based on voltage measurement.
The function Overvoltage protection with any voltage comes with 2 factory-set stages. A maximum of 3
tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages have an identical struc-
ture.
[dwovpuxs-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
858 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.30 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage
[louxovpr-211212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-328 Logic Diagram of a Stage: Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage
i
NOTE
If the function Overvoltage protection with any voltage is used in a 1-phase function group, the param-
eter Measured value is not visible.
Method of Measurement
The Method of measurement parameter allows you to define whether the function works with the funda-
mental component or the calculated RMS value.
• Measurement of the fundamental comp.:
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.
Measured Value
The parameter Measured value allows you to select whether the stage uses a measured (directly
connected) voltage or a calculated phase-to-phase voltage.
If the function Overvoltage protection with any voltage is used in a 1-phase function group, the parameter
Measured value is not visible.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 859
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.30 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage
i
NOTE
If the function Overvoltage protection with any voltage is used in a 1-phase function group, the param-
eter Measured value is not visible.
860 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.30 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage
Parameter: Threshold
6.30.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 861
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.30 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage
862 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.31 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
• Protect equipment (for example, plant components and machines) against damages caused by under-
voltage
[dwstru3p-110211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 863
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.31 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
[louvp3ph-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-330 Logic Diagram of the Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage Stage
Method of Measurement
Use the Method of measurement parameter to select the relevant method of measurement, depending on
the application.
• Measurement of the fundamental component:
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.
864 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.31 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
Measured Value
Use the Measured value parameter to define whether the tripping stage analyzes the phase-to-phase
voltages VAB, VBC, and VCA, or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.
If the measured value is set to phase-to-phase, the function reports those measuring elements that have
picked up.
Pickup Mode
Use the Pickup mode parameter to define whether the tripping stage picks up when there is a threshold
value lower limit violation in one measuring element (1 out of 3) or when there is a threshold value lower
limit violation in all 3 measuring elements (3 out of 3).
Pickup Delay
The Current-flow criterion parameter is only available and of relevance if you are using the current-
flow criterion of the function (parameter Pickup delay = on).
If the circuit breaker opens when the current-flow criterion is being used, the undervoltage detection and
current-flow dropout functions conflict with one another. Depending on the threshold value settings for under-
voltage detection and current-flow criterion, it is possible that the undervoltage is detected before the current-
flow criterion has dropped out. In this case, the tripping stage picks up briefly. Use the Pickup delay
parameter to prevent the tripping stage from briefly picking up in this way when the circuit breaker opens.
This is achieved by delaying pickup by approximately 40 ms.
Current-Flow Criterion
The undervoltage-protection stages work optionally with a current-flow criterion. The Current-flow
criterion works across all tripping stages.
When the Current-flow criterion parameter is activated, the undervoltage-protection stages only pick
up if a settable minimum current (Threshold I>) is exceeded. A current below the minimum current blocks
the tripping stages.
The current-flow criterion can also be set to fulfilled with the binary input signal >Current flow-crite-
rion. The function reports when the current-flow criterion is fulfilled.
Figure 6-330 illustrates the influence of the current-flow criterion.
i
NOTE
If the (_:2311:104) Current-flow criterion parameter is deactivated, the device picks up imme-
diately if a missing measuring voltage is detected while the undervoltage protection is active. The param-
eter setting can be changed even when the device has picked up.
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c.
b., which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker The Blk. by meas.-volt.
failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not
block it.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 865
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.31 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
Parameter: Threshold
EXAMPLE:
Rated voltage of the protected object: Vrated, obj.= 10 kV
Voltage transformer:
[foschwlw-190309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
866 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.31 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 867
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.31 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
A measuring-voltage failure can only be detected if one of the following two conditions is met:
• The device-internal supervision function Measuring-voltage failure detection is configured and
switched on.
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block VTCB is connected to the voltage-transformer circuit
breaker (see Chapter 8.3.3.1 Overview of Functions ).
6.31.5 Settings
868 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.31 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 869
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.31 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
870 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.32 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
• Protect equipment (for example, plant components and machines) from damage caused by under-
voltage
• Protect motors and generators from inadmissible operating states and a possible loss of stability in the
event of voltage dips
2-phase short circuits or ground faults lead to an unbalanced voltage collapse. In comparison to three 1-
phase measuring systems, such events have no noticeable impact on the positive-sequence voltage. This
makes this function particularly suitable for the assessment of stability problems.
The Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage function is used in Protection function
groups, which are based on voltage measurement.
The Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage function comes with 2 factory-set tripping
stages. A maximum of 3 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages
have an identical structure.
The protection function is structured such that one current-flow criterion can act on all undervoltage protection
stages (see Figure 6-331). If the protection function group used has no current measurement, you can only
set the current- flow criterion as fulfilled via the corresponding binary input signal.
[dwstuvu1-110211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 871
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.32 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
[louv3pu1-021012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-332 Logic Diagram of a Stage: Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
Method of Measurement
The stage uses the positive-sequence voltage. The positive-sequence voltage is calculated from the meas-
ured phase-to-ground voltages according to the defining equation.
872 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.32 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
Pickup Delay
The Current-flow criterion parameter is only available and of relevance if you are using the current-
flow criterion of the function (parameter Pickup delay = on).
If the circuit breaker opens when the current-flow criterion is being used, the undervoltage detection and
current-flow dropout functions conflict with one another. Depending on the threshold value settings for under-
voltage detection and current-flow criterion, it is possible that the undervoltage is detected before the current-
flow criterion has dropped out. In this case, the tripping stage picks up briefly. Use the Pickup delay
parameter to prevent the tripping stage from briefly picking up in this way when the circuit breaker opens.
This is achieved by delaying pickup by approximately 40 ms.
Current-Flow Criterion
The undervoltage-protection stages work optionally with a current-flow criterion. The current-flow criterion
works across all stages.
When the Current-flow criterion parameter is activated, the undervoltage protection stages only pick
up if a settable minimum current (Threshold I>) is exceeded in at least one phase. A current below the
minimum current blocks the tripping stages.
The current-flow criterion can also be set to fulfilled with the binary input signal >Current flow-crite-
rion. The function reports when the current-flow criterion is fulfilled.
Figure 6-332 illustrates the influence of the current-flow criterion.
i
NOTE
If the (_:2311:104) Current-flow criterion parameter is deactivated, the device picks up imme-
diately if a missing measuring voltage is detected while the undervoltage protection is active. The param-
eter setting can be changed even when the device has picked up.
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c.
b., which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. The Blk. by meas.-volt.
failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not
block it.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 873
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.32 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
The Current-flow criterion parameter is only available if you are using the current-flow criterion of the
function (parameter Pickup delay = on). If the current-flow criterion is deactivated, no pickup delay is
required.
With the parameter Pickup delay you set whether pickup of the stage is to be delayed by approximately
40 ms or not. The delay avoids possible brief pickup of the stage when the circuit breaker opens.
Parameter Value Description
no Use this setting if you definitely do not want tripping-stage pickup
to be subject to a time delay in the event of a fault. This setting
results in pickup and, where applicable, tripping being performed
as quickly as possible.
Please note that switching procedures (opening of the CB) can
result in brief pickup of the tripping stage, depending on the
threshold-value settings for undervoltage pickup and the current-
flow criterion. To prevent unwanted tripping, you must set a
minimum tripping delay of 50 ms.
yes Use this setting when switching procedures (opening of the CB)
are not permitted to result in tripping-stage pickup.
Please note that pickup is delayed by approximately 40 ms. This
delay is added to the operate time.
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block VTCB is connected to the voltage-transformer circuit
breaker (see Chapter 8.3.3.1 Overview of Functions ).
874 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.32 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
• If they are located on the output side, the voltage is switched off
When setting the threshold value, please make sure that the positive-sequence voltage as defined is equal to
the value of one phase-to-ground voltage. Taking into account the rated primary voltage of the motor, the
primary setting value of the first stage is calculated as follows:
[fobglei1-190309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
When setting secondary values, you calculate the secondary setting value as follows, taking into account the
voltage-transformer ratio:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 875
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.32 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
[fobglei3-190309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
6.32.5 Settings
876 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.32 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 877
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.33 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage
The function Undervoltage protection with any voltage (ANSI 27) detects any 1-phase undervoltage and is
intended for special applications.
[dwstuvux-110211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
878 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.33 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage
[louvpuxx-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-334 Logic Diagram of a Stage: Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage
i
NOTE
If the function is used in 1-phase function groups, the parameter Measured value is not available.
Method of Measurement
The Method of measurement parameter allows you to define whether the function works with the funda-
mental component or the calculated RMS value.
• Measurement of the fundamental component:
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 879
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.33 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage
Measured Value
The parameter Measured value allows you to select whether the stage uses a measured (directly
connected) voltage or a calculated phase-to-phase voltage.
If the function is used in 1-phase function groups, the parameter Measured value is not available.
Current-Flow Criterion
The undervoltage-protection stages work optionally with a current-flow criterion. The current-flow criterion
works across all stages.
When the Current-flow criterion parameter is switched on, the undervoltage protection stages only
pick up when the current-flow criterion has been set to fulfilled via the binary input signal >Current flow-
criterion. The function reports when the current-flow criterion is fulfilled.
Figure 6-334 illustrates the influence of the current-flow criterion.
i
NOTE
If the (_:2311:101) Current-flow criterion parameter is deactivated, the device picks up imme-
diately if a missing measuring voltage is detected while the undervoltage protection is active. The param-
eter setting can be changed even when the device has picked up.
880 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.33 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage
i
NOTE
If the function is used in a 1-phase function group, the parameter Measured value is not available.
Parameter: Threshold
i
NOTE
Because of the flexible setting options of the voltage measurand, the function itself does not determine the
current associated with the voltage. A suitable current-flow monitoring function must be created by the
user with the Continuous Function Chart (CFC), and connected to the binary input signal >Current
flow-criterion.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 881
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.33 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage
6.33.5 Settings
882 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.33 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 883
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.34 Fault Locator
The Fault locator function serves for measuring the fault distance in the event of a short circuit.
Quick determination of fault location and the associated rapid troubleshooting increase the availability of the
line for the power transmission in the electrical power system. Determining the fault location is based on the
loop-impedance calculation of short-circuited measuring loops.
The Fault locator function is used in the Line protection function group.
[dwstrufo-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The recording of phase currents and voltages is a prerequisite for calculation of fault points. The Fault
locator function contains all necessary control parameters.
Fault-point calculation starts only if the functions Distance protection, Differential protection, Ground-fault
protection or Overcurrent protection are picked up or triggered.
Starting Conditions
The fault location is an independent function with its own measurand memory and its own filter algorithms. To
define the valid measuring loop and the most favorable time interval for the measured variable saving, only a
start command is required by the short-circuit protection. The fault location can be started by tripping of the
short-circuit protection or also at each pickup. If another protection device causes the disconnection of a
short-circuit, a fault-location calculation is then also possible for each pickup. In the event of a fault outside
the line to be protected, the fault-location indication cannot always be relevant, however, because the meas-
urands can be falsified by the center infeed for example.
884 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.34 Fault Locator
• Fault distance d of the line proportional to the reactance in kilometers or miles, converted on the basis of
the parameterized reactance per unit length of the line
• Fault distance d as a percentage of the line length, calculated on the basis of the parameterized reac-
tance per unit length and the parameterized line length
i
NOTE
Specification of distance in kilometers, miles, or percent is relevant only for homogenous line sections. If
the line comprises parts which exhibit different reactances per unit of length (for example, overhead-line-
cable sections), you can then analyze the reactance determined from the fault location for separate calcu-
lation of the fault distance.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 885
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.34 Fault Locator
[dwfailur-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-336 Fault Currents and Voltages in a Line Fed on Both Sides
M Measuring point
S1, S2 Source voltage (EMF)
IF1, IF2 Partial fault currents
IF1 + IF2 Total fault current
VF1 Fault voltage at the measuring point
RF Common fault resistance
ZF1, ZF2 Fault impedances
ZF1gnd, Ground fault impedances
ZF2gnd
ZS1, ZS2 External impedances
ZS1gnd, Ground external impedances
ZS2gnd
• Line length for the correct output of the fault distance as a percentage of the line length
i
NOTE
The visibility of the parameter Parallel-line compensat. depends on the selected setting format of
the Line.
The parameter Parallel-line compensat. is visible if you have connected a parallel line for the
device.
Parameter: Start
886 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.34 Fault Locator
The following conditions have to be fulfilled so that the parallel line compensation functions:
• Connect the ground current of the parallel line in the correct polarity to an additional current input.
• Set the input used for the parallel current in the correct ratio to the phase currents for the system data.
• Set the coupling impedances to the parallel system for the line data.
6.34.5 Settings
Context file corrupt
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 887
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Overfrequency Protection
[dwstofqp-090211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
888 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Overfrequency Protection
[lostofqp-040411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Frequency-Measurement Method
Overfrequency protection is available in 2 functional configurations. These work with different frequency-
measurement methods. You select the frequency-measurement method in dependence of the application.
• Angle-difference method (configuration A):
The angle-difference method determines the phasor of the positive-sequence voltage in multiphase
systems. In the case of 1-phase connection, it always processes the phasor of the connected voltage.
Since the change of angle of the voltage phasor over a given time interval is proportional to the
frequency change, the current frequency can be derived from it.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 889
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Overfrequency Protection
Both methods of measurement are characterized by a high measuring accuracy combined with a short pickup
time. Disturbance values such as harmonics, high frequency disturbances, phase-angle jumps during
switching operations and compensation processes due to power swings are effectively suppressed.
Frequency-Measurement Method
The frequency measurement method is selected with the functional configuration from the DIGSI functions
library. The letter at the end of the function name describes the method of measurement.
Redundant solutions can be implemented by combining 2 different methods of frequency measurement. You
can implement a 2-out-of-2 decision by connecting the operate indications of both functions in a CFC with a
logical AND gate. This increases the reliability of protection.
Frequency-Measurement Description
Method
Angle difference method (func- Select this method of measurement if the frequency protection stage is
tional configuration A) used for the protection of machines.
Filtering method (functional Select this method of measurement if the frequency protection stage is
configuration B) used in an electrical power system.
Parameter: Threshold
The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the overfrequency protection stage in
dependence of the application. 50,20 Hz is a typical warning threshold in 50-Hz systems.
890 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Overfrequency Protection
Due to the high-precision frequency measurement, the recommended setting value for theDropout
differential can remain at 20 mHz. If in your application you wish a subsequent dropout of the tripping
stage, then increase the setting value of the dropout differential. For instance, if the pickup value (parameter
Threshold) of the tripping stage is set to 50,20 Hz and the Dropout differential to 100 mHz, the
stage will drop out at 50,10 Hz.
i
NOTE
This table shows one example of a possible frequency protection setting. The setting values can differ
depending on the application.
6.35.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 891
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Overfrequency Protection
892 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.36 Underfrequency Protection
• Disconnect generating units when the power system frequency is critical (for example, f < 0.95 frated)
Frequency deviations are caused by an unbalance between the active power generated and consumed.
Underfrequency is caused by an increase of the consumers' active power demand or by a decrease of the
power generated. These conditions occur in the case of power system disconnection, generator failure, or
disturbances of the power and frequency controller.
Underfrequency protection is available in 2 functional configurations (selectable from the DIGSI functions
library). The functional configurations differ in the frequency measurement method they use.
[dwstufqp-090211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 893
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.36 Underfrequency Protection
[lostufqp-040411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Frequency-Measurement Method
Underfrequency protection is available in 2 functional configurations. These work with different frequency-
measurement methods. You select the frequency-measurement method in dependence of the application.
• Angle-difference method (configuration A):
The angle-difference method determines the phasor of the positive-sequence voltage in multiphase
systems. In the case of 1-phase connection, it always processes the phasor of the connected voltage.
Since the change of angle of the voltage phasor over a given time interval is proportional to the
frequency change, the current frequency can be derived from it.
894 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.36 Underfrequency Protection
Both methods of measurement are characterized by a high measuring accuracy combined with a short
response time. Disturbance values such as harmonics, high frequency disturbances, phase-angle jumps
during switching operations and compensation processes due to power swings are effectively suppressed.
Parameter: Threshold
The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the underfrequency protection stage in
dependence of the application. 49.8 Hz is a typical warning threshold in 50-Hz systems.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 895
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.36 Underfrequency Protection
Due to the high-precision frequency measurement, the recommended setting value for theDropout
differential can remain at 20 mHz. If in your application you wish a subsequent dropout of the tripping
stage, then increase the setting value of the dropout differential. For instance, if the pickup value (parameter
Threshold) of the tripping stage is set to 49.8 Hz and the Dropout differential to 100 mHz, the stage
will drop out at 49.9 Hz.
Frequency Activity
49.80 Hz Alarm and activation of reserves following an established plan
49.00 Hz Undelayed disconnection of 10 % to 15 % of the power system load
48.70 Hz Undelayed disconnection of another 10 % to 15 % of the power system load
48.40 Hz 3. Load shedding stage Another 15 % to 20 % of the power system load is
disconnected.
47.50 Hz Power plants are decoupled from the electrical power system
For this application, 3 stages of the underfrequency protection are used. 2 of these stages are used for load
shedding. The following table shows a setting suggestion.
Stage Caused by Setting Values
at frated = 50 Hz at frated = 60 Hz Delay
f1< Warning 49.80 Hz 59.80 Hz 10,00 s
f2< 1. Load shedding 49.00 Hz 59.00 Hz 0,00 s
f3< 2. Load shedding 48.70 Hz 58.70 Hz 0,00 s
i
NOTE
This table shows one example of a possible frequency protection setting. The setting values can differ
depending on the application.
6.36.5 Settings
896 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.36 Underfrequency Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 897
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.36 Underfrequency Protection
898 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.37 Frequency-Change Protection
• Prevent the system from not secure states caused by unbalance between the generated and consumed
active power
• Network decoupling
• Load shedding
The function Rate of frequency change protection can be used in protection function groups containing a
3‑phase voltage measurement.
2 function block types are available:
• df/dt rising
• df/dt falling
The function Rate of frequency change protection is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 1 df/dt rising
stage and 1 df/dt falling stage. A maximum of 5 df/dt rising stages and 5 df/dt falling stages can operate
simultaneously within the function. Both of the function block types are similar in structure.
Undervoltage check and df/dt calculation are general functionalities and take place on the function level. All
stages use these general functionalities.
[dwdfdt01-160113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
6.37.3.1 Description
Logic
The following figure represents the logic of undervoltage check and df/dt calculation. It applies to all types of
stages.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 899
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.37 Frequency-Change Protection
[lodfdtgf-160113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Measurand
This function uses the frequency calculated via the angle difference algorithm.
For more information, refer to chapter 6.35.3 Overfrequency-Protection Stage .
The frequency difference is calculated over a settable time interval (default setting: 5 periods).
The ratio between the frequency difference and the time difference reflects the frequency change which can
be positive or negative.
Undervoltage Blocking
If the measuring voltage drops below the Minimum voltage, the Rate of frequency change protection is
blocked because precise frequency values cannot be calculated anymore.
900 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.37 Frequency-Change Protection
[lodfdtst-160113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
(1) For the stage type df/dt rising, the value df/dt rising is used.
Frequency Rising/Falling
The stage df/dt falling is used to detect frequency falling and the stage df/dt rising is used to detect
frequency rising.
Parameter: Threshold
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 901
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.37 Frequency-Change Protection
The following relations can be used as an example for estimation. They apply for the change rate at the
beginning of a frequency change (approximate 1 s).
Where:
frated Rated frequency
ΔP Active power change
ΔP = PConsumption - PGeneration
Srated Rated apparent power of the machines
H Inertia constant
EXAMPLE
frated = 50 Hz
H=3s
Case 1: ΔP/Srated = 0.12
Case 2: ΔP/Srated = 0.48
Case 1: df/dt = -1 Hz/s
Case 2: df/dt = -4 Hz/s
6.37.4.3 Settings
902 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.37 Frequency-Change Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 903
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.38 Phase-Rotation Supervision
[dwphrein-240211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• With the binary signal >Invert Phases you change over the phase sequence per measuring point.
The Inverted phases parameter available per measuring point is used to set which phases at the
measuring point must be swapped. The parameter can be found at each 3 phase measuring point.
The two mechanisms are explained separately below.
904 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.38 Phase-Rotation Supervision
[dwphrdrf-240211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The phase sequence of a system or a system section is defined when parameterizing via the Phase
sequence parameter. The setting parameter acts on all measuring points.
The operationally induced switchover between the phase sequence ABC and the phase sequence ACB is initi-
ated via the binary input >Invert Phases. This switches over the phase sequence simultaneously at all 3-
phase measuring points.
The following image shows a logic diagram for determining the current phase assignment and switchover.
The indications shown on the right show the present phase sequence. If the phase sequence is set via the
Phase sequence parameter to ABC, the activation of the binary input will result in a switchover to the phase
sequence ACB .
The switchover of the phase sequence is only authorized for a time at which no measured values are
pending. The switchover command must be present for at least 200 ms. The change of phase sequence is
only permissible when the machine is at standstill. If the current and voltage values of all 3-phase measuring
points are below 5 % of the nominal variable, this is recognized as machine standstill.
A renewed machine standstill must be detected for a resetting of the phase sequence to the set preferred
position.
[dwphrpsys1-151013, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 905
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.38 Phase-Rotation Supervision
The following example shows an application in a pumped storage plant. The switchover of the phase
sequence (change in rotational direction) realizes the transition there from generator operation to motor oper-
ation. Which conductors and measuring points are changed over depends on the conditions in the system.
[dwphrapp-240211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The example shows 2 differential protection devices (IED1 and IED2) and an impedance protection (IED3)
with the connected measuring points.
The phase sequence is insignificant for the differential protection of IED1, as the protected object is not
affected by the switchover option of the phase sequence.
The phase sequence is also relevant to the differential protection of IED2, as the protected object extends
beyond the switchover option.
The phase sequence is also relevant to the impedance protection (IED3). Depending on the switch position,
the voltage measured values 1 and the current measured values 3 have a different phase sequence.
The phase sequence of the system is set in the device via the Phase sequence parameter for generator
operation. The Inverted phases parameter is used to set which phase is swapped for the relevant meas-
uring point. The swap is communicated to the measuring point via the binary input signal >Invert Phases.
The changed phase sequence is then included for calculation of the measurands at the measuring point.
In accordance with Figure 6-347, the phase sequence is set to ABC. L1 is swapped with L3 in motor opera-
tion. The Inverted phases parameter must be set to AC for the current measured values 2 and current
measured values 3 measuring points. As a result, the phase conductor assignment for the differential protec-
tion IED2 and the impedance protection IED3 is correct. The positive-sequence and negative-sequence
current is calculated correctly.
The following logic diagram shows the principle for determining the present phase assignment and measured
variables with the example of currents.
The switchover of the phase sequence is only authorized for a time at which no measured values are
pending. The switchover command must be present for at least 200 ms. The change of phase sequence is
only permissible when the machine is at standstill. In doing so, the system checks for the measuring point to
be switched over whether the measured variables are below 5 % of the nominal variables. If the currents of
the measuring points current measured values 2 and current measured values 3 in the example fall below
5 % of their nominal variables, machine standstill is detected.
906 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.38 Phase-Rotation Supervision
[lophrgph-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 907
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.38 Phase-Rotation Supervision
6.38.5 Settings
908 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.39 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault
The Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault function serves for immediate tripping when switching onto
a fault.
The function does not have its own measurement and must be linked to another protection function with the
pickup (measurement).
The function Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault can be used in all protection function groups.The
function is preconfigured with a stage. A maximum of 2 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the
function. The stages have an identical structure.
[dwstrsto-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 909
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.39 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault
[logisotf-170312-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-350 Logic Diagram of the Stage Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault
Parameter: Configuration
910 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.39 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault
A specific protection stage is generally used. This can be one of the protection stages provided for the protec-
tion application, which itself trips with a delay. An additional protection stage with settings optimized for this
use case, for example, increased threshold value and blocking of self-tripping, can also be used.
6.39.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 911
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.40 Thermal Overload Protection
• Monitor the thermal state of motors, generators, transformers, overhead lines and cables
[dwtolpst-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
912 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.40 Thermal Overload Protection
[lopttrdi-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Thermal Replica
The protection function calculates the overtemperature from the phase currents on the basis of a thermal
single-body model according to the thermal differential equation with
[fodiffgl-310510-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 913
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.40 Thermal Overload Protection
[fonormie-310510-01.tif, 1, en_US]
At the same time, Irated, obj is the rated current of the assigned protected object side:
• In the case of transformers, the rated current of the winding to be protected, which the device calculates
from the set rated apparent power and rated voltage, is decisive.
• The uncontrolled winding forms the basis in the case of transformers with voltage control
• In the case of generators, motors and reactors, the rated current, which the device calculates from the
set rated apparent power and rated voltage, is decisive.
• In the case of lines, nodes and busbars, the rated current of the protected object is set directly
In a steady state, the solution to the thermal differential equation is an e-function whose asymptote repre-
sents the final overtemperature Θend. The time constant τth determines the rise. After reaching an initial adjust-
able overtemperature threshold Θwarn (Threshold thermal warn.), a warning indication is given.
If the overtemperature limit ΘOff (tripping overtemperature) is exceeded, an operate indication is immediately
issued and the equipment disconnected from the power supply. This threshold is specified at 100 % and
corresponds to the final temperature set at a flowing permissible continuous current (Imax).
Figure 6-353 shows the temperature rise at different overload currents and the supervision thresholds.
13The ambient temperature is not taken into account in this execution of the overload protection.
914 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.40 Thermal Overload Protection
[dwtempve-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-353 Temperature History for Different Overload Currents (K-factor = 1.1)
The overtemperature is calculated separately for each phase. The current overtemperature can be obtained
from the operational measured values. It is shown in percent. An indication of 100 % means that the thermal
threshold has been reached. The maximum overtemperature of the phases is regarded as the tripping
temperature. This means that the highest of the 3 phase currents is always assumed.
The analysis of the RMS values of the currents over a broad frequency band also includes the harmonic
components. These harmonic components contribute to the temperature rise of the equipment.
If the flowing current falls below an adjustable minimum current Imin cooling, the Cooling time
constant is activated.
Current Influence
The thermal replica based on the single-body model applies with limitations to high overcurrent situations
(short circuits, motor startup currents). To avoid an overfunction of the overload protection, the thermal replica
must be influenced for overcurrents (exceeding lthreshold). You can select between 2 strategies for this:
• Freezing of the thermal memory
• Limitation of the input current for the thermal replica to the set current. The temperature rise is thereby
retarded at high currents.
Warning Thresholds
The thermal warning threshold issues a warning indication before the tripping threshold (tripping temperature)
is reached. In this way, for example, a load can be reduced in sufficient time and a disconnection avoided. At
a normal K-factor of 1.1 a thermal memory value of 83 % sets in at continuously flowing rated current.
Apart from the thermal warning threshold, the overload protection also has a current-warning threshold. This
current-warning threshold can signal an overload current in sufficient time before the overtemperature value
has reached the warning or tripping threshold.
Dropout of Tripping
Once the thermal memory has fallen below the setting value of the Dropout threshold operate, the trip
command is cancelled upon tripping. In contrast, the current-warning threshold and the thermal warning
threshold are reduced at a fixed dropout threshold (see technical data).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 915
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.40 Thermal Overload Protection
Emergency Start
Depending on the operating conditions, tripping can be blocked or closure enabled despite the permissible
thermal limits being exceeded. Upon activation of the binary input signal >Emergency start, tripping is
blocked and closure enabled. This does not affect the state of the thermal memory. After the input >Emer-
gency start disappears, the blocking remains in effect for the set Emerg. start T overtravel.
Blocking Closure
The signal Block close can be used to prevent closure of the protected object at a high thermal load. The
signal is set if the tripping overtemperature is exceeded, and cancelled if the temperature falls below the
dropout threshold.
916 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.40 Thermal Overload Protection
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Threshold current warning= 1,1 A for lrated = 1 A
Set the threshold to the maximum permissible continuous current (Imax, perm). This results in the same setting
value as for K-factor.
[fowarnsc-100810-01.tif, 1, en_US]
At a K-factor of 1.05, the thermal memory for rated current is 91% filled. Increase the Threshold
thermal warn. to 95%.
Parameter: K-factor
[fotolpkf-100810-01.tif, 1, en_US]
i
NOTE
The thermally permissible continuous current for the protected object is known from relevant tables or from
the manufacturer's specifications!
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 917
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.40 Thermal Overload Protection
In the case of cables, the permissible continuous current depends on the cross-section, insulation material,
design type, and the manner in which the cables have been laid. In the case of overhead lines, an overload of
10 % is permissible.
EXAMPLE
For the Permissible Continuous Current
Cross-linked polyethylene cables (N2XS2Y): 10 kV 150 mm2 (Cu)
Current-carrying capacity (underground laying): Imax, perm = 406 A
Selected K factor of 1.1
This yields a rated current of Irated, obj= 369 A
• Recommended setting value (_:110) Thermal time constant = 2777 s (46.29 min)
The Thermal time constant parameter is used to define the tripping characteristics of the stage. If no
data on Thermal time constant is available, you can determine this from the short-time current-rating
capacity of the cable, for example, from the 1-s current. The 1-s current is the maximum current permissible
for 1 s application time. The 1-s current can be found in the cable specifications. Calculate the Thermal
time constant according to the following formula:
[fodauers-170309-07.tif, 1, en_US]
If the short-time current-rating capacity is specified for an application time other than 1 s, use the short-time
current instead of the 1-s current. Multiply the result by the specified application time.
For a given short-time current-carrying capacity of 0.5 s, use the following formula:
[fodauers-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fokonsta-310510-01.tif, 1, en_US]
918 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.40 Thermal Overload Protection
The Imax thermal parameter allows you to set the threshold current for the Behav. at I> Imax
therm. parameter. The selected threshold current of 2.5 Irated, obj is a practicable value.
• Recommended setting value (_:114) Behav. at I> Imax therm. = freeze therm. rep.
The Behav. at I> Imax therm. parameter is used to select the process by which the function reacts to
short-circuit currents. To prevent premature tripping of the overload protection at low time constants, high
preloading and high short-circuit currents, the thermal replica can be modified.
The default setting has been selected to be compatible with SIPROTEC 4 devices. If you wish to take further
temperature rise into consideration, the current limiting procedure is recommended.
Parameter value Description
freeze therm. rep. If input currents exceed the Imax thermal parameter, the thermal replica will
be frozen for the time the parameter is exceeded. This parameter value is
provided to enable compatibility with older products!
current limiting The input currents are limited to the value set in the Imax thermal param-
eter. If the measured current exceeds the set current value, the limited current
value is supplied to the thermal replica. An advisable current threshold is
approx. 2 to 2.5 Irated, obj.
6.40.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 919
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.40 Thermal Overload Protection
920 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.41 Temperature Supervision
• Generators
• Transformers
In rotating machines, it also checks bearing temperatures for a limit violation.
The temperatures are measured at various locations of the protected object using temperature sensors (RTD
= Resistance Temperature Detector) and are sent to the device via one or more RTD units.
The Temperature supervision function receives its measured temperature values via the RTD unit Ether.
or Serial RTD unit functions from the Analog units function group.
The Temperature supervision function can work in all protection function groups. A maximum of 48 tempera-
ture supervision locations can operate simultaneously in the Temperature supervision function function.
Each temperature supervision location has 2 threshold stages.
[dwstrtmp-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 921
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.41 Temperature Supervision
[lotmpsup-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The Temperature supervision location function block (Location FB) receives a measured temperature
value in °C or °F as an input variable delivered from the temperature sensor function blocks of the Analog
units function group. The Sensor number parameter is used to select the temperature sensor.
2 threshold value decisions can be performed for each measuring point. If the measured temperature value is
greater than or equal to the set threshold values, the stages generate a pickup indication independent of one
another and, after a set tripping time delay, an operate indication.
The indications from the supervision locations remain available for further processing.
i
NOTE
The pickup of the stages does not result in fault logging. The operate indications of the stages do not go
into the trip logic of the device.
922 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.41 Temperature Supervision
Temperature Unit
To change the display and evaluation of measured temperature values from °C to °F, adapt the DIGSI user
default settings accordingly (see 5.6.6.5 Temperature Sensor ).
6.41.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 923
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.41 Temperature Supervision
924 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.41 Temperature Supervision
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 925
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.41 Temperature Supervision
926 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.41 Temperature Supervision
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 927
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.41 Temperature Supervision
928 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.42 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
The Circuit-breaker failure protection function (ANSI 50BF) monitors the tripping of the associated circuit-
breaker (CB) and generates a backup trip signal if the circuit-breaker fails.
The function Circuit-breaker failure protection (CBFP) can be used in the Circuit-breaker function group.
[dwstrbfp-260213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-357 shows the functionalities and the function control of the function.
The start is initiated by the device-internal protection function or by an external protection. Along with the
start, the current-flow criterion or the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion is used to check whether the
circuit breaker is closed. If the circuit breaker is closed, the function picks up and starts the time delay. During
the time delay, the system checks continuously whether the circuit breaker has opened. If this is the case, the
function drops out. If the circuit breaker is not opened, the function trips upon expiration of the time delay.
The following description elaborates on the detailed functionality of the individual function blocks.
[losvsbfp-090712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 929
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.42 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
Internal Start
By default, each device-internal protection stage, which has to control the local circuit breaker starts the
circuit-breaker failure protection. The function is started by the tripping of the protection stage. In the default
setting, the starting signal Internal start (see Figure 6-358) is held when the pickup signal has a falling
edge or the protection function has tripped. The Circuit-breaker failure protection function can in this case
only dropout if the circuit breaker is detected to be open. This is detected using the current flow or circuit-
breaker auxiliary contact criterion. If necessary, the Circuit-breaker failure protection function can also
dropout when the pickup signal has a falling edge or the protection function trips (internal starting signal is not
held).
Where required, individual protection stages or protection functions can be routed so that they are excluded
as starting source. If all device-internal starting sources are excluded in this manner, the start must be initi-
ated externally.
Routing of the internal starting sources takes place in the protection function groups via the Circuit breaker
interaction entry (for this see 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device , Figure 2-6).
[loanwint-160611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
External Start
The parameter Start via binary input is used to set whether the external start is initiated by a 1-
channel or 2-channel signal. The required routing of the input signals is compared with the setting. If a routing
is missing, an error message is generated. The Health signal changes to the state Warning.
930 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.42 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
[loanwext-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-359 Configuration of the External Start of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function
In 1-channel mode, the start is initiated with the binary input signal >Start only.
In 2-channel operation, the binary input signal >Release must also be activated to initiate the start. In the
default setting, the starting signal External start drops out immediately when the input signals have a
falling edge (see Figure 6-360). If necessary, the starting signal can be held. In this case the start remains
active when the binary input signals have a falling edge.
The input signals are monitored to avoid an unwanted pickup of the function.
• Static supervision (see Figure 6-360):
If either of the signals >Start or >Release is active for more than 15 s without activation of the func-
tion, an error in the binary input circuit is assumed. The corresponding signal is blocked to exclude an
external pickup of the function. An indication to this effect is output, and the ready signal changes to the
state Warning. The blocking is reset as soon as the binary input signal drops out.
This static supervision is disabled in the following cases:
a) On pickup of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function (only in the case of an external start).
This prevents an unwanted pickup of the supervision if the external protection that starts the Circuit-
breaker failure protection function uses a lockout functionality. When the starting signal drops out, the
supervision is enabled again.
b) As long as the function (or the device) is in test mode. This allows to check the function without the
supervision blocking the function.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 931
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.42 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
[logikext-070611-02.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-360 External Start of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function, Logic
Current-Flow Criterion
The current-flow criterion is the primary criterion for determining the circuit-breaker position. A circuit-breaker
pole is supposed to be closed, and the current-flow criterion fulfilled, as soon as one of the phase currents
exceeds the phase-current threshold value, and at the same time a plausibilization current exceeds the asso-
ciated threshold value. The plausibilization current can be a second phase current (to compare with the
threshold value for phase currents) or the zero-sequence or negative-sequence current (to compare with the
threshold value for ground currents). The additional evaluation of a plausibilization current increases the
safety of a criterium.
In the case of ground faults, the ground-current threshold value can be dynamically applied to the phase
currents as well. The current-flow criterion is in this case fulfilled when the currents exceed the ground-current
threshold value. The phase-current threshold value is then ineffective. The binary signal is used for the
switchover >Thresh. ground curr..
The measuring algorithm is optimized for fast dropout when the value drops below the threshold value.
932 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.42 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
[lostrom1-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[lokriter-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Pickup/Dropout
After the start, a check is performed whether the circuit breaker is closed. The current-flow criterion and the
circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion are available for this purpose.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 933
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.42 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
Even if the circuit-breaker auxiliary criterion is permitted, preference is given to the fulfilled current-flow crite-
rion because the current-flow criterion is the most reliable criterion for determining whether the circuit breaker
is closed. This means that the circuit breaker is deemed to be closed if it is closed according to the current-
flow criterion but at the same time open according to the circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion.
If no current is flowing at the moment of start, the function can be activated only on the basis of the circuit-
breaker auxiliary-contact criterion. For this purpose, the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts must be permitted
as criterion. When the current begins to flow after the start, the function switches over to the current-flow
criterion.
If the circuit breaker is detected to be closed, the function picks up.
The pickup starts a time delay (see Delay/Tripping). While the delay is running, the system checks continu-
ously whether the circuit breaker has opened. In the default setting, the opening of the circuit breaker is
checked on the basis of the currently valid criterion, which is normally the current-flow criterion because it is
preferred. If until expiration of the time delay, no current flow above the set threshold values has been
detected, the circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion becomes effective.
The function has also a setting in which dropout is only possible if both criteria in parallel detect the circuit
breaker to be open (dropout with auxiliary contact and current-flow criterion).
In the default setting, the internal starting signal is held (see Figure 6-358 and Figure 6-360). This means that
dropout is controlled solely by the switch or circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion. If dropout is also to
occur on the falling edge of the starting signal (that is, when the pickup signal has a falling edge or the protec-
tion function trips), holding of the start signal must be disabled.
[loanreg1-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Delay/Tripping
In a first step, tripping at the local circuit breaker can be repeated. Tripping is repeated after expiration of the
settable delay T1.
Time delay T2 (backup tripping) can commence in parallel either with the start of time T1 or after expiration of
time T1.
If time delay T2 expires without a dropout of the function, a circuit-breaker failure is assumed and the backup
tripping signal Tripping T2 is output. If there is a protection interface in the device, if needed a transfer-trip
signal can be sent to the opposite end.
You can find detailed information in the section Protection Interface.
If the >CB defect input signal is valid, any repetition of the trip signal is suppressed, and the backup tripping
signal T2 is generated immediately (without delay). The binary input of the >CB defect input signal must be
activated for at least 20 ms before the signal becomes valid.
934 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.42 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
The Minimum operate time parameter defines the minimum duration for tripping the function. In contrast
to other protection functions, the parameter is set within its own function. As a result, the setting is inde-
pendent of the identically named comprehensive parameter that is set in the Device settings.
[loverza1-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-365 gives an overview of the functions involved in an external start of the CBFP function. In the case
of an internal start, there is no external protection device and the protection functionality is located in the
CBFP device.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 935
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.42 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
[loextpol-021112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-365 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection with External Start, Tripping Repetition and 3-Pole Tripping
(T2)
936 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.42 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
EXAMPLE
Holding internal start signal (setting value: yes):
In the event of a 2-pole fault, only one contact of the CB opens. The fault current is thus reduced, and the
starting phase short-circuit protection drops out.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 937
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.42 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
EXAMPLE
Holding external starting signal (setting value: yes):
The function is started from the opposite end via an auxiliary device for command transmission. This device
generates only a signal pulse.
i
NOTE
Siemens would like to point out that, with a hold signal, the CBFP generates a trip signal each time a
starting pulse is received and the current flow is high enough. Remember this particularly in the case of an
external start.
• Recommended setting value (_:102) Threshold phase current = approx. 0.50 Isc, min
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Threshold ground current = approx. 0.50 Isc, min
In order to ensure that the disconnection of the fault is promptly detected and the function can drop out
quickly, Siemens recommends setting both thresholds to half the minimum short-circuit current (Isc,min).
If - depending on the neutral-point treatment and/or load conditions - ground faults lead to relatively low fault
currents, a sensitive setting of the parameter Threshold ground current must be selected according to
the rule (0.5 lk, min). There may also be values which are noticeably below the rated or load current.
EXAMPLES
Applications which require you to permit the circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion:
938 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.42 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
• Tripping of the high and low-voltage side CB on the transformer. If only one of the 2 CBs trips, there is
no more current flow.
• Tripping of protection functions whose tripping decision is not based on current measurement, in combi-
nation with low-load situations.
Parameter: Dropout
Parameter: Retrip
• With a small time delay of, for instance, 50 ms, the defect of the 1st trip circuit can be detected based on
the analysis of the fault record.
• With a long time delay which reliably ensures the dropout of the CBFP with the CB open, the rising edge
indication of the trip repeat Retrip T1 is a sure signal for a fault in the 1st trip circuit. The following
example shows how this time is determined.
EXAMPLE
Determining the T1 Time that Reliably Ensures the Dropout of the CBFP with the CB Open:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 939
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.42 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
EXAMPLE
Determining the T2 Time that Reliably Ensures the Dropout of the CBFP with the CB Open:
Time of binary device output 5 ms
(when tripping is caused by device-internal
protection)
CB inherent time up to power interruption 2 periods (assumed rated frequency = 50 Hz)
Dropout time of CBFP function 1 period
Subtotal 65 ms
Safety Factor 2
Total (time T2) 130 ms
If T1 and T2 are started in parallel, take into account the time T1 for the setting of T2.
EXAMPLE
Simultaneous start of T2 and T1
Time for a reliable dropout after the local CB has 130 ms
opened
Setting of T1 50 ms
Total (= T2) 180 ms
940 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.42 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
! CAUTION
Do not set a time that is too short.
If you set a time that is too short, there is a danger (dropout of the function without the current-
flow criterion) that the device contacts will interrupt the control circuit. If this happens, the device
contacts will burn out.
² Set a duration that is long enough to ensure that the circuit breaker reliably reaches its final position
(open) after a control operation.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 941
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Out-of-Step Protection
• Suitable for integration into more complex automatic operations for power system monitoring and
disconnection
• Serves as a basic function for the protection of larger power plant units
• Used in the protection of power systems for selective disconnection in case of power swings
[dwoosstr-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
942 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Out-of-Step Protection
[dwmodlpe-230211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Measuring point m divides the total impedance into 2 impedances m· Ztotal and (1-m)· Ztotal. The following
details apply to the impedance at a measuring point m:
[foimpdnz-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fostroms-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fospanng-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In combination with
[foumesor-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fozmesrt-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Angle δ is the angle between the generator voltage and the power system voltage. In normal operation, this
angle depends on the load profile and is relatively constant. In contrast, in the event of an out-of-step condi-
tion, the angle changes continuously and passes through all values between 0° and 360°. Figure 6-368 zeigt
den Impedanzverlauf an der Messstelle m nach oben genannter Gleichung. The point of origin corresponds
to the point where the protection device is built in (measuring point of the voltage-transformer substitute).
Assuming a constant ratio between UN/UG and a variable angle δ, the locus diagram is a set of circles. The
center and the radius are specified through the ratio VNet/VG. All centers of the circles are located on one axis
specified by the direction of Ztotal. The maximum and minimum impedance values are the result for the 2
extreme values δ = 0° and δ = 180°. If the measuring point coincides directly with the electrical center of the
system, the measured voltage and thus the operating impedance result in 0 at an angle δ = 180°.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 943
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Out-of-Step Protection
[dwzverla-230211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
944 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Out-of-Step Protection
[lo0imped-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-369 Impedance Measurement and Monitoring of the Positive and Negative Sequenced of the
Currents
i
NOTE
If the impedance phasor enters through the straight lines, which can be set using the parameters Zone
limit X top or Zone limit X bottom, the power swing direction is not determined. Since the direc-
tion determination is coordinated with parameter setting Count at, the above limitation applies only to the
setting entry, entry left and entry right.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 945
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Out-of-Step Protection
[loostzon-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
946 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Out-of-Step Protection
[dwzonein-230211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Power-Swing Counter
Passing though the impedance zone is the criterion for incrementing the power swing counter. Use the
parameter setting (Count at) to define when the counter is incremented. Depending on the application,
there are different selection options available for this parameter. For machine protection applications, you
only see 3 selection options without direction dependency.
entry The counter is incremented upon entry into the zone.
entry left The counter is incremented upon entry into the zone from the left.
entry right The counter is incremented upon entry into the zone from the right.
axis The counter is incremented upon crossing the middle ordinate of the zone.
axis from left The counter is incremented upon crossing the middle ordinate of the zone from the
axis from right left.
The counter is incremented upon crossing the middle ordinate of the zone from the
right.
exit The counter is incremented upon exit of the zone.
exit left The counter is incremented upon exiting the zone from the left.
exit right The counter is incremented upon exiting the zone from the right.
In all cases, the impedance phasor must first have crossed the entry line and the
middle ordinate.
Figure 6-372 shows how counting is done for the different trajectories of the impedance phasor. 2 zones are
shown as an example. Each zone has a counter of its own.
4 cases are shown:
Case A: The counter for zone 1 is incremented only if entry or entry right is set for zone 1.
Case B: The counter is incremented for zone 1. The time at which the increment takes place depends on the
settings (entry, entry right, axis, axis from right, exit, exit left).
Case C: The counter for zone 2 is incremented only if entry or entry right is set for zone 2. The counter
is incremented for zone 1. The time at which the increment takes place depends on the settings (entry,
entry right, axis, axis from right, exit, exit left).
Case D: The counter for zone 1 is incremented only if entry or entry right is set for zone 1. The counter
is incremented for zone 2. The time at which the increment takes place depends on the settings (entry,
entry left, axis, axis from left, exit, exit right).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 947
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Out-of-Step Protection
[dwerhzae-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-372 Incrementing the Power Swing Counter for Different Impedance Phasor Trajectories
The protection setting is exemplified by a power-system configuration. If a power swing occurs in the power
system, the out-of-step protection must separate the power system into islands. Each system island must be
able to establish a stable operating state. Although a certain amount of load shedding must be taken into
account, the aim is to minimize power loss. Figure 6-373 shows the power-system configuration used in the
example.
[dwbspnet-210211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
948 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Out-of-Step Protection
If an asynchronous swing condition occurs, the out-of-step protection function separates the 2 systems A and
C from each other. To allow the subnetwork with power reserve to remain connected to the busbar (and the
local load), either the lines A1 and A2 or the lines C1 and C2 must be disconnected from the busbar,
depending on the direction of the impedance curve. This ensures that the infeeding side remains connected
with the busbar and the local load.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 949
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Out-of-Step Protection
[dwvorimp-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
To determine the source impedances as seen from relay A, Figure 6-374 is simplified as follows for the state
= line A2 open (zone 2 active):
950 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Out-of-Step Protection
[dwvrimp2-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-375 Calculation of Source Impedances with Open Line A2 (Zone 2 Active)
The impedances of lines C1 and C2 and of infeed C are combined in Figure 6-375. Only one of the two lines
is used for calculation in the case of a weak infeed (10 Ω); both are used in parallel for a strong infeed (5 Ω).
Since the values for zone 2 are calculated with line A2 open here, simply add the impedance in the direction
of power system A for strong infeed to the line impedance of 10 Ω and 25 Ω for weak infeed. The results for
zone 2 are entered in Table 6-15.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 951
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Out-of-Step Protection
[dwvorim1-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-376 Calculation of Source Impedances with Closed Line A2 (Zone 1 Active)
When line A2 is in operation, the current is split between lines A1 and A2. The impedance seen from Relay A
is therefore doubled at the infeeds. Figure 6-376 shows the relevant values for strong and week infeed. The
impedances for zone 1 are entered in Table 6-15. Zone 1 is effective when line A2 is active.
Table 6-15 Extreme Conditions: Extreme Conditions: Impedance, Seen from Relay A
The condition in which both sides provide a weak or strong source is not relevant for the determination of the
outermost ends of the electrical center.
If one end shows a maximum source impedance and the other a minimum one, you obtain the outermost end
of the electrical center. Use the following equation for calculation (shown for relay A):
[foeztrum-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
952 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Out-of-Step Protection
The results must be calculated separately for zone 2 and zone 1 according to the open or closed switch posi-
tions of infeed B. Table 6-16 shows the electrical center, as seen from relay A.
If the 2 sources have different voltage levels, the swing impedance differs from the electrical center. This fact
must be considered when determining the outermost ends of the electrical center:
[fodvitio-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Ztotal / Ωsecondary Activated Zone Line A2 Electrical Deviation with Outerend of the
in Relay A Center (Seen a Voltage Level Electrical
from Relay A) / Difference of 10 Center / Ωsecon-
Ωsecondary % / Ωsecondary
dary
Figure 6-377 shows the outer ends of the electrical center for relay A, zone 2 (line A2 is open), including the
possible swing impedance location.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 953
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Out-of-Step Protection
[dwimpelo-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-377 Swing Impedance Locations and Outer Ends of the Electrical Center for Relay A (Line A2 is
Open)
To ensure that the power swing zone in Figure 6-377 covers the power swing trajectories, the upper and
lower zone limits X are calculated as shown in the following formula. The calculated values reliably cover the
determined outermost electrical centers in Table 6-17. The safety clearance is half the distance between the
determined centers. Depending on the application, another formula can be used to satisfy the requirements
placed on the geometry of the zone:
[foznengr-310111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Table 6-18 shows the zone limit X setting for relay A based on this formula.
Activated Zone Line A2 Most Extreme Most Extreme Upper Zone Lower Zone
in Relay A Electrical Electrical Limit X Limit X
Center, 1st Center, 3rd
Quadrant Quadrant
Zone 1 active 47 Ω -16 Ω 78.5 Ω -47.5 Ω
Zone 2 Open 26.25 Ω -5.75 Ω 42.25 Ω -21.75 Ω
To determine the Zone limit R, the out-of-step tripping mode must be considered:
954 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Out-of-Step Protection
• If an out-of-step tripping on entry occurs, the R setting must equal the smallest value which occurs when
the swing reaches the transient stability limit angle.
• The R setting is less critical if the out-of-step condition trips when the axis of symmetry is exceeded. It
can be set to the 0.9-fold minimum stable load impedance or to the 0.25-fold distance between the
values of zone limit X. Note that the circuit breaker is exposed to a very strong recovery voltage after
switching.
• If an out-of-step tripping on exit occurs, the R setting depends on how long the trip command is to be
present after the axis of symmetry has been exceeded (180°-condition). The calculation of the R setting
can be based on the currently set swing locus angle.
In the example, tripping is to occur when the zone is entered. Therefore, you have to calculate the R setting
using the transient stability limit angle δ. Based on the maximum transmission angle under stable operating
conditions, the transient stability limit angle is calculated as follows:
Transient stability angle = 180 - maximum transmission angle.
A maximum transmission angle of 60° can be assumed in most cases. The result is a transient stability limit δ
of 120°.
To ensure that the R setting is not too high, it must be determined on the basis of the minimum source impe-
dances. The minimum source impedances (with closed/open line A2) or relay A are shown in Table 6-19.
[dwreinst-210211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-378 Calculation of the R Setting with Minimum Source Impedances (Line A2 Active, Zone 1)
[forfmel1-310111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 955
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Out-of-Step Protection
[dwenergc-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-379 Direction of the Swing Impedance Locus with Energy Transfer from Power System C to
Power System A
956 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Out-of-Step Protection
[dwenerga-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-380 Direction of the Swing Impedance Locus with Energy Transfer from Power System A to Power
System C
In Figure 6-380, the energy flows in the opposite direction. Out-of-step tripping must take place at lines C1
and C2. In this case, power system A remains connected to the local load of the busbar.
6.43.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 957
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Out-of-Step Protection
958 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Out-of-Step Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 959
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.44 Inrush-Current Detection
[dwirsh01-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
960 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.44 Inrush-Current Detection
[loinru02-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Harmonic Analysis
For this method of measurement, the content of the 2nd harmonic and the fundamental component (1st
harmonic) are determined for each of the phase currents IA, IB, and IC and the quotient I2nd harm / I1st harm is
formed from this. If this quotient exceeds the set threshold value, a phase-selective signal is issued. For the
residual current, the quotient will also be monitored. Depending on the connection, the residual current can
be measured (lN) or calculated (3l0).
If 95 % of the set threshold value is exceeded, this leads to a pickup reset (dropout ratio = 0.95).
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the harmonic analysis.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 961
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.44 Inrush-Current Detection
[loinru04-240211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[dwinru03-240211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the CWA method.
From the present fundamental-component current (1st harmonic), the threshold value for identification of the
flat areas is derived via an internal factor.
962 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.44 Inrush-Current Detection
[loinru05-240211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 963
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.44 Inrush-Current Detection
[loinru06-240211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
964 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.44 Inrush-Current Detection
i
NOTE
Make sure that at least one process is activated. Siemens recommends retaining the advised setting
values.
Parameter: Cross-blocking
6.44.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 965
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.44 Inrush-Current Detection
966 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 3-Phase Power Protection
• Detect both active and reactive power feedback in the power systems or on electric machines
• Detect machines (motors, generators) running without load and output an indication to shut them down.
• Be integrated into any automation solution, for example, to monitor very specific power limits (further
logical processing in CFC)
• Power P< 1
• Power Q< 1
A maximum of 4 active power stages and 4 reactive power stages can be operated simultaneously in the
function. The tripping stages have an identical structure.
[dwstpq3p-110211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 967
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 3-Phase Power Protection
[loausmel-050411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[lop3phas-040411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-389 Logic Diagram of the Active Power Stage (Stage Type: Power P<)
Measured Value
The Measured value parameter is used to specify which measured power value is analyzed by the tripping
stage. Possible settings are positive seq. power and the phase-selective powers power of phase A,
power of phase B or power of phase C.
Pickup Characteristic
With the stage type you specify if the stage work as a greater stage (stage type: Power P> 1) or as a
smaller stage (stage type: Power P< 1).
968 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 3-Phase Power Protection
The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the stage. The Tilt power charac-
teristic parameter is used to define the tilt of the pickup characteristic. The figure below shows the defini-
tion of the signs.
[dwdvzpgr-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Pickup
The stage compares the selected power value with the set Threshold. Depending on the stage type (Power
P> 1 or Power P< 1) being above or falling below the threshold value will lead to a pickup.
Dropout Delay
A delay can be set for the dropout when the measured value falls below the dropout threshold. The pickup is
maintained for the specified time. The time delay of the tripping (parameter Operate delay) continues to
run. Once the Operate delay has elapsed, the stage trips.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 969
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 3-Phase Power Protection
[loq3phas-040411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-391 Logic Diagram of the Reactive Power Stage (Stage Type: Power Q<)
Measured Value
The Measured value parameter is used to specify which measured power value is processed by the trip-
ping stage. Possible settings are positive seq. power and the phase-selective powers power of
phase A, power of phase B or power of phase C.
Pickup Characteristic
With the stage type you specify if the stage work as a greater stage (stage type: Power Q> 1) or as a
smaller stage (stage type: Power Q< 1).
The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the stage. The Tilt power charac-
teristic parameter is used to define the tilt of the pickup characteristic. The figure below shows the defini-
tion of the signs.
970 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 3-Phase Power Protection
[dwdvzqgr-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Pickup
The stage compares the selected power value with the set Threshold. Depending on the stage type (Power
Q> 1 or Power Q< 1) being above or falling below the threshold value will lead to a pickup.
Dropout Delay
A delay can be set for the dropout when the measured value falls below the dropout threshold. The pickup is
maintained for the specified time. The time delay of the tripping (parameter Operate delay) continues to
run. Once the Operate delay has elapsed, the stage trips.
The setting of the function will be explained using an active/reactive power range as an example. If the appa-
rent power phasor is within the power range (in Figure 6-393 tripping zone defined by characteristics), a
failure indication is output. For this purpose, you have to make an AND operation of the stage indications of
the active and reactive power stage in CFC. The function used is 3-phase power measurement. Figure 6-393
shows the threshold values and the location of the characteristics in the PQ diagram.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 971
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 3-Phase Power Protection
[dwpqd7sa-110211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Stage Type
In the following example, a drop of the active power below a threshold is to be monitored. In the 3-pole
circuit breaker (P, Q) function, work with the stage type Power P< 1.
Parameter: Threshold
972 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 3-Phase Power Protection
Parameter: Threshold
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 973
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 3-Phase Power Protection
6.45.11 Settings
974 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 3-Phase Power Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 975
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 3-Phase Power Protection
976 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.46 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
The Undervoltage-controlled reactive-power protection function can be used in protection function groups
containing 3-phase voltage and current measurement. Depending on the device, it is preconfigured by the
manufacturer with 1 Protection stage and 1 Reclosure stage. A maximum of 2 Protection stages and 1
Reclosure stage can operate simultaneously within the function.
[dwqvprot-110713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 977
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.46 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
[loqvprst-110713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-395 Logic Diagram of the Protection Stage of the Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power
Protection
978 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.46 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
Measurand
To detect critical power-system situations, the Undervoltage-controlled reactive-power protection function
uses the fundamental values of the phase-to-phase voltages, the positive-sequence current, and the reactive
power.
Q-Measurement Direction
The default directions of the positive reactive-power flow Q and the forward direction of the short-circuit
protection are identical, in the direction of the protected object. Via parameter Q sign, the direction of the
positive reactive-power flow Q can be changed by inverting the sign of the reactive power Q.
Pickup
The protection stage picks up under the following conditions:
• All 3 phase-to-phase voltages are below the parameterized threshold value.
• The positive-sequence current I1 is above the parameterized threshold value.
• The power-generation facility requires more than the parameterized reactive power (Q is above the
parameterized threshold value).
Trip Interface
The stage provides 2 operate signals, the Operate (generator) and the Operate (grid). Depending
on the parameter Trip interface contains, one or none of them will be forwarded to the trip interface
of the circuit-breaker interaction.
Blocking of the Operate Delay and Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter permits you to define whether the operate delay should
be blocked by a threshod-value violation due to an inrush current.
For further information about device-internal Inrush-current detection function, refer to chapter
6.13.6.1 Description .
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 979
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.46 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
EXAMPLE
The following example is given for settings in secondary values.
Rated voltage: Vrated, sec = 100 V
Rated current: Irated, sec = 1 A
Threshold value: 5 % of the power-supply system rated power
You can calculate the setting value as follows:
[foqvprot-110713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
980 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.46 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
Parameter: Q sign
6.46.3.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 981
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.46 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
982 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.46 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
[loqvclst-110713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Measurand
The stage works with fundamental values of voltage and current.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 983
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.46 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
• The reclosure time delay, started by the operate of specific protection functions, has elapsed. The time
delay is started by the first operate signal of the protection stages configured via the Configuration
parameter. All protection stages of the voltage protection, the frequency protection, and the QV protec-
tion are available for configuration.
Parameter: Configuration
• Overvoltage protection
• Undervoltage protection
984 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.46 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
You use these 2 parameters to define the admitted frequency deviation from the rated frequency. f
difference positive defines the upper frequency range limit. f difference negative defines the
lower frequency range limit.
Siemens recommends using the default settings, which reflect common practice in Germany. Other national
transmission codes may require a slightly different range.
6.46.4.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 985
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Current-Jump Detection
[dwstruki-111026-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Current-jump detection operates directly with the sampled values without numeric filtering. This provides very
short response times to sudden changes in the current. The method used is not sensitive to slow changes of
amplitude or frequency.
Using a configurable selection of measured values, you can select from 3 line currents or the residual current.
Current-jump detection is phase-selective for the line current A, B and C.
The difference from the previous sampled value of the first line period is calculated for each sampled value.
The rectified average is then determined for a ½ line period from this differential signal Δi(t). The rectified
average for sinusoidal measurands is then converted to a RMS value ΔI by subsequent multiplication by 1.11.
The resultant measurand ΔI is then compared with the threshold value.
If the parameter (_:101) Threshold is exceeded, the output indication Jump is generated. If you have
selected the phase currents for measurement, the output indication data type used includes the separate
phase information. If you have selected the residual current for measurement, the output indication data type
used includes the NI information. If the current-jump detection responds (ΔILimit), the general information is
generated in the output indication in all cases.
Dropout occurs with a dynamically increased threshold value (ΔILimit) in accordance with the logic in
Figure 6-398. Dynamic increase of the dropout threshold value achieves optimally short dropout times.
The output indication Pulse is formed with the configurable timer (_:102) Minimum pulse length. As
a consequence this output indication has a consistent minimum size. If you activate the binary input >Pulse
extension, you can prolong the pulse duration even further. If the binary input >Pulse extension has
been activated, the indication Pulse drops off when the configured time has elapsed and the falling edge of
the binary input is detected.
986 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Current-Jump Detection
Logic
[lojumpii-271011-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Parameter: Threshold
• Default setting (_:101) Threshold = 0.10 A for Irated = 1A or 0.50 A for Irated = 5 A
With the parameter Threshold, you set the threshold value for the measurand which, when exceeded,
generates the output indication Jump.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 987
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Current-Jump Detection
6.47.5 Settings
988 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.48 Voltage-Jump Detection
[dwstruku-011211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 989
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.48 Voltage-Jump Detection
selectively for the individual measuring elements that have picked up (Pulse VAB, Pulse VBC or Pulse
VCA).
Logic
[lojumpuu-011211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
990 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Protection and Automation Functions
6.48 Voltage-Jump Detection
Parameter: Threshold
6.48.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 991
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
992 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
7 Control Functions
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 993
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.1 Overview
7.1 Overview
7.1.1 Overview
The SIPROTEC 5 series of devices offers powerful command processing capability as well as additional func-
tions that are needed when serving as bay controllers for the substation automation technology or when
providing combi-protection. The object model for the devices is based on the IEC 61850 standard, making the
SIPROTEC 5 series of devices ideally suited for use in systems employing the IEC 61850 communication
protocol. In view of the function blocks necessary for the control functions, other logs are also used.
The concept of so-called controllables is based on the data model described in IEC 61850. Controllables are
objects that can be controlled, such as a switch with feedback. The model of a transformer tap changer, for
example, contains controllables. The controllables are identifiable by their last letter C of the data type (for
example, DPC = Double Point Controllable/Double Command with feedback or BSC = Binary-Controlled Step
Position Indication / transformer tap command with feedback).
994 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.1 Overview
[lecontrl-241013, 1, en_US]
The trip, opening and the close commands are connected to the relays. For the trip command, a choice
between saved and unsaved output is possible. The position is connected with 2 binary inputs (double-point
indication). In addition, signals are available that display the current state of the switch (not selected, off, on,
intermediate position, disturbed position). These signals can be queried in CFC for example, in order to
build interlocking conditions.
Control Models
You can set the operating mode of the controllables by selecting the control model.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 995
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.1 Overview
[dwsteuer-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The figure shows the control models (right) with the respective control mechanisms (center). The standard
control model for a switching command in an IEC 61850 compliant system is SBO with feedback moni-
toring (SBO w. enh. security). This control model is the default setting for newly created switching
devices.
996 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
The following switching devices can be found in the DIGSI 5 library in the Circuit-breaker and Switching-
devices function groups (see the following images).
[sccbausw-130912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-2 Selecting the Circuit-Breaker Switching Device Using the DIGSI Circuit-Breaker Function
Group Menu
[scswausw-130912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-3 Selecting the Remaining Switching Devices Using the DIGSI Switching-Devices Menu
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 997
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
[dwbreake-220512-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The circuit breaker in DIGSI 5 is linked with the binary inputs that acquire the switch position via information
routing. The circuit breaker in DIGSI 5 is also linked with the binary outputs that issue the switching
commands.
The switching device Circuit breaker is available in the DIGSI 5 library in 3 different variants:
• 3-pole circuit breaker
This switching device contains additional base function blocks for protection functions (for example, trip
logic, Manual close, circuit-breaker test).
998 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
i
NOTE
When setting the parameters of a device, you will find 2 circuit-breaker types in the DIGSI 5 library:
- 3-pole circuit breaker or 1-pole circuit breaker, depending on the type of device selected (3-pole or 1-
pole tripping)
- Circuit breaker (status only)
The setting values of the parameter can be found in the chapter 7.2.2.2 Application and Setting Notes .
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 999
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
The inputs and outputs as well as the setting options of the Circuit breaker and Control function blocks are
described in the next section (see 7.2.2.3 Connection Variants of the Circuit Breaker ).
Interlocking
The Interlocking function block generates the releases for switchgear interlocking protection. The actual
interlocking conditions are deposited in CFC. For more information on this, see section 7.4.1 Command
Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection.
Circuit Breaker
The circuit breaker represents the physical switch in the SIPROTEC 5 device. The task of the circuit breaker
is to replicate the switch position from the status of the binary inputs.
The following figure shows the logical inputs and outputs of the Circuit-breaker function block.
1000 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
[dwfuncls-140212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-5 Logical Inputs and Outputs of the Circuit-Breaker Function Blocks
Table 7-3 and Table 7-4 list the inputs and outputs with a description of their function and type. For inputs, the
effect on Quality = invalid on the value of the signal is described.
EXAMPLE
If the signal >Ready accepts the Quality = invalid, then the value is set to going. In problematic operating
states, the circuit breaker should signal that it is not ready for an On/Off cycle.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1001
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
If the quality of the input signal assumes the status Quality = invalid, then the standby status (EHealth) of
the Circuit breaker functionality is set to Warning.
Other output signals of the circuit breaker function block can be found in the information table at the end of
the chapter.
Control
It is the task of the controls to execute command checks and establish communication between the command
source and the circuit breaker. Using the control settings, you specify how the commands are to be
processed.
Through the function SBO (Select Before Operate, reservation15) selects the switching device prior to the
actual switching function, thus it remains locked for additional commands. Feedback monitoring provides
information about the initiator of the command while the command is in process, that means, informing
whether or not the command was implemented successfully. These two options can be selected individually
in the selection of the control model, so that 4 combinations in total are available (see the following table).
The control makes the following settings available (see next table).
Parameter Default Setting Possible Parameter Values
(_:4201:101) Control model SBO w. enh. direct w. normal secur.
security16 SBO w. normal secur.
direct w. enh. security
SBO w. enh. security
(_:4201:102) SBO time-out 30.00 s 0.01 s to 1800 s
(Increment: 0.01 s)
(_:4201:103) Feedback monitoring time 1.00 s 0.01 s to 1800 s
(Increment: 0.01 s)
(_:4201:104) Check switching authority yes no
yes
(_:4201:105) Check if pos. is reached yes no
yes
(_:4201:106) Check double activat. blk. yes no
yes
(_:4201:107) Check blk. by protection yes no
yes
The following figure shows the logical inputs and outputs of the Control function block.
15in standard IEC 61850, Reservation is described as Select before Operate (SBO).
16The default setting is the standard control model for a switching command in an IEC 61850-compliant system.
1002 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
[dwsteue1-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-6 Logical Inputs and Outputs of the Control Function Block
In the information routing of DIGSI 5, you may select a function key as a possible command source. In addi-
tion, it is displayed here if the command is activated by CFC. The logging is routed here.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1003
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
[dw3polls-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1-Pole Triggering
[dw1polig-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
i
NOTE
For safety reasons, Siemens recommends switching on at least 2-phases in the circuit breaker.
1004 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
[ScRang3pLS1p-130913-01, 1, en_US]
You can select the contacts for On and Off as desired. They need not necessarily be next to one another.
The letter U represents an unlatched command. Alternatively, AG (latched tripping) may be selected.
1.5-Pole Triggering
[dw5polig-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
i
NOTE
For safety reasons, Siemens recommends switching on at least 2-phases in the circuit breaker.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1005
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
[ScRang3pLS15p-130913-01, 1, en_US]
2-Pole Triggering
[dw2polan-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1006 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
[ScRang3pLS2p-130913-01, 1, en_US]
i
NOTE
The wiring of the Circuit breaker function group with binary inputs and binary outputs occurs once per
device (see 5.5.1 Overview).
The control function in this type switches all 3 poles on or off simultaneously.
The control functions can switch off 1-pole. This close command is always 3-pole. It is possible that only the
open poles close.
[dw1polls-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
For the circuit breaker with 1-pole triggering, triggering takes place via one relay per phase for the trip
command and via a 4th relay for the close command (see next figure).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1007
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
[dw1panls-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[ScRang1pLS13p-130913-01, 1, en_US]
In Figure 7-16, the switch has a 1-pole connection. The protection trip command is routed individually for the
3 phases (positions L1 to L3). The control will always switch off the 3 poles of the switch. In addition, the 3 U
(Unsaved) allocations of the activation and close command are set to 3-pole. This routing is also used by
protection functions that trip 3 poles. The close command is issued simultaneously for all 3 phases.
1008 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
[sceinaus-280311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The meaning of abbreviations can be found in Table 7-6 and Table 7-7.
The indication Command active can also be routed to a binary output. This binary output is always active if
either an On or trip command is pending, or the switching device was selected by the command control.
7.2.2.4 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1009
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
1010 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
i
NOTE
In contrast to the Circuit-breaker switching device, the Disconnector switching device cannot contain
any additional functions because protection functions or synchronization can have no effect on the discon-
nector.
The following figure shows the structure of the Disconnector switching element:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1011
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
[dwdiscon-190612-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The Disconnector switching device behaves like the Circuit-breaker switching device. The only difference is
the designation of the function block that the physical switch provides (disconnector instead of circuit
breaker). Blocking by protection is not provided in the analysis of the Control function block.
The Disconnector switching device is available in the DIGSI 5 library in 2 different variants:
• Disconnector with 3-pole connection
The device switches all 3 poles of the disconnector on or off simultaneously.
1012 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
The setting values of the parameter can be found in the chapter 7.2.3.2 Application and Setting Notes .
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1013
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
The inputs and outputs as well as the setting options of the Disconnector switch function block are
described in the next chapter (see 7.2.3.3 Trigger Variants of the Disconnector . The Control function block is
described identically as the Circuit-breaker function block, with the exception that the command check
blocking is available through protection only with the circuit breaker.
More information on this is can be found in chapter 7.2.2.2 Application and Setting Notes
Interlocking
The Interlocking function block generates the releases for switchgear interlocking protection. The actual
interlocking conditions are deposited in CFC. For more information on this, see section 7.4.1 Command
Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection.
Disconnector
The disconnector represents the physical switch in the SIPROTEC 5 device. The task of the disconnector is
to replicate the switch position from the status of the binary inputs.
The Disconnector function block is linked automatically via the information matrix with the binary inputs that
register the switch position and with the binary outputs that issue the switching commands.
The Disconnector function block makes the following settings available (see next table).
Parameter Default Setting Possible Parameter Values
(_:5401:101) Maximum output time 10.00 s 0.01 s to 1800 s
(Increment: 0.01 s)
(_:5401:102) Overtravel time 0.00 s 0 s to 60 s
(_:5401:103) Switching-device type disconnector switch-disconnector
disconnector
grounding switch
fast grounding switch
i
NOTE
The parameter Switching-device type is effective only on the IEC 61850 interface. This parameter is
used to set the disconnector type for communication via an IEC 61850 interface. It is a mandatory data
object in the IEC 61850 standard.
The following figure shows the logical inputs and outputs of the Disconnector function block.
1014 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
[dwoutinp-150212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-19 Logical Inputs and Outputs of the Disconnector Function Block
Table 7-10 and Table 7-11 list the inputs and outputs with a description of their function and type. For inputs,
the effect on Quality = invalid on the value of the signal is described.
If the quality of the input signal assumes the status Quality = invalid, then the standby status (Health) of the
Disconnector function block is set to Warning.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1015
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
Control
It is the task of the controls to execute command checks and establish communication between the command
source and the disconnector. Using the control settings, you specify how the commands are to be processed.
Through the function SBO (Select Before Operate, reservation17) selects the switching device prior to the
actual switching function, thus it remains locked for additional commands. Feedback monitoring provides
information about the initiator of the command while the command is in process, that means, informing
whether or not the command was implemented successfully. These two options can be selected individually
in the selection of the control model, so that 4 combinations in total are available (see the following table).
The control makes the following settings available (see next table).
Parameter Default Setting Possible Parameter Values
(_:4201:101) Control model SBO w. enh. direct w. normal secur.
security18 SBO w. normal secur.
direct w. enh. security
SBO w. enh. security
(_:4201:102) SBO time-out 30.00 s -
(_:4201:103) Feedback monitoring time 10.00 s -
(_:4201:104) Check switching authority yes no
yes
(_:4201:105) Check if pos. is reached yes no
yes
(_:4201:106) Check double activat. blk. yes no
yes
1-Pole Triggering
[dw1ptren-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
17in standard IEC 61850, Reservation is described as Select before Operate (SBO).
18The default setting is the standard control model for a switching command in an IEC 61850-compliant system.
1016 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
[ScRangTrenn1p-130913-01, 1, en_US]
You can select the contacts for On and Off as desired. They need not necessarily be next to one another.
1.5-Pole Triggering
[dw5polig-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1017
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
[ScRangTrenn15p-130913-01, 1, en_US]
2-Pole Triggering
[dw2polan-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1018 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
[ScRangTrenn2p-130913-01, 1, en_US]
7.2.3.4 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1019
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
1020 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.3 Switching Sequences
Switching sequences may be running inside the device that switch the switchgear automatically in a prespeci-
fied sequence.
A switching sequence consists of a special function block Switching sequence (Swi. seq.) from the DIGSI 5
Library and the project-specific list of the switching commands that are generated in the CFC.
The function block Switching sequence is located in folder User-defined functions in the DIGSI 5 Library.
[scudeffb-110913-01, 1, en_US]
These function blocks can be used in the information matrix on the highest level (level of the function groups)
or in a user-defined function group.
One Switching sequence function block is used per switching sequence. The function block is the interface
for controlling and monitoring the condition of the CFC switching sequence. The task of the function block is
to verify the relative conditions for control commands, for example, switching authority, interlocking condi-
tions, etc. You can connect the signals of the function block with the CFC chart. They start and stop the
switching sequence and provide data about the status of the switching sequence (see Figure 7-27). The CFC
chart is used to activate the switching device that must be switched. The CFC blocks define, among other
things, the switching devices that must be switched.
[dwswseq1-110913-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1021
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.3 Switching Sequences
• Controllable Start for the start via a communication protocol, for example, IEC 61850, T103, or DNP
• Controllable Cancel for the cancellation via a communication protocol, for example, IEC 61850, T103,
or DNP
On-Site Operation
If at least one Switching sequence function block is used in the device, a new Switching sequences entry
is shown in the first line of the Control menu. If this menu item is selected, an overview of all switching
sequences and the current status will be displayed (see Figure 7-28, example with 2 switching sequences).
You can start or cancel the switching sequences from this menu.
[scsflgdi-110913-01, 1, en_US]
This function block offers similar settings as the Control function block of a circuit breaker or disconnector
(see chapter 7.2.1 General Overview).
1022 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.3 Switching Sequences
[scssc4pa-120913-01, 1, en_US]
Information
The Switching sequence function block provides the following data (Figure 7-30):
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1023
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.3 Switching Sequences
[scinfof1-120913-01, 1, en_US]
In the Switching sequence function block, the interlocking is analog to the Interlocking function block and it
is possible to use it in the switching sequence:
• >Enable start: Connection to interlocking conditions (CFC) for the start of the entire switching
sequence. Not in effect in the non-interlocked switching mode.
• >Enable start (fixed): Non-revocable interlocking conditions for the start of the entire switching
sequence. In effect regardless of the switching mode.
If the monitoring of the time-out is activated (parameter Time-out monitoring), the process feedback
must take place via the inputs >Successful and >Failed. If the last switching command of the switching
sequence was executed successfully, the input >Successful usually is set. To do this, connect the feed-
back of the last switching command from the CFC with this input of the function block during the device
parameterization.
If a switching command fails, this feedback can be captured by the input >Failed. The active switching
sequence will be ended immediately and doesn't have to wait for a time-out.
The indication Execution signals the current condition of the switching sequence. The events running,
canceled, failed, and successful are generated only while the time-out is activated. The event Start
Trigger is used to start the switching sequence in the CFC chart.
1024 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.3 Switching Sequences
[dwbspunt-120913-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
The switching sequence C4 Off (Figure 7-32) should switch off feeder bay C4. The circuit breaker is opened;
followed by opening of one of the 2 busbar disconnectors.
[scssc4as-110913-01, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1025
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.3 Switching Sequences
Command Execution
As described in Section Starting and Canceling a Switching Sequence, Page 1022, the display page or the
Control menu can be used to start the switching sequence. The Start Trigger signal for indication
Execution is used to recognize the start and initiates the switching sequence by pickup of TRIG in the DPC-
DEF building block of circuit breaker QA1. Building blocks DPC-DEF and DPC-EXE are always used in pairs.
The DEF building block controls the type and nature of the command
• VAL = Switching direction (0 = Off, 1 = On)
• SELECT = Select switching device (2 = Select with a value suitable for the preset control model SBO w.
enh. security)
7.3.4 Settings
1026 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.3 Switching Sequences
7.3.5 Information
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1027
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
Before switching commands can be issued by the SIPROTEC 5 unit, several steps are used to check the
command:
• Switching mode (locked/unlocked)
• Switching authority (local/DIGSI/substation/remote)
Confirmation IDs
SIPROTEC 5 devices offer the ability to safeguard various operations by means of confirmation IDs. The
following confirmation IDs from the Safety menu apply to the control functions:
[scconfir-291110-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1028 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
! DANGER
If the switching mode = non-interlocked, the switchgear interlocking protection is shut off
Erroneous switching operations can lead to severe or fatal injuries.
² Ensure manually that all checks have been implemented.
In addition, you can set the switching mode directly with a binary input or CFC. Use the General function
block (see next figure).
[scmoscha-260511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The following table shows the effects of changing the switching mode to use command checks.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1029
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
Switching Authority
The switching authority determines which command source is allowed. The following command sources are
possible:
• Local:
A switching command from the local control (cause-of-error source Location) is possible only if the
switching authority is set to Local and the device is capable of local operation. Setting the switching
authority to Local is typically accomplished with key switch S5 (Local/Remote). In this case, commands
from all other sources are rejected. If the switching authority is set to Local, the setting cannot be
changed remotely.
• DIGSI:
A switching command from DIGSI (connected via USB or Ethernet, cause-of-error source Maintenance)
is accepted only if the switching authority in the device is set to Remote. Once DIGSI has signed on the
device for command output, no commands from other command sources or a different DIGSI PC will be
executed.
• Substation:
This switching authority level can be activated via a parameter in the General function block. A switching
command from the station level (cause-of-error source Substation or Automatic substation) is
accepted if the switching authority is set to Remote and the controllable Station switching authority is
set. This is accomplished by a command from the substation automation technology. Switching
commands from the device or from outside the substation (cause-of-error source Local, Remote or
Automatic remote) are rejected.
Full support of the this switching authority level is assured only when using the IEC 61850 protocol.
• Remote:
This switching authority level stands from remote control directly from the network control center or (if
the switching authority level Substation is not activated) generally for Remote control. The cause-of-
error source is Automatic remote. Commands from this level are accepted if the switching authority is
set to Remote and the controllable Substation switching authority is not set. Switching commands
from the device or from the substation (cause-of-error source Local, Substation or Automatic substa-
tion) are rejected.
1030 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
[schoheit-260511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-35 Display of Switching Authority and Switching Mode in Information Routing (in Function Block
General)
Sw. authority key/set and Sw.mode key/set indicate the current state of the key switch or parameter for
switching authority or switching mode and provide this information for further processing in the CFC. In the
CFC, for example, it is possible to set up an automatic routine to ensure that the switching authority is auto-
matically set to Local when the key switch is set to not interlocked.
The signals shown in Figure 7-35 in DIGSI 5 information routing have the following relationship:
• In terms of switching authority and switching mode, the respective key switch position serves as the
input signal and the input signals in the matrix.
• The state of the switching authority and switching mode is indicated by corresponding output signals.
• The Switching authority and Switching mode functions link the input signals and in this way establish
the output signals (see Figure 7-36 and Figure 7-37).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1031
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
[dwhoheit-260511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[dwmodsch-020513-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In the case of both functions, the input signals overwrite the state of the key switch. This allows external
inputs to also set the switching authority or switching mode, if desired (for instance, by querying an external
key switch).
The Station switching authority exists only if it has been enabled in the settings of the General function (see
figure below). By activating the Several switching authority levels check box at this point, you can specify
that switching commands from several command sources are allowed when Remote switching authority is
set in the device.
i
NOTE
This is determined in Edition 2 of IEC 61850.
1032 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
[scakthoh-140111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-38 How to Activate the Station Switching Authority and to Enable Several Switching-Authority
Levels
Table 7-14 Effect on Switching Authority when Several Switching-Authority Levels Are Enabled and the
Station Switching Authority Is Activated
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1033
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
The following table presents an overview of the result of a switching-authority check based on the set
switching authority and the cause of the command:
1034 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
[scverrie-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
EXAMPLE
For interlocking
For the making direction of the circuit breaker QA in bay E01 (see the figure below), it is necessary to check
whether the disconnectors QB1, QB2, and QB9 are in the defined position, that is, either On or Off. Opening
the circuit breaker QA should be possible at any time.
The interlocking equations are: QA_On = ((QB1 = On) or (QB1 = Off)) and ((QB2 = On) or (QB2 = Off)) and
((QB9 = On) or (QB9 = Off)). There is no condition for opening.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1035
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
[scabgang-270410-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The CFC chart that is required to implement the interlocking equation is shown in the next figure.
[scverpla-270511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Since the Disconnector function provides the defined position On or Off, the exclusive OR gate XOR is not
necessary for interlocking. A simple OR suffices.
As can be seen in the CFC chart, the result of the check is connected to the >Release on signal in the
Interlocking function block in the circuit breaker QA function group (see Figure 7-41).
1036 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
EXAMPLE
For system interlocking
This example considers the feeder = E01 from the previous example (bay interlocking) and additionally the
coupling bay = E02 (see the figure below).
[scanlage-270410-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The circuit breaker QA in coupling bay = E02 will be considered next. As the multibay interlocking condition,
you must provide the bus coupler command block at the end:
If the two busbars in bay = E01 are connected, i.e. if the two disconnectors QB1 and QB2 in bay =E01 are
closed, the circuit breaker QA in bay = E02 is not allowed to be switched off. Accordingly, bay = E01 in the
CFC of the device generates the indication Coupling closed from the positions of the switches QB1 and
QB2 and, using IEC 61850-GOOSE, transmits it to bay = E02 in the device. You must then store the following
interlocking condition in bay = E02:
QA_Off = NOT (= E01/Coupling closed)
In the CFC chart for the coupling device = E02, you must create the following CFC chart (see the figure
below).
[scplanve-241013, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1037
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
[scdoppel-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[scnichta-130810-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The signal is then queried in the CFC interlocking conditions for the associated switching devices and is used
to generate the release signal (for example, >Release on).
1038 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
i
NOTE
Remember, for instance, that pickup of the thermal overload protection can create a fault as well and thus
prevent switching commands.
i
NOTE
Please note that the command check Blocking by protection function is only available for controlling
circuit breakers, because in this case a unique relationship with protection functions and automatic
reclosing has been configured. In disconnectors, this relationship is not always unique, precisely with
regard to the 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout, and it must be mapped for each system using CFC charts.
To carry out the command check Blocking by protection function for disconnectors, use the following
indications (if present) in your interlocking conditions:
• Group indication: Pickup (Function group Line)
• Circuit-breaker failure protection: Pickup (Circuit-breaker failure protection)
All commands in the sequence are logged. The command log contains:
• Date and time
• Reason for the transmission (SEL = Selected, OPR = Operate, CMT = Command execution end, SPN =
Spontaneous)
EXAMPLE
The following example illustrates control of a disconnector QB1 for various cases.
• Successful command output
• Interrupted command
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1039
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
[scposcas-070411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[scposca2-070411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1040 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
[scposcan-070411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[scnegint-070411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1041
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
[scnegtim-070411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[scnegti2-070411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1042 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
[scsponta-070411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Depending on the transmission reason, the desired control value or the actual state value of the controllable
and the switching device can be contained in the log.
The following table shows the relationship.
Table 7-16 Relationship between the Reason for Transmission and the Value Logged
7.4.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1043
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
1044 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Ffunction
The Synchronization function (ANSI 25) checks whether the activation is permissible without a risk to the
stability of the system when interconnecting 2 power supply units. Typical applications are the synchroniza-
tion of a line and a busbar or the synchronization of 2 busbars via a cross-coupling. A power transformer
between the 2 measuring points can also be taken into consideration.
The following operating modes are covered:
• Synchrocheck
• Switching synchronous power systems
[dwsynfn1-270213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Connection
You can find examples for the synchronization of line and busbar in the following 2 figures. Figure 7-56 shows
an example for the synchronization of 2 busbars via bus coupler.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1045
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Ffunction
The synchronization function uses 2 voltages to check the connecting conditions: a voltage of the reference
side 1 (V1) as well as a voltage to be used as a reference on side 2 (V2). The reference voltage of side 1 is
designated in the synchronization function as V119. This is always the voltage of the measuring point that is
connected to the Sync. voltage 1 interface of the circuit-breaker function group. The voltage to be set as
reference is designated with V21. This is always the voltage of the measuring point that is connected to the
Sync. voltage 2 interface of the circuit-breaker function group. The assignment of the measuring points to
the interfaces of the circuit-breaker function group can be configured, see chapter 2.1 Function Embedding in
the Device .
The selection of the voltages used for the synchronization depends on the device connection to the primary
system:
• Connection of the primary system via 4 voltage inputs and hence use of a 1-phase and a 3-phase meas-
uring point (Figure 7-56 and Figure 7-54):
The voltage connected to the 1-phase measuring point is definitive here. If. for example, this is the
phase-to-ground voltage VA, the voltage VA is also used by the other side of the 3-phase measuring
point.
• Connection of the primary system via 6 voltage inputs and hence use of two 3-phase measuring points
(Figure 7-55):
The phase-to-phase voltage VAB of both sides is always used for the test.
You can connect both the phase-to-ground voltages and the phase-to-phase voltages to the device. The
possible interface connections are listed in the Appendix.
[dwsyns01-210912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-54 Synchronization of Line and Busbar, Connection via 4 Voltage Inputs
19Do not confuse the designations V1 and V2 with the numbering of the voltage inputs V1 to V4 (Figure 7-54) and V1 to V8 (Figure 7-55)
1046 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Ffunction
[dwsyns02-210912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-55 Synchronization of Line and Busbar, Connection via 6 Voltage Inputs
[dwsyns03-210912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-56 Synchronization of 2 Busbars via Cross-Coupling, Connection via 4 Voltage Inputs
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1047
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Ffunction
The representation is limited to ±180o. A positive result means that α2 has a maximum of 180o lead. In the
case of a negative value, α2 lags by maximum 180o behind. Figure 7-57 shows the circumstances. The
phase angle α1 was added to the zero axis as a reference system.
If asynchronous systems are present and the frequency f2 is greater than f1, the angle dα then changes from
the negative value to 0 and then to the positive value. As shown in Figure 7-57, the direction of rotation is
counterclockwise (mathematically positive). At f2 < f1 the direction of rotation is clockwise.
[dwsynp04-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Only positive values are permissible for the setting parameters. Inequalities are used to characterize the
setting parameters uniquely. The representation is explained with the example of differential voltage. 2 setting
values are necessary to allow unbalanced settings.
The inequality V2 > V1 yields a positive value for dV. The associated parameter is Max. voltage diff.
V2>V1. For the 2nd setting parameter Max. voltage diff. V2<V1 the inequality V2 < V1 applies. It
corresponds to a negative dV.
The procedure is the same for the differential frequency and differential phase angle.
• Functional sequence for issuing the closing release (see section 7.5.6 Sequence of Functions)
1048 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Ffunction
[losyn001-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Stage Control
The normal stage control is used for a synchronization stage (see Figure 7-58).
Note the following special features:
• As soon as there is a synchronization function available in the device, the measuring points are calcu-
lated and displayed. One stage must be activated for calculating all Delta settings. It is not necessary to
start the stage for this purpose.
• If all synchronization stages are deactivated within the function, closure via the control will no longer be
possible, as none of the stages can generate an closing release. If the synchronization function is
deleted, the circuit breaker is no longer regarded as subject to compulsory synchronization. In this case,
it is possible to activate via the control without synchronization.
• If more than one synchronization stage is switched on, then the >Selection signal must be active for
exactly one stage, so that it can be activated via the controls.
You can block the entire synchronization stage via the binary signal >Block stage. A started process is
completed and the entire stage reset after blocking. The stage must be restarted to initiate a new switching
procedure. The blocking only affects the test process for the closing conditions. The measured values are still
calculated and displayed.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1049
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Ffunction
Operating Range
[losyn002-160311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The operating range of the synchronization function is defined by the configurable voltage limits Min. oper-
ating limit Vmin and Max. operat. limit Vmax as well as by the specified frequency band fnominal
±4 Hz.
If one or both voltages are outside the permitted operating range when the measurement is started or a
voltage leaves the range, this is displayed via corresponding indications Frequency f1 > fmax,
Frequency f1 < fmin, Voltage V1 > Vmax, Voltage V1 < Vmin etc. The closing conditions are
then not checked.
Supervision
The supervisions listed below are executed in a function-specific manner. If one of the monitors picks up, the
Health goes to alarm. The stage is indicated as Inactive. A closing release or direct close command is not
possible in this case.
• For consistency of settings of specific parameters
Definite threshold-value settings are checked after a parameter change. Ensure, for example, that the
threshold V1, V2 with voltage is set greater than/equal to the lower voltage limit Min. oper-
ating limit Vmin but less than/equal to the upper voltage limit Max. operat. limit Vmax. If
there is an inconsistency, the error message Setting error is set.
• For multiple selection of the stage at the start time of the synchronization
If there is a simultaneous selection of multiple closed synchronization stages at the start time, the error
message Multiple selection is set.
Measuring-Voltage Failure
If a voltage-transformer fault (measuring-voltage failure) is recorded via the binary input signal >Open of one
of the voltage-measuring points, then the closing commands of the synchronization stage are no longer
tested. In other words, a release of the closure based on the measurement is no longer possible. The readi-
ness of the stage turns to warning. Direct close command is still possible.
1050 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Ffunction
The device-internal supervision function measuring-voltage failure detection (Fuse Failure Monitor) does not
have any effect on the synchronization stage.
Measured Values
The measured values for the synchronization function are displayed in their own primary, secondary and
percentage measured-value windows. Voltage measurements are always displayed as chained variables,
even if the associated measuring point records phase-to-ground voltages. The measured values are obtained
and displayed as soon as the device is functional. The difference values are calculated as soon as the stage
is activated.
The following values are individually displayed:
• Reference voltage V1
• Voltage to be synchronized V2
• Optional: Smoothed frequency difference and frequency difference rate of change on activation of the
corresponding settings in the Expanded delta-f options stage type
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1051
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Ffunction
In the Application and Setting Notes, several examples are provided for using both parameters.
EXAMPLE:
The 1-phase measuring point connected with Sync-voltage 1 records the phase-to-phase voltage VAB. The
1-phase measuring point connected with Sync-voltage 2 records VA. In this case the phase angle between
VAB and VA takes into consideration the delta variable Δα during calculation..
This automation guarantees that several voltage sources can be switched between during running operation,
each of which records different voltages.
Dynamic measuring-point switching provides the capability to connect the voltages used in the Synchro-
check function to various measuring points. In this way, for example, it is possible to use the correct voltage
on the basis of the switch position on the switching devices. If more than 1 measuring point is connected to V
sync1 or V sync2, you must create the V sync select. function block in the Circuit breakers function
group.
More information can be found in Chapter 5.8.1 Overview of Functions.
Selection of the desired voltage measuring points (V sync1 and V sync2) for the Circuit breakers function
group is controlled via Continuous Function Chart.
Example
Figure 7-60 shows an example of a Synchrocheck in a one-and-a-half circuit breaker application. If circuit
breaker QA2 is to be closed, the reference voltages must be selected from several possible measuring
points. This selection of measuring points is dependent on the switch positions of all circuit breakers and
disconnectors.
1052 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Ffunction
[dwdynmsu-140212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Each synchronization function requires 2 comparison voltages. For the circuit breaker QA2 located in the
middle, there are 2 options for each side (Vsync1 and Vsync2). The selection of synchronization voltages for
each side depends on the position of the circuit breaker and the disconnectors.
For circuit breakers QA1 and QA3, the busbar voltage (Vsync1) is available for one side, and 3 voltages (Vsync2)
are available for the other side.
[scdynms2-211212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-61 Connecting the Measuring Points with the Circuit-Breaker Function Group
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1053
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Ffunction
There are consistency checks that validate the connections of voltage measuring points to the function group:
• The connection type must be identical for all measuring points connected to the same interface.
• It is not permitted to route a measuring point to the function group using the option VN.
• The rated voltage (primary and secondary) must be identical for all measuring points connected to the
same interface.
• If more than 1 measuring point is connected to 1 voltage interface, a function block must be expanded to
enable selection of the synchronization voltage.
CFC Control
The voltages are selected by CFC logic on the basis of the measuring point IDs. If more than one measuring
point is connected to interfaces Vsync1 or Vsync2 of the Circuit-breaker function group, the V sync select.
function block has to be removed from the library in the Circuit-breaker function group. A CFC logic (see
following example) has to define IDs for the V sync1 or V sync2 inputs of this function block in order to
ensure the correct measuring point connection for the Synchrocheck function.
[scdynmsx-160212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the disconnectors or circuit breakers are in ongoing switching operations, it is sometimes not possible to
select the correct measuring point. For these transient stages, the value 0 should be used as the ID for
voltage selection inputs V sync1 and V sync2). The function block does not go into the alarm condition and
the Synchrocheck function is blocked. The following CFC program shows how transient states are handled. If
no conditions or the first condition is met, a measuring point is not selected.
[scdyntra-240112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-63 Handling of Transient States by a CFC Program for Voltage Selection
If only one measuring point is connected to each voltage interface, you do not have to generate an instance
of this function-block type.
1054 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Ffunction
[losynf01-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Start
The synchronization stage must be started to check the closing conditions. The synchronization stage can be
started device-internally by the controller and the reclosing, or externally, via binary input signals, for example
by an external automatic reclosing (AREC), (see section 7.5.12 Interaction with Control, Automatic Reclosing
(AREC), and External Triggering ).
At the start, the system checks whether there is a multiple selection by the synchronization stage (see section
Monitoring in chapter 7.5.4 General Functionality). If this is the case, the process is terminated. After a
successful start, the indication In progress is cleared and the supervision time for the maximum duration
of the synchronization process (parameter Max.durat. sync.processis started. The system also checks
whether the voltages and frequencies are in the operating range (see section 7.5.4 General Functionality). If
this is not the case, the closing conditions are not checked.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1055
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Ffunction
Blocking Closure
You can use the input signal >Block close command to block the release signal for the closure (signal
Release close cmd.) as well as the closure itself. The measurement continues to operate during the
blocking. If the blocking is revoked and the release conditions are still fulfilled, the release is given for closure.
1056 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Ffunction
[losynche-160311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
With this operating mode, the values ΔV, Δf, and Δα are checked before connecting the 2 power-supply units.
The indication All sync. conditio. OK signals that the setting values (conditions) have been reached
and that the release for closure has been given (see Checking the Closing Conditions, Closure in section
7.5.6 Sequence of Functions).
Every fulfilled condition is signaled individually via the indications Voltage difference OK, Frequency
diff. OK, and Angle difference OK.
If a condition is not fulfilled, detailed information on why the condition is not fulfilled is provided via indications.
If the differential voltage is outside the setting limits, for example, the indication V dif.too large(V2<V1)
is issued. The indication indirectly contains information that the voltage V2 has to be increased for a
successful synchronization.
With the Expanded delta-f options stage type configured and an activated (_:140) Limit dfdiff/dt
for sync. op parameter, the frequency difference rate of change is also checked. If the permissible
frequency change rate (parameter (_:141) Max. value dfdiff/dt syn) is exceeded, the indication
(_:329) d fdiff/dt too large is issued.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1057
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Ffunction
A distinction according to synchronous and asynchronous systems can be made with this type of stage.
If galvanically coupled systems are switched in parallel, synchronous systems are present. A typical charac-
teristic for synchronous systems is equality of frequency (Δf ≈ 0). If the frequency difference falls below the
setting value of the f-threshold ASYN<->SYN parameter, synchronous systems are to be assumed. If the
frequency difference exceeds the setting value of the f-threshold ASYN<->SYN parameter, asynchronous
systems are to be assumed. This status occurs in galvanically isolated systems, for example.
Both states have their own operating mode with its own closing conditions. Both operating modes can be
switched on and off separately (parameter Sync. operating mode and Async. operating mode). The
following combinations result from this:
Sync. operating mode Async. operating Functionality
mode
on on If the frequency difference is below the threshold
value set f-threshold ASYN<->SYN, the oper-
ating mode synchronous is active. In other cases,
the operating mode asynchronous is active.
off on Regardless of the frequency difference and the
threshold value f-threshold ASYN<->SYN, the
operating mode is exclusively active asynchro-
nously.
on off If the frequency difference is below the threshold
value set f-threshold ASYN<->SYN, the oper-
ating mode synchronous is active. In other cases,
the stage is inactive, i.e. a switching release
cannot be issued.
off off Both operating modes are deactivated. No activa-
tion release can be be given via these operating
modes either.
1058 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Ffunction
[losynsyn-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The frequency difference is very low in the synchronous systems operating mode. It is below the threshold
value f-threshold ASYN<->SYN. The status is signaled via the State f-synchronous indication.
The parameters ΔV and Δα are checked for issuing an activation release (see Figure 7-67). The indication
All sync. conditio. OK signals that both setting values (conditions) are reached. If the conditions
remain fulfilled over the set time delay (parameter Delay close command), the release for closing is given
(see also chapter 7.5.7 Closing Conditions for the Synchrocheck Stage Type ).
Every condition fulfilled is signaled individually via the indications Voltage difference OK and Angle
difference OK.
If a condition is not fulfilled, detailed information on why the condition is not fulfilled is provided via indications.
If the differential voltage is outside the setting limits, for example, the indication V dif.too large(V2<V1)
is issued. The indication indirectly contains information that the voltage V2 has to be increased for a
successful synchronization.
With the Expanded delta-f options stage type configured and an activated (_:142) Limit dfdiff/dt
for asyn. op parameter, the frequency difference rate of change is also checked. If the permissible
frequency change rate (parameter (_:143) Max. value dfdiff/dt asyn) is exceeded, the indication
(_:329) d fdiff/dt too large is generated.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1059
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Ffunction
[losynzus-110211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1060 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Ffunction
[losynasy-210912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In this operating mode, compliance with the voltage difference ΔV and frequency difference Δf conditions is
checked. The function calculates the time point of the close command taking into account the angular differ-
ence Δα and the closing time of the circuit breaker. This is calculated so that the voltage phasors are equal at
the moment of pole contact by the circuit breaker (ΔV ≈ 0, Δα ≈ 0).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1061
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Ffunction
[losynarb-080211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-69 Operating Range Under Synchronous and Asynchronous Conditions for Voltage (V) and
Frequency (f)
When configuring the Expanded delta-f options function block, you can expand the synchronization checks
to include the following aspects:
• Limitation of the frequency change rate
With this option, you can define additional upper limits for the rate of fpermissible requency difference
change. The release checks for both stage types take these additional upper limits into consideration.
Both activation (parameters (_:140) Limit dfdiff/dt for sync. op and (_:142) Limit
dfdiff/dt for asyn. op) and the upper limits (parameters (_:141) Max. value dfdiff/dt
syn and (_:143) Max. value dfdiff/dt asyn) for the frequency change rate are adjustable
selectively for synchronous and asynchronous conditions. Both stage types consider the frequency
change rate when issuing the release for switching and indicate when the rate is exceeded.
If you also activate the option to compensate for low-frequency oscillations (parameter (_:150)
Suppr. frequ. oscillations), the frequency change rate is stabilized in the presence of such
oscillations. Stabilization is in effect for asynchronous as well as synchronous operating modes.
1062 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Ffunction
[dwsynfre-101013-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure Example: Frequency Difference between the Constant Frequency f1 and the
7-70 Sinusoidal Oscillating Frequency f2
With this option active, the range of function measured values is expanded by the smoothed frequency.
Release of switching in synchronous networks occurs after one second at the earliest. This time is
needed to smooth the frequency measured values.
The actual frequency can be larger or smaller than the smoothed value at any instant. The Max. diff.
"f threshold" parameter makes it possible to limit the increase in instantaneous frequency value in
relation to the respective frequency threshold value.
If at least one of 2 power-supply units is de-energized, the power-supply units can be connected together via
the following operating modes.
If the measured voltage is less than the threshold V1, V2 without voltage, the zero potential of the
power-supply unit is detected. A 3-phase connection increases safety, as several voltages have to fulfill the
conditions. The energized side must be in the defined operating range with respect to voltage and frequency
(see section 7.5.4 General Functionality) and exceed the threshold V1, V2 with voltage.
The following additional closing conditions can be selected, which are then applied next to the closing condi-
tions for the synchronism:
Parameter Description
Close cmd. at V1> & V2< Closing release under the condition that power-supply unit U1 is
energized and the power-supply unit U2 is de-energized.
Close cmd. at V1< & V2> Closing release under the condition that power-supply unit U1 is
de-energized and the power-supply unit U2 is energized.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1063
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Ffunction
Parameter Description
Close cmd. at V1< & V2< Closing release provided mains adapters V 1 and V2 are de-
energized.
Each of these conditions can be made effective individually via parameters or binary input. You can also set
parameters for combinations, for example a release for closure, if Close cmd. at V1> & V2< or Close
cmd. at V1< & V2> has been fulfilled.
[losyn003-160311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The indications Cond. V1>V2< fulfilled, Cond. V1<V2> fulfilled and Cond. V1<V2<
fulfilled indicate that the relevant conditions are fulfilled.
You can use the Supervision time parameter to set a supervision time for which the closing conditions
must at least be fulfilled with de-energized connection, before closing is allowed.
1064 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Ffunction
[losyndir-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The operating mode Direct close command function initiates a closure release without any testing upon
start of the synchronization stage. The closure occurs immediately.
The combination Direct close command with other operating modes is not recommended, as the other oper-
ating data is bypassed.
If the synchronization function is defective (standby of the sync stage = alarm or warning), a direct close
command is executed or not executed, depending on the type of fault (see also supervisions in chapter
7.5.4 General Functionality).
With Control
The control and synchronization function are always located in a function group Circuit breaker. The control
and also the synchronization function always operate with the circuit breaker, which is linked to the function
group Circuit breaker.
As soon as the synchronization function is in the function group Circuit breaker, the circuit breaker is subject
to compulsory synchronization. If all synchronization stages are deactivated, the circuit breaker cannot be
activated via the control, as no release can be generated for the closure. The circuit breaker is no longer
subject to compulsory synchronization after deletion of the synchronization function. Closure without synchro-
nization is then possible via the control.
If closure is to be synchronized via the control, the control automatically generates an internal signal which
starts the synchronization function. The functional sequence is described in chapter 7.5.6 Sequence of Func-
tions. After fulfilling all closing conditions, the synchronization sends a release signal to the control, which
closes the circuit breaker and then stops and synchronization function.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1065
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Ffunction
[losynaw1-310111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[losynaw2-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1066 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Ffunction
• State-controlled, via the signal >Start / stop syn.proc. (see also chapter 7.5.6 Sequence of
Functions).
The start is followed by the functional sequence (see chapter 7.5.6 Sequence of Functions). If the conditions
are fulfilled, the output signal Release close cmd. is issued. The switched object QAx of the function
group Circuit breaker is not closed. The output signal Release close cmd. must be explicitly assigned to
the binary output in order to close the circuit breaker.
[losynaw3-160311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1067
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Ffunction
i
NOTE
Thus just as with the measuring values of the synchronization function, all the voltage parameters are also
to be understood as phase-to-phase voltage.
1068 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Ffunction
[losynae1-160311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If there is a power transformer between the voltage transformers of the circuit breaker to be synchronized,
you then have to correct the phase-angle rotation for a switching group deviating from 0. Figure 7-76 shows
such an application. The Angle adjust. (transform.) parameter is used to save the phase-angle rota-
tion.
The switching group of the transformer is defined by the upper voltage side to the low voltage side. If the
reference voltage transformer V1 is connected on the upper voltage side of the transformer (as in
Figure 7-76), enter the phase-angle rotation directly according to the switching group. A switching group
figure of 5, for example, means an angular rotation of 5 • 30o = 150o. Set this value for the Angle adjust.
(transform.) parameter.
If the voltage connection V1 is on the low-voltage side due to the system, you then have to apply the exten-
sion angle with 360o. A transformer with switching group 5 yields an angular adjustment of 360o -
(5 •· 30o) = 210o.
2. Correction of phase-angle errors: You can correct a phase-angle error between the voltage transformers in
increments. Ascertain a possible correction value during commissioning.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1069
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Ffunction
1070 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Ffunction
Parameter for asynchronous operation: Max. voltage diff. of voltage and frequency
Parameter for synchronous operation: Maximum voltage diff. of voltage and angle
If at least one of 2 power-supply units is de-energized, the power-supply units can be connected together via
the following operating modes. The above potential release conditions are independent of one another and
can also be combined.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1071
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Ffunction
i
NOTE
For reasons of safety, the releases have been deactivated in the default setting and are therefore at no.
Even if you wish to apply one of these operating modes, Siemens recommends leaving the setting at no
for reasons of safety. Set the operating mode only dynamically via the assigned binary input signal (for
example >Operating mode 'U1>U2<') (see also Figure 7-71). This prevents one of these operating
modes from being incorrectly activated statically thereby resulting in an incorrect switching.
Parameter Description
no No release for closing is possible via this operating mode.
yes If the power-supply unit V1 is de-energized and the power-supply unit
V2 is energized, the release for closure is given upon starting the
synchronization stage after the supervision time has passed.
The setting depends on the operational requirements. Note the above
information.
Parameter Description
no No release for closure is possible via this operating mode.
yes If the power-supply unit V1 is energized and the power-supply unit V2 is
de-energized, the release for closure is given upon starting the synchro-
nization stage after the supervision time has passed.
The setting depends on the operational requirements. Note the above
information.
Parameter Description
no No release for closure is possible via this operating mode.
yes If the power-supply units V1 and V2 are de-energized, the release for
closure is given upon starting the synchronization stage after the super-
vision time has passed.
The setting depends on the operational requirements. Note the above
information.
i
NOTE
You must set this setting value less than or equal to the setting value Min. operating limit Vmin. In
other cases, the synchronization stage cannot operate and the standby of the synchronization stage goes
to alarm.
1072 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Ffunction
i
NOTE
For safety reasons, Siemens recommends leaving the setting at no. If a direct close command is neces-
sary, Siemens recommends only using this operating mode dynamically via the binary input signal >Set
mode 'dir.cls.cmd' (see also Figure 7-73). This prevents this operating mode from being incorrectly
activated statically thereby resulting in an incorrect switching.
7.5.17 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1073
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Ffunction
1074 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Ffunction
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1075
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Ffunction
1076 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Ffunction
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1077
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.6 Transformer Tap Changers
With the device control function, you can change a transformer tap by moving it higher or lower and monitor
the proper execution of the adjusting commands.
The function has built-in comprehensive options for measuring the tap changer position as well as supervi-
sion and monitor functions. The supervision and monitor functions are used to check the voltage and supply
information about the tap position for adaptive matching of the transformer differential protection.
The following options are provided for control:
• Direct user commands via the device keypad or routed binary inputs
• User-defined conditions via the CFC
If the tap changer reaches the end positions, the control function issues the (_:301) End higher
pos.reached or (_:302) End lower pos.reached indication.
The transformer tap controller is controlled by the function group Transformer tap changers, which you can
select from the DIGSI library (group Switching devices).
[sctssdig-100713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-77 Transformer Tap Changer Functionality in the DIGSI Information Matrix
The central element is the Controllable Position of type BSC (Binary Controlled Step Position Information,
based on IEC 61850). You connect this Controllable in the matrix to the desired number of binary inputs that
indicate the current tap position.
You can find more information in Chapter 7.6.2 Application and Setting Notes .
The Position Controllable also contains settings. If you wish to change the settings, you must select the
Controllable in the DIGSI information matrix and change the settings by way of the Properties dialog. The
taps are controlled via the commands Tap higher and Tap lower, each of which must be connected to one
binary output.
1078 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.6 Transformer Tap Changers
Example
The following images show a CFC chart for transformer tap control with the routing of the function keys for
stepping up or stepping down: To use the function keys, you create 2 user-defined single-point indications
(SPS). These are used for the function keys (e.g., <F1>, Higher function key and <F2>, Lower function key)
and as the input signals for the appropriate CFC blocks.
The commands for changing to higher or lower must not be connected as an output in the CFC. The
BSC_EXE block connects this automatically.
[sctrcfc1-190713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[scrafuts-100713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Using this simple CFC chart, the transformer tap changer can move a tap up or down by pressing function
keys. The control direction can be selected using a value at the Val input of the BSC-DEF block. 1 means
step up, 0 means step down.
Motor Supervision
The runtime of the motor drive can be monitored from the device. This function is used to identify failures of
the motor drive during switching and to trip actions if necessary. To use motor runtime supervision, you must
route the moving contact and set the proper motor runtime.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1079
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.6 Transformer Tap Changers
The moving contact is active until the tap changer has reached the new position. This time is compared to the
Motor supervision time. If the new tap position is not reached within the motor runtime, the Motor
sup. time expired indication is set. The Trigger motor prot. sw. indication with which the motor
can be switched off is output after 1.5 s. Depending on the Supervision behavior setting, the function
reaches a status of Failure or Warning.
[lotcmoue-090713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
A new tap position can only be reached in conjunction with an adjusting command. The device monitors
spontaneous changes to the tap position without an adjusting command or changes in the wrong direction.
Spontaneous changes to the tap position indicate a defect or a failure in the tap changer.
An error response occurs if the tap position is outside the specified range (minimum value, maximum
value). A detected fault of the tap changer is indicated. You can acknowledge the fault using the Reset
failure command. At the device you can find this command by using the navigation keys: Main Menue →
Device Functions → Reset Functions → Tap Changer.
The device counts the number of successfully completed adjusting commands with the Op.ct. operation
counter accumulator value.
1080 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.6 Transformer Tap Changers
[scstuslt-100713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• status only
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1081
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.6 Transformer Tap Changers
This setting specifies the maximum output time. The range of values extends from 0.01 s to 1800.00 s. For
activating motors to change the tap, a time of 1.50 s is practical.
• Default setting (_:116) Highest tap changer position = Lowest tap voltage
With the setting Highest tap changer position, indicate whether the lowest or highest voltage is
present at the highest tap changer position. This establishes whether the voltage is greater or less at a higher
tap position.
1082 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.6 Transformer Tap Changers
[scdeegts-100713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1083
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.6 Transformer Tap Changers
With the Number of bits for tap coding parameter, set the number of bits you need for coding the
transformer taps. The number is dependent on the selected Coding. For example, you need 3 bits for 7
binary-encoded transformer taps. The range of values extends from 2 to 32.
• BCD
• Table
• Gray
If you want to specify an individual tap coding type, select Table.
In the Coding representation section, select the numbering system in which your coding table entries
will take place, alternatively:
• Binary (2 characters)
• Octal (8 characters)
i
NOTE
If the binary inputs used for coding are all inactive, this indicates an invalid tap position (regardless of the
display offset). In the display, for an invalid tap setting, the position --- or -64 is shown with the quality
invalid; the exception is BCD with sign, see the example.
Enter the coding for the tap in the Coding column in the Coding table. Enter the value according to the
numbering system previously selected. Select the desired number of taps and number of bits for tap coding.
Taps with the same coding and taps with 0 coding are not permitted.
Table 7-17 Routing of the Binary Inputs (Tap Coding Type: Binary)
Example
BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6
1084 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.6 Transformer Tap Changers
Example
Tap changer X X X X
Meaning Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Moving
contact
Tap = 1 1 0 0
With 3 binary inputs, a maximum of 23 -1 = 7 tap positions can be mapped in binary code. If all routed binary
inputs indicate 0, this is interpreted as a connection error and is reported by Position --- or -64 with quality
invalid. The representation of transformer taps should start with the numerical value 3. The information prop-
erties must be configured as follows for the example:
Tap coding type: Binary
Number of taps: 4
Number of bits for tap coding: 3
Offset of the tap display: 2
Moving Contact (Highest Binary Input) yes
The 3 binary inputs must be numbered sequentially, for example, BI 1, BI 2, BI 3 and BI 4 for the moving
contact.
Routing of the Binary Inputs (Tap Coding Type: BCD with Sign)
The following table shows the routing of 3 binary inputs (BI 1 to BI 3) with 7 transformer tap positions desig-
nated -3 to 3. Encoding takes place in BCD.
Table 7-18 Routing of the Binary Inputs (Tap Coding Type: BCD with Sign)
Example
BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6
Tap changer X X X
Meaning Bit 1 Bit 2 Sign
Tap = 1 1 0 1
Using 3 binary inputs, a maximum of 7 tap positions can be mapped with the tap coding type of BCD with
sign. This yields the number of positions from -3 to 3. If all routed binary inputs indicate 0, this is recognized
as tap 0. The 3 binary inputs must be numbered sequentially.
Tap coding type: BCD with sign
Number of taps: 7
Number of bits for tap coding: 3
Offset of the tap display: 0
Moving Contact (Highest Binary Input) no
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1085
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.6 Transformer Tap Changers
[sctrass7-190713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
7.6.3 Settings
1086 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Control Functions
7.6 Transformer Tap Changers
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1087
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
1088 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
8 Supervision Functions
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1089
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.1 Overview
8.1 Overview
SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with an extensive and integrated supervision concept. Continuous super-
vision:
• Ensures the availability of the technology used
• Avoids subfunction and overfunction of the device
1090 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision
SIPROTEC 5 devices are freely configurable. A load model is integrated in DIGSI 5. The load model prevents
you from overloading the device with an excessively large application.
The load model shows the device utilization and the response times for device functions. If it determines that
an application created is likely to overload the device, DIGSI prevents the application from being loaded into
the device.
In this rare case, you must then reduce the application in order to be able to load it into the device.
The load model can be found in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device→ Device information.
In the operating range, select the Resource consumption setting sheet. The following figure shows an
example of the view of the load model in DIGSI 5:
[sclastmo-141210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
A green total display for the processor response time indicates that the device is not overloaded by the
present application. On the other hand, if you see a red exclamation mark, the planned application is over-
loading the device.
The list below the total display shows the individual functional areas. These areas combine functions with the
same real-time requirements in groups. A green display in front of an area (see Figure 8-1) signals that the
response times of those functions grouped in this area can be maintained. A red exclamation point indicates
that functions may have longer response times than are specified in the Technical data for the device. In such
a case, loading of the application into the device is blocked.
The following table provides an overview of the functional areas and the most important influence quantities
on device utilization:
Functional Brief Description Change in Load
Area
CFC event- CFC charts that must be edited Adding or removing CFC charts in the fast event-triggered
triggered, fast especially fast (for example, to process range
invoke interlockings between • Create CFC chart
protection functions) • Delete CFC chart
• Change the process range in the properties of the
CFC chart
Add to or remove from CFC charts in the fast event-trig-
gered process area
Measuring Provision of measured values Adding or removing
points for protection, control, and • Measuring points (in the Measuring-points routing
measurement functions Editor)
• Function groups that provide measured-value prepro-
cessing for insertable functions (for example, Line
function group and Circuit-breaker function group)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1091
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision
If the load model displays a warning, bear in mind the following general instructions:
The areas named in the table are listed in descending order of real time requirements. If a warning appears to
the effect that the guaranteed response times may be exceeded in an area, you may be able to return to the
permitted area by taking the following measures:
• Reduce the functional scope in the marked area (red exclamation mark)
• Reduce the functional scope in another area with higher real time requirements
1092 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision
When you have reduced the application, check the display in resource consumption! If a function or state has
been switched off, it will continue to represent a load for the area. If you do not need the function or stage,
delete it rather than switching it off.
Use the general Circuit-breaker function group only in the following cases:
• Interaction with a protection-function group is essential.
That is to say, operate indications of protection functions cause the circuit breaker assigned to the
Circuit-breaker function group to be switched off.
• You want to use functions such as the automatic reclosing function or circuit-breaker failure protection in
the Circuit-breaker function group.
If a circuit breaker is only to be modeled for control purposes, use the Circuit breaker [state only] function
group.
When you order a SIPROTEC 5 device, you are also ordering a function-points account for use of additional
functions.
The following figure illustrates consumption of function points in the current application with respect to the
existing function-points account.
[scfpunkt-141210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The remaining white bar shows the function points that have not yet been used up by your configuration. The
number of function points available in a device depends on the device purchase order (position 20 of the
product code). You can also order function points subsequently, and so increase the function-points account
for the device.
i
NOTE
Find out the function-points requirement for the desired application before ordering the device. For this,
you can use the device configurator.
CFC resources include all of the elements used in CFC. For example, the number of CFC charts that can be
used in a device is limited. The limit is determined by the device type. The resources available for CFC charts
are managed in CFC statistics:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1093
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision
[sccfcsta-141210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
A bar chart is displayed for each limited CFC resource. In each bar chart, the limit is indicated by a narrow
gap in the bar. The number above the gap indicates the available limit. In the example shown, a maximum of
32 CFC charts can be created.
The number to the right of the bar shows the quantity of the respective resource currently being used. In the
example shown, this is 2 CFC charts.
The following table explains the resources displayed in CFC statistics.
Name Description
Continuous Function Charts Number of CFC charts that can be created in a device
(CFC) It does not matter which process level the plan is created in.
System timer Number of system timers that can be used by CFC blocks
CFC modules such as BLINK or TLONG use timers of this kind. A CFC
module can use multiple system timers.
Ticks per execution level Number of ticks permitted in the respective process level
• Measured value A tick is a unit of measurement for the respective plan size.
• Fast Event-Triggered
• Event-Triggered
• Interlocking (only for
specific devices)
Flip-flops Number of flip-flop states that can be stored in a device (for longer than an
operating-voltage outage)
1094 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
8.3.1 Overview
The secondary circuits establish a connection to the power system from the point of view of the device. The
measuring-input circuit (currents, voltages) as well as the command circuits to the circuit breakers are moni-
tored for the correct function of the device. The connection to the station battery is ensured with the supervi-
sion of the external auxiliary voltage. The secondary system has the following supervision systems:
Measuring circuits (voltage):
• Measuring-Voltage Failure
• Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker
• Voltage balance
• Voltage sum
• Current sum
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1095
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
[dwstrffm-210113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[lozusamm-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Each subfunction creates its own monitoring indication. The function summarizes these indications via the
group indication Alarm.
The response to the detection of a measuring-voltage failure is explained in the specific protection-function
descriptions.
1096 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
Logic
[looppode-200812-05.tif, 1, en_US]
The criterion for detection of an unbalanced measuring-voltage failure is the voltage unbalance. This unbal-
ance is determined based on the ratio between negative and positive-sequence voltage. If the threshold value
is violated and the monitoring is released and not blocked, the monitoring picks up (see Figure 8-6). The indi-
cation Asym.fail.-inst.alarm is output.
The monitoring is released as soon as a certain minimum voltage is exceeded. This prevents a spurious
response in the presence of low voltage measurands or a measurand of 0 (for example, circuit breaker open).
Instantaneous monitoring also requires the presence of a minimum current. This prevents a spurious instan-
taneous pick up of the monitoring in the presence of a weak infeed (current < 10 % of rated current)
combined with a power-system incident.
If the voltage unbalance is blocked by unbalanced faults in the primary system, the supervision is blocked.
The device detects an unbalanced fault based on the ratio between negative and positive sequence current.
In the event of 1-pole automatic reclosing, the supervision is blocked.
Delay/Seal-In
In the presence of a weak infeed (current < 10 % of rated current), certain protection functions require more
time for detection of a system incident. For this purpose, the monitoring of the Asym.fail. - time delay
parameter is allowed to delay.
If a system incident is detected during the time delay, the supervision drops off. This is because the function
assumes that the unbalance - and consequently the pickup of the supervision - is due to the system incident.
After the time delay has elapsed, it definitely assumes a measuring-voltage failure. The monitoring seals in
and the Asym.fail.-alarm indication is output. The dropout does not happen until the voltage unbalance
has disappeared after a seal-in time of 10 s. In the presence of 3-pole close-in faults, this seal-in time
prevents the monitoring from dropping off too quickly and thus releasing the protection functions.
The sealing-in function can be deactivated using the Asym.fail.-DO on netw.flt. parameter. As soon
as a system incident is detected, the monitoring drops off instantaneously.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1097
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
Logic
[losymmet-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1098 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
i
NOTE
If a voltage transformer circuit-breaker is installed in the secondary circuit of the voltage transformers, its
position is communicated to the device via a binary input (see chapter 8.3.3.1 Overview of Functions ).
Logic
[lozuscha-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Switching onto a 3-phase measuring-voltage failure is detected if the following criteria are fulfilled simultane-
ously:
• All 3 phase-to-ground voltages have dropped below the threshold value 3ph.fail. - VA,VB,VC <.
• The circuit breaker is detected to be in closed position. The detection takes place either via the phase
currents or via the ≥1-pole closed signal, which is generated via the circuit-breaker auxiliary
contacts.
See Chapter Process monitor5.1.4.1 Overview of Functions
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1099
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
A voltage jump – such as in a 3-phase measuring-voltage failure with closed circuit-breaker (see chapter
8.3.2.4 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure ) – does not occur in the case of switching to a 3-phase meas-
uring-voltage failure. If the monitoring is not blocked, the time delay SO 3ph.fail. - time delay is
started. After the time has elapsed, the indication SO 3ph.failure-alarm is displayed. A dropout of the
monitoring is only possible by a recovery of the voltage.
The supervision is blocked as soon as a pickup of a protection function is detected within a protection func-
tion group and the time delay of the supervision has not yet elapsed.
This subfunction also covers the situation of a low load with 3-phase measuring-voltage failure and closed
circuit-breaker, because the circuit-breaker condition is also determined from the circuit-breaker auxiliary
contacts. The subfunction for detecting a 3-phase measuring-voltage failure (see chapter 8.3.2.4 3-Phase
Measuring-Voltage Failure ) is not released in this situation, e.g. because the current flow is too low.
This subfunction can be switched on or off separately using the Switch-on 3ph. failure parameter.
The 3ph.fail. - phs.curr.release parameter is used to define the phase current threshold above
which the monitoring is released.
1100 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
• Recommended setting value (_:103) 3ph.fail. - phs.curr. jump = 0.1 A for IN = 1 A or 0.5
A for IN = 5 A
The 3ph.fail. - phs.curr. jump parameter is used to set the differential current between the present
current phasor and the stored phasor (from the previous period). If the value is exceeded, the function detects
a system incident and blocks the monitoring.
Siemens recommends using the default setting.
i
NOTE
Adapt the SO 3ph.fail. - time delay parameter to the inherent time of protection functions which
are intended to block the monitoring function.
Note that with parameter values 0 s blocking of the monitoring function via a protection stimulation will not
be possible any more.
8.3.2.7 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1101
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
1102 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
[dwmcbstr-040211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
8.3.3.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1103
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
[dwstrusy-300913, 1, en_US]
1104 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
[lokenuns-040211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Logic
[lospasym-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The Threshold min/max parameter is the criterion by which a phase-to-ground voltage unbalance is
measured. The device calculates the ratio between the minimum (Vmin) and the maximum (Vmax) phase-to-
ground voltage.
Enter the lower limit of the maximum phase-to-ground voltage (Vmax) with the parameter Release
threshold. This specifies the lower limit of the operating range of this function.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1105
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
Operate delay
If it falls below the balance factor Threshold min/max and at the same time the maximum phase-to-ground
voltage exceeds the Release threshold, the Operate delay begins. If both conditions persist during
this time, the indication Failure is generated.
8.3.4.5 Settings
1106 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
i
NOTE
For the Voltage-sum supervision, the externally generated residual voltage must be connected to the 4th
voltage measuring input.
For the Voltage-sum supervision to work correctly, the Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter must
be set accordingly.
[dwstrvss-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[lokenvss-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1107
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
Logic
[lovssumm-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The device measures the phase-to-ground voltage and the ground voltage of the lines to be protected. The
sum of the 4 voltages must be 0.
Threshold
When the calculated fault voltage (VF) exceeds the Threshold the Operate delay for the indication
Failure is started.
The device calculates the fault voltage (VF) with the formula:
VF = |VA + VB + VC + Vph/VN •UN|, where Vph/VN forms the Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter.
The Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter takes into account the differing transformation ratios between
the residual voltage input and the phase-voltage inputs.
More information in this respect can be found in chapter 8.3.5.1 Overview of Functions ).
Operate delay
When the threshold value for the Operate delay is exceeded, the indication Failure is generated.
Parameter: Threshold
1108 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
Set the Operate delay parameter so that overfunctions due to disturbing influences (such as switching
operations) are avoided. Siemens recommends using the default setting.
8.3.5.5 Settings
[dwstrvrs-060611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1109
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
Logic
[lovrsymm-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The device compares the measured phase sequence with the set phase-rotation direction.
You can find detailed information in the section Power-system data.
The phase rotation is important for protection functions which process phase, loop, and directional informa-
tion. The connection of the currents to the device does not depend on the selected phase sequence.
The connection diagrams are shown in the section Appendix.
Operate delay
When the device detects an inverted phase-rotation direction for the duration of the Operate delay, the
indication Failure is generated.
1110 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
8.3.6.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1111
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
[dwbwsstr-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• Depending on the supervision mode, you can add a marker for blocking protection functions for the
affected phases.
1112 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
[lobwstr1-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure Stages of the Broken-Wire Detection Function Using the Differential Protection
8-19
Broken-Wire Suspected
The broken-wire detection monitors the dynamic behavior of the currents of each phase and of all measuring
points. The instantaneous values of the currents are checked for their plausibility for that purpose. Each
expected violation must be confirmed by additional criteria before a broken wire can be detected and signaled
reliably.
i
NOTE
If the secondary circuits of the current transformers are accidentally opened while the broken-wire detec-
tion is on, functions like the differential protection are blocked phase-segregated and no longer initiate trip-
ping. Hazardous overvoltages can be generated at the open circuit of the current transformer in this condi-
tion which are not eliminated because the differential protection is blocked.
The detection of the local broken-wire suspicion is performed on each 3-phase current measuring point of the
device selectively for each phase. Depending on the protected object, the detection is based on permanent
(line differential protection) or frequency-adjusted instantaneous values (transformer differential protection).
Detection:
A wire break initially manifests itself as a sudden decrease of the current below the minimum threshold of
0.04 I/Irated. A plausibility test on one period of past instantaneous values confirms this condition. If the criteria
for the local wire break are satisfied, the affected phase is marked with Broken-wire suspected.
Resetting:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1113
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
The broken-wire suspicion is reset by phase current flowing again , by a reset criterion of the broken-wire
check or by a binary input signal. Binary resetting can be useful during laboratory tests among other applica-
tions.
Indication:
If the broken wire detected by the broken-wire check has not been reset within 10 ms, it will be indicated. The
indication is held stable for the duration of at least 3 periods.
Broken-Wire Check
To prevent unwanted pickup of this monitoring function caused by special operating conditions, for example
fault, maintenance, test, etc., a local broken-wire suspicion must be confirmed by additional other criteria.
These criteria are checked on the level of the protection functions (Protection function group).
If at least one of the following criteria contradicting wire break is satisfied, the locally set broken-wire suspi-
cion is reset including any associated protection blocking.
Local resetting criteria:
• At least one protection function has picked up.
• An assigned circuit-breaker is open.
• Jump detection on a different local current channel of the same phase without broken-wire suspicion
• Local overcurrent, that is Iph > 2· Irated is true for at least one local phase.
• Local overcurrent at the opposite end, that is Iph > 2· Irated is true for at least one phase.
• Blocking
– Each broken-wire suspicion must cause the affected protection functions to be blocked. Affected
phases are marked with “protection blocked”.
• Automatic blocking
– In addition to broken-wire suspicion, you can make the protection blocking dependent on the crite-
rion that the maximum differential current of all phases does not exceed a settable threshold value
Delta value for autoblock for the differential protection. The phases to be blocked are
marked.
Differential protection functions and protection functions that pick up on unbalanced currents are blocked.
Each individual protection function is responsible for the actual blocking and is described there, too.
1114 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
Parameter: Mode
• Recommended setting value (_:102) Delta value for autoblock = 1.00 I/IN
With the Delta value for autoblock parameter you can make the blocking decision for protection func-
tions dependent on the amount of the differential current.
8.3.7.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1115
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
[dwstrsym-060611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[losymmke-040211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1116 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
Logic
[locbsymm-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The Threshold min/max parameter is the criterion by which unbalance in the phase currents is measured.
The device calculates the ratio between the minimum (Imin) and the maximum (Imax) phase current.
Enter the lower limit of the maximum phase current (Imax) with the parameter Release threshold. This
specifies the lower limit of the operating range of this function.
Operate delay
If it falls below the balance factor Threshold min/max and at the same time the maximum phase current
exceeds the Release threshold, the tripping delay begins. If both conditions persist during this time, the
indication Failure is generated.
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Release threshold = 0.5 A for Irated = 1 A or 2.5
A for Irated = 5 A
The Release threshold parameter is used to set the lower limit of the maximum phase current (Imax).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1117
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
8.3.8.5 Settings
• Ground current detected with 3 separate ground-current transformers (see Figure -35 in the Attachment)
• 3 current transformers and one summation current transformer connected (see Figure -34 in the Attach-
ment)
• 2 current transformers and one summation current transformer connected (see Figure -39 in the Attach-
ment)
i
NOTE
For current-sum supervision, the ground current of the line to be protected must be connected to the 4th
current measurement input (IN).
1118 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
[dwstrcss-300913, 1, en_US]
[lokensum-300311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1119
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
Logic
[locssumm-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[foglchki-040211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Threshold
The Threshold parameter is the lower limit of the operating range of the Current-sum supervision func-
tion.
1120 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
Operate delay
When the calculated fault current (IF) exceeds the calculated fault current limit (IFmax), the Operate delay
starts. If the threshold-value violation persists for that time, the Failure indication is generated.
Parameter: Threshold
• Recommended setting value (_:102) Threshold = 0.1 A for Irated = 1 A or 0.5 A for Irated = 5 A
The Threshold parameter is used to set the maximum phase current (Imax).
8.3.9.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1121
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
The current measurement is based on the RMS values of the fundamental component.
[dwstrcrs-040211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Logic
[locrsymm-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The device compares the measured phase sequence with the set phase-rotation direction.
You can find detailed information in the section Power-system data.
The phase rotation is important for protection functions which process phase, loop, and directional informa-
tion. The connection of the currents to the device does not depend on the selected phase sequence.
The connection diagrams are shown in the section Appendix.
Operate delay
When the device detects an inverted phase sequence for the duration of the Operate delay the indication
Failure is generated.
1122 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
8.3.10.5 Settings
[dwtcsueb-010313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1123
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
[dwtcs2be-110611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
CR Command relay
CB Circuit breaker
CBFP Circuit-breaker coil
AuxCon1 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact (NC)
AuxCon2 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact (NO)
V-St Control voltage (tripping voltage)
V-BI1 Input voltage for binary input 1
V-BI2 Input voltage for binary input 2
Supervision with 2 binary inputs identifies disruptions in the trip circuit and the outage of the control voltage. It
also monitors the reaction of the circuit breaker by way of the position of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts.
Depending on the switch position of the command relay and circuit breaker, the binary inputs are either acti-
vated (H) or not (L). If both binary inputs are not activated, there is a fault. The fault may be a interruption or a
short circuit in the trip circuit, an outage of the battery voltage or a fault in the mechanics of the circuit
breaker. With intact trip circuits, this state will occur only briefly while the command relay is closed and the
circuit breaker has not yet been opened.
No Command MCB AuxCon1 AuxCon2 BI 1 BI 2 Dynamic State Static State
. Relay
1 Open ON Closed Open H L Normal operation with closed circuit
breaker
2 Open OFF Open Closed H H Normal operation with open circuit
breaker
3 Closed ON Closed Open L L Transmission or fault Fault
4 Closed OFF Open Closed L H CR successfully activated the circuit
breaker
1124 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
With the Alarm delay parameter, you can set the time delay. After fixing the fault in the trip circuit, the
failure indication will automatically expire after the same time.
If the binary input signals >Trip relay or >CB auxiliary contact are not routed on the binary inputs
of the device, then the Input sig. not routed indication is generated and the Trip-circuit supervision
function is ineffective.
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the trip-circuit supervision with 2 binary inputs.
[lotcs2be-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[dwtcs1be-110611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1125
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
CR Command relay
CB Circuit breaker
CBFP Circuit-breaker coil
AuxCon1 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact (NC)
AuxCon2 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact (NO)
V-St Control voltage (tripping voltage)
V-BI Input voltage for binary input
R Equivalent resistance
The supervision with 1 binary input identifies disruptions in the trip circuit and the failure of the control voltage.
In normal operation, the binary input is activated with the command relay open and the trip circuit intact (H).
The supervision circuit is closed by means of the equivalent resistance R or by means of the auxiliary contact
AuxCon1 of the closed circuit breaker. The binary input is not activated while the command relay is closed
(L). If the binary input is not activated for a prolonged time, there is a disruption in the trip circuit or the control
voltage has failed.
No Command MCB AuxCon1 AuxCon2 BI Dynamic State Static State
. Relay
1 Open ON Closed Open H Normal operation with closed circuit breaker
2 Open OFF Open Closed H Normal operation with open circuit breaker
3 Closed ON Closed Open L Transmission or fault Fault
4 Closed OFF Open Closed L CR successfully activated the circuit breaker
Use the parameter Blk.by trip/open cmd from to set the conditions under which the trip-circuit super-
vision is blocked. The following conditions can cause a blocking of the trip-circuit supervision function:
• The Trip/open cmd. of the circuit breaker is activated.
• One of the trip commands of the circuit-breaker failure protection is activated.
As long as the trip-circuit supervision function is blocked, the closed contact of the command relay does not
cause a failure indication.
If the command contacts of other devices work in parallel on the trip circuit, the failure indication must be
delayed. With the Alarm delay parameter, you can set the time delay. After fixing the fault in the trip circuit,
the failure indication will automatically expire after the same time.
If the binary input signal >Trip relay is not routed to a binary input of the device (information routing in
DIGSI 5), then the Input sig. not routedindication is generated and the Trip-circuit supervision
become ineffective.
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the trip-circuit supervision with 1 binary input.
1126 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
[lotcs1be-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Equivalent Resistance R
The equivalent resistance R must be dimensioned such that the circuit-breaker coil is no longer activated
when the circuit breaker is open. Simultaneously, the binary input must still be activated when the command
relay is open.
In order to ensure the minimum voltage for activating the binary input, Rmax results in:
[fofr1b02-090330-01.tif, 1, en_US]
So that the circuit-breaker coil does not remain activated, Rmin results in:
[fofr1b03-090330-01.tif, 1, en_US]
You can calculate the optimal value for the equivalent resistance R from the 2 values Rmin and Rmax:
[fofr1b01-090330-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1127
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
The following applies for the power consumption of the equivalent resistance R:
[fofr1b04-090330-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• Recommended setting value (_:100) Alarm delay = 2 s (Trip-circuit supervision with 2 binary
inputs)
• Recommended setting value (_:100) Alarm delay = 300 s (Trip-circuit supervision with 1 binary
input)
With the parameter Alarm delay, you can set the time for the delayed output of the indication Trip-
circuit failure.
For Trip-circuit supervision with 2 binary inputs, you set the Alarm delay parameter so that the short-
term transient states do not cause the function to activate.
For the Trip-circuit supervision with 1 binary input, you set the Alarm delay so that the longest duration
of a trip command is bridged without fail. This ensures that the indication is emitted only if the trip circuit is
actually interrupted.
8.3.11.6 Settings
1128 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1129
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.4 Supervision of Device Hardware
8.4.1 Overview
The correct state of the device hardware is a requirement for the correct functioning of the device. The failure
or erroneous function of a hardware component leads to device malfunctions.
The following modules of the device hardware are monitored:
• Base module
• Expansion modules
• USB Interface
• Battery voltage
i
NOTE
If the error has not be rectified after 3 unsuccessful attempts, the system automatically recognizes it as a
severe device malfunction. The device goes permanently out of operation into a secure state (fallback
mode).
Fatal device errors with outage of central components: The device goes permanently out of operation
into a secure state (fallback mode).
Such errors are, for example:
• Memory error (flash) in the base module
• CPU/Controller/FPGA error in the base module
1130 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.4 Supervision of Device Hardware
• Detection of failures in the device-internal measuring circuits (for example, analog-digital converter)
• Blocking of the protection functions concerned (for example, differential protection). This avoids an over-
function of the device.
The supervision principle is based on fast current sum supervision with connection of the neutral-point current
to the 4th current measurement input. In order to ensure that even the fast tripping stages of the protection
functions can be blocked in time before a spurious pickup, the fast current measurement is based on instan-
taneous values.
For Analog-digital converter supervision, the neutral-point current of the line to be protected must be
connected to the 4th current measuring input (IN). The 4th current measuring input must be routed via the
current-transformer neutral point (IN neutral point) (see next figure).
[tileite2-070211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-33 Connection to a 3-Phase Current Transformer and Measured Zero-Sequence Current
(Current in Common Return Conductor)
[dwschstr-040211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1131
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.4 Supervision of Device Hardware
[lokenisu-240413-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-35 Characteristic Curve of the Supervision of the Device-Internal Analog-Digital Converters
Logic
[losumsch-240413-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-36 Logic Diagram of the Supervision of the Device-Internal Analog-Digital Converters
When the output signal A/D converter monit. is active, certain protection functions are blocked to avoid
failures (see 11.64 Supervision of the Device-Internal Analog-Digital Converters ).
1132 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.4 Supervision of Device Hardware
Threshold Value
The threshold value is the lower limit of the operating range of the Supervision system of the device-
internal analog-digital converters function.
i
NOTE
The threshold value is secondary side at 10 % of the current transformer's rated value (factory setting).
The user can neither set nor change the threshold value.
i
NOTE
The slope of the characteristic curve is set to 0.1 at the factory. The user can neither set nor change the
slope of the characteristic curve.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1133
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.5 Supervision of Device Firmware
• Program-sequence error
Fatal firmware error. The device goes permanently out of operation into a secure state (fallback
mode).
Such errors are, for example:
• Device startup with faulty new parameter set. No usable parameter set is present.
• Device startup with version error
• CFC-runtime error
1134 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.6 Supervision of Hardware Configuration
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1135
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.7 Supervision of Communication Connections
Supervision
With the supervision of the communication connections, every communication port is monitored selectively.
• Failures are detected and indicated via the operational log. The device remains in operation!
• Each port additionally is equipped with a separate communication log, with which details of the failures
(for example, error rate) are displayed.
• Disturbed protection interfaces set phasor values, both analog measured values and binary information
to invalid (for example, for differential protection). Binary signal traces can be set to defined values in
cases of failures.
• Disturbed time-synchronization signals can lead to an automatic change of the source of time synchroni-
zation.
Normally, you can correct communication failures by checking the external connections or by replacing the
affected communication modules. In chapter8.8.2 Defect Severity 1 to 8.8.4 Defect Severity 3, you will find
the detailed description, in tabular form, of the error responses. Corresponding corrective measures can also
be found there.
1136 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures
8.8.1 Overview
When device errors occur and the corresponding supervision functions pick up, this is displayed on the
device and also indicated. Device errors can lead to corruption of data and signals. These data and signals
are marked and tagged as invalid, so that affected functions automatically go into a secure state. If the
supervision functions pick up, this will lead to defined error responses.
Error Responses
Group-Warning Indication (LED)
Group-Fault Indication
Device-Diagnosis Buffer
Fallback Mode
Device Restart (Reset)
Indication in the
Defect severity 1 x x x
Defect severity 2 x x x x
Defect severity 3 x x x x
Defect severity 1 faults allow the continued safe operation of the device. Defect severity 1 faults are indicated.
The device remains in operation.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1137
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures
When the supervision functions pick up, corrupted data and signals are marked as invalid. In this way, the
affected functions can go into a secure state. Whether functions are blocked is decided in the appropriate
function itself. For more detailed information, refer to the function descriptions.
Life contact Remains activated
Red error LED Is not activated
Log
For every device fault, a corresponding supervision indication is output. The device records these indications
with a real-time stamp in the operational log. In this way they are available for further analyses. If supervi-
sions in the communication interfaces area of the device pick up, there is a separate communication log avail-
able for each port. Extended diagnostic indications and measured values are available there. The device-
diagnosis log contains expanded fault descriptions. There you also receive recommendations of corre-
sponding corrective measures for each detected device error.
You will find further information on handling the logs in chapter 3.
Overview of Errors
1138 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1139
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures
1140 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures
Faults of defect severity 2 are fatal device faults that lead to an immediate restart of the device (reset).
This occurs when the device data is corrupted (for example, RAM memory), if a restart prevents restoration of
data consistency. The device goes briefly out of operation, a failure is avoided.
Life contact Is terminated during the restart
Red error LED Is activated during the restart
i
NOTE
If the fault of defect severity 2 has not be been removed after 3 unsuccessful restarts (reset), the fault is
automatically assigned to defect severity 3. The device will automatically turn to the fallback mode.
Log
For every device error with a subsequent restart (reset), only the restart can be detected in the operational
log. The actual supervision indication is entered in the device-diagnosis log at the point in time of the fault
detection and before the restart. These indications are recorded with a real-time stamp and are thus available
for later analyses. The device-diagnosis log contains expanded fault descriptions. There you also receive
recommendations of corresponding corrective measures for each detected device error.
You will find further information on handling the logs in chapter 3.
Overview of Errors
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1141
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures
Faults of defect severity 3 are fatal device faults that lead to device immediately going into the fallback mode.
Fatal device errors are errors that cannot be resolved by a restart of the device. In this case, contact the
Customer Support Center. The device goes permanently out of operation, a failure is avoided. In the fallback
mode, minimal operation of the device via the on-site operation panel and DIGSI is possible. In this way, for
example, you can still read out information from the device-diagnosis log.
Life contact Is terminated in the fallback mode
Red error LED Is activated in the fallback mode
Log
For every device error that immediately leads to entry into the fallback mode, entries from supervision
messages in the operational log are not possible. The actual supervision indication is entered in the device-
diagnosis log at the point in time of the fault detection, that is, before entry into the fallback mode. These indi-
cations are recorded with a real-time stamp and are thus available for later analyses. The device-diagnosis
log contains expanded fault descriptions. There, you are offered recommendations of corresponding correc-
tive measures for each detected device error.
You will find further information on handling the logs in chapter 3.
Overview of Errors
1142 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1143
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Supervision Functions
8.9 Group-Warning Indication
[scgrwarn-010313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Log
The group-warning indication is entered into the operational log with a real-time stamp together with the error
indications that caused it.
1144 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
9 Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring
of the Primary System
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1145
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.1 Overview of Functions
[dwomverf-010212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
For the display, the measured values of a SIPROTEC 5 device are summed up in the following groups:
• Operational measured values
• Statistic Values
1146 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.2 Structure of the Function
[dwomvltg-030912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The Minimum values/Maximum values/Average values and User-defined values can be inserted from the
library into the Line function group.
Details regarding the individual measured value groups can be found in the tables in the following chapters.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1147
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.2 Structure of the Function
[dwomvls1-250211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1148 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.3 Operational Measured Values
Active power
Apparent power
Reactive power
Power factor
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1149
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.3 Operational Measured Values
i
NOTE
With the P, Q sign parameter in the function block General, the sign of the following measured values
of the respective function group can be inverted (see Chapter 9.2 Structure of the Function Structure of the
Function, section Inversion of Output-Related Measured and Statistical Values):
• Active power (total): P total
• Active power (phase-related): PA, PB, PC
1150 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.4 Fundamental and Symmetrical Components
Fundamental Components
Symmetrical Components
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1151
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.5 Average Values
• Synchronization time for establishing the date of commencement updating information, for example, at
the top of the hour (hh:00) or at one of the other times (hh:15, hh:30, hh:45).
(Parameter: Average synchroniz. time)
Average values are formed through the following measurands:
• Operational measured values except for phase-related ratings
• DIGSI
i
NOTE
With the P, Q sign parameter in the function block General, the sign of the following measured values
of the respective function group can be inverted (see Chapter 9.2 Structure of the Function Structure of the
Function, section Inversion of Output-Related Measured and Statistical Values):
• Active power (total): P total
• Reactive power (total): Q total
The average value formation functionality is not preconfigured with the devices in the function group. If you
use the functionality, you must load it from the library into the respective function group.
The following settings listed for the calculation of the average values can be set with DIGSI and at the device.
You find the setting parameters in DIGSI in the project tree under Settings > Device settings.
1152 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.5 Average Values
i
NOTE
The average value calculation restarts after
• Changing one of the 3 settings for the average-value calculation
• Resetting the device (initial or normal reset)
The following examples explain how to set parameters and to make a change.
A new average value is formed every 30 min, at hh:15 (15 min after the top of the hour) and hh:45 (15 min
before the top of the hour). All measured values obtained during the last 60 min are used for average value
formation.
If these settings are changed to 11:03:25, for instance, the average values are first reset and "---" appears in
the display. The 1st average value is then formed at 12:15:00.
In this example, the Average synchroniz. time = hh:45 acts as described above for = hh:15.
A new average value is formed every 60 min at hh:15 (15 min after the top of the hour). All measured values
obtained during the last 60 min are used for average value formation.
If these settings are changed to 11:03:25, for instance, the average values are first reset and "---" appears in
the display. The 1st average value is then formed at 12:15:00.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1153
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.5 Average Values
A new average value is formed every 10 min at hh:00, hh:10, hh:20, hh:30, hh:40, hh:50. All measured values
obtained during the last 5 min are used to form the average value.
If these settings are changed to 11:03:25, for instance, the average values are first reset and "---" appears in
the display. The 1st average value is then formed at 11:10:00.
1154 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.6 Minimum/Maximum Values
Minimum and maximum values can be formed based on different measured or calculated measurands:
• Operational measured values
• Symmetrical components
• Selected values
You can set which measurand will be used. The measurements for the minimum/maximum formation are
loaded from DIGSI.
Calculation and resetting of the minimum and maximum values are controlled through settings. The settings
describe the following points:
• Memories of the minimum/maximum values are reset to 0 cyclically or not at all.
(Setting Min/Max cyclic reset)
• Point in time when the memories of the minimum/maximum values are reset to 0.
(Setting Min/Max reset each and setting Min/Max reset minute)
• Point in time at which the cyclical reset procedure of the minimum/maximum values begins (after the
parameterization)
(Setting Min/Max days until start)
The following figure shows the effect of the settings.
[dwminmax-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• Average values
The minimum and maximum values are reset on a regular basis or via the
• Binary input >Reset min/max
• DIGSI
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1155
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.6 Minimum/Maximum Values
i
NOTE
With the P, Q sign parameter in the function block General, the sign of the following measured values
of the respective function group can be inverted (see Chapter 9.2 Structure of the Function Structure of the
Function, section Inversion of Output-Related Measured and Statistical Values):
• Minimum / maximum values of the active and reactive power:
Min:Ptotal, Max:Ptotal, Min:Qtotal, Max:Qtotal
• Minimum / maximum values of the average values of the active and reactive power:
AverageMin:Ptotal, AverageMax:Ptotal, AverageMin:Qtotal, AverageMax:Qtotal
The minimum/maximum values functionality is not preconfigured. If you want to use the functionality, you
must load it from the library into the respective function group.
The following settings listed for the calculation of the minimum/maximum values can be set with DIGSI or at
the device. You find the setting parameters in DIGSI in the project tree under Settings > Device settings.
1156 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.7 Energy Values
The device continually determines the values for the active and reactive energy from the power-measured
values. It calculates the exported and imported electrical energy. The calculation (summation over time)
begins immediately after the device startup. You can read the present energy values on the device display or
through DIGSI, delete the energy value (set to 0), or set it to any initial value. After input, the energy-value
calculation will continue with the new setting values.
Energy values can be transferred to a control center through an interface. The energy values are converted
into energy metered values. Here the following applies:
[foomverg-020311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Through the settings, you set how the metered values are processed. The setting parameters apply for all
energy metered values of the device, and do not have a function-group specific effect. You determine the
following points:
• Parameter Energy restore time
Hour-related point in time; at this point in time, the device will provide a metered value at the communi-
cation interface for transmission. After this, it will be transferred in accordance with the selected log.
Note: If the parameter is activated through a time setting, the parameter Energy restore interval
will automatically be deactivated.
In compliance with IEC 61850, when individually measured values are missing, the quality of the energy-
metered values changes to the state Questionable.
This quality state is retained until a new meter content is specified for the energy value by:
- Confirmation of the current meter content via Set
- Setting a new meter content
- Resetting the meter content to 0
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1157
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.7 Energy Values
i
NOTE
With the P, Q sign parameter in the function block General, the sign of the following measured values
of the respective function group can be inverted (see Chapter 9.2 Structure of the Function Structure of the
Function, section Inversion of Output-Related Measured and Statistical Values):
• Active energy, output: Wp+
• Active energy, input: Wp-
The set parameters apply for all electricity meters of the device. You find the setting parameters in DIGSI in
the project tree under Settings > Device settings.
Note: If the setting is activated via a set time, the setting Energy restore time is ineffective and will be
deactivated automatically.
Note: If the setting is activated via a set time, the setting Energy restore interval is ineffective and will
be deactivated automatically.
1158 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.7 Energy Values
You route these logical signals in the DIGSI routing matrix. Open the function group, for example, Line, where
you created the energy value. Under the tab Measured values you will find the tab Energy, 3-phase. In this
tab, you will find the logical signals in addition to the measured values.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1159
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.8 User-Defined Metered Values
i
NOTE
You can define additional metered values through DIGSI for user-specific applications.
Use pulse meters; then you can define the respective metered values through DIGSI and set parameters for
them analogously to the energy values. You can read out the metered values on the display of the device or
via DIGSI.
Through settings, you can individually set how each pulse-metered value is processed:
• Parameter Restore time
Hour-related point in time when the device will provide a metered value at the communication interface
for transmission. After this, the transfer takes place in accordance with the selected protocol.
Note: If the parameter is activated through a time setting, the parameter Restore interval will auto-
matically be deactivated.
1160 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.8 User-Defined Metered Values
[scomvimp-010313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The functionality Pulse-metered values is not preconfigured. If you want to use the functionality, you must
load it from the library into the respective function group.
The parameters can be set individually for every pulse counter. You will find the setting parameters in DIGSI
in the project tree under Parameter > Function group
For pulse-metered values, the following described settings and binary inputs are available.
Note: If the parameter is activated through a time setting, the parameter Transfer interval is ineffective and
will automatically be deactivated.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1161
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.8 User-Defined Metered Values
Note: If the parameter is activated through a time setting, the parameter transfer time is ineffective and will
automatically be deactivated.
The factor is used for adaptation to larger units (for instance, kWh). It is adjustable in powers of ten (1, 10,
100, 1000, etc.). The following figure shows the signals that can be arranged in the DIGSI information matrix.
Open the function group where you created the pulse-metered value, for example, Line 1. There, you will find
the function area Pulse-metered value. Here you will also find the logical signals next to the metered value.
Select the metered value and enter the settings under Properties.
1162 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.8 User-Defined Metered Values
[scimpzwe-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1163
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.9 Statistical Values of the Primary System
• Sum of the primary breaking currents, separately for each breaker pole
The following values are available for each disconnector switch:
• Total number of switching operations of the disconnector switch initiated by the device
• Number of switching operations of the disconnector switch initiated by the device, separately for each
switch pole (if 1-pole switching is possible)
1164 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
A Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) measures the phasor values of current and voltage. These values get a
high precision time stamp and together with the values of power frequency, power frequency change rate and
optional binary data that are also time stamped are transmitted to a central analysis station. The standardized
transmission protocol IEEEC 37.118 is used to do this.
The PMU function group is activated by selecting the protocol IEEE C37.118PMU on an Ethernet module
(electrical or optical). The PMU obtains the measured values from the measuring points and the precise time
from time synchronization. The time-stamped synchrophasors for current and voltage are formed from this
and transferred together with additional values via the communication module to a server (PDC, Phasor Data
Concentrator).
[dwstrpmu-250613-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1165
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
The following table shows the differences between the PMU measured values and the remaining measured
values of the device.
The following figure shows the structure of such a Wide Area Monitoring System. The data delivered from the
PMUs on the PDC are transmitted via the Inter-Control Center Communications Protocol (ICCP) according to
DIN EN 60870-6 to the network control center.
[dwstrwam-120124-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The phasor-measurement units each have 2 communication interfaces: an Ethernet module for synchro-
phasor communication via IEEE C37.118 and another module for communication with the substation automa-
tion technology, for example, through the IEC 61850 protocol.
The central evaluation system, e.g. SIGUARD PDP Phasor Data Processor, receives the data, files, archives
them and graphically displays them on a User Interface. In this system, a self-checking function may also be
performed, for example, on undamped power swings. The further distribution of information to other PDCs or
to a control station is done here.
To maintain the required maximum errors (TVE) required in the standard IEEE C37.118, the time tolerance
relative to the UTC time reference (UTC = Universal Time Coordinated) may be maximum 10 μs. Therefore,
the device must be directly synchronized with a GPS precise time signal for the correct function of the PMU.
1166 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
Phasors
A phasor u(t) = Uejωt can be displayed as a phasor that moves counterclockwise in the complex plane at the
angular frequency ω. Therefore, the voltage function u(t) = Re{u(t)} is obtained as a projection of the phasor
u(t) on the real axis.
[dwgeopdc-061011-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1167
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
[dwutcphi-260112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-8 Determination of Phase Angle ρ of Measuring Signal Xm Relative to the Cosine Function
The number of phasors that are transmitted per second is configurable. The transmission rate is defined
according to IEEE C37.118 as the reporting rate. The reporting rate defines the number of phasors that are
transmitted per second. Extremely precise time synchronization is essential so that phasor measurement can
be carried out to enable phasors from different sites to be compared.
Reporting Rate
You use the configurable reporting rate (parameter (_:10621:102) Reporting rate) to specify the
number of telegrams that are compiled and sent to the PDC per second. It is adjustable, depending on the
rated frequency, and applies to all currents and voltages of the relevant PMU function group. If several PMU
function groups are created on the device, these may work with different reporting rates.
1168 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
[dwklatve-120124-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[dwutcphi-111011-01.tif, 1, --_--]
where:
• Xr(n) = Real part of measured signal
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1169
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
• Binary information
The current and voltage channels transferred from a PMU function group are selected through the Function
group connections editor in DIGSI 5. The frequency and frequency change rate are determined once per
PMU. In this case, only the current and voltage channels selected via the Function group connections
editor for this PMU are taken into consideration. You may route the binary information in the information
routing matrix of DIGSI 5.
The channel used for specifying the frequency is selected dynamically during the device runtime. Each
channel is checked for the presence of a signal in the following order:
1. 3-phase voltage measuring points
2. 1-phase voltage measuring points
3. 3-phase current measuring points
4. 1-phase current measuring points
The 1st measuring point found with a valid signal is used for specifying the frequency in the PMU function
group.
In the case of 3-phase measuring points, the positive-sequence system can also be transmitted instead of 3
individual sychrophasors. This setting can be made via the parameter (_:10621:103) Only positive
sequence.
1170 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
Data is transmitted continuously from the PMU to the PDC at the configured reporting rate. The transmission
is terminated by a corresponding switch-off command from the PDC or when the connection between the
PDC and the PMU is interrupted.
Communication between the PMU and the PDC can be passed via TCP or UDP protocols.
The following ports are used for data transmission:
• TCP: Port 4712
• UDP: Port 4713
The ports must be configured on the PDC.
Up to 3 different PDCs can be connected to one device PMU at the same time. The IP addresses of the
maximum 3 PDCs are set in the PMU function group. If 4 device PMUs are configured, this enables support
for up to 12 PDCs.
You configure and parameterize the Phasor-Measurement Unit with DIGSI. After a device has been added in
a DIGSI project, one or more communication modules that support synchrophasors can be configured as
PMUs. The device module supports a maximum of 2 communication modules that can be configured as
PMUs. If more than 2 PMUs are needed, the device must be expanded with a CB202 plug-in module
assembly (expansion module), which can accommodate 2 more communication modules.
The following communication modules support synchrophasors:
• ETH-BA-2EL (2 x Ethernet electric, RJ45)
• ETH-BB-2FO ( 2 x Ethernet optical, 2 km, LC duplex)
These modules are then freely assignable to ports E, F, N or P of the device, see Figure 9-10. The selected
port can be seen under (_:10621:104) Port. This parameter is automatically managed by DIGSI and
cannot be changed.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1171
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
[sccommod-140213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
i
NOTE
Port M of the CB202 plug-in module assembly is used to accommodate measuring-transducer modules
and cannot be used for the installation of communication modules.
Addressing
You must configure the respective Ethernet address (IP address, subnet mask, etc.) for each communication
module in DIGSI. This is done in the DIGSI General settings properties dialog of the communication module
in item Ethernet addresses and so forms the IP address for the respective PMU.
[scethern-200912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1172 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
In the DIGSI properties dialog for channel 1, select the synchrophasor protocol, see Figure 9-12.
[scprotoc-200912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
After you have selected the synchrophasor protocol for the communication module, an advanced settings
dialog for PMU-specific configuration opens, see Figure 9-13.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1173
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
[scpmucon-200912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
You configure the specific settings for the communication protocol in the top section of this settings dialog. In
the bottom section, you specify the corresponding PMU-specific settings.
Measuring-Point Assignment
After adding measuring points to the device, you can assign these to any configured PMU. Figure 9-14 shows
an example of how the device configuration can be supplemented with 2 additional input/output modules. You
connect the current and voltage inputs on these I/O modules to measuring points via the DIGSI routing
matrix, see example in Figure 9-15.
1174 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
[scaddios-140213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[scroutin-240912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-15 Assignment of the Current and Voltage Inputs of the Added Input/Output Modules on Meas-
uring Points
The maximum numbers of measuring points that can be routed for one PMU are:
• 2 x 3-phase voltage measuring points
• 2 x 3-phase current measuring points
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1175
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
[scfgconn-240912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-16 Connecting Measuring Points to the Configured PMU Function Groups
When these setting steps have been completed, the PMUs are fully configured. The PMU is a function group
that functions independently of all the other function groups instantiated in the device.
The device load, however, is dependent on:
• Number of PMUs
• Performance class (where Class M generates the greater load)
[scpmubif-240613-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Routing Indications
The routable indication ChannelLive of the PMU log
• Comes if the PMU is connected to the PDC
1176 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
[scparami-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[scdevpmu-260613-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-19 Changing the PMU Setting Values via the Device Display
You can also change the communication settings in the same way. To do this, select the corresponding
communication port in the Communication menu on the device display. From the Channel 1 menu item, you
can then access the detailed setting options for the IP or PMU communication settings (see Figure 9-20).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1177
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
[scdevcom-260613-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-20 Changing the Communication Setting Values Via the Device Display
i
NOTE
Different setting values are shown or hidden, depending on the rated frequency set.
1178 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
Parameter: Class
Parameter: Port
This parameter cannot be set because the Port results from the physical position where the corresponding
communication module is inserted.
9.10.9 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1179
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.11 Measuring Transducers
[dwstrumu-050313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1180 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.11 Measuring Transducers
[dwklbsp1-120124-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In this example, the measured value -20 mA means a temperature of 0 degrees Celsius and the measured
value 20 mA a temperature of 100 degrees Celsius. Thus Unit = °C and Conversion factor = 100 is
entered. The resolution (decimal place) of the temperature value can be chosen; for a decimal place, select
Resolution = 0.1.
[sctransd-110113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If a value smaller than -24 mA or larger than +24 mA is applied to the measuring-transducer input, the meas-
ured value is marked as invalid. If the parameter Range active is activated, the 2 additional parameters
Upper limit and Lower limit appear. Both limiting values indicate the input currents in mA, for which
the value set by the Conversion factor (Upper limit) and the value 0 (Lower limit) of the calcu-
lated measurand are valid (see following figure).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1181
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.11 Measuring Transducers
[dwklbsp2-120124-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In this example, Range active is selected. The Upper limit is at 15 mA, the Lower limit is at 5 mA
and the Conversion factor remains at 100. The total results in a characteristic curve as shown in the
following figure, taking into account all possible valid measured values from -24 mA to +24 mA. The setting
Upper limit conv. factor is the calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the
value in the Upper limit setting. The setting Lower limit conv. factor is the calculated measured
value if the input current corresponds to the value in the Lower limit setting.
1182 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.11 Measuring Transducers
[dwklges2-120124-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1183
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.11 Measuring Transducers
[sctrans2-110113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Each measuring transducer makes available the scaled measured value in the information matrix (these are
the temperature values in the examples) and the original current measured value in mA for further
processing.
The measuring-transducer values can be displayed in the display image and processed with CFC charts.
Parameter: Resolution
Parameter: Upper limit, Lower limit, Upper limit conv. factor and Lower limit conv. factor
1184 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.11 Measuring Transducers
If you activate the Range active setting, then 4 additional settings Upper limit, Lower limit, Upper
limit conv. factor, and Lower limit conv. factor appear. The setting Upper limit conv.
factor is the calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the value in the Upper limit
setting. The setting Lower limit conv. factor is the calculated measured value if the input current
corresponds to the value in the Lower limit setting.
9.11.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1185
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.11 Measuring Transducers
1186 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.11 Measuring Transducers
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1187
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring
• Allows maintenance intervals of the CB poles to be carried out when their actual degree of wear makes
it necessary
• Sends a warning signal when the wear of a circuit breaker reaches a specified degree
Savings on maintenance and servicing costs is one of the main benefits this functionality offers.
• 2P-method stage
2 points method for calculating the remaining switching cycles
• I2t-method stage
Sum of all squared fault-current integrals
The function is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 1 ΣIx-method stage. A maximum of 1 ΣIx-method
stage, one 2P-method stage, and 1 I2t-method stage can be operated simultaneously within this function.
The general functionality is available across stages and and provides a uniform start criterion for the stages.
[DwCBWear, 1, en_US]
9.12.3.1 Description
Logic
As the wear on the circuit breaker depends on the current amplitude and duration of the actual switching
action, including arc deletion, determination of the start and end criteria is important. The following general
functionality provides starting and further timing information to the different stages (methods).
The general functionality operates phase-selectively. The following figure shows the logic of the functionality
across stages.
1188 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring
[LoCBWear, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-28 Logic Diagram of the Functionality Across Stages of the Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring
Function
• Binary input signal >Start calculation is initiated, for example, from external.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1189
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring
[DwCBTime, 1, en_US]
In order to prevent an incorrect calculation in case of a circuit-breaker failure, the parameter Current
thresh. CB open is used to verify whether the current actually returns to 0 after 2 additional cycles.
Fundamental components are used for comparing the threshold values. When the current criterion fulfills the
requirement of the phase-selective logic release, the calculation and evaluation of the respective methods are
initiated.
1190 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring
9.12.3.3 Settings
[LoCBWIxS, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1191
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring
[LoCBWIxF, 1, en_US]
[FoCBWIxA-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Where:
q No. of circuit-breaker switching cycle
Tripping/opening current of phase A to the power of x in the qth circuit-
breaker operation
Rated normal current to the power of x
The phase-selective ΣIx value is available as statistical value. You can reset or preset the statistics according
to the specific application.
To simplify the interpretation of the sum of the tripping current powers, the values are set in relation to the
exponentiated rated normal current Irated of the circuit-breaker (see also Setting notes).
1192 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring
Parameter: Exponent
You use the Exponent parameter to specify the exponent for the ΣIx method.
A typical value is the default setting of 2. However, due to practical experiences with individual circuit
breakers, slightly different values may be requested.
Parameter: Threshold
9.12.4.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1193
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring
[LoCBW2PS, 1, en_US]
1194 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring
mined by the maximum number of switching cycles at rated short-circuit breaking current Isc. The 4 associ-
ated values can be configured with the parameters Rated normal current, Switching cycles at
Ir, Rated short-circ.cur. Isc, and Switching cycles at Isc.
[DwCBWOpC, 1, en_US]
As shown in the preceding figure, a double-logarithmic diagram, the straight line between P1 and P2 can be
expressed by the following exponential function:
[FoCBW2P1-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Where:
Itrip Tripping/opening current
Irated Rated normal current
m Slope coefficient
b Switching cycles at rated normal current
n Number of switching cycles
The general line equation for the double-logarithmic representation can be derived from the exponential func-
tion and leads to the coefficients b and m.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1195
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring
i
NOTE
Since a slope coefficient of m < -4 is technically irrelevant, but could theoretically be the result of incorrect
settings, the slope coefficient is limited to -4. If a coefficient is smaller than -4, the exponential function in
the switching-cycles diagram is deactivated. The maximum number of switching cycles with Isc is used
instead as the calculation result for the current number of switching cycles, as the dashed line with
m=-4.48 shows in following figure.
[DwCBWSlo, 1, en_US]
If the 2P-method stage receives the logic release signal, the current number of used up switching cycles (in
relation to the number of switching cycles at rated normal current) is calculated based on the determined trip-
ping current. This value is subtracted from the the remaining lifetime (switching cycles). The remaining life-
time is available as statistic value. For better understanding, refer to the example below.
You can reset or preset the statisticv values according to the specific application. The reset operation
changes the statistic values to 0, and not to their default values of 10 000.
The statistic value of the residual switching cycles is calculated according to the following formula:
[FoCBW2P2-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1196 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring
Where:
i No. of latest circuit-breaker switching cycle
Endur.i Residual switching cycles with rated normal current, after the ith
switching cycle
nrated Overall permissible switching cycles at rated normal current
ntrip Overall permissible switching cycles at tripping current Itrip
nrated/ntrip Lost switching cycles referring to rated normal current
EXAMPLE
For calculating the residual switching cycles of a circuit breaker, the following is assumed:
P1 (2.5 kA, 10 000)
P2 (50.0 kA, 50)
The circuit breaker has made 100 opening operations with rated normal current, 2 tripping operations with
rated short-circuit breaking current, and 3 tripping operations with 10 kA tripping current. Then, the residual
switching cycles with rated normal current are:
[FoCBW2P3-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
There are still 9465 possible break operations at rated normal current.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1197
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring
Parameter: Threshold
Example
Here is an example that shows you how to set the Threshold parameter. Assuming a circuit breaker with
the same technical data as provided in the example for residual switching cycles, 50 breaking operations with
rated short-circuit breaking current are permitted.
A warning signal should be issued when the number of possible breaking operations with rated short-circuit
breaking current is less than 3. For that condition, you set the Threshold value based on the following
calculation:
[FoCBW2P4-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
9.12.5.3 Settings
1198 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring
[LoCBWI2t, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1199
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Measured Values, Energy Values and Monitoring of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring
selectively. The integrals are referred to the squared rated normal current of the circuit breaker as shown in
the following formula, with phase A as example.
[FoCBWI2T-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Where:
Irated Rated normal current
iA(t) Sampled measured current value of phase A
The calculated squared tripping current integrals are added to the existing statistic values.You can reset or
preset the statistic value according to the specific application.
Parameter: Threshold
9.12.6.3 Settings
1200 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
10 Functional Tests
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1201
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Functional Tests
10.1 General Notes
1202 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Functional Tests
10.2 Direction Test (Current and Voltage Connection)
• Q is positive if the inductive reactive power flows in the line or protected object.
• Q is negative if the inductive reactive power flows to the busbar or out of the protected object.
If the power measured values have a different sign than expected, then the power flow is opposite the
current-direction definition. This can be the case, for example, at the opposite end of the line . The current-
transformer neutral point then points in the direction of the protected object (for example line).
If the values are not as expected, it may be due to a polarity reversal at the voltage connection.
As a final step, switch off the system.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1203
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Functional Tests
10.3 Functional Test for the Protection Communication
[scprotec-061210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Proper communication of the devices among each other can be supervised during operation.
² Check the connections for each protection interface in DIGSI 5.
If a connection is successfully established, the text box Status of topo recog. shows the indication valid in
DIGSI 5 (see Figure 10-1).
If 2 devices are parameterized incorrectly, the text box Status of topo recog. shows the indication Invalid.
(see Figure 10-1).
In Figure 10-2 there is no protection data communication between device 1 and device 2, that is, the protec-
tion interfaces 1 and 2 of device 1 do not receive data. The transfer of protection data is interrupted and
differential protection is ineffective. One reason for this can be a remote control with DIGSI via the protection
interface. In this case, the protection connection is interrupted and the connection is used exclusively for
DIGSI.
1204 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Functional Tests
10.3 Functional Test for the Protection Communication
[scprotco-061210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1205
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Functional Tests
10.3 Functional Test for the Protection Communication
The fundamental principle of the loop test is based on the fact that you switch the data from the transmitting
channel to the receiving channel at a point in the communication connection. When the loop test is activated,
special data is transmitted with the expectation that the same data will also be received.
The loop test involves 2 steps.
NOTICE
No other tasks can be performed on the device while the loop test is in progress.
² Any change during the loop test will cause the device to malfunction.
² First you must set the necessary settings (see next figure).
Under Baud rate, set the transmission rate you are using.
[scaktloo-290113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
² Under Act. HDLC clock recovery, specify whether the sending clock is to be generated by the commu-
nication module itself or if it should be used by the connected telecommunication device. If the clock rate
is to be used by the connected telecommunication device, set this parameter to On.
NOTICE
Only one interface is permitted for the loop test.
If you wish to use a second interface, you must first deactivate the first interface.
² Failure to deactivate the first interface will cause the device to malfunction.
² In Online mode in DIGSI 5, click the communication module and the channel that is configured as the
protection interface.
² Open the Online view and select the following menu items (see next figure):
1206 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Functional Tests
10.3 Functional Test for the Protection Communication
[scloopte-290113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
² Test Suite > Communication Module > Placeholder for Module Slot > Channel > LoopHDLC
² You can now activate the loop test by clicking the Activate loop test button.
² A window opens for the confirmation ID. Enter the confirmation ID.
² The device restarts and switches to startup mode.
² Return to Online mode and to the loop test.
Now you can start the test by selecting Start loop test. In Loop-test label, you specify the duration of
the loop test. You can stop the test with Stop loop test.
[scaktloo-290113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
² As soon as the loop test is activated, normal telegram traffic is interrupted and pressing Start loop test
sends out test telegrams with the set baud rate on the sending output. Test telegrams sent and received
are counted and checked for parity. Defectively received telegrams are also displayed. In this way, the
quality of the communication path can also be checked, in addition to a physically correct connection.
The results of the test are displayed.
i
NOTE
In order to receive, for example, statistically relevant data on the quality of the communication connection,
the loop test can be performed over a longer time lapse. This is why the system does not automatically
switch back to normal telegram mode after a time lapse.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1207
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Functional Tests
10.3 Functional Test for the Protection Communication
NOTICE
Deactivate the loop test before performing any other tasks on the device.
After the end of the loop test or after it has been stopped, you must switch the channel of the
communication module over to normal telegram mode again using DIGSI.
² Failure to deactivate the loop test before performing other tasks on the device will cause the device to
malfunction.
² If this operating mode is not properly completed, no protection connection is established with any
remote devices.
² To reactivate the protection connection, you must switch back to it using DIGSI 5. To do this, stop the
loop test with Stop loop test if the test is still running.
² Return the device to process mode (normal operation) by clicking the Deactivate loop test button.
The device will then restart in process mode.
[dwanwloo-251012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
This figure shows a part of a protection connection. The protection connection runs from a SIPROTEC 5
device via a fiber-optic line to the 1st communication converter CO-CO#1. The connection between the
communication converters is assured by a copper cable. The 2nd communication converter is connected to a
SIPROTEC 5 device by an optical fiber. By creating a communication loop (Loop#1) in the 1st communication
converter and activating the loop test, you are testing the correct function of the communication route to the
output of the 1st communication converter.
i
NOTE
To do this, set the parameter Act. HDLC clock recovery to Off and the baud rate to 128 kbit.
² If you want to test the communication route to the output from the 2nd communication converter, use the
optical fiber at the optical outputs of the communication converter to switch communication loops
(Loop#2).
i
NOTE
To do this, set the parameter Act. HDLC clock recovery to On and the baud rate to 128 kbit.
If you click the diagnostic page of the module in online mode, DIGSI 5 shows the state of the communication
module. If the module is in loop mode, you must specifically deactivate this mode.
1208 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Functional Tests
10.4 Functional Test of Thermal Overload Protection
The primary test current is 1.5 * 483 A = 724.5 A. This results in a secondary current of 724.5 A *1A/750A =
0.966 A. A secondary current of 0.966 A must therefore be supplied.
² Calculate the operate time with the following formula. Enter only primary variables here.
² Set Iprevious load = 0. The setting parameters reveal the K-factor (for example, 1.1) and the Thermal
time constant (for example, 600 s or 10 min).
² Test from the cold state.
[foauslpr-190309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
² At a current of 0.966 A supplied on the secondary side, the protection function must trip after 463 s.
[foauslpr-190309-02.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1209
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Functional Tests
10.4 Functional Test of Thermal Overload Protection
i
NOTE
Owing to the relatively large time constants in practice, the tests are carried out with significantly reduced
time constants. Reset the original setting value after completing the tests.
1210 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Functional Tests
10.5 Primary and Secondary Tests of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
i
NOTE
Always keep in mind the local conditions, the station plans, and protection plans.
i
NOTE
Siemens recommends isolating the circuit breaker of the tested feeder at both ends before starting the
tests. Line disconnector switches and busbar disconnector switches must be open so that the circuit
breaker can be operated without risk.
General Precautions
! CAUTION
Tests on the local circuit-breaker of the feeder cause a trip command to the output to the adjacent (busbar)
circuit breakers.
Noncompliance with the following measure can result in minor personal injury or material damage.
² In a first step, interrupt the trip commands to the adjacent (busbar) circuit breakers, for example, by
disconnection of the corresponding control voltages.
For testing the circuit-breaker failure protection, it must be ensured that the protection (external protection
device or device-internal protection functions) cannot operate the circuit breaker. The corresponding trip
command must be interrupted.
Although the following list does not claim to be complete, it can also contain points, which have to be ignored
in the current application.
Test Modes
The device and the function can be switched to test mode. These test modes support the test of the function
in different ways:
Test Modes Explanation
Device in test mode This operating mode is relevant for the following tests:
1. Approach of current thresholds in the case of an
external start: Supervision of the binary input signals in
the case of an external start is disabled. This setting
allows a static activation of the starting signals in order to
approach the current threshold.
2. Check whether the issued trip commands actuate the
corresponding circuit breakers, because the device
contacts are also actuated in the device test mode.
CBFP function in test mode (device is NOT in This operating mode is important for function tests in
test mode) which the generated operate indications are NOT
supposed to actuate the binary outputs.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1211
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Functional Tests
10.5 Primary and Secondary Tests of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
i
NOTE
When the function or device is in test mode, all indications are given a test bit.
i
NOTE
In the mode Device in test mode, the operate indications generated by the function operate the binary
outputs.
1212 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Functional Tests
10.5 Primary and Secondary Tests of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
Start by Trip Command from the External Protection without Current Flow
² If start is possible without current flow: (see Start by trip command from the external protection).
Termination
² All temporary measures taken for testing must be undone, such as special switch positions, interrupted
trip commands, changes to setting values, or individually switched off protection functions.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1213
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Functional Tests
10.6 Circuit-Breaker Test
i
NOTE
If the auxiliary contacts are not connected, a circuit breaker that has been opened may be permanently
closed.
The following test program is available for you to carry out the circuit-breaker test.
No. Test Program
1 3-phase open/closed cycle
[dwcbch01-300913, 1, en_US]
[dwcbc3p2-300913, 1, en_US]
Test Procedure
The following conditions must be satisfied before the circuit-breaker test can start:
² If a circuit-breaker auxiliary contact signals the position of the breaker pole to the device via the Posi-
tion binary input, the test cycle is not initiated unless the circuit breaker is closed. If the circuit-breaker
auxiliary contact has not been routed, you must ensure that the circuit breaker is closed.
² The circuit breaker must be ready for an open-closed-open cycle (indication >Ready).
1214 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Functional Tests
10.6 Circuit-Breaker Test
² A protection function must not have been picked up in the circuit-breaker protection function group
responsible for the circuit breaker.
Figure 10-9 shows the progression over time of an open-close test cycle.
If a circuit-breaker auxiliary contact is connected, the function waits for the indication circuit breaker Posi-
tion = open after the trip command is generated. When the indication Position = open is received, the
close command is transmitted after a dead time (parameter (_:6151:101) Dead time). If the feedback
from the circuit-breaker positions is not received within the maximum transmission time (Dead time+
2 · Output time + 5 s), the circuit-breaker test is aborted and considered to be failed. The proper func-
tioning of the circuit breaker is monitored via the feedback on the circuit-breaker positions.
If the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact is not connected, the trip command is generated for the parameterized
output time (parameter (_:4261:101) output time)). After the dead time (parameter (_:6151:101)
Dead time) has elapsed, the close command follows, also for the duration of the parameterized time
(Output time). In this case, you must ensure that the circuit breaker is closed.
[dwcbch03-300913, 1, en_US]
The Circuit-breaker test function is used in protection function groups for circuit breakers. If the actual
Circuit-breaker functionality has been configured and wired further configuration is not necessary.
² You define the time between the trip command and the close command with the (_:6151:101) Dead
time parameter.
i
NOTE
The circuit-breaker test does not perform a synchrocheck even if the synchrocheck has been configured in
the protection-function groups for circuit breakers. This may cause stability problems in the system during
a 3-pole interruption. Therefore, a 3-pole circuit-breaker test should be very short, or not performed at all
under load.
• Via DIGSI
• Via control commands, which you can also connect in the CFC
The following figure illustrates operation of the circuit-breaker test in DIGSI.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1215
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Functional Tests
10.6 Circuit-Breaker Test
[sccbc3p3-140912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
² Select the function in the project tree on the left in the online access.
² Start the desired test program in the upper portion of the middle window.
² The corresponding feedback is displayed in the bottom portion of the middle window. Additional informa-
tion about the behavior of other functions while the circuit-breaker test is being performed can be read in
the operational log.
1216 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Functional Tests
10.7 Out-of-step Protection Function Test
Primary Test
² Do not carry out a separate transient test, but check whether the protection device is properly connected
to the primary plant.
² Check the operational measured values under load. If the amount angles and phase angles of the
voltages and currents as well as the impedance phasor of the positive-sequence system correspond to
the current load conditions, you can assume that the function works properly.
² Switch the protection function on.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1217
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Functional Tests
10.8 Function Test of the Inrush-Current Detection
Harmonic Analysis
² Superimpose on the fundamental-component current a test current of double frequency (2nd harmonic)
and test the pickup behavior with this.
² Cause a threshold value excess (internal pickup) for one of the protection functions that you want to
block.
- or -
² Apply a test current with a load current as lead (current step).
The inrush current detection creates a blocking signal.
CWA Process
² Create a test current that has flat ranges of a minimum width of 3 ms simultaneously in all 3 phase
currents.
The inrush current detection creates a blocking signal.
1218 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Functional Tests
10.9 Functional Test of the Trip-Circuit Supervision
2 Binary Inputs
² Make sure that the binary inputs used are isolated.
1 Binary Input
² Make sure that, in the circuit of the 2nd circuit-breaker auxiliary contact, an equivalent resistance R is
connected.
² Observe the dimensioning notes under the section Equivalent resistance R.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1219
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Functional Tests
10.10 Power-Swing Blocking Functional Test
Primary Test
² Do not carry out a separate transient test, but check whether the protection device is properly connected
to the primary plant.
² Check the operational measured values under load. If the amount angles and phase angles of the
voltages and currents as well as the impedance phasor of the positive-sequence system correspond to
the current load conditions, you can assume that the function works properly.
² Switch the protection function on.
1220 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Functional Tests
10.11 Functional Test for the Rotational Direction Switchover
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1221
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Functional Tests
10.12 Ground-Fault Test
! DANGER
Live system parts! Capacitive coupled voltages on dead parts!
Noncompliance with the following measures can lead to death, serious physical injury, or considerable
material damage.
² Primary measures may be performed only on dead and grounded system parts.
The most reliable test is the one with a primary ground fault. For this, proceed as follows:
² Release line and ground on both sides; on the farthest line end it must remain open during the entire
test.
² Place a 1-phase ground-fault jumper on the line. For overhead lines this can be done on an arbitrary
location, in any case behind the current transformer (seen from the busbar of the feeder to be tested
out). For cables, the ground is done on the farthest end (sealing end).
² Remove the protective grounding of the line.
² Switch the circuit breaker on the end of the line to be tested.
² Check direction indicator (LED if routed).
² Check the (_:302) Ground fault indication regarding the direction and, if necessary, phase infor-
mation in the fault or sensitive ground-fault log. The indication (_:302) Ground fault forwards
must be logged as direction information.
² If backwards is determined as direction, either with the current connections or the voltage connections
there is an inversion in the neutral path. For the display undetermined, the ground current is probably
too low.
² Disconnect and ground line.
The test is then completed.
1222 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Functional Tests
10.13 Primary and Secondary Testing of the Synchronization Function
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1223
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Functional Tests
10.13 Primary and Secondary Testing of the Synchronization Function
[scsyn001-170510-01.tif, 1, en_US]
2. The arrangement in Figure 10-12 is suitable for measuring the circuit-breaker operating time with external
timer. Set the timer to the range 1 s or a tripping of 1 ms.
Connect the circuit breaker manually. The timer is started simultaneously by this. After the poles of the circuit
breaker close, the voltage VLine appears. The timer is then stopped.
If the timer is not stopped owing to an unfavorable closing moment, repeat the attempt.
Siemens recommends calculating the average value from several (3 to 5) successful switching attempts.
i
NOTE
Add the command output time of the protected device to measured time. This exclusively depends in good
approximation on the binary output used for the close command. You can find the switching times for the
different binary outputs in the Technical data. Set the total time with the parameter CB closing time.
Round off to the next lower adjustable value. Proceed in the same way for all other synchronization stages
used.
1224 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Functional Tests
10.13 Primary and Secondary Testing of the Synchronization Function
[dwsynae6-080211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
b) As secondary test
² Establish a synchronous state by applying synchronous voltage values at both measuring points.
² Check the functional measured values within the synchronization function:
– The delta values must be 0.
– Check the voltages V1 and V2 for plausible values in comparison with the operational measured
values for the voltage.
– Check the frequencies f1 and f2 for plausible values in comparison with the operational measured
value for the frequency.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1225
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Functional Tests
10.13 Primary and Secondary Testing of the Synchronization Function
² Start the synchronization stage, for example, externally with binary input signal or via the integrated
controller. You can use a synchroscope to trigger the start at synchronism, that is, at 12 hours. The
duration until the close command then corresponds to a cycle with the duration 1/Δf. At a frequency
difference of 0.1 Hz, the duration is thus 10 s.
² Insofar as permissible, perform this attempt several time for oversynchronous switching and subsynchro-
nous switching.
² The switching performance can be checked with an external recorder or the integrated fault recording
function. You have to start the fault recording explicitly.
² You can repeat the blind switching attempts at the limits of the permissible voltage difference.
1226 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
11 Technical Data
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1227
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
1228 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.1 General Device Data
All current, voltage, and power data are specified as RMS values.
Rated frequency frated 50 Hz, 60 Hz
Protection-class current Rated Current Irated Measuring Range
transformers
5A 500 A
5A 250 A
5A 100 A
1A 100 A
1A 50 A
Instrument transformers 5A 8A
1A 1.6 A
Power consumption per Approx. 0.1 VA
current circuit at rated
current
Thermal rating 500 A for 1 s
(protection and instrument 150 A for 10 s
transformers) 20 A continuously
25 A for 3 min
30 A for 2 min
Dynamic load-carrying 1250 A one half wave
capacity
Voltage Input
All current, voltage, and power data are specified as RMS values.
Rated 50 Hz, 60 Hz
frequency frated
Input and IO202/IO208/IO211/IO214 IO215
output modules
Measuring 200 V 7.07 V
range
Input impe- 200 kΩ 7 kΩ
dance
Thermal rating 230 V continuously 20 V continuously
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1229
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.1 General Device Data
1230 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.1 General Device Data
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1231
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.1 General Device Data
1232 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.1 General Device Data
Switching on switching power for 30 s, recovery time until switching on again: 15 minutes
250 V/4.0 A 1000 W
220 V/4.5 A 1000 W
110 V/9.0 A 1000 W
60 V/10 A 600 W
48 V/10 A 480 W
24 V/10 A 240 W
AC and DC contact voltage 250 V
Permissible continuous current per contact 5A
Permissible current per contact (switching on and 30 A for 1 s
holding)
Short-time current across closed contact 250 A for 30 ms
Total permissible current for contacts connected to 5A
common potential
Switching time OOT (Output Operating Time) ≤ 16 ms
Additional delay of the output medium used
Rated data of the output contacts in accordance with DC 300 V, 10 A, Resistive
UL certification DC 250 V, 1 hp motor - 30 s ON, 15 min OFF
DC 110 V, 3/4 hp motor - 30 s ON, 15 min OFF
DC 60 V, 1/2 hp motor - 30 s ON, 15 min OFF
DC 48 V, 1/3 hp motor - 30 s ON, 15 min OFF
DC 24 V, 1/6 hp motor - 30 s ON, 15 min OFF
Interference suppression capacitors across the 4.7 nF, ± 20 %, AC 250 V
contacts
The power relays operate in interlocked mode, that is, only one relay of each switching pair picks up at a
time thereby avoiding a power supply short circuit.
Device Dize
Ground of the Modular Devices
Type of construction 1/3 1/2 2/3 5/6 1/1
Flush-mounting device 4.8 kg 8.1 kg 11.4 kg 14.7 kg 18.0 kg
Surface-mounted device with 7.8 kg 12.6 kg 17.4 kg 22.2 kg 27.0 kg
integrated on-site operation panel
Surface-mounted device with 5.1 kg 8.7 kg 12.3 kg 15.9 kg 19.5 kg
detached on-site operation panel
Size Weight
Detached on-site operation panel 1/3 1.9 kg
Detached on-site operation panel 1/6 1.1 kg
Device Dize
Ground of the Non-Modular Devices 7xx82
Type of construction 1/3
Flush-mounting device 3.7 kg
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1233
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.1 General Device Data
Minimum Bending Radii of the Connecting Cables Between the On-Site Operation Panel and the Base Module
Fiber-optic cable R = 50 mm
Pay attention to the length of the cable protection
sleeve, which you must also include in calculations.
D-Sub cable R = 50 mm (minimum bending radius)
1234 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.1 General Device Data
UL Note
Type of Line Current Terminal Voltage Terminal with Voltage Terminal with
Spring-Loaded Termi- Screw Connection
nals
Litz wire with ring-type lug 2.7 Nm No ring-type lug No ring-type lug
Stranded wires with boot- 2.7 Nm 1.0 Nm 0.6 Nm
lace ferrules or pin-type
lugs
Solid conductor, bare 2.0 Nm 1.0 Nm –
(2 mm2)
i
NOTE
Use copper cables only.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1235
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.2 Protection Interface and Protection Topology
Mode On
Off
PPS Synchronization Telegr. and PPS
Telegr. or PPS
PPS synchronization off
Blocking of the unbalanced Yes
runtimes No
Maximum signal runtime threshold 0.1 ms to 30.0 ms Increments of 0.1 ms
Maximum runtime difference 0.000 ms to 3.000 ms Increments of 0.001 ms
Failure indication after 0.05 s to 2.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Failure indication after 0.0 s to 6.0 s Increments of 0.1 s
Max. error rate/h 0.000 % to 100.000 % Increments of 0.001 %
Max. error rate/min 0.000 % to 100.000 % Increments of 0.001 %
PPS failure indication after 0.5 s to 60.0 s Increments of 0.1 s
Transmission Rate
Direct connection:
Transmission rate 2048 kbit/s
Connection via communication networks:
Supported network interfaces G703.1 with 64 kBit/s
G703-T1 with 1.455 MBit/s
G703-E1 with 2.048 MBit/s
X.21 with 64 kBit/s or 128 kBit/s or 512 kBit/s
Pilot wires with 128 kbit/s
Transmission rate 64 kBit/s at G703.1
1.455 MBit/s at G703-T1
2.048 MBit/s at G703-E1
512 kBit/s or 128 kBit/s or 64 kBit/s at X.21
128 kBit/s for pilot wires
Transmission Times
Priority 1
Response time, total approx.
For 2 ends Minimum 8 ms
Typical 10 ms
For 3 ends Minimum 10 ms
Typical 14 ms
For 6 ends Minimum 15 ms
Typical 18 ms
Dropout times, total approx.
For 2 ends Typical 20 ms
For 3 ends Typical 20 ms
For 6 ends Typical 26 ms
1236 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.2 Protection Interface and Protection Topology
Priority 2
Response time, total approx.
For 2 ends Minimum 9 ms
Typical 16 ms
For 3 ends Minimum 12 ms
Typical 18 ms
For 6 ends Minimum 17 ms
Typical 23 ms
Dropout times, total approx.
For 2 ends Typical 24 ms
For 3 ends Typical 25 ms
For 6 ends Typical 32 ms
Priority 320
Response time, total approx.
For 2 ends Minimum
Typical 100 ms
For 3 ends Minimum
Typical 150 ms
For 6 ends Minimum
Typical 200 ms
Dropout times, total approx.
For 2 ends Typical 100 ms
For 3 ends Typical 150 ms
For 6 ends Typical 200 ms
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1237
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.3 Date and Time Synchronization
21If provided
1238 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.4 Line Differential Protection
When using up to 3 line ends 5 % of setting value or 1% of Irated for each line end
When using up to 6 line ends 10 % of setting value or 1% of Irated for each line end
Operating Times
The tripping times depend on the number of line ends, the communication speed, and the configured output
contacts. The following data assume a transmission rate of at least 512 kbit/s and trip command output via
high-speed standard relays (type HS).
Tripping Times of the IDiff Stage
When using 2 line ends Minimum (50/60 Hz) 27 / 24 ms
Typical (50/60 Hz) 29 / 26 ms
When using 3 line ends Minimum (50/60 Hz) 27 / 24 ms
Typical (50/60 Hz) 31 / 28 ms
When using 6 line ends Minimum (50/60 Hz) 32 / 28 ms
Typical (50/60 Hz) 38 / 35 ms
Dropout Times of the IDiff Stage
For all line ends Typical 35 ms to 50 ms
Time Delays
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1239
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.4 Line Differential Protection
Self-Stabilization
1240 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.5 Stub Differential Protection
Operating Times
The reported tripping times assume the issuance of commands via high-speed relays (type HS).
Tripping Times of the IDiff Stage
Minimum (50/60 Hz) 27 / 24 ms
Typical (50/60 Hz) 29 / 26 ms
Dropout Times of the IDiff Stage
Typical 35 ms to 50 ms
Time Delays
Self-Stabilization
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1241
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.6 Distance Protection
Parallel-Line Matching
Phase preference
For double ground faults in a grounded system Block leading phase from ground
Block lagging phase from ground
Release all loops involved
Release phase-to-ground loops involved
Release phase-to-phase loops involved
For double ground faults in isolated or resonant- C(A) acyclic
grounded system A(C) acyclic
B(A) acyclic
A(B) acyclic
C(B) acyclic
B(C) acyclic
C(A) cyclic
A(C) cyclic
All loops involved
Ground-Fault Detection
Distance measurement
1242 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.6 Distance Protection
Times
Shortest operate time Approx. 17 ms (50 Hz)/15 ms (60 Hz) with fast relays and
Approx. 12 ms (50 Hz)/10 ms (60 Hz) with high-speed relays
Dropout time Approx. 30 ms
Incremental times 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ for all zones Increments of 0.01 s
Timer tolerance 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
The times set are pure delay times.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1243
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.7 Power-Swing Blocking
Times
1244 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.8 Information Transmission Process with Distance Protection
Blocking Procedure
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1245
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.9 Information Transmission Procedure with Ground-Fault Protection
1246 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.10 Echo and Tripping in the Event of Weak Infeed
Times
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1247
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
Threshold Value For converter type For Iph-rated = 1 A 0.003 A to 100 Increments of
(Excitation value) I-sensitive and 000 A 0.001 A
IN-rated = 1 A For Iph-rated = 5 A 0.003 A to 500 Increments of
000 A 0.001 A
For converter type For Iph-rated = 1 A 0.015 A to 100 Increments of
I-sensitive and 000 A 0.001 A
IN-rated = 5 A For Iph-rated = 5 A 0.015 A to 500 Increments of
000 A 0.001 A
For converter type I-protection and IN-rated 0.030 A to 100 Increments of
=1A 000 A 0.001 A
For converter type I-protection and IN-rated 0.150 A to 500 Increments of
=5A 000 A 0.001 A
Type of characteristic curve Characteristic curves according to IEC (see Table 11-1) and ANSI (see
Table 11-2)
Time multiplier 0.05 to 15.00 Increments of 0.01
Additional delay 0.000 s to 60.000 s Increments of 0.001 s
1248 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
Characteristic Curves
Extension of the operate time during operation with transformer inrush-current Approx. 10 ms
detection
You can select from the following tripping and dropout characteristic curves:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1249
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
[logfpke1-030311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 11-1 Tripping Characteristic Curves of the Independent Overcurrent Protection with Logarithmic
Inverse Characteristic Curve
1250 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
[logfpke2-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Dropout Ratios
Operate time with time delay = 0 Fundamental component over 1 Approx. 25 ms + OOT 22 at 50 Hz
ms cycle filter (standard filter) Approx. 25 ms + OOT at 60 Hz
Fundamental component over 2 Approx. 30 ms + OOT
cycle filters
Extension of the operate time during operation with transformer inrush- Approx. 10 ms
current detection
Dropout Time Fundamental component over 1 Approx. 20 ms + OOT
cycle filter (standard time)
Fundamental component over 2 Approx. 40 ms + OOT
cycle filters
22OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, for example 5 ms with fast relays
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1251
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
Operating range
frated ± 20 % Active
Outside of frated ± 20% Not active
Tolerances
Threshold values:
Response, release threshold value for zero system 1 % of the setting value or 1 % of the rated current
current 3I0 with normal-sensitive ground current
converter
Response, release threshold value for zero system 1 % of the setting value or 0.2 % of the rated current
current 3I0 with sensitive ground current converter
Minimum zero voltage V0 1 % of the setting value or 0.1 V
Minimum transformer neutral point current IY 1 % of the setting value or 1 % of the rated current
Minimum negative-sequence system voltage V2 1 % of the setting value or 0.1 V
Minimum negative-sequence system current I2 1% of the setting value or 1 % of the rated current
Times:
Independent delay times 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
Current-dependent time delay, 5 % of the setting value ± 10 ms
Characteristic curves to IEC, ANSI/IEEE and loga-
rithmic inverse characteristic curve
For ≤ 2 I/I3I0P ≤ 20 and T3I0P ≥ 1 s
Current-dependent time delay, 3 % of the setting value ± 10 ms
Characteristic curve: logarithmic-inverse
S0-dependent time delay 3 % of the setting value ± 10 ms
1252 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.12 External Trip Initiation
Times
Tolerance
23OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, for example 5 ms with fast relays, see chapter 11.1.4 Relay
Outputs
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1253
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.13 Automatic Reclosing
1254 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.14 Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Times
Tolerances
24If you have selected the method of measurement = RMS value, do not set the threshold value under 0.1 lrated,sec.
25OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, for example 5 ms with fast relays
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1255
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.15 Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Extension of the operate time during operation with transformer inrush- Approx. 10 ms
current detection
1256 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.15 Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[dwocpki1-080213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 11-3 Operate Curves and Dropout-Time Characteristic Curves According to IEC
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1257
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.15 Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[dwocpki2-080213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 11-4 Operate Curves and Dropout-Time Characteristic Curves According to IEC
1258 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.15 Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[dwocpka1-080213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 11-5 Operate Curves and Dropout-Time Characteristic Curves According to ANSI/IEEE
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1259
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.15 Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[dwocpka2-080213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 11-6 Operate Curves and Dropout-Time Characteristic Curves According to ANSI/IEEE
1260 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.15 Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[dwocpka3-080213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 11-7 Tripping Characteristic Curves and Dropout Characteristic Curves According to ANSI/IEEE
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1261
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.15 Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[dwocpka4-080213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 11-8 Operate Curves and Dropout-Time Characteristic Curves According to ANSI/IEEE
Tolerances
1262 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.15 Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1263
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases with User-Defined Characteristic Curve
Tolerances
1264 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases with User-Defined Characteristic Curve
Extension of the operate time during operation with transformer inrush- Approx. 10 ms
current detection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1265
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.17 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Ground
Times
Tolerances
26If you have selected the method of measurement = RMS value, do not set the threshold value under 0.1 lrated,sec.
27OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, see Chapter 11.1.4 Relay Outputs
28Insignificantly increased tolerances will occur during the calculation of 3I0, maximum factor of 2
29Insignificantly increased tolerances will occur during the calculation of 3I0, maximum factor of 2
1266 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.18 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Ground
Extension of the operate time during operation with transformer inrush- Approx. 10 ms
current detection
30If you have selected the method of measurement = RMS value, do not set the threshold value under 0.1 lrated,sec.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1267
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.18 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Ground
[dwocpki1-080213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 11-9 Operate Curves and Dropout-Time Characteristic Curves According to IEC
1268 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.18 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Ground
[dwocpki2-080213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 11-10 Operate Curves and Dropout-Time Characteristic Curves According to IEC
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1269
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.18 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Ground
[dwocpka1-080213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 11-11 Operate Curves and Dropout-Time Characteristic Curves According to ANSI/IEEE
1270 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.18 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Ground
[dwocpka2-080213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 11-12 Operate Curves and Dropout-Time Characteristic Curves According to ANSI/IEEE
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1271
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.18 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Ground
[dwocpka3-080213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 11-13 Operate Curves and Dropout-Time Characteristic Curves According to ANSI/IEEE
1272 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.18 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Ground
[dwocpka4-080213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 11-14 Operate Curves and Dropout-Time Characteristic Curves According to ANSI/IEEE
Tolerances
31Insignificantly increased tolerances will occur during the calculation of 3I0, maximum factor of 2
32Insignificantly increased tolerances will occur during the calculation of 3I0, maximum factor of 2
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1273
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.18 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Ground
1274 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.19 Overcurrent Protection, Ground with User-Defined Characteristic Curve
Tolerances
33Insignificantly increased tolerances will occur during the calculation of 3I0, maximum factor of 2
34Insignificantly increased tolerances will occur during the calculation of 3I0, maximum factor of 2
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1275
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.19 Overcurrent Protection, Ground with User-Defined Characteristic Curve
Extension of the operate time during operation with transformer inrush- Approx. 10 ms
current detection
1276 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.20 Directional Time-Oovercurrent Protection, Phases
Setting Values for the IEC/ANSI Characteristic Curve Stage Type (Inverse-Time)
Type of characteristic curve Characteristic curves according to IEC (see Table 11-3) and
ANSI (see Table 11-4)
Dropout Disk emulation –
Instantaneous
Time multiplier 0.05 to 15.00 Increments of 0.01
Setting Values for Stage Type with User-Defined Characteristic Curve (Inverse Time)
35If you have selected the method of measurement = RMS value, do not set the threshold value under 0.1 lrated,sec.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1277
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.20 Directional Time-Oovercurrent Protection, Phases
Direction Determination
Times
Tolerances
36OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, for example 5 ms with fast relays
1278 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.20 Directional Time-Oovercurrent Protection, Phases
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1279
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.21 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Ground
1280 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.21 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Ground
[dwloginv-300913, 1, en_US]
Setting Values for Stage Type Logarithmic Inverse Time with Knee-Point Overcurrent Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1281
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.21 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Ground
[dwdrloinkn-171013, 1, en_US]
Figure 11-16 Operate Curve of the Logarithmic Inverse Time with Knee-Point Characteristic (In the
Example of Threshold = 0.004 A)
Setting Values for Stage Type User-Defined Characteristic Curve Overcurrent Protection
Times
1282 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.21 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Ground
Tolerances
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1283
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.22 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping
Times
Operating range
Tolerances
37OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, see Chapter 11.1.4 Relay Outputs
1284 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.23 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase (Stage Description Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection)
Times
Tolerances
38If you have selected the method of measurement = RMS value, do not set the threshold value under 0.1 lrated,sec.
39OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, see Chapter 11.1.4 Relay Outputs
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1285
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.23 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase (Stage Description Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection)
1286 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.24 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase (Stage Description Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection)
Extension of the operate time during operation with transformer inrush- Approx. 10 ms
current detection
The tripping characteristic curves and dropout characteristic curves according to IEC can be found in the
Technical Data chapter under Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection.
Tolerances
40If you have selected the method of measurement = RMS value, do not set the threshold value under 0.1 lrated,sec.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1287
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.24 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase (Stage Description Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection)
1288 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.25 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase with User-Defined Characteristic Curve
Tolerances
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1289
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.25 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase with User-Defined Characteristic Curve
Extension of the operate time during operation with transformer inrush- Approx. 10 ms
current detection
1290 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.26 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
The operate curves and dropout-time characteristic curves according to IEC can be found in the chapter
Technische Daten under Abhängiger Überstromzeitschutz.
Tolerances
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1291
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.26 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Transient excess pickup in method of measurement = fundamental component, for τ > < 5 %
100 ms (with complete unbalance)
1292 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
11.27.1 General
Setting Values
Tolerances
Dropout Ratio
Residual current and voltage threshold 95 % of setting value or 50 % of smallest possible setting value
values
The technical data of the overvoltage protection stage with zero-sequence system/residual voltage is found in
Chapter 11.35 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage .
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1293
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Times
Threshold value For current trans- For Iph-rated = 1 A 0.030 A to 100 000 Increments of 0.001
3I0> former type protec- A A
tion For Iph-rated = 5 A 0.150 A to 500.000 Increments of 0.010
A A
For IN transformer For Iph-rated = 1 A 0.001 A to 100.000 Increments of 0.001
type sensitive and A A
IN-rated = 1 A For Iph-rated = 5 A 0.001 A to 500.000 Increments of 0.001
A A
For IN transformer For Iph-rated = 1 A 0.005 A to 100.000 Increments of 0.001
type sensitive and A A
IN-rated = 5 A For Iph-rated = 5 A 0,005 A to 500.000 Increments of 0.001
A A
Threshold value V0> 0.300 V to 200 Increments of 0.001
000 V V
Tripping delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
42OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, see Chapter 11.1.4 Relay Outputs
1294 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Times
Threshold value For IN transformer For Iph-rated = 1 A 0.001 A to 100.000 Increments of 0.001
3I0> type sensitive and A A
IN-rated = 1 A For Iph-rated = 5 A 0.001 A to 500.000 Increments of 0.001
A A
For IN transformer For Iph-rated = 1 A 0.005 A to 100.000 Increments of 0.001
type sensitive and A A
IN-rated = 5 A For Iph-rated = 5 A 0,005 A to 500.000 Increments of 0.001
A A
Min. U0> for direction determination 0.300 V to 340 000 Increments of 0.001
V V
Time delay of the direction determination 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Rotation angle of the reference voltage -180° to 180° Increments of 1°
Forward range +/- 0° to 90° Increments of 1°
Tripping delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Times
43OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, see Chapter 11.1.4 Relay Outputs
44OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, see Chapter 11.1.4 Relay Outputs
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1295
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Times
45OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, see Chapter 11.1.4 Relay Outputs
1296 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.28 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
Threshold value For current transformer type protec- 0.030 A to 100.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
3I0> interm. tion and Irated = 1 A
For current transformer type protec- 0.150 A to 500.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
tion and Irated = 5 A
For IN transformer For Iph-rated = 1 A 0.001 A to 100.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
type sensitive For Iph-rated = 5 A 0.001 A to 500.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
and IN-rated = 1 A
For IN transformer For Iph-rated = 1 A 0.005 A to 100.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
type sensitive For Iph-rated = 5 A 0.005 A to 500.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
and IN-rated = 5 A
Number of pickups until intermittent ground fault 2 to 10 Increments of 1
Pickup extension time 0.00 s to 10.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Sum of extended pickup times 0.00 s to 100.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Reset time 1.00 s to 600.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Times
Tolerances
46OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, for example 5 ms with fast relays
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1297
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.29 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Definite-Time Delay
Dropout Ratio
About 0.95
Times
Operating Range
Tolerances
Threshold values:
Negative-sequence voltage V2 1 % of the setting value or 0.5 V
Negative-sequence current I2 2 % of setting value or 10 mA at Irated = 1 A
1 % of setting value or 5 mA at Irated = 5 A
Times:
Independent delay times 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
47OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, see Chapter 11.1.4 Relay Outputs
1298 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.30 Undercurrent Protection
Times
Tolerances
48OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, for example, 5 ms with fast relays, see Chapter Relay
Outputs
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1299
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.31 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
Times
Tolerances
49If you have selected the method of measurement = RMS value, do not set the threshold value under 10 V.
50OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, see Chapter 11.1.4 Relay Outputs
1300 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.32 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
Times
Tolerances
51OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, see Chapter 11.1.4 Relay Outputs
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1301
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.33 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage
Times
Tolerances
52OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, see Chapter 11.1.4 Relay Outputs
1302 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.34 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage and Compounding
Times
Tolerances
53OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, for example, 5 ms with fast relays, see chapter
11.1.4 Relay Outputs
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1303
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.35 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
Times
Tolerances
54If you have selected the method of measurement = RMS value, do not set the threshold value under 10 V.
55OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, see Chapter 11.1.4 Relay Outputs
1304 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.36 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage
Times
Tolerances
56If the function Overvoltage protection with any voltage is used in a 1-phase function group, the measured-value parameter is not
visible.
57If you have selected the method of measurement = RMS value, do not set the threshold value under 10 V.
58OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, see Chapter 11.1.4 Relay Outputs
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1305
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.37 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
Times
Tolerances
59If you have selected the method of measurement = RMS value, do not set the threshold value under 10 V.
60OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, see Chapter 11.1.4 Relay Outputs
1306 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.38 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
Times
Tolerances
61OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, see Chapte 11.1.4 Relay Outputs
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1307
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.39 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage
Times
Tolerances
62If you have selected the method of measurement = RMS value, do not set the threshold value under 10 V.
63OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, see Chapter 11.1.4 Relay Outputs
1308 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.40 Fault Locator
You can find the following settings in the line data of the line protection function group:
• Reactance per unit length of the line per kilometer or per mile
• Line length for the correct output of the fault distance as a percentage of the line length
• The ground impedance adjustment factors in the setting format Kr and Kx or K0 and angle (K0)
Parallel line compensation (optional) For connection or disconnection
Consideration of the load current for 1- Correction of the X value, for connection and disconnection
pole ground faults
Fault Distance
Tolerances
64 The output of the fault distance in km, miles and percent presupposes a homogenous line.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1309
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.41 Overfrequency Protection
Times
Dropout Ratio
Operating Ranges
Tolerances
Frequency f>
frated - 0.20 Hz < f < frated + 0.20 Hz ± 5 mHz at V = Vrated
frated - 3,0 Hz < f < frated + 3,0 Hz ± 10 mHz at V = Vrated
Time delay T(f>) 1% of the setting value or 10 ms
Minimum voltage 1% of the setting value or 0.5 V
65OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, for example 5 ms with fast relays, see chapter 11.1.4 Relay
Outputs
1310 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.42 Underfrequency Protection
Times
Dropout Ratio
Operating Ranges
Tolerances
Frequency f<
frated - 0.20 Hz < f < frated + 0.20 Hz ± 5 mHz at V = Vrated
frated - 3.0 Hz < f < frated + 3.0 Hz ± 10 mHz at V = Vrated
Time delay T(f<) 1% of the setting value or 10 ms
Minimum voltage 1% of the setting value or 0.5 V
66OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, for example 5 ms with fast relays, see Section 11.1.4 Relay
Outputs
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1311
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.43 Rate of Frequency Change Protection
Times
Dropout Ratio
Tolerances
1312 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.44 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault
Tolerances
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1313
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.45 Thermal Overload Protection
Dropout Ratios
Tripping threshold (fixed at 100 %) Dropout if value drops below operate indication dropout
threshold
Thermal warning threshold About 0.99 of the setting value
Current warning threshold About 0.95 of the setting value
Tolerances
Operate Curve
Operate Curve
1314 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.45 Thermal Overload Protection
[dwauslke-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1315
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.46 Analog Units Function Group
1316 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.47 Temperature Supervision
Dropout Conditions
Dropout differential 3° C or 6° F
Tolerances
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1317
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.48 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
Setting Values
Dropout Ratios
Circuit-Breaker Supervision
i
NOTE
The circuit-breaker failure protection can also work without the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts stated.
Auxiliary contacts are required for circuit-breaker failure protection in cases where the current flow is
absent or too low for tripping (for example with a transformer or a Buchholz protection).
Times
Tolerances
Threshold values, dropout thresholds 2 % of the setting value or 1 % of the rated current
Times 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
67Viabinary inputs
68The dropout time is the time required by the CBFP function to detect that the CB is open. The time for mechanically switching a
contact is not included.
1318 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.49 Out-of-Step Protection
Rectangle
Times
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1319
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.50 Inrush-Current Detection
Times
Dropout Ratios
Operating Range
Tolerances
1320 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.51 3-Phase Power Protection (P,Q)
Times
Tolerances
71OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, see Chapter 11.1.4 Relay Outputs
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1321
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.52 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
Times
Tolerances
72OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, for example 5 ms with fast relays
1322 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.53 Current-Jump Detection
Operating Range
10 Hz to 80 Hz Function active
Behavior outside the operating range Function inactive
Tolerances
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1323
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.54 Voltage-Jump Detection
Working area
10 Hz to 80 Hz Function active
Behavior outside the operating range Function inactive
Tolerances
1324 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.55 Synchronization Function
Synchrocheck
Switching synchronous systems
Switching asynchronous systems
De-energized switching
Direct closing command
Setting Values
Supervision/Delay times:
Max. duration of synchronization 0.00 s to 3 600.00 s or ∞ (ineffec- Increments of 0.01 s
process tive)
Supervision time de-energized 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
switching
Closure delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Voltage threshold values:
Upper voltage limit Vmax 3.000 V to 340.000 V (phase-to- Increments of 0.001 V
phase)
Lower voltage limit Vmin 3.000 V to 170.000 V (phase-to- Increments of 0.001 V
phase)
V<, for off-circuit conditions 3.000 V to 170.000 V (phase-to- Increments of 0.001 V
V>, for voltage present phase) Increments of 0.001 V
3.000 V to 340.000 V (phase-to-
phase)
Differential values, changeover thresholds asynchronous/synchronous:
Voltage differences 0.000 V to 170.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
V2 > V1; V2 < V1
Frequency difference f2 > f1; 0.000 Hz to 2.000 Hz (synchro- Increments of 0.001 Hz
f2 < f1 nous)
0.000 Hz to 4.000 Hz (asynchro-
nous)
Angular difference α2 > α1; 0o to 90o Increments of 1o
α2 < α1
Δf threshold ASYN <-> SYN 0.010 Hz to 0.200 Hz Increments of 0.001 Hz
Adjustments of the sides:
Angle adjustment 0.0o to 360.0o Increments of 0.1o
Voltage adjustment 0.500 to 2.000 Increments of 0.001
Circuit breaker
Closing time of the circuit breaker 0.01 s to 0.60 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout Ratio
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1325
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.55 Synchronization Function
Times
Operating Range
Voltage 20 V to 340 V
Frequency frated -4 Hz ≤ frated ≤ frated +4 Hz
Tolerances
1326 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.56 Broken-Wire Detection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1327
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.57 Current-Balance Supervision
Times
1328 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.58 Voltage-Balance Supervision
Times
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1329
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.59 Current-Sum Supervision
Times
1330 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.60 Voltage-Sum Supervision
Times
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1331
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.61 Current Phase-Rotation Supervision
Times
1332 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.62 Voltage Phase-Rotation Supervision
Times
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1333
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.63 Trip-Circuit Supervision
1334 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.64 Supervision of the Device-Internal Analog-Digital Converters
Blockings
Blocked protection functions Differential protection for lines, differential protection for transformers,
motors, generators, busbars, ground-fault differential protection, overcur-
rent protection (high-current stage)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1335
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.65 Measuring-Voltage Failure Detection
Times
Times
Operating Range
Tolerances
73OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, see Chapter 11.1.4 Relay Outputs
74OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, for example, 5 ms with fast relays, see chapter
11.1.4 Relay Outputs
75OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, for example, 5 ms with fast relays, see chapter
1336 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.66 Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1337
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.67 Operational Measured Values
Phase Angle
ΦV °
Frequency range 47.5 Hz to 52.5 Hz at frated = 50 Hz
57.5 Hz to 62.5 Hz at frated = 60 Hz
Tolerance ΦV 0.2 ° at rated voltage
ΦI °
Frequency range 47.5 Hz to 52.5 Hz at frated = 50 Hz
57.5 Hz to 62.5 Hz at frated = 60 Hz
1338 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.67 Operational Measured Values
Powers
Active power P MW
Range P 50 % to 120 % and
Rated current range |cosφ| ≤ 0.07
Current measuring ranges 1 A, 5 A
Frequency range 100 · Irated, 1.6 · Irated
47.5 Hz to 52.5 Hz at frated = 50 Hz
57.5 Hz to 62.5 Hz at frated = 60 Hz
Tolerance P 0.5 % Prated with I/Irated and V/Vrated
PA, PB, PC -
Apparent power S MVA
Range S 50 % to 120 %
Tolerance S 1 % Srated with I/Irated and V/Vrated
SA, SB, SC -
Reactive power Q MVAr
Range Q 50 % to 120 % and
|cosφ| ≤ 0.07
Tolerance Q 0.5 % Qrated with I/Irated and V/Vrated
Power factor λ (abs)
Tolerance 0.02
QA, QB, QC -
Frequency
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1339
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.68 Energy Values
1340 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.69 Phasor Measurement Unit
Synchrophasor Standard
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1341
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.70 Measuring Transducers
1342 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Technical Data
11.71 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1343
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
1344 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
A Appendix
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1345
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Appendix
A.1 Order Options and Accessories
Order Options
The following ordering options are possible for SIPROTEC 5 products:
• Device
• Single part
• DIGSI 5
• Functional enhancement
i
NOTE
To order single parts in the order configurator, use the Single part link.
• Plug-in module
• Operation panel
• Terminal/accessories
• Mechanical accessories
Ordering Accessories
i
NOTE
To order terminals, terminal accessories, and mechanical accessories in the order configurator, use the
Single part link.
Group Accessories
Terminal/accessories Voltage terminal, terminal block, 14-pole
Terminal/accessories Voltage input (power supply)
Terminal block, 2-pole
Terminal/accessories Current terminal, 4 x protection
Terminal/accessories Current terminal, 3 x protection and 1 x measurement
Terminal/accessories Current terminal, 4 x measurement
Terminal/accessories 2-pole cross connector for current terminal
Terminal/accessories 2-pole cross connector for voltage terminal
Terminal/accessories Cover for current terminal block
Terminal/accessories Cover for voltage terminal block
1346 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Appendix
A.1 Order Options and Accessories
Group Accessories
Mechanical accessories Cable set for operation panel
Mechanical accessories Cable set COM-link cable
Mechanical accessories Cable for detached on-site operation panel
Mechanical accessories Cover plate for plug-in modules
Mechanical accessories Labeling strips for LEDs/keypad
Mechanical accessories Set of part for mounting bracket 1/2
Mechanical accessories Set of part for mounting bracket 2/3
Mechanical accessories Set of part for mounting bracket 5/6
Mechanical accessories Set of part for mounting bracket 1/1
Mechanical accessories Screw cover 1/3
Mechanical accessories Screw cover 1/6
Mechanical accessories Bus termination plate
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1347
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Appendix
A.2 Typographic and Symbol Conventions
Dynamic settings:
State logic
1348 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Appendix
A.2 Typographic and Symbol Conventions
Icon Description
Binary input signal derived from an external output
signal
AND gate
OR gate
XOR gate
Negation
Comparators
Pickup delay
Dropout delay
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1349
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Appendix
A.2 Typographic and Symbol Conventions
Icon Description
Trigger the pulse of duration T with a negative signal
edge
Characteristic curve
1350 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Appendix
A.3 Standard Variant for 7SA84, 7SD84
[SvSASD84-140813-01, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1351
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Appendix
A.4 Standard Variants for 7SA86, 7SD86, 7SL86
[svstyp01-161112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[svstyp02-161112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1352 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Appendix
A.4 Standard Variants for 7SA86, 7SD86, 7SL86
[svstyp03-161112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1353
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Appendix
A.4 Standard Variants for 7SA86, 7SD86, 7SL86
[svstyp04-161112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1354 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Appendix
A.4 Standard Variants for 7SA86, 7SD86, 7SL86
[svstyp06-161112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1355
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Appendix
A.4 Standard Variants for 7SA86, 7SD86, 7SL86
[svstyp07-161112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1356 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Appendix
A.4 Standard Variants for 7SA86, 7SD86, 7SL86
[svstyp08-161112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1357
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Appendix
A.4 Standard Variants for 7SA86, 7SD86, 7SL86
[svstyp10-161112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1358 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Appendix
A.4 Standard Variants for 7SA86, 7SD86, 7SL86
[svstyp11-161112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1359
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Appendix
A.4 Standard Variants for 7SA86, 7SD86, 7SL86
[svstyp12-161112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1360 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Appendix
A.5 Standard variants for 7SJ86
[SvSJTyp1-140813-01, 1, en_US]
[SvSJTyp2-140813-01, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1361
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Appendix
A.5 Standard variants for 7SJ86
[SvSJTyp3-140813-01, 1, en_US]
1362 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Appendix
A.6 Connection Examples for Current Transformers
[ti3leit1-070211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[tileite2-070211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure A-16 Connection to a 3-Wire Current Transformer and Measured Zero-Sequence Current (Current
in Common Return Conductor)
i
NOTE
The switchover of current polarity at the 3-phase current transformer causes a rotation in the direction of
electric current for current input I4 (IN)!
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1363
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Appendix
A.6 Connection Examples for Current Transformers
[tileite3-260313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure A-17 Connection to a 3-Wire Current Transformer and Cable Type Current Transformer for Sensi-
tive Ground-Fault Detection
i
NOTE
The switchover of current polarity at the 3-phase current transformer causes a rotation in the direction of
electric current for current input I4 (IN-sep)!
[tileite4-260313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure A-18 Connection to a 3-Wire Current Transformer and Measured Ground Current from a Complete
Holmgreen Connection
1364 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Appendix
A.6 Connection Examples for Current Transformers
i
NOTE
The switchover of current polarity at the 3-phase current transformer causes a rotation in the direction of
electric current for current input I4 (IN-sep)!
[tileite5-060313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure A-19 Connection to a 3-Wire Current Transformer and Measured Residual Current from the
Current-Transformer Neutral Point of the Respective Parallel Line (for Parallel-Line Compen-
sation)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1365
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Appendix
A.6 Connection Examples for Current Transformers
[tileite6-060313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure A-20 Connection to a 3-Wire Current Transformer and Measured Ground Current via the Neutral-
Point Current Transformer of a Grounded Power Transformer
[tileite7-070211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure A-21 Connection to a 2-Wire Current Transformer - for Isolated or Resonant-Grounded Systems
Only
1366 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Appendix
A.6 Connection Examples for Current Transformers
[tileite8-260313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure A-22 Connection to a 2-Wire Current Transformer and Cable Type Current Transformer for Sensi-
tive Ground-Fault Detection - for Isolated or Resonant-Grounded Systems Only
i
NOTE
The switchover of current polarity at the 3-phase current transformer causes a rotation in the direction of
electric current for current input I4 (IN-sep)!
[tileite9-260313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure A-23 Connection to a 3-Wire Current Transformer and an Additional Current Transformer in the
Neutral Point of a Grounded Power Transformer
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1367
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Appendix
A.6 Connection Examples for Current Transformers
[tileit10-260313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure A-24 Current Transformer Connection for High-Impedance Differential Protection (for Example, a
Power Transformer, in Preparation)
[tileit11-060313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure A-25 Connection to a 3-Wire Current Transformer in the Neutral Point of a Generator and Cable
Type Current Transformer for Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection of the Line
1368 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Appendix
A.6 Connection Examples for Current Transformers
[tileit12-260313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure A-26 Current Transformer Connection for High-Impedance Differential Protection (Example, a
Power Transformer)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1369
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Appendix
A.7 Connection Examples for Voltage Transformers
[tvvolta1-260313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[tvvolta2-260313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure A-28 Connection to 3 Star-Connected Voltage Transformers and to the Broken-Delta Winding
1370 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Appendix
A.7 Connection Examples for Voltage Transformers
[tvvolta3-260313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure A-29 Connection to 3 Star-Connected Voltage Transformers and to the Broken-Delta Winding of a
Separate Voltage Transformer (for example, Busbar)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1371
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Appendix
A.7 Connection Examples for Voltage Transformers
[tvvolta4-260313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure A-30 Connection to 3 Star-Connected Voltage Transformers and to the Phase-to-Phase Voltage of
a Busbar Voltage Transformer (for Example, for Synchronization Applications)
1372 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Appendix
A.7 Connection Examples for Voltage Transformers
[tvvolta5-260313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure A-31 Connection to V-Connected Voltage Transformer (Delta-Connected Device Input Trans-
former) and Connection to the Phase-to-Phase Voltage of a Busbar Voltage Transformer
i
NOTE
When using the connection type 3-phase-to-phase voltage, the zero-sequence voltage cannot be
detected.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1373
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Appendix
A.7 Connection Examples for Voltage Transformers
[tvvolta6-260313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure A-32 Connection to V-Connected Voltage Transformer (Delta-Connected Device Input Trans-
former) and Connection to the Broken-Delta Winding of a Busbar Voltage Transformer
[tvvol2ll-260313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1374 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Appendix
A.7 Connection Examples for Voltage Transformers
[tvl2lluu-260313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[tvvolta7-260313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1375
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Appendix
A.8 Connection Examples for Special Applications
[dw15ls3p-170311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1376 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Appendix
A.9 Prerouting 7SL86 (Basis)
Binary Inputs
Table A-2 Default Binary Inputs, Using the Example of Line Protection
Binary Outputs
Table A-3 Default Output Relays, Using the Example of Line Protection
Function Keys
Table A-4 Default Setting Function Key Using the Line Protection Example
Light-emitting Diodes
Table A-5 Default LED Displays, Using the Example of Line Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1377
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Appendix
A.9 Prerouting 7SL86 (Basis)
1378 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Appendix
A.10 Prerouting 7SL86 (1 1/2 Circuit Breaker)
Binary Inputs
Table A-6 Default Binary Inputs, Using the Example of Line Protection
Binary Outputs
Table A-7 Default Output Relays, Using the Example of Line Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1379
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Appendix
A.10 Prerouting 7SL86 (1 1/2 Circuit Breaker)
Function Keys
Table A-8 Default Setting Function Key Using the Line Protection Example
Light-Emitting Diodes
Table A-9 Default LED Displays, Using the Example of Line Protection
1380 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Appendix
A.10 Prerouting 7SL86 (1 1/2 Circuit Breaker)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1381
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Appendix
A.11 Preroutings 7SJ86
Binary Inputs
Table A-10 Default Binary Inputs, Using the Example of Line Protection
Binary Outputs
Table A-11 Default Output Relays, Using the Example of Line Protection
Function Keys
Table A-12 Default Setting Function Key Using the Line Protection Example
Light-Emitting Diodes
Table A-13 Default LED Displays, Using the Example of Line Protection
1382 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Glossary
Control display
The control display becomes visible for devices with a large display after pressing the Control key. The
diagram contains the switching devices to be controlled in the feeder. The control display serves for imple-
menting switching operations. Specification of this diagram forms part of configuring.
ACD
IEC 61850 data type: Directional protection activation information
ACK
Data transfer acknowledgment
ACT
IEC 61850 data type: Protection activation information
ASDU
ASDU stands for Application Service Data Unit. An ASDU can consist of one or more identical information
objects. A sequence of the same information elements, for example measured values, is identified by the
address of the information object. The address of the information object defines the associated address of the
first information element of the sequence. A consecutive number identifies the subsequent information
elements. The number builds on this address in integral increments (+1).
Output indication
Indications can be information provided by the device on events and states. The events and states are
provided via binary outputs, for example, startup of the processor system (event) or fault in a device function
(state). These are designated as output indications.
Tree view
The left area of the project window visualizes the names and symbols of all containers of a project in the form
of a hierarchical tree structure. This area is referred to as a tree view.
BCR
IEC 61850 data type: Binary counter reading
Container
If an object contains other objects, this is referred to as a container. The object Folder for example is such a
container.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1383
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Glossary
BRCB
Buffered Report Control Block
CID
Configured IED Description
CRC
Cyclic redundancy check
Data unit
Information item with a joint transmission source. Abbreviation: DU = Data Unit
Data window
The right area of the project window visualizes the content of the area selected in the navigation window. The
data window contains for example, indications or measured values of the information lists or the function
selection for parameterization of the device.
Data Type
The data type is a value set of a data object, together with the operations allowed on this value set. A data
type contains a classification of a data element, such as the determination whether it consists of integers,
letters, or similar.
DB
Double Command
DC
Double Command
1384 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Glossary
DCF
Device Configuration File: Device parameterization
DCF77
The precise official time is determined in Germany by the Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt PTB in
Brunswick. The atomic clock unit of the PTB transmits this time via the long-wave time signal transmitter in
Mainflingen near Frankfurt/Main. The emitted time signal can be received within a radius of approx. 1500 km
from Frankfurt/Main.
DCP
Discovery and Basic Configuration Protocol
DEL
DEL (phase-to-phase related measurements of a 3-phase system)
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DIGSI
Configuration software for SIPROTEC
DM
Double-point indication
Double Command
Double commands (DC) are process outputs which visualize 4 process states at 2 outputs: 2 defined states
(for example, On/Off) and 2 undefined states (for example, disturbed positions).
Double-point indication
Double-point indications (DI) are process indications which visualize 4 process states at 2 inputs: 3 defined
states (for example, On/Off and disturbed position) and 1 undefined state (00).
DP
See Double-Point Indication.
DPC
IEC 61850 data type: Double Point Control
DPS
IEC 61850 data type: Double-point status
DU
Data unit
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1385
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Glossary
EB
Single Command
ESD Protection
The ESD protection is the entirety of all means and measures for the protection of electrostatic-sensitive
devices.
Single Command
Single commands (EB) are process outputs which visualize 2 process states (for example, On/Off) at an
output.
Single-point indication
Single-point indications (SI) are process indications which visualize 2 process states (for example, On/Off) at
an input.
Electromagnetic Compatibility
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) means that an item of electrical equipment functions without error in a
specified environment. The environment is not influenced in any impermissible way here.
EM (SI)
Single-point indication
ENC
Enumerated Status Controllable
ENS
Enumerated Status
Ground
The conductive ground whose electric potential can be set equal to 0 at every point. In the area of grounding
conductors, the ground can have a potential diverging from 0. The term reference ground is also used for
this situation.
Floating
Floating means that a free potential not connected to ground is generated. Therefore no current flows through
the body to ground in the event of touching.
Grounding
The grounding is the entirety of all means and measuring for grounding.
1386 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Glossary
FEFI
Far End Fault Indication
Bay Controller
Bay controllers are devices with control and monitoring functions without protection functions.
FG
Function group
Chatter Blocking
A rapidly intermittent input (for example, owing to a relay contact fault) is disconnected after a parameteriz-
able monitoring time and therefore cannot generate any more signal changes. The function prevents the
system from overloading in the event of an error.
Function group
Functions are brought together into function groups (FG). The assignment of functions to current and/or
voltage transformers (assignment of functions to measuring points), the information exchange between the
function groups via interfaces as well as the generation of group indications are important for this bringing
together.
GA
General interrogation
General interrogation
The state of all process inputs, of the status and of the error image are scanned on system startup. This infor-
mation is used to update the system-side process image. Likewise, the current process state can be interro-
gated after data loss with a general interrogation (GA).
Device Container
In the component view, all SIPROTEC devices are subordinate to an object of the device container type. This
object is also a special object from the DIGSI-5 Manager. However, as there is no component view in the
DIGSI 5 Manager, this object only becomes visible in conjunction with STEP 7.
GIN
Generic Identification Number
GOOSE
Generic Object-Oriented Substation Event.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1387
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Glossary
Hierarchy Level
In a structure with superordinate and subordinate objects, a hierarchy level is a level of equal-ranking objects.
HSR
High Availability Seamless Redundancy Protocol
HV bay description
The HV project description file contains data concerning which bays are present within a ModPara project.
The actual bay information is saved for each bay in an HV bay description file. Within the HV project descrip-
tion file, each bay receives an HV bay description file through a reference to the file name.
HV Project Description
If the configuring and parameterization of PCUs and submodules is completed with ModPara, all the data will
be exported. The data is distributed to several files during this process. A file contains data on the basic
project structure. This typically includes information on which bays are present within this project. This file is
designated as an HV project description file.
ICD
IED Capability Description
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission – International electrotechnical standardization body
IEC address
A unique IEC address must be assigned to each SIPROTEC device within an IEC bus. A total of 254 IEC
addresses per IEC bus are available.
IDC Combination
The inter-device communication combination, in short IDC, serves for the direct exchange of process informa-
tion between SIPROTEC devices. You require an object of the type IDC combination for configuring of an
1388 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Glossary
inter-device communication. The individual participants of the group as well as the necessary communication
parameters are specified in this object. The type and scope of the information exchange by the participants
among one another are also saved in this object.
Initialization string
An initialization string consists of a series of modem-specific commands. If the modem is initialized, these
commands are transferred to the modem. The commands can force definite settings for the modem, for
example.
Internet protocol
An Internet protocol (IP) enables the connection of participants which are positioned in different networks.
IP
Internet protocol
Combination Device
Combination devices are bay units with protection functions and with feeder mimic diagram.
Communication reference
The communication reference describes the type and design of a participant involved in the communication
via PROFIBUS FMS.
Communication branch
A communication branch corresponds to the configuration of 1 to n participants communicating via a joint
bus.
LAN
Local Area Network
Link Address
The link address indicates the address of a SIPROTEC device.
List view
The right area of the project window displays the names and symbols of the objects which are within a
container selected in the tree view. As the visualization is in the form of a list, this area is also referred to as
list view.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1389
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Glossary
MCB
Circuit Breaker
MIB
Management Information Base
MICS
Model Implementation Conformance Statement
MMS
Manufacturing Message Specification
Modem
Modem profiles for a modem connection are saved in this object type.
Modem Profile
A modem profile comprises the name of the profile, a modem driver and optionally several initialization
commands as well as a participant address. You can create multiple modem profiles for a physical modem.
For this, link different initialization commands or participant addresses with a modem driver and its properties,
and save these under various names.
Modem Connection
This object type contains information on the two partners of a modem connection, local modem and remote
modem.
NACK
Negative acknowledgment
Navigation Window
Left area of the project window, which visualizes the names and symbols of all containers of a project in the
form of a hierarchical tree structure.
Object
Each element of a project structure is designated as an object in DIGSI 5.
Object Property
Each object has properties. These can on the one hand be general properties that are common to several
objects. Otherwise, an object can also have object-specific properties.
1390 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Glossary
Offline
If there is no communication connection between a PC program (for example, configuration program) and a
runtime application (for example, a PC application), the PC program is offline. The PC program executes in
Offline mode.
Online
If there is a communication connection between a PC program (for example, configuration program) and a
runtime application (for example, a PC application), the PC program is online. The PC program executes in
Online mode.
Folder
This object type helps when structuring a project hierarchically.
OSM
Optical Switch Module
Parameter set
The parameter set is the entirety of all parameters that can be set for a SIPROTEC device.
Parameterization
Comprehensive term for all setting work on the device. You can parameterize the protection functions with
DIGSI 5 or sometimes also directly on the device.
PICS
Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement
PLC
See Programmable Logic Controller.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1391
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Glossary
PROFIBUS
PROcess Feld BUS, German Process and Fieldbus standard (EN 50170). The standard specifies the func-
tional, electrical and mechanical characteristics for a bit-serial fieldbus.
PROFIBUS Address
A unique PROFIBUS address must be assigned to each SIPROTEC device within a PROFIBUS network. A
total of 254 PROFIBUS addresses per PROFIBUS network are available.
Programmable Logic
The programmable logic is a function in Siemens devices or station controllers, enabling user-specific func-
tionality in the form of a program. This logic component can be programmed by various methods: CFC (=
Continuous Function Chart) is one of these. SFC (Sequential Function Chart) and ST (Structured Text) are
others.
Project
In terms of content, a project is the replication of a real energy supply system. In graphic terms, a project is
represented as a number of objects which are incorporated in a hierarchical structure. Physically, a project
consists of a series of directories and files containing project data.
PRP
Parallel Redundancy Protocol
Back-up battery
The back-up battery ensures that specified data areas, flags, times and counters are kept retentive.
Real Time
Real time
Reorganize
The frequent addition and deletion of objects results in memory areas which are no longer used. The reorgan-
ization of projects allows these memory areas to be freed up again. The reorganization also leads to VD
addresses being reassigned. This results in all SIPROTEC devices having to be reinitialized.
RSTP
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
SBO
Select before operate
1392 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Glossary
SC
See Single Command
SCD
See Substation Configuration Description
Protection Device
A protection device detects erroneous states in distribution networks, taking into account various criteria,
such as error distance, error direction or fault direction, triggering a disconnection of the defective network
section.
Sequence of Events
Acronym: SOE. An ordered, time-stamped log of status changes at binary inputs (also referred to as state
inputs). SOE is used to restore or analyze the performance, or an electrical power system itself, over a
certain period of time.
Service Interface
Device interface for interfacing DIGSI 5 (for example, through a modem)
SICAM SAS
Substation Automation System – Modularly structured station control system, based on the substation
controller SICAM SC and the SICAM WinCC operator control and monitoring system..
SICAM WinCC
The operator control and monitoring system SICAM WinCC graphically displays the state of your network.
SICAM WinCC visualizes alarms and messages, archives the network data, provides the option of inter-
vening manually in the process and manages the system rights of the individual employees.
SIPROTEC
The registered trademark SIPROTEC designates the product family of protection devices and fault recorders.
SIPROTEC 5 device
This object type represents a real SIPROTEC device with all the contained setting values and process data.
SIPROTEC 5 Variant
This object type represents a variant of an object of the SIPROTEC device type. The device data of this
variant can differ from the device data of the original object. However, all variants derived from the original
object have its VD addresses. Therefore they always correspond to the same real SIPROTEC device as the
original object. In order to document different working states during parameterization of a SIPROTEC device,
you can use objects of the type SIPROTEC variant, for example.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1393
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Glossary
Slave Device
A slave may only exchange data with a master after its has been requested to do so by this master.
SIPROTEC devices work as slaves. A master computer controls a slave computer. A master computer can
also control a peripheral device.
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol
SNTP
Simple Network Time Protocol
SOE
Sequence of Events
SP
See Single-Point Indication.
SPC
IEC 61850 data type: Single Point Control
SPS
IEC 61850 data type: Single point status
SPS
Programmable Logic Controller
SST
System Interface
Station Description
A station description is an IEC 61850-compliant file for data exchange between the system configurator and
the IED configurator. The station description contains information on the network structure of a substation.
The station description contains for example, information on the assignment of the devices to the primary
equipment, as well as on the station-internal communication.
System Interface
Device interface for linking to the control and protection system via various communication protocols
TC
Tap-position command – see Transformer Tap Position Command
TCP
Transmission Control Protocol
1394 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Glossary
Participant
In an inter-device communication group, up to 16 SIPROTEC devices suitable for this can communicate with
one another. The individually involved devices are referred to as participants.
Participant Address
A participant address consists of the name of the participant, the international dialing code, the local dialing
code and the participant-specific telephone number.
Telephone Book
Participant addresses for the modem connection are saved in this object type.
Topological View
The Topological View is oriented to the objects of a system (for example, switch gear) and their relation to
one another. The Topological View describes the structured layout of the system in hierarchical form. The
Topological View does not assign the objects to the devices.
Transformer-tap indication
The transformer-tap indication (TM) is a processing function. The transformer tap changes are recorded and
further processed with this indication.
Tunneling
Technology for connecting two networks via a third network, whereby the through traffic is completely isolated
from the traffic of the third network.
UDP
User Datagram Protocol
URCB
Unbuffered Report Control Block
USART
Universal Synchronous/Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1395
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Glossary
UTC
Universal Time Coordinated
VD Address
The VD address is automatically given by the DIGSI 5-Manager. It is unique throughout the project and hence
serves for unique identification of a real existing SIPROTEC device. For communication with the DIGSI 5
device processing, the VD address must be transferred to the SIPROTEC device.
Combination Matrix
In an inter-device communication (IDC) group, up to 16 SIPROTEC devices suitable for this can communi-
cate with one another. The combination matrix specifies which devices exchange which information.
Virtual Device
A VD (virtual device) comprises all communication objects, as well as their properties and states, which a
communication user can utilize in the form of services. A VD can be a physical device, a module of a device
or a software module.
Value Indication
Value indications are single-point indications in which a further value is transferred in addition to the actual
indication (example: Fault locator : Here the distance to the fault location is also indicated in addition to the
fault statement Yes/No.)
Protection Communication
Protection Data Communication includes all functionalities necessary for data exchange via the protection
interface. Protection communication is created automatically during configuration of communication channels.
Fleeting Indication
Fleeting indications are single-point indications present for a very short time, in which only the coming of the
process signal is logged and further processed time-correctly.
WYE
DEL (phase-to-ground related measurements of a 3-phase system)
Metered Value
Metered values are a processing function, used to determine the total number of discrete similar events
(counting pulses), for example, as integral over a time span. In the power supply utility field, electrical energy
is often recorded as a metered value (energy import/delivery, energy transport).
Time stamp
A time stamp is a value in a defined format. The time stamp assigns a time point to an event, for example, in
a log file. Time stamps ensure that events can be found again.
1396 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Index
1,2,3 ... B
3-phase function group VI Backward interlocking
Structure of the function group 217 Trip logic 488
3-phase VI Function Group Blocking method
Overview 217 Trip logic 546
Blocking methods
Transmission logic 483, 545
Blocking procedure
A Trip logic 484
Broken-wire detection
ACD 153, 288 Application and setting notes 1115
ACT 153, 288 Blocking 1114
Application templates Broken-wire check 1114
7SA84, 7SA86 175 Broken-wire suspected 1113
7SD84, 7SD86 181 Function structure 1111
7SJ86 189 Overview of functions 1111
7SL86 185
Automatic reclosing
Function structure 564
Automatic reclosing function C
Overview of functions 564
Automatic reclosing function, cyclic Charging-current compensation
Blockings 593 Logic of the stage 337
Closing indication, close command 588 Mode of operation 337
Cycle control, Operating mode 1 575 Circuit breaker
Cycle control, Operating mode 2 577 Circuit-breaker failure protection 236
Cycle control, Operating mode 3 579 Circuit-breaker test 236
Cycle control, Operating mode 4 580 Termination of the trip command 239
Dead time, Operating modes with pickup 584 Trip logic 239
Dead time, Operating modes with tripping 582 Trip-circuit supervision 236
Dead-line checking, reduced dead time 596 Circuit-breaker failure protection 929
Evolving-fault detection 586 Communication log 71
Input logic, Operating modes with pickup 573 Control functions
Input logic, Operating modes with tripping 572 Command checks 1028
Operating modes 568 Command logging 1039
Reclaim time 590 Controllables 994
Stage release 581 Control Functions
Start 574 User-defined Objects 151, 286
Structure 571 Current-jump detection
Automatic Reclosing Function, Cyclic Function structure 986
Circuit-Breaker Health, Circuit-Breaker Condi-
tion 591
D
Device-Diagnosis Log 74
Differential protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1397
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Index
Mode of operation 320 Application and setting notes for the RTD unit
Pickup of the stage 321 serial 277
Pickup upon switching 321 Application and setting notes for the RTD-Unit
Dimensions 1234 Ether. 272
Directional mode 822 Communication with 20-mA Unit. Ether. 256
Directional mode (ground fault) 498, 507 Communication with an RTD unit 271
Directional Negative-Sequence Protection Overview 20-mA Unit Ether. 254
Inrush-Current Detection 818 Overview RTD unit Ether. 270
Directional overcurrent protection, phases 667 Overview RTD unit serial 277
Directional test 1205 Fiber-optic cable
Distance protection multimode 108
Direction determination 396 multiplexer 108
Double ground faults in the grounded system 372 repeater 108
Grounded systems 369 single-mode 108
Grounded systems, application and setting Function group
notes 373 Line 194
High-voltage overhead-line application example 438
Impedance pickup 400
Isolated or resonant-grounded systems 382
Isolated or resonant-grounded systems, application G
and setting notes 388
Output logic 437 General Functionalities (Undervoltage Check, df/dt
Pickup, overcurrent pickup 404 Calculation) 899
Zone with MHO characteristic curve 427 Ground-fault detection
Zone with quadrilateral characteristic 417 Grounded systems 370
DPC 153, 288 Grounded systems, residual-current criterion 371
DPS 152, 287 Grounded systems, residual-current/negative-
sequence current criterion 371
Grounded systems, zero-sequence voltage crite-
rion 372
E Isolated or resonant-grounded systems 383
Isolated or resonant-grounded systems, residual-
Echo and tripping on weak infeed current criterion 384
Overview of functions 553 Isolated or resonant-grounded systems, residual-
Structure of the function 553 current/negative-sequence current criterion 385
External trip initiation 561 Isolated or resonant-grounded systems, zero-
sequence voltage criterion 386
Ground-fault differential protection 350, 351
Ground-fault log 66
F Ground-fault protection 494
Dynamic settings 530
Fault locator Inrush-current detection 499, 508, 529
Parallel-line compensation 884 Method of measurement 498, 507
Fault log 64 Group Indications
FG Analog Transformers Time Overcurrent Protection Functions 744
Application and Setting Notes for the 20-mA Unit.
Serial 262
Overview 20-mA Unit Serial 262
FG analog unit I
Function group structure 253
Overview 253 Idiff
FG Analog unit Fault behavior 322
Technical data 1316 Logic of the stage 320
FG analog units Idiff fast
Temperature sensor 273 Fault behavior 327
FG Analog units Logic of the stage 325
Application and setting notes for the 20-mA unit Mode of operation 325
Ether. 257 Pickup of the stage 326
Pickup upon Switching 327
1398 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Index
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1399
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Index
1400 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
Index
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1401
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013
1402 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C010-4, Release 10.2013